advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 587
SoundCheck SoundCheck User Manual ® ® VERSION 16 Instruction Manual Version 16.0 Feb 2017 © Copyright 2000 - 2017 Listen, Inc. Loudspeakers & Microspeakers Microphones Headphones & Headsets Wireless Devices Smartphones & Tablets Telephones Sound Measurements Make Sound Products 6 Hearing Aids Audio Electronics Listen, Inc. 580 Harrison Ave, Suite 3W Boston, MA 02118 Tel: (617) 556-4104 Web: www.listeninc.com Sales: [email protected] Support: [email protected] 580 Harrison Ave, Suite 3W • Boston, MA 02118 • 617-556-4104 • Fax 617-556-4145 • www.listeninc.com PN: 8010 REV 120717 SOUNDCHECK ® VERSION 16 USER MANUAL © COPYRIGHT 1995-2017 LISTEN, INC. REV 120717 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Contents Listen Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Installing SoundCheck for Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Minimum Computer Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Upgrading From an Earlier Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Rules - Installing SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Hardware Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Demo Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Listen Hardware Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Demo Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Optional Modules and Protected Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 NI Visa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Windows Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 European Decimal Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 First Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Audio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 A Note About Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Page intentionally left blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 SoundCheck 16.0 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Listen Hardware Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Full Multichannel Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 SoundCheck ONE™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Operating Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Sequence Run Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Test Equipment Setup for Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents i Microphone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SoundCheck Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Quick Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Offline Tab Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Drop down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Mass Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 SoundCheck 16.0.ini Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 INI File Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Controls and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Graphs and Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Login Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Hardware - System.Har . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Hardware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Hardware Editor Rules For Production Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Audio Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Listen Hardware Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 External Hardware Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Interface Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 NI DAQ Digital I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 NI DAQmx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Calibration Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 System.Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Calibration Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SoundCheck Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ii Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Naming - Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Defining the Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Calibrating SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Calibration History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Digital signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Equalization and Correction Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Input Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Digital Channel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Reference Codec & dBm0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Bluetooth Sequence Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Units Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Analysis Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Display Editor – Memory List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Post-Processing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Message Step Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Stimulus Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Frequency Stepped Sweep (Stweep™) Excitation Signal Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 New - Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Stimulus Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Right Click Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Stimulus Step Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Analyze/Ignore Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Compound Stimulus - Stweep Optimized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Compound Stimulus - WAV File With Pilot Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Signal Parameters for Amplitude Sweep Excitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 WAV File Excitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 DC Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Control Method: Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Two Tone Stimulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Sweep Type - Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Active Speech Level Stimulus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents iii Acquisition Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Play & Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Time (sec). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Record Padding (sec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Record Delay (sec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Curve Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Use Signal Path Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Virtual Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Rules - Virtual Instrument Acquisition Step Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Analysis Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 View Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Algorithm Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Rules - Normalized THD/Normalized Rub and Buzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Measurement Confidence Rules: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Rules - Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Autosave Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Rules - Relative File Path Rules in Autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rules of use for Text Files: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Test Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Apply Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 In a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Memory List Value Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Recall Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 iv Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Rules - Relative File Path Rules in Recall Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Prompt Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 File Path Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Curve Names to be Recalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Order of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Recall in a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Post-Processing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Search Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Desired Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rules - Axis choices for Operand A in Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Unary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Scalar (Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Zwicker Loudness (Optional Module Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Zwicker Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Intersection (search). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 User Equation (optional module) Equation Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Directivity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Nth Octave Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Rules - Resampling and Frequency Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Frequency Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Time Domain Waveform Filter (Optional Module Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Post Processing Use Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Message Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Listen Hardware Control Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 AmpConnect Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 AudioConnect Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 SoundConnect 2 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DC Connect Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents v BTC-4148 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Operator Message - Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Display Local Language Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Numeric Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 External Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Syntax for Sending RS232 (serial) or IEEE-488 (GPIB) Commands in SoundCheck . . . . . . . 249 Reading RS232 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 AmpConnect Message Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 AmpConnect Message Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Custom Step Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Limits Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Precision of Limits Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Critical Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Limits Editor Summary Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Data Tab Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Rules - Waveform in Limit Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Multimeter Limit Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Parameters Tab - Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Absolute Comparison Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 X Axis - Log vs. Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Failed Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Comparison of Absolute Limits, Floating Limits and Floating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Display Editor and Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tabs (Curves, Values, Results and WFM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Memory List Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Memory List Drop Down Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Display Lock Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Autoprotect/Undo Autoprotect Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Auto Grouping General Rules - Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 vi Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Right Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 WAV File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 WAV File General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 WAV File Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Rules for scaling Waveforms when they are saved as WAV files: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Offline Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Display Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Display Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Right Click on Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Graph Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Graph Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Creating a Display Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Display Step Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Display Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Adding Polar Curves to Display Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Report Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Report Template Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Print Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Print Type Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Report Generator Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Report Template Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Manually Creating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Creating a Word Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Manual Report With Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Print Step Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating an Excel Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Serial Number Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Auto Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Prompt Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents vii Statistics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Online Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Offline Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Statistical Process Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Choosing What Statistics to Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 SPC - Statistical Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Best Fit to Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Adding Statistics Steps to the Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Verdict of the Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Rules - Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Statistics Example Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Outline Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Instrument Open Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 System Custom Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Mixer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 RS232 Read Integer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Serial Number Write Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Creating a Custom VI for SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Creating a Custom Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 SoundMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Time Frequency Analysis Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 SoundMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Time-Frequency Analysis Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Time-Frequency Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 3D View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Analysis Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Algorithm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Sequence Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 What is a sequence?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 What is a step? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Default Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 viii Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Sequence Editor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Relative File Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Sequence Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Editing Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Editing Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Step Template Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Rules - Sub-sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Right Click Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Configure Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Configure Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Conditional Branching Rules - Sequence Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Creating a New Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Exporting Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Document Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Virtual Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Instrument List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Overload Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Common Instrument Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Virtual Instrument Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Opening Multiple Instances of Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Instrument Operation Time Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 WAV file playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Why use an equalized WAV file? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Equalize a WAV file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Strip Chart Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Real Time Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Distortion Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 SoundCheck ONE™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents ix Template Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Setup & Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Generating SoundCheck ONE Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Sequence Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Controlling SoundCheck with TELNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 C# Example App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 LabVIEW Example App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Python Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Command Set Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 ActiveX Control - Legacy Examples (Windows Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 API Specification (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Creating an ODBC Connection for MS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 ODBC Connection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Example Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Relationship of Access Tables for SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Supported Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Database Setup Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Determining the Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Creating the Connection Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Data File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 SoundCheck *.DAT and *.WFM file binary formats for most commonly used versions . . . . 477 1 DAT Binary Data File Format – SoundCheck 4.13 (DAT v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 2 DAT Binary Data File Format – SoundCheck 5.54 (DAT v3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 3 DAT Binary Data File Format SoundCheck 6.01-7.01 (DAT v6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 4 WFM Binary File Format – SoundCheck 6.01-7.01 (WFM v3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Appendix B: Windows Setup Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Audio Device System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 x Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual European Decimal Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Windows Display - Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Appendix C: PXI/PCI 4461 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 PXI 1031 Chassis Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 NI 4461 Install and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 SoundCheck Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Appendix D: Connection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Amp Calibration - Single Ended Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Amp Calibration - XLR Balanced Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Amp Calibration - Bridged Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Mic Calibration - SoundConnect™ Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Loudspeaker Test Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Loudspeaker Test Connections with Impedance Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Detailed Drawing of Impedance Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Balanced vs Single Ended Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Appendix E: Serial Port Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Footswitch and Buzzer Control Via Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Serial Port Pin Out Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Buzzer On/Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Remote Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Appendix F: System Verification Using SoundCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Sequence Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Appendix G: Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Noise Floor and Ground Loop Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Windows Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Appendix H: Keyboard Shortcuts & Stweep Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Stweep Table - ISO Stepped-sine Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Appendix I: Equation Editor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 User Equation Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Contents xi Appendix J: Weighting and Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 TSR Window Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Appendix K: Time Selective Measurements With Log Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Appendix L: Excel Template Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Step 1 – Write Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Step 2 – Create Autosave Step(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Step 3 – Create Initial Excel File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Step 4 – Create Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Step 5 – Use the Template in the Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Appendix M: Barcode Reader Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Bar Code Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Appendix N: Running Sequences from a Network Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Master PC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Workstation PC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Appendix O: Data Import Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Importing text from a saved file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Appendix P: Default Sequence List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 xii Contents SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Listen Software License Agreement READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE IS COPYRIGHTED AND LICENSED (NOT SOLD). BY INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU ARE NOT WILLING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU SHOULD RETURN THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE KEY, AND DOCUMENTATION WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF YOUR INVOICE DATE, AND YOU WILL RECEIVE A CREDIT OR A REFUND. The enclosed Software is provided to the purchaser of the Software ("End-User") by LISTEN, Inc., ("Licensor") for use only under the terms set forth in this Agreement. Licensor reserves any right not expressly granted to the End-User. The End-User owns the disk on which the Software is recorded, but Licensor retains ownership of all copies of the Software itself. The End-User assumes sole responsibility for the installation, use and results obtained from use of the Software. 1. License. Licensor grants to End-User a limited, non-exclusive and nontransferable license to install, maintain and use the Software in object code form on a single computer owned or leased by End-User solely in connection with the End-User's own business. End-User may make one copy of the Software, in machine-readable form, solely for backup or archival purposes for the computer on which the Software is installed. The Software is protected by copyright law. As an express condition of this License, the End-User must reproduce on the copy Licensor's copyright notice and any other proprietary legends on the original copy supplied by Licensor. 2. Restrictions. End-User agrees that the Software is a proprietary product and that all right, title and interest in and to the Software, including all associated intellectual property rights, are and shall at all times remain with Licensor. End-User may NOT sublicense, assign, or distribute copies of the Software to others. THE END-USER MAY NOT DECOMPILE, REVERSE ENGINEER, DISASSEMBLE, OR OTHERWISE REDUCE THE SOFTWARE TO A HUMAN READABLE FORM. THE END-USER MAY NOT MODIFY, ADAPT, TRANSLATE, RENT, LEASE, LOAN, RESELL FOR PROFIT, DISTRIBUTE, OR OTHERWISE ASSIGN OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE, OR CREATE DERIVATIVE WORKS BASED UPON THE SOFTWARE OR ANY PART THEREOF. 3. Protection and Security. End-User agrees that the Software contains trade secrets, proprietary information and copyrighted material of Licensor. End-User agrees to use its best efforts and to take all reasonable steps to safeguard the Software to ensure that no unauthorized person shall have access thereto and that no unauthorized copy, publication, disclosure or distribution, in whole or in part, in any form, shall be made. End-User acknowledges that the Software contains valuable confidential information and that unauthorized use and/or copying are harmful to Licensor. End-User agrees to assist and cooperate with Licensor in the identification and removal of illegal copies of Listen software or software based on Listen’s source-code located on the End-User’s computer, computer system, or at End-User’s place of business. End-User agrees to only install and use authorized, genuine and licensed versions of the Software. Installation or use of any unlicensed or illegal copies, or software based on Listen’s source code shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement. 4. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. This License will terminate immediately without notice from Licensor if the End-User fails to comply with any of its provisions. Upon termination the EndUser must destroy the Software and all copies thereof. End-User may terminate this License at any time by destroying the Software and all copies thereof. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Listen Software License Agreement i 5. Limited Warranty. Licensor warrants that, for ninety (90) days from the date of shipment by Licensor (i) the media on which the software is furnished will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use; and (ii) the Software conforms to its published functional specifications current at the time of shipment. Except for the foregoing, the Software is provided AS IS. If, during the warranty period, a defect appears, End-User shall return the Software to Licensor and Licensor's only obligation shall be, at Licensor's election, to replace the defective Software or refund the purchase price. The End-User agrees that the foregoing constitutes the End-User's sole and exclusive remedy for breach by Licensor under any warranties made under this Agreement. This warranty does not apply if the Software (i) has been altered or changed in any way by anyone other than Licensor; (ii) has not been installed, operated, repaired or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Licensor (including the use of other Software versions) or (iii) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence or accident. Licensor is not responsible for problems associated with or caused by incompatible operating systems or equipment, or for problems in the interaction of the Software with software not furnished by Licensor. No oral or written information or advice given by Licensor or its dealers, distributors, employees or agents shall in any way extend, modify or add to the foregoing warranty. THE WARRANTY AND REMEDY PROVIDED ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE END-USER ASSUMES ALL RISK AS TO THE SUITABILITY, QUALITY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSOR, OR ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, CONSULTANTS, INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS, AGENTS OR AFFILIATES, BE LIABLE TO THE END-USER FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS REVENUES OR PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA OR BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE), HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. LICENSOR'S LIABILITY TO THE END-USER (IF ANY) FOR ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, WILL BE LIMITED TO, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL EXCEED, THE AMOUNT ORIGINALLY PAID TO LICENSOR FOR THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE. 7. Enhancements. From time to time Licensor may, in its sole discretion, advise the End-User of updates, upgrades, enhancements or improvements to the Software and/or new releases of the Software (collectively, "Enhancements"), and may license the End-User to use such Enhancements upon payment of prices as may be established by Licensor from time to time. All such Enhancements to the Software provided to the End-User shall also be governed by the terms of this License. IN ORDER FOR THE END-USER TO BE ASSURED THAT IT WILL BE ADVISED OF AND LICENSED TO USE ANY ENHANCEMENTS TO THE SOFTWARE, THE END-USER MUST REGISTER THEIR SOFTWARE AT www.listeninc.com/register. 8. Export Regulations. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations of other countries. End-User agrees to strictly comply with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export or import Software. ii Listen Software License Agreement SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 9. General. This License will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the United States, and shall inure to the benefit of Licensor and End-User and their successors, assigns and legal representatives. Any action, suit or proceeding arising out of under or in connection with this Agreement whether, brought for equitable relief or money damages shall be brought exclusively in either state or federal court in Suffolk County, Massachusetts. LicenSee irrevocably and unconditionally submits to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of such courts and agrees to take any and all future action necessary to submit to the jurisdiction of such courts. Final judgment in any such suit shall be conclusive and may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit on the judgment, a certified or true copy of which shall be conclusive evidence of the fact and the amount of any liability therein described, or by appropriate proceedings under any applicable treaty or otherwise. If any provision of this License is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable to any extent under applicable law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible and the remaining provisions of this License will remain in full force and effect. Any notices or other communications to be sent to Licensor must be mailed first class, postage prepaid, to the following address: LISTEN, Inc. 580 Harrison Ave., Suite 3W, Boston, MA 02118 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and all prior proposals, agreements, representations, statements and undertakings are hereby expressly cancelled and superseded. This Agreement may not be changed or amended except by a written instrument executed by a duly authorized officer of Licensor. 10. Acknowledgment. BY OPENING THIS PACKAGE AND/OR INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE, THE END-USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS READ THIS LICENSE, UNDERSTANDS IT, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. Should you have any questions concerning this License, contact Licensor at the address set forth above. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Listen Software License Agreement iii LISTEN 䕃ӊ䆌ৃण䆂 䇋ᅝ㺙ᴀ䕃ӊѻકПࠡҨ㒚䯙䇏ᴀण䆂ЁⱘᴵℒᴵӊDŽᴀ䕃ӊѻકᏆপᕫ㨫ᴗᑊ䖯㸠䆌ৃ ˄㗠䴲ߎଂ˅DŽϔᮺᅝ㺙ᴀ䕃ӊѻકˈे㸼⼎ᙼᏆফᑊৠᛣᴀ䆌ৃण䆂ⱘ乍ᴵℒDŽབᙼϡৠᛣ ফᴀण䆂ᴵℒⱘ㑺ᴳˈᙼᑨথ⼼᠔䕑᮹ᳳПৢϝक(30)ݙѸ䖬ᴀ䕃ӊѻકǃ⹀ӊ䩹࣭᭛ӊˈ ᑊᇚӮᬊࠄ䗔ℒDŽ ᠔䰘䕃ӊ⬅ LISTEN, Inc.( 䆌ৃᮍ ) 䕃ӊфᆊ˄᳔㒜⫼᠋˅ᦤկˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋乏ḍᴀण䆂ᴵℒՓ ⫼䆹䕃ӊDŽ䆌ৃᮍֱ⬭᠔᳝ᯢ⹂ᥜќ᳔㒜⫼᠋ⱘᴗ߽DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᢹ᳝ࠏᔩ᳝䕃ӊⱘˈܝԚܼ䚼 䕃ӊࡃᴀⱘ᠔᳝ᴗ⬅䆌ৃᮍѿ᳝DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᇍᅝ㺙ǃՓ⫼ঞ䕃ӊՓ⫼ⱘ៤ᵰᡓᢙ⣀ゟ䋷ӏDŽ 1.䆌ৃDŽ䆌ৃᮍ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᥜќϔӑ᳝䰤ⱘǃ䴲ᥦҪⱘǃϡৃ䕀䅽ⱘ䆌ৃˈ䆌ৃ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᢹ᳝ ⾳⫼ⱘϔৄҙ⫼Ѣ᳔㒜⫼᠋㞾䑿Ϯࡵⱘ⬉㛥ϞˈҹⳂᷛҷⷕⱘᔶᓣᅝ㺙ǃ㓈ᡸঞՓ⫼ᴀ䕃ӊDŽ᳔㒜 ⫼᠋ৃҹᴎ఼ৃ䇏Ḑᓣࠊϔӑᴀ䕃ӊⱘࡃᴀˈԚࠊࡃᴀⱘⳂⱘ䳔Ўᇍᅝ㺙᳝ᴀ䕃ӊⱘ⬉㛥䖯㸠 ӑᄬḷDŽᴀ䕃ӊѻકফ㨫ᴗ⊩ֱᡸDŽЎᴀ乍䆌ৃⱘϔ乍ᯢ⹂ᴵӊˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᖙ乏ᡞ䆌ৃ ᮍᦤկⱘॳ䕃ӊϞⱘ䆌ৃᮍ㨫ᴗໄᯢҹঞӏԩ݊Ҫϧ᳝ᴗᷛ⼎ϔৠࠊࠄ䕃ӊӑϞDŽ 2.䰤ࠊDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৠᛣᴀ䕃ӊᰃϔ乍ϧ᳝ѻકˈᴀ䕃ӊЁⱘҹঞϢᴀ䕃ӊⳌ݇ⱘϔߛᴗ߽ǃᴗⲞ ߽Ⲟˈࣙᣀ᠔᳝Ⳍ݇ⶹ䆚ѻᴗˈഛ⬅䆌ৃᮍѿ᳝Ϩӏԩᯊഛᑨ⬅䆌ৃᮍѿ᳝DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ϡᕫᇚ 䕃ӊⱘࡃᴀߚ䆌ৃǃ䕀䅽䫔ଂќҪҎDŽ᳔ ᳔㒜⫼᠋ϡᕫᇍᴀ䕃ӊ䖯㸠㾷ⷕǃডᎹǃߚ㾷ҹ݊ Ҫᮍᓣᇚᴀ䕃ӊ䰡ԢЎৃ䇏ḐᓣDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ϡᕫׂᬍǃᬍ㓪ǃ㗏䆥ǃߎ⾳ǃߎ׳ǃ⾳׳ǃҹ䌶߽Ў Ⳃⱘߎଂǃ㒣䫔ˈҹ݊Ҫᮍᓣ䕀䅽䕀⿏ᴀ䕃ӊˈѢᴀ䕃ӊᴀ䕃ӊⱘӏԩ䚼ߚ߯䗴㸡⫳ કDŽ 3.ֱᡸᅝܼDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৠᛣ䕃ӊࣙ䆌ৃᮍⱘଚϮ⾬ᆚˈϧֵ᳝ᙃ᳝㨫ᴗⱘ䌘᭭DŽ᳔㒜⫼ ᠋ৠᛣሑ᳔݊ࡾᑊ䞛প᠔᳝ড়⧚ᮑᇍᴀ䕃ӊࡴҹֱᡸˈ䙓ܡ㒣ᥜᴗ㗙Փ⫼ᴀ䕃ӊˈ䙓ܡҹ ӏԩᮍᓣᇚᴀ䕃ӊᭈԧ݊Ёӏԩ䚼ߚ䖯㸠㒣ᥜᴗⱘࠊǃ݀ᓔǃ䴆䫔ଂDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᡓ䅸ᴀ 䕃ӊЁࣙњᵕӋؐⱘֱᆚֵᙃˈ㒣ᥜᴗⱘՓ⫼/ࠊᇚӮᇍ䆌ৃᮍ䗴៤ᤳᆇDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ ৠᛣणࡽᑊ䜡ড়䆌ৃᮍ䆚߿ᑊߴ䰸ᅝ㺙Ѣ᳔㒜⫼᠋ⱘ⬉㛥ǃ⬉㛥㋏㒳ࡲ݀ഄ⚍ⱘ㒣ᥜᴗⱘᴀ䕃 ӊⲫ⠜䕃ӊ˄ࣙᣀᴀ䕃ӊ݊Ҫ⠜ᴀ˅DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৠᛣҙᅝ㺙ᑊՓ⫼Ꮖᥜᴗⱘǃℷ⠜ⱘᑊ㦋ᕫ䆌ৃ ⱘᴀ䕃ӊⱘ䕃ӊ⠜ᴀDŽᅝ㺙Փ⫼ӏԩ㒣䆌ৃⱘⲫ⠜ⱘ䕃ӊⱘ㸠Ўᇚ㹿㾚Ўᇍᴀण䆂ⱘḍᴀ䖱 㑺DŽ 4.㒜ℶDŽᴀ䆌ৃᣕ㓁᳝ᬜⳈ㟇㒜ℶDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋䖱ডᴀ䆌ৃӏԩϔ乍㾘ᅮⱘˈᴀ䆌ৃᇚゟे㒜ℶ㗠᮴ 䳔䆌ৃᮍߎк䴶䗮ⶹDŽ㒜ℶৢˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᖙ乏䫔↕ᴀ䕃ӊঞ᠔᳝Ⳍ݇ᣋ䋱DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৃ䗮䖛䫔↕ ᴀ䕃ӊ᠔᳝Ⳍ݇ᣋ䋱ⱘᮍᓣ䱣ᯊ㒜ℶᴀ䆌ৃDŽ 5. ᳝䰤ⱘֱ䆕DŽ䆌ৃᮍֱ䆕ˈ㞾䆌ৃᮍথ䋻П᮹䍋бक˄90˅˄˖ݙi˅ℷᐌՓ⫼⢊ᗕϟˈᅝ 㺙њᴀ䕃ӊⱘ䕑ԧᴤ᭭Ꮉ㡎Ϟ≵᳝⨩⮉˗ᑊϨ˄ii˅ᴀ䕃ӊথ䋻ᯊヺড়݊᠔݀Ꮧⱘࡳ㛑㾘 ḐDŽℸˈᴀ䕃ӊᣝĀ⦄⢊āᦤկDŽབᵰᴀ䕃ӊֱׂᳳ⦄ߎݙњ⨩⮉ˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᑨᇚП䗔ಲ䆌ৃ ᮍˈᑊϨ䆌ৃᮍଃϔⱘНࡵेˈ⬅䆌ৃᮍ㞾㸠䗝ᢽˈᤶ᳝⨩⮉ⱘ䕃ӊ䗔䖬ӋℒDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৠᛣ ࠡ䗄НࡵЎ᳔㒜⫼᠋䆌ৃᮍ䖱ডᴀण䆂乍ϟ᠔ⱘӏԩֱ䆕㗠ѿ᳝ⱘଃϔܼ䚼ᬥ⌢ᮑDŽབᵰ ᴀ䕃ӊߎ⦄ҹϟᚙࠡˈމ䗄ֱ䆕ϡќ䗖⫼˄i˅Ꮖ㒣㹿䰸䆌ৃᮍПⱘӏԩҎҹӏԩᮍᓣᬍׂ ᬍ˗˄ii˅≵᳝ḍ䆌ৃᮍᦤկⱘ᪡ᣛफᅝ㺙ǃ᪡ǃׂ⧚㓈ᡸ˄ࣙᣀᇍᴀ䕃ӊ݊Ҫ⠜ᴀⱘՓ ⫼˅˄iii˅⬅Ѣফࠄ䴲ℷᐌⱘ⠽⧚⬉ᄤⱘय़ǃϡᔧՓ⫼ǃ⭣ᗑᛣDŽᇍՓ⫼ϡऍ䜡ⱘ᪡ ㋏㒳䆒ᇐ㟈ⱘϢПⳌ݇ⱘᬙ䱰ˈᇚᴀ䕃ӊϢ䴲䆌ৃᮍᦤկⱘ䕃ӊϔ䍋Փ⫼᠔ᓩথⱘᬙ䱰ˈ 䆌ৃᮍϡᡓᢙ䋷ӏDŽ iv Listen Software License Agreement SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 䆌ৃᮍ݊㒣䫔ଚǃߚ䫔ଚǃਬᎹҷ⧚ଚᦤկⱘӏԩষ༈ⱘк䴶ⱘֵᙃᓎ䆂ϡᕫҹӏԩᮍᓣ ᵘ៤ᇍϞ䗄ֱ䆕ⱘᓊԌǃׂᬍ㸹DŽ Ϟ䗄ֱ䆕ᬥ⌢ᮑЎᥦҪᗻⱘˈᑊϨপҷњ᠔᳝݊Ҫᯢ⼎ᱫ⼎ⱘֱ䆕ˈࣙᣀԚϡ䰤Ѣ䩜ᇍ䗖䫔 ᗻᇍᶤϔ⡍ᅮⳂⱘ䗖⫼ᗻⱘ咬䅸ֱ䆕DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᡓᢙ᳝݇ᴀ䕃ӊ䗖⫼ᗻǃ䋼䞣ᗻ㛑ⱘ᠔᳝亢 䰽DŽ 6.䋷ӏ㣗ೈDŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋⬅ѢՓ⫼᮴⊩Փ⫼ᴀ䕃ӊ䜡༫ⱘк䴶ᴤ᭭ҹӏԩᔶᓣᇐ㟈ⱘӏԩৢ㓁 ⱘǃⱘ✊يǃ䯈ⱘǃ⡍⅞ⱘᚽ㔮ᗻⱘᤳᆇ䌨ٓ˄ࣙᣀᇍ㧹Ϯᬊܹ߽⍺ᤳ༅ǃ㒣㧹Ёᮁǃ᭄ ଚϮֵᙃ϶༅ㄝⱘᤳᆇ䌨ٓ˅ˈ᮴䆎䋷ӏᔶᓣབԩˈࣙᣀ⭣ᗑᛣˈ䆌ৃᮍ݊㨷џǃ催㑻ㅵ⧚ ҎਬǃਬᎹǃ乒䯂ǃ⣀ゟᡓࣙଚǃҷ⧚Ҏ݇㘨ᮍϡᡓᢙӏԩ䋷ӏˈेՓ䆌ৃᮍᏆ㹿ਞⶹ䆹ᤳᆇথ ⫳ⱘৃ㛑ᗻDŽ 䆌ৃᮍ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᡓᢙⱘҹԩ⾡ᔶᓣѻ⫳ⱘᅲ䰙ⱘⳈᤳᆇ䌨ٓ䋷ӏ˄བᵰ᳝˅ˈϡ䆎䋷ӏᔶᓣབ ԩˈࣙᣀ⭣ᗑᛣˈҙ䰤ѢϨӏԩᚙމϟϡ催Ѣህ䕃ӊ䆌ৃ䆌ৃᮍᬃҬⱘॳྟӋℒDŽ 7. छ㑻DŽ䆌ৃᮍৃҹϡᯊ㞾㸠އᅮ䗮ⶹ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᇍᴀ䕃ӊߎⱘᮄǃᦤछǃᔎᬍ䖯//ᴀ 䕃ӊⱘ᳔ᮄথᏗ˄ড়⿄“छ㑻”˅ˈᑊϨৃҹ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᬃҬ䆌ৃᮍϡᯊ䆒ᅮⱘӋḐৢ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᥜ ќᇚℸ㉏छ㑻ⱘՓ⫼䆌ৃDŽᴀ䆌ৃᴵℒᇍ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᦤկⱘ᠔᳝ᇍᴀ䕃ӊⱘछ㑻ৠḋ᳝㑺ᴳDŽ Ў⹂᳔ֱ㒜⫼᠋㛑ᬊࠄ݇Ѣࠡ䗄छ㑻ⱘ䗮ⶹᑊ㦋ᕫℸ㉏䕃ӊछ㑻ⱘՓ⫼䆌ৃˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋ᖙ乏ҹ ϟ㔥ഔᇍ݊䕃ӊ䖯㸠⊼˖ݠwww.listeninc.com/register <http://www.listeninc.com/register>DŽ 8.ߎষᴵ՟DŽ䕃ӊˈࣙᣀᡔᴃ᭄ˈᑨヺড়㕢ߎষㅵࠊ⊩ⱘ㽕∖ˈࣙᣀ㕢ߎষㅵ⧚⊩ḜঞϢП Ⳍ݇ⱘᴵ՟ˈᑊৃ㛑䳔㽕ヺড়݊Ҫᆊⱘ䖯ߎষᴵ՟DŽ᳔㒜⫼᠋ৠᛣϹḐ䙉ᅜ᠔᳝ࠡ䗄ᴵ՟ᑊᡓ䅸 ᳝݊䋷ӏህߎষǃߎݡষ䖯ষ䕃ӊ㦋ᕫ䆌ৃDŽ 9.ϔ㠀ᴵℒDŽ ᴀ䆌ৃফ㕢偀㧼䇌าᎲ㘨䙺⊩ᕟⱘㅵ䕪ᑊℸߎ㾷䞞ˈᑊᑨヺড়䆌ৃᮍǃ᳔㒜 ⫼᠋ঞ݊㞾㒻ফᮍǃফ䅽ᮍ⊩ᅮҷ㸼Ҏⱘ߽ⲞDŽᴀण䆂ᓩ䍋ⱘϢᴀण䆂Ⳍ݇ⱘӏԩ㸠ࡼǃ䆝 䆐⊩ᕟᑣˈ᮴䆎ᰃ৺ᇏ∖㸵ᑇᬥ⌢䞥䪅ᤳᆇ䌨ٓˈᑨܼ䚼Ѹ⬅偀㧼䇌าᎲ㧼⽣ܟ䚵ⱘᎲ㘨 䙺⊩䰶ϧሲㅵ䕪DŽ㹿䆌ৃᮍϡৃ᩸ಲᑊ᮴ᴵӊഄ᳡Ңࠡ䗄⊩䰶ⱘϧሲㅵ䕪ᴗഄ⚍ˈᑊৠᛣ䞛পӏ ԩঞ᠔᳝䖯ϔℹⱘᖙ㽕㸠ࡼҹ᳡Ңࠡ䗄⊩䰶ⱘㅵ䕪ᴗDŽᇍ䆹䆝䆐ⱘ㒜ᅵ߸އЎ᳔㒜㒧ᵰˈᑊϨৃҹ ḍ䆹߸އǃ䅸ᅮџᅲⱘ㒧䆎ᗻ䆕ᴤ᭭ⱘ㒣䖛䅸䆕ⱘ⹂ޚ᮴䇃ⱘࡃᴀϔӑҹঞ݊Ё᠔䗄ⱘ䋷ӏ 䞥乱ˈḍ᳝݇ᴵ㑺݊Ҫ㾘ᅮ䗮䖛䗖ᔧᑣˈ݊Ҫㅵ䕪ऎඳݙᔎࠊᠻ㸠DŽ㢹ᴀ䆌ৃⱘӏԩᴵ ℒ㹿᳝ㅵ䕪ᴗⱘ⊩䰶ḍⳌ݇⊩ᕟ䅸ᅮЎ᮴ᬜϡৃᠻ㸠ˈ䆹ᴵℒᇚܕ䆌ⱘ᳔㣗ೈݙќҹᠻ 㸠ˈϨᴀ䆌ৃⱘ݊Ҫᴵℒ㒻㓁ᅠܼ᳝ᬜDŽ䆌ৃᮍߎⱘӏԩ䗮ⶹ݊ᅗ≳䗮ᖙ乏䗮䖛䚂䌘乘Ҭᮍ ᓣҹ༈ㄝ䚂ᬓ䚂ᆘ㟈ҹϟഄഔ˖ LISTEN, Inc. LISTEN, Inc. 580 580 Harrison Ave., Harrison Ave., Suite Suite 2A, 3W, Boston, MA 02118 Boston, MA 02118 ᴀण䆂ᵘ៤ঠᮍህᴀण䆂Џ乬᠔䖒៤ⱘᅠᭈण䆂ˈৠᯊᯢ⹂㾷䰸ᑊপҷ᠔᳝Пࠡⱘϔߛᦤ䆂ǃण 䆂ǃ䰜䗄ǃໄᯢֱ䆕DŽ䰸䴲᳝䆌ৃᮍᥜᴗҷ㸼ㅒ㕆ⱘк䴶᭛кˈᴀण䆂ϡᕫবׂᬍDŽ SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Listen Software License Agreement v 10. ᡓ䅸DŽᠧ ᠧᓔᴀࣙ㺙/ᅝ㺙ᴀ䕃ӊৢˈ᳔㒜⫼᠋ेᡓ䅸݊Ꮖ䯙䇏ǃ⧚㾷ᴀ䆌ৃᑊৠᛣফࠄᴀ䆌 ৃⳌ݇ᴵℒᴵӊⱘ㑺ᴳDŽ㢹ᇍᴀ䆌ৃ᳝ӏԩ䯂乬ˈৃ䗮䖛Ϟ䗄ഄഔ㘨㋏䆌ৃᮍDŽ vi Listen Software License Agreement SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck® for Windows System Requirements SoundCheck uses your computer’s CPU to perform all calculations and signal processing. Because of this, the speed of your computer directly affects the overall performance of the SoundCheck system. In addition, all stimulus waveforms and measured waveforms are played and/or stored in memory for optimum performance. This means that long test signals and measurements require more memory and longer processing time than short test signals and measurements. Therefore, it is recommended that 4 GB of RAM be used for measurements of 4 to 10 seconds and 8 GB of RAM (or more) for measurements longer than 10 seconds. More system memory is also required for the following: Low frequency measurements, using more than 2 channels per measurement and high bandwidth measurements (more than 48 kHz sample rate). Note: Windows 32 bit operating systems are limited to 4 GB of RAM (3.25 GB of actual RAM). SoundCheck 32 bit will only make use of 2 GB of ram. The extra ram in addition to the 2 GB is to allow for headroom for the operating system and other system requirements. SoundCheck 64 bit makes full use of additional memory installed on a 64 bit operating system. 8 GB of RAM or more is common. Minimum Computer Requirements Before buying a series of new computers for use with SoundCheck, we recommend that you test one with all the related hardware, including the audio interface. Test the audio interface with the SoundCheck Self Test sequence to insure that it is compatible with the computer. We recommend that you purchase a high quality computer according to the quidelines below. Refer to Appendix A:Hardware Compatibility List on page 483, for details regarding audio interfaces and operating systems. The audio interfaces listed in the Hardware Compatibility List have been tested with SoundCheck on computer systems supplied by Listen. Note that some computers may not be compatible with all audio interfaces. Supported operating systems are: Windows® 7, 32 bit and 64 bit, and Windows® 10 - 64 bit only Windows® 8.0 and 8.1 are no longer supported. See Appendix A:Hardware Compatibility List on page 483. Windows® XP, 98, Millennium Edition, Windows® 2000 & NT® are not supported Intel Core Duo processor minimum or better (Celeron processors are not recommended) To take advantage of using multiple virtual instruments, a multi-threaded processor is recommended, e.g.; Intel-I3/I5/I7 processor / AMD Phenom II processor or better. Intel processor motherboards require changes to Bios. See Appendix A:Hardware Compatibility List on page 483. 4 GB of RAM minimum (8 GB or more recommended for large WAV files or high resolution measurements below 50 Hz). Windows 7 systems will require a minimum of 4 GB of RAM 500MB of free hard-disk space required for complete software installation Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to the USB port on the computer. We offer an evaluation service to customers who would like to have their computer and hardware compatibility evaluated by Listen. Please contact [email protected] for pricing on this service. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck for Windows 1 Computer Setup Important! SoundCheck requires that you have Administrative Rights Enabled in Windows, for any account that it is installed on. Please follow the procedures outlined in Appendix B:Windows Setup Recommendations on page 493. This shows our recommended setup for Windows 7 and optimization tips. Refer to the Appendix A:Hardware Compatibility List on page 483 for information on approved audio interfaces. Backup It is highly recommended that you make a backup of your SoundCheck critical folders on a regular basis. A backup should always be made prior to installing a new version or update to SoundCheck. We recommend that the following folders be included in any backup: Sequence files (.SQC) Data (If the default Data folder in SoundCheck is the location for your data files) Results (If the default Results folder in SoundCheck is the location for your result files) WAV files SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini and SoundCheck 16.0.ini (Stores the preferences that were last used in SoundCheck and settings specifically for the 64 bit version) See SoundCheck 16.0.ini Files. Upgrading From an Earlier Version If you are upgrading from an earlier version of SoundCheck 16.0 (or Beta version) you should copy the old installation folder and name it "SoundCheck 16.0 OLD" before installing the new version. This is a precautionary measure to keep you from overwriting sequence steps that you have customized. Installing SoundCheck 16.0 overwrites the contents of the SoundCheck 16.0 folder. If upgrading from SoundCheck 15.x (or earlier), the folder name does not need to be changed. This way you can run both versions of SoundCheck without disturbing any tests you have already created. If you want to run your SoundCheck 15.x Sequences in the new version, you can use the Setup Wizard to convert those sequences for SoundCheck 16.0. See Convert Sequences From Previous Version on page 12. Rules - Installing SoundCheck 2 Do not copy Steps and Sequences folders from previous version and paste them into SoundCheck 16.0. See Convert Sequences From Previous Version on page 12. SoundCheck 16.0 sequences are not backward compatible. They will not work in previous versions of SoundCheck. Sequences from SoundCheck 4.x, 5.x and 6.x will run in SoundCheck 16.0 but will require updating to conform to the new Multichannel parameters. DAT files created with SoundCheck 16.0 are not viewable in versions of SoundCheck prior to and including SoundCheck 6.0x. The updated DAT file format in SoundCheck 16.0 is not compatible with versions of SoundCheck prior to and including SoundCheck 6.0x. The DAT file format was updated in SoundCheck 6.1. Status.dat files for SoundCheck 8.x and later will not work with previous versions of SoundCheck. Installing SoundCheck for Windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Software Installation Important! Do not unplug the hardware key while SoundCheck is running. Doing so could destroy the hardware key. 1. Close all running applications before installation. We recommend that you temporarily disable anitvirus software during the SoundCheck installation process. Once complete, re-enable your antivirus software. Make sure your IT department has allowed for the installation of SoundCheck. 2. Software downloaded from our website is installed by simply double clicking on the Setup.exe file. You can also install from disc by placing the SoundCheck installation disc in the DVD-ROM drive of your computer If your computer is set to “Auto Run”, you will be prompted to install the software You may also be prompted to “Run Launch.exe” Click “Install SoundCheck”. Select either 32 bit or 64 bit installation. See SoundCheck 64 Bit vs 32 Bit on page 7. Note: The demo version is only available in the SoundCheck 32 bit installer. The 64 bit installation does not allow you to install the demo version. Download the SoundCheck 32 bit installer from the website or select the 32 bit installer from the DVD menu. 3. For first time installations, LabVIEW Run Time (LabVIEW 2016) is required as part of the installation process. This will require a computer reboot before SoundCheck is installed. The SoundCheck installation will resume after reboot. 4. Follow the prompts for: Device Driver Installation Wizard - For details see Listen Hardware Drivers on page 7. SoundCheck 16.0 Setup Wizard License Agreement Installation Location Check Hardware Key 5. You are prompted to insert the hardware key to continue installation. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck for Windows 3 Hardware Key As of SoundCheck 13 a new type of hardware key is required. This key is compatible with Windows 64 bit as well as 32 bit versions. Previous versions of SoundCheck will not work with this key The SoundCheck hardware key must be connected to the computer or SoundCheck will not open Figure 3-1: Hardware Key SoundCheck 32 bit Demo version can be installed to preview the software without the hardware key (64 bit demo not available) Warning! Do not lose the hardware key! Do not lose the hardware key for the SoundCheck system It unlocks the functionality of your SoundCheck software For insurance purposes, this key represents the full value of your system and should be noted in your company's list of assets We recommend that it be securely attached to the computer to avoid loss or theft Hardware Key Installation Insert the included hardware key into the USB port of the computer when prompted during the SoundCheck installation process. The computer will recognize the new hardware key as the driver is included in the software installation. Important! Do not to remove the hardware key while SoundCheck is running. The hardware key can be damaged. If damaged, it will need to be returned to Listen, Inc. for replacement. Note: If the USB key is moved from one USB port to another, the driver will automatically re-install for the new USB port. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Use the following precautions to help neutralize the difference in electrical charge between your hardware key and the computer, before contact is made. This should help to protect your hardware key from ESD or Static Shock. 4 Use a rubber mat that has been specifically designed as an electrical insulator. Do not use a mat designed to decrease electrostatic discharge as protection from electrical shock. Use a grounded wrist strap designed to prevent static discharge Use antistatic or electrostatic discharge (ESD) preventive clothing or gloves Avoid touching the USB contact pins For grounding purposes, verify that your computer provides excellent conductivity between the power supply, the case, the mounting fasteners, and the mainboard. Installing SoundCheck for Windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Normal Mode with hardware key With a valid Hardware Key and no Acquisition Channels enabled (0 Channels): You can not open, edit, apply or insert an Acquisition Step into a sequence. Acquisition Steps in the Sequence are skipped. With a valid Hardware Key and Acquisition Channels enabled (2, 4, 8, 16, or 32): When inserting or editing an Acquisition Step you are limited to the number of hardware channels enabled on the Hardware Key. A warning is issued if you try to exceed this number. If you open a sequence that uses a number of hardware channels that is greater than the number of channels enabled on the Hardware Key, a detailed warning is issued when the sequence is pre-loaded, indicating that the sequence was created using more channels than is available. Acquisition steps such as this will be skipped when the sequence is run. Hardware Key Laser ID The Laser ID of the Hardware Key currently connected to the system is shown on the SoundCheck Main Screen. Figure 3-2: Hardware Key Laser ID Demo Version The SoundCheck 32 bit Demo version can be installed to preview the software without the hardware key. Note: The demo version is only available in the SoundCheck 32 bit installer. The 64 bit installation does not allow you to install the demo version. Download the SoundCheck 32 bit installer from the website or select the 32 bit installer from the DVD menu. Follow the installation prompts to the Check Hardware Key screen. Select “Skip Hardware Key and install 32-bit Demo” as shown in Figure 3-5. All data generated in the demo version is randomly adjusted in level and is therefore not valid. See Demo Version in the SoundCheck Manual. Figure 3-3: 32 Bit Demo Version 6. Confirm that the hardware key has been inserted, then click Install to finish the installation. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck for Windows 5 7. Open SoundCheck. The Setup Wizard runs automatically at startup. The wizard can also be run by clicking File on the SoundCheck Main Screen and selecting Setup Wizard (Ctrl+Z). Figure 3-4: Setup Wizard 8. Proceed to Setup Wizard on page 11. 6 Installing SoundCheck for Windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Listen Hardware Drivers Device Driver Installation Wizard The Driver Installation runs automatically when the SoundCheck installation runs. Drivers are included for Listen Hardware such as: AudioConnect, SoundConnect 2, AmpConnect, DC Connect and BTC-4148. AmpConnect The AmpConnect driver used in SoundCheck 16.0 creates the following limitations for installations of SoundCheck 13 on the same system: Cannot control the AmpConnect headphone output (in SC13) Serial number is removed from AmpConnect audio device name, necessitating a relink of audio channels in the hardware editor (in SC13) If you need to use AmpConnect in SoundCheck 13: Go to Add/remove programs in Windows Select “AmpConnect USB SC driver” and click Uninstall AmpConnect and DC Connect As of SoundCheck 13, new drivers for AmpConnect ISC & DC Connect have been included in the SoundCheck installation process. The new driver will not work in versions prior to SoundCheck 13. To use AmpConnect or DC Connect with SoundCheck 12 (and previously supported versions), you will need to manually Rollback the device driver in Windows Device Manager. Please refer to the latest AmpConnect or DC Connect manual for driver rollback procedures. AudioConnect and SoundConnect 2 These drivers are included in the SoundCheck 16.0 software installation. AudioConnect 4x4 These drivers are not included in the SoundCheck 16.0 software installation. The AudioConnect 4x4 interface must be connected to the computer when the drivers are installed. SoundCheck 64 Bit vs 32 Bit SoundCheck 64 will access more system memory, which permits the use of much longer stimuli (over 1 minute in length) and improves performance when using multiple channels. It also allows larger data sets, such as DAT files with hundreds of curves, to be opened into the memory list for offline analysis and reporting. SoundCheck 64 Bit can only be installed on a 64 bit Windows operating system. If you try to install it on a 32 bit system you will get an error indicating that it is not compatible. LabVIEW Run Time x64 is required and is installed with SoundCheck 64 Bit SoundCheck 32 Bit can be installed on both 32 bit and 64 bit Windows operating systems LabVIEW Run Time x32 is required and is installed with SoundCheck 32 Bit Demo version is only available in SoundCheck x86, 32 bit. See Demo Version on page 8. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck for Windows 7 Demo Version The SoundCheck 32 bit Demo version can be installed to preview the software without the hardware key. Select the SoundCheck 32 Bit installer. Then select “Skip Hardware Key and install 32-bit Demo” as shown in Figure 3-5. All data generated in the demo version is randomly adjusted in level, Randomized, and is therefore not valid. The SoundCheck wall paper will change to indicate this as shown in Figure 3-6. Run C:\SoundCheck 16.0-x86\SoundCheck Demo-Viewer 16.0.exe Only available in SoundCheck x86, 32 bit version All data is randomized Recall, save and print data is randomized Create and modify test sequence but Save sequence is disabled 2 channels of input/output hardware channels Figure 3-5: 32 Bit Demo Version Figure 3-6: Demo Wallpaper A valid Hardware Key is required to register ActiveX components during SoundCheck installation. The Hardware Key is not required to use ActiveX in Demo Mode. All other functionality of SoundCheck is available SoundCheck executes the test sequence and adds random values to the data displayed or saved. All data generated in the demo version is randomly adjusted in level and is therefore not valid. 8 Installing SoundCheck for Windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Optional Modules and Protected Sequences Once SoundCheck is installed, with the proper status.dat file and hardware key, a list of Optional Modules and Protected Sequences is available. Click on the Help menu of the SoundCheck Main Screen and then select Optional Modules. The current list of modules and sequences available is found in Figure 3-7: Optional Modules List. This indicates which modules and sequences are currently enabled on the system as well as items that can be added. Note: Acquisition is now an option that allows only a specific number of hardware channels. 2000 Limits Editor 2017 Stimulus 1301 SoundMap CSD 2001 Harmonic Distortion 2018 Stepped Sine 1300 SoundMap Full 2002 Sequence Editor 2019 IM Distortion 2003 Spect Analyzer (Scope FFT) 2020 Multitone 3000 Hearing Aid Application for ANSI 3.22-1996 2004 Post-Processing 2021 Transfer Functions 2005 RTA Spect Analyzer 2022 2 Channel Acquisition 2006 Time Selective Response 2023 4 Channel Acquisition 3103 IEEE 1329, Clause 10 Seq (JB03xx) 2007 Loudness Rating 2024 8 Channel Acquisition 3104 TIA-470 Seq (JB04xx) 2008 Attack and Release 2025 16 Channel Acquisition 3105 IEEE 269, Clause 9 Seq (JB05xx) 2009 Statistics 2026 32 Channel Acquisition 2010 Save to Database 2027 64 Channel Acquisition 3106 Hearing Aid Magnetic Comp Seq (JB06xx) 2011 Polar Plot 2029 SoundCheck ONE 2012 Equation Editor 2030 Perceptual Rub & Buzz 2013 EQ a Wav File 2031 Zwicker Loudness Rating 2014 Signal Generator 2032 Waveform Filter 2015 Multimeter 2033 Active Speech Level 2016 Loose Particle 2099 SC Win 2100 SC Mac 3102 EN50332-1 Max SPL for Headphones 3107 TIA USB Headsets Seq (JB07xx) 3108 TIA 810 Seq (JB08xx) 3109 TIA 920 Seq (JB09xx) 3110 ETSI TBR 38 Seq (JB10xx) 3111 (JB11xx) Reserved 3112 (JB12xx) Reserved 3113 (JB13xx) Reserved 3114 (JB14xx) Reserved Figure 3-7: Optional Modules List NI Visa If you intend to use a GPIB controller, an external footswitch or external buzzer with SoundCheck (optional equipment), NIVisa is required and is included in the SoundCheck installation process. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Installing SoundCheck for Windows 9 Windows Text Size The Windows default display setting is for text to be at 100%. It is sometimes changed when individual users are trying to make icons larger on the Windows desktop or make program menu fields larger. Setting this higher than 100% causes fields in SoundCheck to overlap and in some cases become “not visible”. Medium (125%) and Large (150%) should not be used. Menus will not be readable. See Windows Display - Text Size on page 495. European Decimal Notation The “Decimal Display Format” can be changed to European Style in Windows. (comma in place of period) See European Decimal Notation on page 494. Windows Setup Instructions See Appendix B:Windows Setup Recommendations on page 493 for additional Windows computer setup instructions. 10 Installing SoundCheck for Windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup Wizard SoundCheck®, when installed at Listen onto a purchased computer, is configured with the appropriate audio interface driver. If a different audio interface is installed, you will have to configure it manually. Note: Please refer to Minimum Computer Requirements on page 1. If only the software is purchased, you should use this section to setup your audio interface for use with SoundCheck. Note: For complete computer setup recommendations, please refer to Windows Setup Recommendations on page 493. First Run The Setup Wizard runs the first time SoundCheck runs. The wizard can also be run by clicking File on the SoundCheck Main Screen and selecting Setup Wizard (Ctrl+Z). Click on the items in the Menu to select a function Check box for “Do not show on start up” Assists in setting up new hardware, including autodetection of audio interface Allows you to transfer over sequences as well as hardware and calibration settings from previous versions of SoundCheck Figure 1: Setup Wizard Greeting Locate Status.dat File This allows you to navigate to the appropriate Status.dat file for your hardware key. The status.dat file is normally sent by email from Listen, Inc. Automatically Select Status.dat If the status.dat path is pointed to a folder containing multiple status.dat files, the software will automatically load the file that corresponds to the hardware key that is currently plugged in. Figure 2: Locate Status.dat File SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup Wizard 11 Import Settings You can import Preferences as well as Hardware and Calibration setups from previous installations of SoundCheck. You will be prompted to choose if Signal Paths should be overwritten and then if Calibrated Device Files should be imported Select or ignore import of Preferences or Hardware/ Calibration setups Figure 3: Import Settings Figure 3: Import Settings Note: Calibration .DAT files from devices not in use in System Calibration will not be copied into the new version of SoundCheck. These files will need to be manually imported later. Convert Sequences From Previous Version Right click to: Add a sequence or a directory of sequences to the list Remove a sequence from the list Clear the list Select the Desination Folder for the converted sequences Click Convert Figure 4: Convert Sequences 12 Setup Wizard SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup New Hardware You are prompted when new Listen hardware is detected. In the Hardware Editor, Automatic Startup Configuration is enabled by default for Listen Hardware. The Vp value fields for supported Listen Hardware will automatically update. See Automatic Startup Configuration on page 49 Hardware from other manufacturer’s is not detected Click on the Arrow button to open the Hardware Editor or Self Test sequence Figure 5: Setup New Hardware Creating Sequences A sequence tutorial is available in the main SoundCheck manual in the Sequence Editor Chapter. See Creating a New Sequence on page 401. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup Wizard 13 Audio Interface Important! Before setting up an audio interface for use with SoundCheck, please refer to Hardware Compatibility List on page 483. This contains important information regarding approved audio interfaces. For manual setup of the audio interface in SoundCheck: 1. Open SoundCheck and select Hardware from the Setup menu. 2. Click Import and browse the list of Hardware Steps in the SoundCheck 16.0\Steps\Hardware folder. Steps are grouped first by operating system Steps are configured for individual audio interfaces and are named by brand and/or model of that audio interface If an appropriate step exists for your audio interface, select that step from appropriate operating system folder If the audio interface is not listed, the setup for the audio interface will have to be created manually Figure 4-1: Hardware Editor Note: Please contact Listen for the most recent list of Hardware Configurations, or for help creating a new step. When using a audio interface with Balanced Inputs and Outputs please follow the calibration and wiring guidelines found in Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connections on page 508. Note: 14 When using the Digital Audio Labs “CardDeluxe“ in conjunction with Listen’s “SoundConnect“ microphone power supply, the Max In value of the Input Hardware Channel must be multiplied by 1.125. This is to account for the impedance difference between the SoundConnect and the CardDeluxe. Setup Wizard SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual A Note About Calibration The Calibration Configuration includes all devices in the signal path including the Audio Interface, Amplifier, and/or Microphone. The Calibration Editor allows you to create a Signal Path for each device that might be used on the system. The Table View of the editor acts as a database of all calibrated devices. Figure 4-2: Calibration Table The accuracy of your SoundCheck system depends upon accurate calibration of your input and output devices. Nominal calibration values for many devices typically used are included with SoundCheck. For more accurate measurements, calibration of individual signal paths should be performed for each device. Frequency of calibration of these devices depends upon the stability of the device. For more information refer to Calibration Configuration on page 65. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup Wizard 15 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup Wizard 16 SoundCheck® 16.0 New Features Faster & more accurate THD+N analysis algorithm Listen’s completely re-designed THD+N analysis algorithm is compliant with the AES17 standard, and is more accurate and significantly faster than other audio test systems. High accuracy is achieved, even with short and/or low level test signals, through the use of a synthetic notch filter - an extremely precise digital notch filter. A traditional notch filter option is also offered to enable correlation with measurements made on legacy systems. The algorithm also includes high and low pass filters for controlling the measurement bandwidth and for filtering noise in electronic measurements. See THD + Noise on page 157. New Real Time Distortion Analyzer (optional module) A new distortion analyzer provides continuous real time measurement of output distortion including THD and THD+N, THD and THD+N residual level and SINAD. A, B, and C weighting filters along with user-defined arbitrary weighting functions can be used. Data from the distortion analyzer can also be saved to the memory list. This enables distortion to be quickly viewed without having to set up a sequence. With the optional strip chart recorder, distortion can also be viewed over time. See Distortion Analyzer on page 434. New Frequency Counter (optional module) The new high resolution frequency counter offers an accurate and clear visual indication of frequency, determining the dominant signal in a selected signal path and returning a precise frequency measurement. This measurement can be saved to the memory list and can be used in a sequence, for example for triggering a measurement at a certain frequency. This feature is useful for calibration (e.g. calibrating audiometers), for testing playback systems to ensure that they are playing back audio at a constant rate, and for any other application requiring a high precision frequency measurement. See Frequency Counter on page 435. Save to Memory List for All Meters The multimeter, distortion analyzer and frequency counter can all now save results to the memory list, even when used interactively. This enables an instantaneous measurement to be recorded without having to run a sequence, and also enables these saved values to be used within sequences. See Common Instrument Controls on page 409. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck 16.0 New Features 17 New Strip Chart Recorder (optional module) The Strip Chart Recorder module provides the multimeter, distortion analyzer and frequency counter the ability to plot measurements over time. This functionality is directly equivalent to connecting a paper chart recorder to a classic, stand-alone hardware instrument. The Strip Chart Recorder can plot continuously or for a predefined amount of time and can plot instantaneous results or repeating averages. This is an invaluable feature for environmental and reliability testing and for any engineer that needs to characterize the behavior of a device over time. Results from the Strip Chart Recorder can be saved to the memory list and used inside a sequence just like any other virtual instrument. See Strip Chart Recorder on page 420. Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients In stepped sine amplitude and frequency sweeps, selecting equalization now also enables a smooth transition between steps. These smooth transitions minimize the transient response in the device under test. This results in shorter test times, smoother sounding sweeps, and is particularly useful for microphone testing where a source speaker needs to be equalized. See Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients on page 103. Without Sweep Equalization With Sweep Equalization 18 SoundCheck 16.0 New Features SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Upgraded Multimeter The multimeter has a new, fixed or auto-tracking bandpass filter option. This is useful for measuring a specific signal in the presence of background noise. In addition a new ‘Linear Repeating’ averaging mode is available. In this mode a linear average is made and then repeated. This is useful when, for example, you would like to plot a repeating 1 second Leq of the environmental noise level. See Filters Tab on page 419. See Averaging Tab (Avg.) on page 418. Simplified Setup SoundCheck automatically scans for new devices and setting changes when opened, and updates the Hardware Editor, Audio Hardware and Listen Hardware Tabs. This makes setup much faster. The ability to also manually adjust hardware setup and preserve 3rd party hardware settings offers flexibility and makes it easier to integrate Listen and 3rd party hardware. To simplify audio interface setup, sample rates are restricted to the selection valid for that device. If changes are made during a SoundCheck session, a simple ‘refresh’ will scan for changes and update the settings. Software installation for multiple systems is also simplified; when pointing to a folder of multiple status.dat files in the setup wizard, the correct status.dat file is automatically selected based on the connected hardware key. A new conversion tool facilitates updating custom VIs from an older version to the latest version of SoundCheck by automatically re-linking the appropriate vi and ctl files, saving time over doing it manually. See Setup Wizard on page 11. Outline ET250-3D Turntable Control Custom Steps are available to control the Outline Turntable model ET250-3D, and an example sequence is available. See Outline Ethernet on page 347. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck 16.0 New Features 19 SoundCheck Control Via Python SoundCheck can be controlled via Python, an objectoriented scripting language that offers some advantages over C++. An included example (which can be used as a starting point and modified) demonstrates the simplicity of controlling SoundCheck using Python. Compatible with Python 2 and 3, this script opens SoundCheck, loads and runs the “Complete Test” sequence, and passes results back to the Python script for further processing. See Python Example on page 449. Externally Launch and Close Virtual Instruments A new virtual instrument wrapper allows you to open and close virtual instruments from a custom VI or using TCP/IP. See Instrument Open Close on page 348. Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs A new conversion tool facilitates updating custom VIs from an older version to the latest version of SoundCheck by automatically re-linking the appropriate VI and CTL files, saving time over doing it manually. See Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs on page 352. The Exit Status of Custom Steps Is Now Indicated Like other SoundCheck steps, the Sequence Editor now highlights in red or green whether a custom step completed successfully or not. 20 SoundCheck 16.0 New Features SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of SoundCheck®, created by Listen, Inc. SoundCheck is the first dedicated electroacoustic test and measurement system for production line quality control testing as well as research and development applications. SoundCheck was developed by some of the most knowledgeable and skilled engineers and software programmers in the world. Our goal is to provide fast and accurate testing with an intuitive user interface. Listen will constantly be looking for new ways to improve SoundCheck. Customer feedback helps us develop better sound measurement solutions and is greatly appreciated. Please call or email us at [email protected]. Listen Hardware Support As of SoundCheck 14, support for the control of AudioConnect, SoundConnect 2, as well as the Portland Tool & Die BTC-4148 Bluetooth interface are available. SoundCheck 16.0 supports AmpConnect ISC™, Listen's integrated hardware box which replaces a power amplifier, microphone power supply, impedance box and digital I/O card in your testing setup. AmpConnect ISC can be fully controlled either via the sequence editor, or directly via a control panel that replicates the appearance of the front of the hardware. See AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck on page 253. Please refer to the AmpConnect ISC manual for more information. Note: SoundCheck 10.11 and above is required to use AmpConnect ISC™. For driver change note See AmpConnect and DC Connect on page 7. Figure 6-1: Listen Hardware Control SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction 21 Full Multichannel Acquisition An unlimited number of hardware channels enables you to use as many channels simultaneously as your hardware and computer memory can support. This offers advantages for many types of testing including: Production testing of surround sound electronics Stereo headset testing Two channels of acoustic signal and two channels of impedance can be measured simultaneously, increasing the speed of test. Multichannel devices all channels can be measured simultaneously, enabling an entire surround sound test to be carried out much faster. Pro audio mixers and other multichannel devices can be tested faster using SoundCheck. Batch mode testing Multiple channels can be utilized for batch-mode testing of multiple devices at once, such as microphones. The multichannel capability of SoundCheck also means that you can play and record simultaneously on different devices (audio interfaces, or data acquisition devices). This allows an NI data acquisition card (such as the PXI/PCI 4461 and 4462) to be used in conjunction with an audio interface, combining the flexibility of a Windows Multimedia environment with the high accuracy of the NI hardware. SoundCheck communicates with Windows Multimedia devices in real time by sending WAV files. It is the only audio test system that offers complete control of Windows multimedia devices, making it the ideal solution for testing audio electronics and multimedia devices such as IP phones, MP3 players and Bluetooth headphones. 22 Introduction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck ONE™ SoundCheck ONE is an entry-level SoundCheck system which is essentially a lower cost, simplified, version of SoundCheck coupled with the AmpConnect ISC or AudioConnect hardware. SoundCheck ONE offers the capability to test loudspeakers, microphones and headphones within predetermined sequence templates. Although the user interface is the same as in the full version of SoundCheck, rather than using the Sequence Editor, SoundCheck ONE users are supplied with sequence templates. These templates serve as the starting point for all SoundCheck ONE tests and can be used to generate as many product specific sequences as desired by selecting parameters such as the stimulus signal, characteristics to be measured, frequency range, level and limits. SoundCheck 16.0 hardware keys can be programmed to also work in SoundCheck ONE mode. This enables you to easily switch between SoundCheck 16.0 and SoundCheck ONE. Refer to SoundCheck ONE™ on page 437 for more information. Global System Hardware and Calibration System Hardware - One Hardware Configuration to define and configure data acquisition equipment for all sequences System Calibration - One System Configuration to define the sensitivity of the input or output transducers along with any needed EQ and Correction curves Test Sequence SoundCheck allows you to develop tests or modify existing tests from our extensive library. Each test, referred to as a "Sequence" is essentially a script. A Sequence is a series of "Steps", with each step performing a specific task. An extremely simple Sequence might have the following structure: Stimulus Step - Define and generate the signal to be sent to the DUT Acquisition Step - To play the Stimulus and record the DUTs response Analysis Step - For example, to calculate frequency response of the DUT Limits Step - To apply Pass/Fail criteria on acquired data Display Step - To Display data and results Many other Step types are available, including Post-Processing, Printing, Statistics, etc. Each step type is clearly defined and explained later in the manual. See Sequence Editor on page 387. Virtual Instruments In addition to running pre-defined Sequences, you can also generate stimuli and analyze data using standalone "Virtual Instruments" (optional). These can be launched from the "Instruments" menu, and replicate familiar laboratory equipment. These include the following: Signal Generator, Multimeter, Oscilloscope, FFTSpectrum, Real-Time Analyzer, Distortion Analyzer, Frequency Counter and Strip Chart. See Virtual Instruments on page 407. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction 23 Operating Principles Speaker SoundCheck operates on the same principles as a traditional, stand-alone measurement system consisting of a Signal Generator, RMS Multimeter, tracking filter, and level recorder. With SoundCheck, all of these functions are implemented in software as VI’s, or Virtual Instruments. Microphone Tracking Filter Device Under Test 1000 Hz Sine Generator Voltmeter Level Recorder Figure 6-2: Traditional Hardwarebased Test System The advantages of software-based instruments are numerous. SoundCheck takes advantage of today’s highspeed personal computers, professional audio interfaces, data acquisition cards and Windows software platforms. This saves thousands of dollars in hardware cost compared with traditional audio test and measurement systems. The system is modular, which means you can easily upgrade as your needs change. Speaker Microphone Input Amplifer Device Under Test PASSED Computer SoundCheck Software Signal Generator Module Display Module Analysis Module D/A Audio Interface A/D Figure 6-3: SoundCheck Softwarebased Test System 24 Introduction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequences Running a Sequence performs most measurements in SoundCheck. A Sequence is made up of individual steps, or operations that are strung together to create an overall test. Custom test procedures can be written or modified using the Sequence Editor. Typically, sequence names are product model numbers or device names. SoundCheck includes example sequences to aid in developing new sequences. See Sequence Editor on page 387. Steps A step is a unique operation that is executed in the order it occurs in a sequence. To edit a step in the active sequence: Choose Setup from the main screen drop down menu Select the category for the Step in the sequence to be edited (e.g., Stimulus, Acquisition, etc) You can also open the Sequence Editor and select a step from the right side of the editor. A step can also be saved as a template in the library on the left side of the Sequence Editor. The step templates are then available for use in other sequences. Every Step has a Step Category and a Step Editor. As of SoundCheck 12, all attributes and fields of a step in the active sequence are linked to that sequence. Changes to the steps in the active sequence appear only in that sequence. Sequence Run Status After pushing Start, the Stop button turns red to indicate that the sequence is running Test Time Stop Button The Test Time field shows the elapsed time of the sequence run Click the Stop button at any time during the sequence run to halt operation You can also hit the Escape key on the keyboard to Stop Figure 6-4: Stop Button See SoundCheck Main Screen on page 31. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction 25 Test Equipment Setup for Typical Applications Note: Chose the proper input and output Hardware Channels that correspond to the Signal Paths used in the selected test sequence. Loudspeaker Setup 1. Connect an output of the audio interface to the input of the power amplifier. 2. Connect the output of the power amplifier to the loudspeaker under test. 3. Connect the microphone preamp cable to the microphone input on the microphone power supply (e.g., SoundConnect). 4. Connect the output of the microphone power supply to an input on the audio interface. 5. Select the appropriate sequence in SoundCheck and click Start. SoundCheck™ for Loudspeaker Testing PASSED Microphone Power Supply Audio Interface Audio Output to Amp Input Mic Supply Output to Audio Input Microphone Power Amplifier Loudspeaker Figure 6-5: Loudspeaker Equipment Setup 26 Introduction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Earphone/Headphone Setup Note: Chose the proper input and output Hardware Channels that correspond to the Signal Paths used in the selected test sequence. 1. Connect an output of the audio interface to the input of the power amplifier. 2. Connect the output of the power amplifier to the earphone/headphone under test. 3. Connect the ear simulator preamp cable to the microphone input on the microphone power supply (e.g., SoundConnect). 4. Connect the output of the microphone power supply to an Input on the audio interface. 5. Select the appropriate sequence in SoundCheck and click Start. SoundCheck™ for Earphone/ Headphone Testing PASSED Microphone Power Supply Earphone/ Headphone under test Audio Interface Mic Supply Output to Audio Input Audio Output to Amp Input Ear Simulator Power Amplifier Figure 6-6: Earphone Equipment Setup SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction 27 Microphone Setup Note: Chose the proper input and output Hardware Channels that correspond to the Signal Paths used in the selected test sequence. 1. Connect an output of the audio interface to the Input of the Power Amplifier. 2. Connect the output of the power amplifier to the mouth simulator. 3. Connect the microphone under test either to the direct input of the microphone power supply (e.g., SoundConnect BNC Input), or if no additional gain is needed, connect directly to the input of the audio interface. 4. If using a microphone power supply, connect the output to an Input on the audio interface. 5. Select the appropriate sequence in SoundCheck and click Start. SoundCheck™ for Microphone Testing PASSED Microphone Power Supply Audio Interface Audio Output to Amp Input Mic Supply Output to Audio Input Microphone under test Power Amplifier Mouth Simulator Figure 6-7: Microphone Equipment Setup 28 Introduction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hearing Aid Setup Note: Chose the proper input and output Hardware Channels that correspond to the Signal Paths used in the selected test sequence. 1. Connect an output of the audio interface to the Input of the power amplifier. 2. Connect the output of the power amplifier to the anechoic chamber. 3. Connect the hearing aid under test to a coupler, sealing the transmitter of the hearing aid towards a calibrated microphone. 4. Connect this mic to the microphone input on the microphone power supply (e.g., SoundConnect). 5. Connect the output of the power supply to an input on the audio interface. 6. Select the appropriate sequence in SoundCheck and click Start. SoundCheck™ for Hearing Aid Testing PASSED Audio Interface DC Connect DC Voltage to Battery Adapter Input USB to PC Anechoic Test Chamber SoundConnect Mic Supply to Audio Input Audio Outputs to Amp Inputs Right Amp Output to Telecoil Loop Input Power Amplifier Hearing Aid in coupler Left Amp Output to Speaker Input Figure 6-8: Hearing Aid Equipment Setup Note: DC Connect is an optional hardware item available from Listen, Inc. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Introduction 29 Telephone/Cell Phone Setup Note: Chose the proper input and output Hardware Channels that correspond to the Signal Paths used in the selected test sequence. 1. Connect an output of the audio interface to the input of the power amplifier. 2. Connect the output of the power amplifier to the mouth simulator cable for the head and torso simulator. 3. Connect the microphone (Ear Simulator) to the microphone input of the microphone power supply (e.g., SoundConnect). 4. Connect the output of the microphone power supply to an input on the audio interface. 5. Connect an output of the audio interface to the input of the Telephone interface to send signal to the device in the positioner. 6. Select the appropriate sequence in SoundCheck and click Start. SoundCheck™ for Telephone Testing To Positioner Telephone Interface PASSED Microphone Power Supply Audio Interface Audio Output to Amp Input Mic Supply Output to Audio Input From Ear Simulator Head & Torso Simulator To Mouth Simulator Power Amplifier Figure 6-9: Telephone Equipment Setup 30 Introduction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen Start, Continuous, and Redo measurement controls Test time of running test in Stopwatch fashion Drop down list for selecting test sequences in the current folder Track lot and serial numbers # of units tested During sequence run this field shows the current running step Figure 7-1: SoundCheck Main Screen Quick Start Menu The optional Quick Start Menu provides a simple interface for choosing a sequence to open or starting a new sequence. It also allows easy access to recently used sequences as well as examples. Recent Sequences: Select a recently used sequence to open Open: Opens a Windows browser so you select a sequence to open (Same as the File > Open function) New: This opens the Sequence Editor with a blank sequence. See Creating a New Sequence on page 401 for more information. Figure 7-2: Quick Start Menu Examples: Opens the Example Sequence Browser as shown in Figure 7-3. You can select from any of the default sequences included with SoundCheck. The Sequence Information field provides an explanation of the selected sequence. You can also select View Sequence Document to open the PDF file included with that sequence. See Appendix P:Default Sequence List on page 543. Figure 7-3: Example Sequence Menu SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 31 Control Buttons Start - To start a measurement, left click the Green Start button. You can also click the F2 key on your keyboard, or use an optional foot switch or bar code reader. Select Mode (down arrow) - allows you to select the following options: Continue Step Stop Select Mode Start Start - Runs the sequence one time Cont. (Continuous) - Repeats the sequence until Stop is selected Redo - Runs the same measurement again and overwrites the results of the previous measurement Stop - Ends the run of the sequence at the current running step Click the Stop button at any time during the sequence run to halt operation You can also hit the Escape key on the keyboard to Stop Step - Runs one step of the sequence at a time. Available when Breakpoints are set in a sequence. See Debugging Tools on page 396. Continue - Runs the remaining steps in a sequence when: A previous step is set to Wait for Confirmation. Hit the Enter key to continue. See Configure Step on page 398. Breakpoints are set in a sequence. Hit the Enter key to continue. The sequence will continue to the next Breakpoint or to the end of the sequence. You can also click the Step button to run one step at a time. See Debugging Tools on page 396. The keyboard shortcuts will also change “Select Mode” and the Start Icon will change accordingly: Start = F2, Continuous = F3, Redo = F4, Continue = Enter and Stop = Esc. See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. Note: Clicking Stop ends the sequence run at the current running step. The sequence does not run to the end. Running Step Display When a sequence is running, the Current Running Step is displayed in the sequence name field. Offline Tab Display The Offline Tab is available with or without a sequence loaded. This allows you to open, process, and view data without loading a test sequence. In the Offline Tab, data can be examined or analyzed without affecting the layout of the display steps of the sequence. It minimizes the risk of accidentally editing sequences. This is also useful to customers who view data on a regular basis, but may not be opening a sequence. See Offline Tab on page 295. 32 SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Drop down menus All SoundCheck functions are divided into individual modules, accessible from drop down menus. Left click on a menu heading and then click on the desired selection. File Create a New sequence or Open an existing sequence Save changes to a sequence or Save As to save with a new name Export Sequences - See Exporting Sequences on page 403. Mass Export - Multiple sequences can be exported in a single operation. See Mass Export on page 40. Document Sequence - Allows you to export a list of the steps of the active sequence along with information regarding the configuration of the steps. Edit Open the Login window to change the Access Level or User Name Preferences allows you to customize and maintain various SoundCheck operations and functions including Status.dat file location. See Preferences on page 35. See Folder Paths on page 36. Instruments Select single or multiple Virtual Instruments See Virtual Instruments on page 407 Open or Save Virtual Instrument Configuration files (.VIC) Setup Setup Open System Hardware and Calibration See Page 47 for Hardware and Page 65 for Calibration Open steps that are used in the Active Sequence (Grayed out steps are not in use) Open the Memory List or Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 33 Offline The Offline Menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen features steps that can be used to process data without affecting the active sequence. The processed data can be saved Changes to steps can only be saved by selecting Save As, giving the step a new name and saving it to the appropriate SoundCheck step folder. None of the changes to a step will be saved with the active sequence when it is closed and saved This allows you to try different functions and ideas, modify the display to show data in a different ways and then save the results. 1. In Figure 7-4, Post-Processing has been selected from the Offline menu. 2. The Curve Division step is selected. 3. Curves for Operand A and B are selected from the existing Memory List of the Active Sequence. 4. After pressing the Apply button, the result shows up in the Memory List as Protected Data. Rules Steps called from the Offline menu Figure 7-4: Offline Menu Example must be opened from their default location: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Steps folders. You should not use steps from a different SoundCheck folder or from a stand-alone folder on your local drive or network. Any steps that you wish to use that are not part of the default SoundCheck installation should be copied to the appropriate folders in the SoundCheck 16.0 directory you are operating from. Window Promote SoundCheck Main Screen to fill the desktop (the Main Screen can be resized manually) 34 Shows the Open windows for the current sequence. You can select specific windows that may have become hidden. SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Help Turn on Pop Up Context Sensitive Help Open the SoundCheck Instruction Manual Open additional documentation Check for Updates, visit the User Community, Download example sequences Request support, request new features or report a bug Show the Optional Modules installed on the system To display context sensitive help, choose Help from the drop down menu or click on the question mark (?) in the upper right corner of the screen. Move your cursor over the control or field of interest and the help text will show information for that control. Preferences The Preferences Menu consolidates program-wide preferences such as folder paths and background wallpaper into a single menu. This menu also includes new options such as toggling sequence documentation and whether or not to automatically load a sequence on startup. Click Edit on the Main Screen and select Preferences. Startup Select: Load last used sequence Run Setup Wizard Show Quick Start Menu Automatically load virtual instrument config Select a saved virtual instrument configuration to load at startup. See Virtual Instrument Configuration on page 409. Login Show or Hide Login Window on Startup Select Access Level: Engineer, Technician or Operator Set the Password for each Access Level See Login on page 45. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 35 Display Wallpaper Image File - Browse to select an image file for use as a Main Screen background. Use Solid Color - Ignores the Wallpaper Image selection and sets the Main Screen background to the Color selected below Wallpaper Image - Uses the selected Wallpaper Image file Position Center - The graphic is not resized and is placed in the center of the Main Screen background Tile - The graphic is not resized and is duplicated, filling the Main Screen background Stretch - The graphic is stretched to fill the Main Screen background Color Set a custom color for the desktop background which includes any area not covered by a Wallpaper Image Anti-Aliasing This is a visual smoothing option for graphed data. Older or lower performance computers may experience a slow down when updating displays with a large amount of data. Anti-Aliasing can be shut off to speed up display rendering. Anti-Aliasing Waveforms is off by default. Folder Paths The Folder Paths dialog window allows you to customize where files are located as well as file selection. 36 Default Step Templates Folder - Location of Step Templates Import Export folder - Default directory for exporting sequences Logo path - Path to logo file used for printing Default Data Path - Default path used in Autosave and Recall Steps Status File Path - Location of status.dat file(s) Figure 7-5: Folder Paths SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Status.dat File Path Note: As of SoundCheck 15, you can automatically select the Status.dat file. The location for the Status.dat file can be selected by clicking Edit on the SoundCheck Main Screen, then Preferences and then selecting Folder Paths. Click the folder icon for Status File Path or Containting Folder. If the status.dat path is pointed to a folder containing multiple status.dat files, with the Key ID in the file name, the software will automatically load the one that corresponds to the currently plugged in hardware key. 1. Click Browse and select a Status.dat file or click on Current Folder to allow SoundCheck to automatically select. 2. Click OK to continue. 3. Click on OK to close the Folders path dialog SoundCheck will automatically switch to using the new Status.dat file SoundCheck does not have to restart once the new Status file has been selected Figure 7-6: Status File Path If the status.dat path is pointed to a folder containing multiple status.dat files, the software will automatically load the file that corresponds to the hardware key that is currently plugged in. This allows you to use multiple Status.dat files for multiple hardware keys, or Status.dat files with different functionality for a single hardware key. The Status.dat file must have the Key ID in the file name; e.g., "status SC 1111.dat". This allows for use of multiple hardware keys on one system. You can also switch between SoundCheck full version and SoundCheck ONE, if you have a SoundCheck ONE Status.dat file. In this case you will need to select the specific status.dat file instead of selecting the folder. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 37 Wrong Status.dat Warning If an invalid Status.dat file is selected, the SoundCheck wall paper will change to indicate that “Data is Randomized”. There is also a message in the upper right corner of the SoundCheck Main Screen indicating the condition of the Status.dat file. See Figure 7-7. Figure 7-7: Data Randomized Warning Miscellaneous Show Sequence Documentation This allows you to globally turn off Show Sequence Documentation in all sequences. Show ‘Protect Data’ option when switching sequences Turns off the warning: “This action will remove any unused pre-run curves and unprotected measured data from the Memory List.” Figure 7-8: Miscellaneous Tab 38 SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Advanced Important! Please don't use the options in this tab unless directed to by Listen Support personnel. These are only for troubleshooting. Log sequence duration and memory usage: Produces a log file in the SoundCheck folder containing the length of time the sequence ran and the memory consumption of each sequence run C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Time Mem Log.txt Log assertions: Creates log of failed programmer sanity checks (programmer errors) Show assertions: Show failed programmer sanity checks (programmer errors) on screen Enable TCP/IP Server: Check to allow TCP/IP Server (Automatically updates SoundCheck 16.0.ini file with True/ False status and port number) Figure 7-9: Advanced Tab TCP IP Server Port: The Port number of this SoundCheck system See Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP on page 443 for more information. Process Priority Raising the Process Priority level helps to minimize fluctuation in sequence execution time. The default value is set to Normal. The appropriate values are listed below. SCProcessPriority= Low BelowNormal Normal AboveNormal High Realtime When the priority is set to “Realtime”, SoundCheck takes priority over all other applications. We do not recommend using “Realtime” as it can dramatically change the performance of the system. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 39 Mass Export Multiple sequences can be exported in a single operation. This saves time when upgrading from one version of SoundCheck to another and when transferring your sequences from one system to another. See Exporting Sequences on page 403. Click File on the SoundCheck Main Screen Open the appropriate sequence folder Select the sequences you want to export as shown in Figure 7-10 Figure 7-10: Select Sequences 40 Navigate to and open the export destination folder (or create a new one) Click Current Folder. We do not recommend exporting directly to your desktop, but a folder on your desktop is OK. You will be prompted to confirm the export destination Click OK to export SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck 16.0.ini Files The SoundCheck 16.0.ini and SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini files are used to store various settings for SoundCheck including the settings made in the preferences menu. (The x64 file is only available in the 64 bit version.) For example, when changing sequences, you are prompted if you want to preserve unprotected data in your Memory List, in a dialog box like Figure 711. When the Don't ask me again is selected, SoundCheck will use the chosen action (Discard or Protect) as the default action each time the sequence is changed, and the dialog box will no longer appear. You can review this setting in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini files, found in the root of the SoundCheck folder. //Signal Generator: Specifies the minimum size of the user interface buffer when playing a WAV file to the driver. Playing a WAV file is not as CPU intensive as a sine wave because it is a finite sample length being read from disk. Lowering this value will improve response time from the signal generator user interface when playing a WAV file. Raising this number should reduce dropouts. Min = 1, Max=40, Default=2 [SoundCheck 16.0] ;appFont = "Tahoma" 20 ;dialogFont = "Tahoma" 20 OutputBufSizeGuiWAV = 2 ;systemFont = "Tahoma" 20 [MicCal] [Files] CALIBRATOR TYPE = "3" RecentFiles.list = "" MICROPHONE TYPE = "0" RecentDATFiles.list = "" PRE-GAIN = "0.000000" RecentRESFiles.list = "" [Dialogs] RecentWFMFiles.list = "" PROMPT TO REMOVE WHEN EDIT DISPLAY = "True" RecentDISFiles.list = "" PROMPT TO REMOVE PRE-RUNS = "True" RecentVIConfigFiles.list = "" PROTECT MEASURED = "False" [Execution] PROMPT TO OVERWRITE FILE = "True" SCProcessPriority = "Normal" SHOW SPLASHSCREEN = "False" [Debug] [MiscSettings] LogTimeAndMemoryPerRun = FALSE RUN SETUP WIZARD = "TRUE" LogAssertions = FALSE LOAD LAST USED SEQUENCE = "FALSE" ShowAssertions = FALSE FIRST RUN = "FALSE" [Virtual Instruments] SHOW NEW FEATURES DOC = "True" StartupConfig = "" //Input Virtual Instruments: If buffer size of samples fetched from input device drops below this value, new samples are fetched. Increasing this number should reduce dropouts on the input side (very rare). Min = 1, Max=500,Default=100 InputBufSizeDll = 100 //Signal Generator: Specifies the minimum % of the ASIO output buffer below which new samples will be written to the driver. Lowering this number will reduce response time to changes in the signal generator user interface. Raising this number should reduce dropouts. Min = 10, Max=95, Default=70 OutputBufPercentDllASIO = 70 Figure 7-11: Prompt to Keep Unprotected Data ANTI ALIASING CURVES = "TRUE" ANTI ALIASING WAVEFORMS = "FALSE" DEMO MODE = "False" DEMO VERSION = "SoundCheck" PROTECT MEASURED DATA WHEN EDIT DISPLAY = "True" PRINT IMAGE FORMAT = "bmp" SHOW DATA IN OUT = "True" STEP DEFAULT OVERWRITE CURVES = "True" SERIAL NO = "" Figure 7-12: Example of SoundCheck 16.0.ini In Figure 7-12, you can See two entries in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file labeled Prompt to remove pre-runs and Protect Measured. When Prompt to remove pre-runs is set to False, the dialog is disabled. SoundCheck is then using the Protect Measured field to determine whether measured curves are protected when sequences are changed. When Protect Measured is set to True, the Memory List will preserve all measured curves from one sequence to the next. When it is set to False, all unprotected data is discarded when the sequence is changed. See Sequence Editor on page 387 for more information on changing sequences. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck Main Screen 41 INI File Rules 42 Stores the preferences that were last used in SoundCheck and settings specifically for the 64 bit version SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini is only available in the 64 installation When using SoundCheck 64 bit, the x64 INI file is created the first time you manually edit a color in a display. You can also create the file by making a blank INI file with the same name as the SoundCheck executable, e.g.: SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini.) SoundCheck Main Screen SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controls and Details SI Units SoundCheck uses SI Units throughout the system. It is important to note that values entered, such as 0.1 Volts, will change to 100 m when SI Units are selected in the Preferences for a Virtual Instrument. Values can also be entered directly with SI Units by typing 150 m. It is then important to note the following table of abbreviations for SI Units that should be used in SoundCheck. Symbol Name Factor Symbol Name Factor m milli 10-3 k kilo 103 u micro 10-6 M mega 106 n nano 10-9 G giga 109 p pico 10-12 T tera 1012 f femto 10-15 P peta 1015 a atto 10-18 E exa 1018 z zepto 10-21 Z zeta 1021 y yocto 10-24 Y yotta 1024 Numeric Fields Figure 8-1: SI Units Highlight the value in a numeric field by dragging the mouse cursor over the number while holding down the left-button, or by repeatedly pressing the Tab button on the keyboard until you find the correct entry field. You can enter the correct value by highlighting the value in the numeric field and entering the correct number using the keyboard, or by using the left-button of your mouse to click on the up/down arrow keys next to the numeric field to increase/decrease the present value. With the cursor placed after the 3, click the Up Arrow key to raise the value to 401 mV Another method is to place the blinking cursor to the right of the value you want to increase or decrease. In this example, the cursor is placed in the Voltage field. Using the up/down arrows on the keyboard allows you to change the value in 1, 0.1 or 0.01 increments, depending on which digit the cursor is placed next to. By using the Page Up/Down keys you can change the output level in 1 dB increments. In this example, the up arrow will increment the level by 1.00 V. Pressing the up arrow once increases the level to 1.01 V. By putting the cursor in the Frequency field you can use the Page Up/Down keys to change the frequency in R80 or 24th octave steps. Right Click Functions Many of SoundCheck’s settings can be found under Right Click Functions. Refer to the following list for some of the main Right Click functions. Convert Sequences From Previous Version on page 12 Right Click Functions on page 53 Right Click Function on page 74 Right Click Functions on page 98 Virtual Instruments on page 126 Right Click - Memory List on page 281 Right Click on Graph on page 297 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controls and Details 43 Resolution In the Signal Generator click Preferences and then Resolution to change the settings as shown in Figure 8-2. Knobs Instead of entering the desired value with the keyboard, you can also dial in the value with the virtual knob located below the numeric field. Simply place the cursor over the knob, hold down the left mouse button and rotate the knob to change the level. Figure 8-2: Preferences Signal Generator Graphs and Cursors The cursor can be moved by Left Clicking and dragging the cursor marker (+) to the desired point on the measurement curve. The cursor will snap to the closest curve you drag to. The XY coordinates of a cursor are displayed next to the cursor on the display. The XY coordinate box can be moved so that it does not cover the graph line. See Cursors on page 297. Right Click on Display for options Delta X axis Delta Y axis Figure 8-3: Frequency Response Graph Modifying Graph Display Right Click on a Display and select Preferences to show the Graph Preferences editor. See Display Editing on page 296. Cursor Controls Cursor color is controlled by through the Graph Preferences window. Figure 8-4: Graph Preferences 44 Controls and Details SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Login To view and change the system's login settings, select Login from the Edit drop down menu on the SoundCheck® Main Screen. The Login screen also appears when first starting the SoundCheck program. Login allows the SoundCheck administrator to prevent use of certain test system functions by other users. For instance, unauthorized users can be blocked from editing Calibration or Sequences with password protection. Access Level There are three access levels: Engineer, Technician, and Operator. Engineer - The Engineer level is the highest access level, and therefore all functionality is accessible Technician - The Technician level allows access to Calibration procedures, and may measure, print and save data Operator - The Operator level can only measure and print Figure 9-1: Login User Name The User Name entered in Login can be stored with data, results, and included with printouts. It is useful for keeping track of who performed the measurement. The user name is typed in at the login prompt or can be scanned in with a barcode reader. Once the user name has been entered SoundCheck will remember the name and use it for all future sessions. The name is remembered when SoundCheck is closed and re-opened. If a new user name needs to be entered, simply open the Login screen from the Edit menu in SoundCheck and enter a new operator name, or enter a new name in the Login screen upon opening SoundCheck. Password The default passwords are not specified (blank) when SoundCheck is shipped. You must click Setup to create passwords. See Figure 9-2: Login Setup. Passwords are case sensitive, so be careful with capital letters. Click Setup to open the Login Setup dialog in order to create new passwords. (Always keep a written copy of your passwords and keep them in a secure place.) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Login 45 Login Setup The Login Setup dialog allows you to change the login password or bypass the user login. Bypasses Login Screen This can be changed at any time by selecting Edit on the SoundCheck Main Screen and then selecting Login. Figure 9-2: Login Setup Select Edit from the SoundCheck Main Screen and then select Login to access the Login Screen. Figure 9-3: Login Screen 46 Login SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration Hardware - System.Har This serves as a database for all of the hardware that the specific SoundCheck system uses. To edit the Hardware Configuration, click Setup on the SoundCheck Main Screen and then select Hardware as shown in Figure 10-1 (shortcut Ctrl+Shift+H). Note: As of SoundCheck 11, Hardware is a “System Level” configuration. It is unique to a specific SoundCheck system and is used by all sequences. Settings from earlier step versions can be imported in the Hardware Configuration Editor. Note: Hardware (.HAR) Steps created with SoundCheck 16 and later are not backward compatible with previous versions of SoundCheck. Figure 10-1: Setup - Hardware Features Listen hardware is configure automatically but can be adjusted, making setup faster and more flexible. This allows you to more easily add 3rd party hardware to use along with Listen Hardware Easier integration of Listen and 3rd party hardware 3rd party hardware settings are preserved (not overwritten) when adding Listen Hardware Easier integration of Listen and 3rd party hardware See Listen Hardware Page on page 56. Hardware Compatibility SoundCheck will work with a variety of audio interfaces, including other multimedia sound devices such as the Bluetooth headsets and USB microphones shown under Windows Sound and Audio Devices Properties. There are a wide variety of audio interfaces available with varying degrees of performance but we recommend that you use one of the audio interfaces certified by Listen. See Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List on page 483. SoundCheck will also work with a variety of National Instruments data acquisition cards such as digital input/ output and IEEE/GPIB that are supported by DAQmx. This includes dynamic signal measurement cards such as the NI 4461, which requires DAQmx. See Appendix C: PXI/PCI 4461 Installation on page 497 for information on setting up the NI 4461. Other manufacturers’ cards can be used, but require some knowledge of LabVIEW programming to create a Custom VI Step inside SoundCheck. See Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step on page 353. I/O devices that are not manufactured by NI must conform to DAQmx and must be recognized by NI MAX, in order to be used with SoundCheck As of SC 9.1, Digital I/O functions are compatible with DAQmx devices DaqMX devices cannot be used simultaneously with ASIO audio interfaces SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 47 Hardware Editor Rules For Production Lines When setting up multiple SoundCheck systems that will use the same sequence, it is important to follow some basic rules: 48 The minimum number of Audio Interface channels should be the same on all systems Calibration Editor channels must use the same naming convention across all systems. See Naming Best Practices on page 73. When controlling Listen Hardware with Message Steps, e.g.: AmpConnect ISC, AudioConnect and SoundConnect 2, the same hardware must be used across all systems so that the Message Steps perform the specified commands. See Listen Hardware Control Message on page 237. The Listen Hardware Startup Default settings should be the same across all systems. See Listen Hardware Page on page 56. External Interfaces must use the same Interface Numbering scheme across all SoundCheck systems so that Message Steps communicate correctly. See External Interface on page 246. NI Daq device ports must have the same minimum number of ports. Each port number must be configured with the same Input or Output status across all SoundCheck systems. See NI DAQ Digital I/O Table on page 61. Select Save As in the Hardware Editor to save the System.HAR file so it can be imported to other SoundCheck Systems. We recommend that you save it with a name identifying the specific hardware in use. Note that the Hardware Interface Vp and Latency values for a specific interface should be entered on each SoundCheck system after importing the settings for Listen Hardware and External Interfaces. Hardware (.HAR) Steps created with SoundCheck 16 and later are not backward compatible with previous versions of SoundCheck Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Audio Page The following settings will affect how WAV files are created and played by SoundCheck, such as in the Stimulus and Acquisition Editors. Figure 10-2 shows the default System Hardware Configuration for AudioConnect. This shows the hardware channels available when using this audio interface and default Vp values. Channels and other values are Grayed out until the actual device is selected in the Device column. Figure 10-2: System Hardware Table Hardware settings for other audio interfaces or from previous sequences can be imported into the Hardware Editor as well. If items in the list become obsolete they can be deleted. This will of course affect channels in the Calibration Editor that link to that device and any sequence that might use one of the deleted channels. Each Channel Name should be unique to avoid confusion when editing a sequence or adding hardware at a later date. Automatic Startup Configuration As of SoundCheck 16, Auto Mode has been replaced with Automatic Startup Configuration. This allows SoundCheck to detect and maintain Listen hardware so that most users will never have to open the hardware editor or modify hardware settings. SoundCheck will always scan for available devices on startup. SoundCheck will only automatically configure Listen Hardware devices on startup if Automatic Startup Configuration is selected. When Refresh is clicked SoundCheck scans for hardware and then configures what it can, no matter what. Automatic Startup Configuration is on by default The Automatic Startup Configuration check box and Refresh button affect both the Audio and Listen Hardware tabs Input and Output Vp values are stored in the firmware of AmpConnect ISC, AudioConnect and future Listen interfaces. These values are automatically loaded in the Hardware Editor when SoundCheck discovers new hardware on startup or when you click Refresh. Automatic Startup Configuration configures new channels only at startup, if Automatic Startup Configuration is selected. You can manually scan by clicking on the Refresh button. (The system does not continuously poll for changes to hardware.) After automatic configuration you can further edit the hardware configuration. For example, this allows you to use automatic configuration to detect and configure the AudioConnect 4x4, but then easily change its configuration to 192 kHz sample rate. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 49 When “Refresh” is selected SoundCheck scans for Listen hardware and automatically configures discovered hardware channels in the same way Automatic Startup Configuration works at startup, regardless of the state of Automatic Startup Configuration. Automatic Startup Configuration or Refresh will not overwrite the settings of an existing audio channel where those settings are allowed values. Only Vp and Sampling Rate are checked for validity. If you are using audio interfaces other than those made by Listen, Automatic Startup Configuration will not affect your “already configured channels” as long as the device is connected. Selection Buttons Five buttons at the bottom of the editor allow you to: Refresh - Click to scan for Listen hardware and automatically configure discovered hardware channels Import - Allows you to import hardware settings from the Hardware Configuration examples provided with SoundCheck or from other SoundCheck sequences. This will overwrite the settings of current channels in the table if they have the same channel name. Save - Save changes to hard disk and closes the Hardware Editor Save As - Allows you to save the configuration for a specific hardware setup. You can create different hardware configurations so you can easily switch between them using the Import function. Cancel - Discard any changes made while the editor window was open Importing Hardware Settings This can be useful when sequences are created on a different SoundCheck system, with different hardware. When Import is selected, the Hardware Configuration Editor will check for Input and Output channel name duplication. You are prompted to select Yes or No to overwrite existing channels. Yes/Yes to All: The current channel settings will be replaced with the settings from the imported channel(s) No/No to All: You can choose to not update individual channels or all channels New Channels: If the imported Hardware Configuration has channels with different names from the current configuration, the channels will be added to the Hardware Configuration. Note: 50 Figure 10-3: Import Overwrite Message When channels are added to the Hardware Configuration, each channel must have a unique name. The Hardware Configuration cannot be saved if there are duplicate channel names. Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The example in Figure 10-4 shows new Input and Output channel names after importing channels from a hardware file for another device. The new channels can be renamed. In this case they might be named Input 3, Input 4, Output 3 and Output 4. This flexibility allows the Hardware Configuration to be used as a database for any device that you might have available, even if it is not always connected to the system. Right click on a channel and select Rename Figure 10-4: Import Channels The settings for the Lynx audio interface are grayed out and cannot be edited since the device is not present in the system SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 51 Hardware Table Fields The Hardware Configuration Table view allows you to add, delete, duplicate and edit hardware settings for all devices available on the SoundCheck system. Each device is defined in a row with column headings of: Channel Name - Defined by user. Default = Input 1..n, Output 1..n Driver - Audio Interface or NI DAQmx WDM/MME - Select when using an audio interface that only has WDM or MME drivers DAQmx - Select to setup an NI DAQmx compatible Digital IO device. See NI DAQmx on page 62 for more information. ASIO - If the installed audio interface features ASIO drivers, this can be selected to take advantage of the benefits of ASIO Core Audio - Available only on Mac OS Device Name - The name of the audio interface as it appears in the Windows Multimedia Stack Select Ch (Channel 1..n or L/R of Audio Interface Channel Pair) Click on the Drop Down list to select a channel. Vp (max voltage) - Determined in Hardware Channel Calibration process or entered by user Analog/Digital - Set by user Sampling Rate - Select from list (For devices using WDM drivers, some listed sampling rates may not be compatible with SoundCheck.) Alias Freq - Anti-aliasing filter frequency, automatically determined but can be edited by user Bit Depth - Select from list Latency - Determined in Hardware Channel Calibration process or entered by user Note: As of SoundCheck 14, the Hardware Editor uses only the Table View. The essential hardware settings for all channels of a multichannel Hardware Configuration can be viewed and edited in the table as shown in Figure: 10-5. Latency is defined on the Input channels Figure: 10-5 Hardware Editor 52 Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Waveforms The Hardware & Calibration info of a channel are attached to any waveform that was played or recorded through that channel. This allows it to be analyzed on another computer. Please refer to Calibration Configuration on page 65 for more information. Sort In the table view of the Hardware Editor you can sort the table by Left Clicking on a column header. This simplifies viewing and editing when you have a lot of channels. For example, sort by Channel Name or sort by Input Channel. Right Click Functions Right Click on a line of the table to Add, Delete, Duplicate or Rename hardware channels. Multiple channels can be selected. Click and hold on the shift key to select a range of channels or the control key to select specific channels. Figure: 10-6 Right Click Add Channel - Create a new channel in the drop down list Delete Channel(s) - Remove the selected channel(s) from the list. This will affect any Acquisition Step in the sequence that uses this channel. Duplicate Channel(s) - Creates a duplicate of the selected channel(s) and appends “- Copy” to the name Rename - Change the name of the selected channel Calibrate Using - Select the proper input or output channel to calibrate with. This automatically starts the Audio Interface Calibration sequence. ASIO Control Panel - Click to open the ASIO Control Panel for the selected device (grayed out when no ASIO device is present) Audio Interface Calibration Right click on a channel and select Calibrate Using then select the proper input or output channel. The Audio Interface Calibration Sequence will run automatically on the selected Input/Output channel signal chain. See Figure: 10-7. The Audio Interface Calibration process will instruct you on the required connections and procedure. See Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connections on page 508 when using a balanced audio interface. When finished, the essential hardware values for that Input/Output channel of the audio interface are entered into the appropriate fields of the Hardware Table. Figure: 10-7 Calibrate Using... Important! Only one channel pair, Input to Output, is calibrated at a time. A four channel audio interface will require four different calibration tests, one for each channel. Important! The calibration sequence should not be modified! SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 53 ASIO Right Click on the Channel Name Field and select ASIO Control Panel Audio interfaces with ASIO drivers are supported as of SoundCheck 10. (Previous versions of SoundCheck only support WDM and MME drivers.) ASIO is a driver standard geared towards Pro Audio equipment, which allows for more stable latencies ASIO drivers offer excellent audio interface control and allow for use of a wide range of professional audio multichannel audio interfaces Figure 10-8: Hardware Using ASIO When using ASIO devices, the Hardware Editor in SoundCheck looks similar to MME/WDM audio interfaces. The channel number is selected after selecting the device name. Right click on a Channel Name and select ASIO Control Panel to adjust ASIO settings for that device. ASIO Control Panel ASIO devices have their own control panel. The buffer size of the device, and in some cases USB Streaming Mode, is set here. This is directly related to the latency value in the Hardware Editor in SoundCheck. The example shown is the control panel for an AudioConnect 4x4 audio interface. USB Streaming Mode is set to Safe The Buffer Size is set to 2048 Samples. Other interfaces may require larger or smaller buffer sizes. The buffer size is also dependent on the Sample Rate and the number of channels used simultaneously. Please refer to the instructions for your audio interface. Figure 10-9: ASIO Control Panel Some ASIO control panels also allow you to set the gain settings for the device. These values must be set before calibrating the ASIO audio interface in SoundCheck. Sampling Rate Sampling Rate refers to the audio interface’s sampling rate in samples per second (e.g., 8000, 11025, 22050, 32000, 44100, 48000, 96000, 192000, etc.). Refer to the documentation provided with the audio interface for appropriate sampling rates. SoundCheck will attempt to test the audio interface at different sampling rates and bit depths. If they are supported, SoundCheck will only show those that work. See Figure: 10-5 Hardware Editor on page 52. 54 Note: Audio Interfaces with WDM driver (Windows Driver Model) support all sample rates through “sample rate conversion”. For SoundCheck we recommend that you only use the sample rates supported by the audio interface. If the sample rate between the audio interface and device under test are different, use Frequency Shift and Resample Post Processing steps as indicated in Rules - Resampling and Frequency Shift on page 228. Note: Using a higher sample rate proportionally increases the amount of memory required. Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Alias Freq (Alias free freq limit (Hz)) This shows the limit of the upper frequency range to which the audio interface can measure. This is dependent on the Sample Rate setting and the filter applied by the selected audio interface. Bit Depth Select the bit depth used by the A/D and D/A converters of the audio interface. Typical values are 16 and 24 bits (sometimes 32 bit words are used to convey 24 bits of information as in the Lynx Studio and RME audio interfaces). 24-bit audio will provide the greatest dynamic range (approximately 120 dB). However, when using 24-bit audio, more computer memory is required. If there is insufficient RAM, SoundCheck may slow down significantly, because the computer is using the hard drive as virtual memory. If this occurs, you may need to upgrade the computer’s RAM. Device Selection - Input or Output Select the device to be used for Input or Output from the drop down list. These are stored by device name with the Hardware Configuration. If the device is not available (Hardware removed from PC or sequence imported on another PC without the proper hardware), a warning message will appear. Open the editor to update the Hardware Table or select Ignore. Figure 10-10: Hardware Not Found Input (Vp) and Output (Vp) This defines the maximum peak voltage that the audio interface can handle before overloading, sometimes referred to as full-scale deflection (FSD). All audio interfaces provided by Listen Inc. have predefined Hardware Configurations in SoundCheck, which include the nominal FSD values for the input and output channels for that audio interface. If you have another audio interface, enter the appropriate values when editing your Hardware Configuration. These calibration values can be measured by following the Audio Interface calibration procedure. See Audio Interface Calibration on page 53. Latency This is the time delay or latency between input and output hardware channels when operating in full-duplex mode (record and play simultaneously). This value is expressed in seconds and in samples. The latency expressed in seconds is calculated from the integer number of samples. SoundCheck uses samples in measurements, since there are no rounding errors. (For audio interfaces that Listen provides, this value will be known.) Most audio interfaces cannot record and play simultaneously. There is almost always a delay between the two and the delay should not vary from measurement to measurement. The audio interfaces that Listen provides are certified to have high performance in making audio-related measurements. If you are using an audio interface that Listen, Inc has not certified, the measurement performance of SoundCheck may be severely compromised! Important! If the latency is not consistent, (as with WDM audio interface drivers), Autodelay must be enabled in the Analysis Steps of all sequences or measurements will NOT be reliable. See Delay on page 177. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 55 A/D - Analog/Digital Selection When set to Analog, the Max Input and Output values of the audio interface can be set. (Values determined by the Audio Interface Calibration Sequence.) When set to Digital the Input/Output values change to 100% FSD (Full Scale Deflection) of the audio device selected. The Vp value should be set to 1. Listen Hardware Page Listen Hardware is automatically added to this page when it is detected by SoundCheck. Once added, items will remain on the page until manually removed. Disconnected items are noted as “Disconnected” in the Status column. The fields below apply to all Listen Hardware devices. Figure 10-11: Listen Hardware Device ID Shows the device identification for all devices that have been connected to the SoundCheck system. Device IDs can be changed to make it easier to keep track of multiple devices of the same Device Name. Rename - The device name default can be changed by right clicking on the device line Delete Device - Right click on the device line to remove a device from the table Device Name Shows the product name of the device Serial Number Shows the Serial number of the connected device Startup Default Right click on the device line to set the initial settings that the Listen hardware device will adopt when SoundCheck opens Status Indicates if the device is connected and recognized by SoundCheck or disconnected Firmware Version Shows the firmware of the connected device 56 Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual AudioConnectTM Right-click on the AudioConnect line and select Assign Startup Default. The controls in Figure 10-12 are the same as the AudioConnect Message Step. The AudioConnect audio interface can be controlled through a SoundCheck Message Step. This allows you to change the input and output configuration of the device during the operation of a SoundCheck sequence. For details on step settings see AudioConnect Message on page 239. Note: Automatic Startup Configuration cannot be used if changing the input routing between Mic and Line during the run of a sequence. If you wish to switch inputs using Message Steps in a SoundCheck sequence you should disable Automatic Startup Configuration on the Audio Page and use separate channels for Inputs 1/2 and Mic Input 1/2. This limitation does not apply to Gain changes. Figure 10-12: AudioConnect Startup Default AmpConnect ISCTM In order to control AmpConnect ISC from a SoundCheck sequence, it must be Enabled in the Hardware Editor. Refer to the AmpConnect ISC Manual for more detailed information. Important! After installing SC 14, prior versions of SoundCheck will not have control over the device. Additionally, the serial number of the AmpConnect ISC audio interface will not be read properly which changes the name of the device in the Hardware Editor. For details on step settings see AmpConnect Message on page 238. Figure 10-13: AmpConnect Startup Default SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 57 SoundConnect 2TM SoundConnect 2 is a compact and rugged USB controlled microphone power supply and conditioning amplifier. It can be controlled through a SoundCheck Message Step. This allows you to change the input signal routing, Gain and High/Low Pass filters during the operation of a SoundCheck sequence. Right-click on the SoundConnect 2 line and select Assign Startup Default. The controls in Figure 10-14 are the same as the SoundConnect 2 Message Step. For details on step settings see SoundConnect 2 Message on page 239. Figure 10-14: SoundConnect 2 Startup Default DC ConnectTM The Listen DC Connect is a USB-controlled DC power supply and measuring amplifier used for measuring the DC voltage and current consumption on DC-powered audio devices. The Listen Hardware table shows any DC Connect device that has been setup in the Hardware Editor. DC Connect can be controlled in SoundCheck by using Message Steps as well as the Stimulus Editor and Acquisition Editor. Important! As of SoundCheck 13, after installing SoundCheck you cannot use DC Connect with versions prior to SoundCheck 13, unless you manually switch the drivers in Windows Device Manger. Download the latest DC Connect manual from the Listen website for a step by step procedure. Figure 10-15: DC Connect Startup Default The DC Connect startup default editor is shown in Figure 10-15. This allows you to set DC Connect to 0 VDC output when SoundCheck is launched, along with other device settings. For details on step settings see DC Connect Message on page 240. 58 Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual BTC-4148 by Portland Tool & Die This is a complete interface for measuring and characterizing Bluetooth audio devices including handsets, headsets, speakers, car kits and other devices with Bluetooth audio input or output. It can be controlled through a SoundCheck Message Step. This allows you to change the pairing of devices and the profiles used when testing, during the operation of a SoundCheck sequence. In the Listen Hardware Table, Right-click on the BTC-4148 line and select Assign Startup Default. The controls in Figure 10-16 are the same as the BTC-4148 Message Step. A2DP Profile - Select SBC or AptX HFP Profile - Select CVSD or mSBC Audio Source - Only available in Startup Default Select USB or SPDIF Role - Only available in Startup Default Source - Use when connecting to transducer Sink - Use when connecting to a phone or laptop Figure 10-16: BTC-4148 Startup Default For details on step settings see BTC-4148 Message on page 240. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 59 External Hardware Page Interface Table Select which Computer Interface type is being used to control external devices, such as a multiplexer or turntable. To send or receive IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS232 commands, use the Message Editor. Interface # Each external interface is assigned an Interface Number which is used to identify the device in Messages Steps used in SoundCheck sequences. Right Click on the Interface Number line and select Add Interface. Figure 10-17: External Interface Setup This can be a mixture of IEEE-488, RS-232, Serial Footswitches or Serial Buzzers. See Serial Port Control on page 511 for footswitch and buzzer wiring. Note: The IEEE interface card must have a LabVIEW driver. Important! The Interface Number for external devices must be the same across multiple SoundCheck systems that share a common Message Step in a sequence. Message Steps use these device numbers to identify the device used in the step. See External Interface on page 246. Any change in the order of devices in the Hardware Editor will cause communication errors with the external devices. See Hardware Editor Rules For Production Lines on page 48. Type Type of communication interface, such as IEEE-488, RS232, Footswitch, or Buzzer. If the Footswitch is installed and configured in the Hardware Configuration, it can control the Start button of SoundCheck and the Continue button on the Main Screen. A second Footswitch can control the Redo and Stop button. COM Port Communication port number as defined by the Windows System Properties Device Manager. Baud rate Transfer rate speed of the communication port (in bits per second). Data bits Specify the data bits for this port. Consult your hardware manufacturer for more information. Parity Specify the parity for this port if your serial device requires this setting. 60 Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stop bits Specify the stop bits for this port if your serial device requires this setting. Flow control Specify the flow control for this port if your serial device requires this setting. Important! SoundCheck cannot access a Com Port that is also be being referenced by Windows or another app. Make sure that no other software applications are using the Com Port that is used in the Hardware Configuration. NI DAQ Digital I/O Table Configure the Digital Input and Output card being used to control external devices, such as relays. To send and receive digital I/O commands (for example for controlling relays), use the Message Editor. These settings will be reflected in the Message Editor when programming digital I/O commands. Right click on a line to Add, Delete or Duplicate. Dev ID Device identification number for digital I/O board. To determine the ID number in Windows, look at the System Device Manager to locate your board. Figure 10-18: External For DAQmx devices, look in the Ni MAX software application to determine device info. Note that new DAQmx devices require that all ports are setup and defined in External Hardware page. Even though you may only be using two ports of a four port device, you must define all ports. No. of Ports Number of Input/Output Ports available on the digital I/O board. Port No. Port currently being configured. In Figure 10-18, Port 1 is an input port. To configure whether a particular port is an Input or Output, select the Port No. and then click either Input or Output in the I/O column. Note: On some devices the function of ports may be fixed: e.g., Ports 1, 2 are input and 3, 4 are output. Port Width National Instrument devices that use the DAQmx driver must be setup with the exact number of bits specified for a port. I/O - Input/Output You must indicate the Port direction, for each port enabled, i.e.: Port 1 = Input, Port 2 = Output, Port 3 = Output SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 61 NI DAQmx This sets the properties of the NI 4461 Analog Data Acquisition Card. (optional hardware for testing electronics devices such as audio interfaces, amplifiers, preamps, etc.) Notes: The NI 4461 card requires the installation of NI-DAQmx. Use the latest approved DAQmx version from the SoundCheck installation DVD. See “Hardware Compatibility List” on page 483. DaqMX devices cannot be used simultaneously with ASIO audio interfaces. As of SoundCheck 11.0, the RTA virtual instrument is compatible with NI DAQmx devices. Also note that the Multimeter and Scope/FFT cannot be used simultaneously with NI DAQmx devices. Important: Output and input sample rates must match in the hardware editor. The NI 4461 clock defaults to the output sample rate. When the NI-Daq Acquisition device is selected the Hardware Editor has the following constraints: Digital In and Out are not available. Only Analog is available. Input and Output Vp values are in Volts and relate to the Sensitivity of the channel. See “Input and Output Vp” on page 63. Bit Depth is fixed at 24 Bit Driver: Select NI DAQmx Figure 10-19: NI 4461 Device: Select proper device ID Select Ch: Select Channels according to Device ID, Select ai0 (Input 1) or ai1 (Input 2) Vp: Set the Vp value for desired sensitivity (See “Input and Output Vp” on page 63.) Sample Rate: Set according to chart (See “Sample Rate / Latency” on page 63.) Latency: Set according to chart (See “Sample Rate / Latency” on page 63.) Term Config: Select Default, RSE, NRSE, Differential or Pseudo-Differential Coupling: Select AC, DC or GND IEPE: Enable to turn on ICP power for the NI 4461 Inputs. See Figure 10-19. The IEPE check box on the Audio Input tab is used to turn on ICP power for the inputs of the NI 4461. This will power the SCM microphone as well as any ICP powered transducer (4 mA current standard). 62 Hardware Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Input and Output Vp settings Input Range Vp (Hardware Config Setting)1 0.316 1.00 3.16 10.0 31.6 42.4 Gain (dB) 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 1 Each input channel gain is independently set in the Hardware Config. Output Range Attenuation (dB) 0 -20 -40 2 Each Vp (Hardware Config Setting)2 10.00 1.0 0.1 output channel attenuation is independently set in the Hardware Config. Figure 10-20: Input and Output Vp Latency and Sample Rate The Latency of the 4461 will change as the sample rate of the Hardware Configuration changes. The following chart shows recommended Latency values for the sample rates supported in SoundCheck. Sample Rate (Hz) 200k 192,000 176,400 96,000 88,200 48,000 44,100 32,000 16,000 8,000 Latency (Samples) 100 100 100 114 114 109 109 109 90 80 Figure 10-21: Sample Rate / Latency SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 63 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hardware Configuration 64 Calibration Configuration The accuracy of your SoundCheck system depends upon accurate calibration of your input and output devices. Nominal calibration values for many devices typically used are included with SoundCheck. For more accurate measurements, calibration of individual signal paths should be performed for each device. Frequency of calibration of these devices depends upon the stability of the device. Important! As of SoundCheck 11, Calibration is a “System Level” configuration. It is unique to a specific SoundCheck system and is used by all sequences. Individual Calibration Steps are no longer used. Settings from these steps can be imported in the Calibration Configuration Editor. See Input Tab on page 69. The Calibration Editor (Ctrl+Shift+C) is used to calibrate the complete SoundCheck® test setup including signal conditioning (e.g., amps and preamps) and transducers (e.g., microphones and sound sources). This allows absolute measurements of acoustic, electroacoustic, electrical, and electronic devices. This step calibrates the entire system. See Figure 11-12 for a system diagram. The System Calibration Configuration input/output sensitivities and units are also used for calibrating the virtual instruments accessed in SoundCheck’s Instruments drop down menu. System.Cal This is the database for all signal path setups and calibration data for the system. Figure 11-1 shows the table view of the Calibration Configuration supplied with SoundCheck. Channel setups can be imported from previous SoundCheck sequences Obsolete channels can be deleted. (Note that this can effect the curves used by this and other sequences.) Best Naming practices should be followed when creating new calibration items. See Naming - Best Practices on page 73. Each line defines the following for use in a sequence or virtual instrument: Input or Output path Calibration data file Physical connection to hardware Tab View shows information for selected Input/Output channels. Table View shows all input and output channels. Figure 11-1: System Calibration Table For more information on calibration procedures and specifics, please refer to Calibrating SoundCheck on page 76. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 65 Features As of SoundCheck 15, accelerometer and other vibration transducer calibration and related force units (dB re 1 m/s2, dB re 1 N and dB re 1 g) are supported. See Accelerometer Calibration Procedure on Page 82. Auto Read This allows you to change the preamp gain of a Listen Hardware device to optimize the dynamic range of the system without needing to re-calibrate the microphone. See Auto Read on Page 70. Accounts for all of the equipment in the measured chain: Amplifiers Measurement Microphones Sound Sources Preamplifiers Calibration information for each channel includes: Magnitude and phase response Sensitivity dB reference units Serves as a database of stored devices Assigns a set of calibration data to a physical Hardware Input/Output channel Calibration information can be shown in Table View making it easier to review multiple devices Custom curves are easily imported A single calibrated device can be associated with any number of hardware channels Calibration History allows you to view past calibration data for a device Sort In the table view of the Calibration Editor you can sort the table by Left Clicking on a column header. This simplifies viewing and editing when you have a lot of channels. For example, sort by Signal Path or sort by HW Channel. 66 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Basics System Calibration Structure Input and Output Signal Paths are defined in the Calibration Editor. A Signal Path links a Calibrated Device (mic, amp, etc.) to a physical Hardware Channel (audio interface in/out). The following diagram shows the basic structure of a channel in System Calibration. System Calibration Layout Input Channels 1. Input Signal Path 2. Calibrated Device 3. Hardware Channel Name of Channel Unique DAT file with correction data for a specific input device Input channel of sound card (Named in Hardware Step) 1. Output Signal Path 2. Calibrated Device 3. Hardware Channel 4. Input Signal Path Name of Channel Unique DAT file with correction data for a specific output device Output channel of sound card (Named in Hardware Step) Input Signal Path used for calibration (Named in Calibration Step) Output Channels The next diagram shows how this structure would be used for specific devices. System Calibration Example Input Channels Signal Path Calibrated Device Hardware Channel Reference Mic SCM 2 Mic.dat Input 1 Direct In 2 Unity Cal (Read Only).dat Input 2 Signal Path Calibrated Device Hardware Channel Input Signal Path Amp Ch 1 Crown Amp- L.dat Output 1 Direct In 1 Amp Ch 2 Crown Amp- R.dat Output 2 Direct In 2 Output Channels This structure allows you to have one calibrated device associated with many hardware channels, or have many calibrated devices associated with one hardware channel. The Input and Output Tabs divide the calibration settings for the Signal Paths into two groups. Both groups can have multiple Input or Output Signal Paths. Direct In 1 and 2, and Direct Out 1 and 2 are projected paths that cannot be removed Each Signal Path is linked to a set of calibration data (calibrated device) as well as a physical hardware channel. This information is also available in the Table View. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 67 SoundCheck Signal Flow The diagram in Figure 11-2 shows the successive transfer functions that occur in the signal chain, from the output of SoundCheck back to the input. S EQ V0 H0 X Output Transducer G DUT Y H1 V1 C0 C1 R Input Transducer Figure 11-2: Signal Flow 1. S: Stimulus created in Stimulus Step 2. EQ: Equalization is applied to the stimulus to correct for the response of the output transducer (e.g., Mouth) [NAME eq-out.dat, NAME eq-out.dat] 3. V0: Electrical stimulus played out the audio interface 4. X: Physical input to the DUT (G) 5. Y: Physical output from the DUT (G) 6. V1: Electrical response acquired by the audio interface 7. C0: Correction out for the output transducer [NAME corr-out.dat, NAME corr-out.dat] (applied after analysis) 8. C1: Correction in for the input transducer (e.g., Microphone) [NAME corr-in.dat, NAME corr-in.dat] (applied after analysis) 9. R: Response calculated with output and input transducers compensated The EQ correction curve is used to compensate for the response of the output transducer. This is applied to the stimulus before it is played out of the audio interface. C0 is used to fine-tune the compensation for the output transducer, after the measurement has been made. The net result of this two part compensation is: EQ.H0.C0 = 1 C1 is used to compensate for the input transducer: H1.C1 = 1 This way, R is the response of the DUT to the stimulus S R= S. EQ. H0.G.H1.C0.C1 = G. S All of the Correction Curves can be viewed in the Memory List by selecting an XY Display from the Display drop down list. The following curves will be present for both Input and Output Signal Paths: Inputs corr-in.dat sens-in.dat gain-in.dat Outputs 68 corr-out.dat eq-out.dat sens-out.dat Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Input Tab Input Signal Paths, as shown in Figure 11-3, are made up of the following: The Calibrated Input Device The sensitivity of that specific device and its units The Gain of the specified Listen Hardware device See Input Hardware Channel on Page 70 for more information. The type of calibration that is used for the device The hardware channel that it is connected to The Signal Path names are used in any editor where “Use Signal Path Name“ can be selected, e.g., in the Acquisition step, when “Use Signal Path Name“ is selected, the Input name will be: “Recorded Time Waveform [Input Signal Path Name]“. Figure 11-3: Input Channel Definition Important! Changing an Input Signal Path name in the System Calibration Configuration will change the channel name reference throughout the sequence and any sequence that uses that Channel Name, if “Use Signal Path Name“, is used in an Analysis Step. Remember that as curve names change, subsequent steps in the sequence will need to be redirected to the new names in the Memory List. See “Naming - Best Practices” on page 73.. Calibrated Device - The transducer or input device used for acquiring signal. This may be a Microphone, Direct audio interface input, USB or Bluetooth device, etc. The Dat file associated with this device is where the correction curves for that device are stored. The Dat file is created when a new Calibrated Device is added to the list. Sensitivity and Gain Calibration input sensitivity has now been divided into two parts: sensitivity of the transducer and preamplifier gain. These values show up in the Memory List following the naming of the Calibrated Input Device, e.g.: SCM 3 Mic sens-in (Sensitivity)S SCM 3 Mic gain-in (Preamp Gain) Sensitivity - Shows the measured sensitivity that is acquired through the Calibrate Device process. This value can also be manually entered. Gain - The total gain in dB of the preamplifier the transducer is connected to. This value can be entered manually or automatically read from Listen hardware devices. Units - Input physical units and the dB reference are entered by clicking on Units. Refer to Common Units for Inputs and Outputs on Page 74. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 69 Auto Read When enabled, this option automatically reads and updates the gain from a single channel of USB-connected Listen Hardware. This allows the preamp gain to be changed manually or programmatically in a sequence. This can be used to optimize dynamic range without needing to re-calibrate the input path. Device - After enabling Auto Read select a Listen Hardware device from the dropdown menu Channel - Select the appropriate preamplifier channel. The gain value will automatically be read and populated in the editor. Input Hardware Channel Allows you to select which channel of the audio interface the Calibrated Device is connected to. In this case the SCM 3 Mic is connected to Input 1 of the AudioConnect audio interface. Copy from Memory List Allows you to select a curve from the Memory List to be used as a Correction or Equalization curve The default Reference Frequency is 1 kHz as shown in Figure 11-4. Importing Correction Curves From Other Manufacturers If an imported curve does not have a 0dB value at 1 kHz you must change the calibration Reference Frequency in the editor to a point on the correction curve that is at 0dB. This may also have to be done when importing Diffuse Field or other such correction curves without data at 1 kHz. Calibration Sequence Select the sequence that runs when the Calibrate button is selected Figure 11-4: Copy From Memory List Calibrate Device Run the selected calibration sequence Note: Calibration Sequences are never run on their own. They are always run from the Calibration Configuration Editor. Open Table Opens the Calibration Editor Table View. See Table View on Page 72 for more information 70 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Import Allows you to import settings from SoundCheck sequences from previous versions or other systems. This imports settings for both Input and Output tabs. Save Stores calibration changes to hard disk Cancel Discard all changes made to the Calibration Configuration Copy From Memory List - Input This allows you to overwrite the Destination correction file with a curve from the Memory List. The curve may need to be Inverted if it is the fundamental response curve as opposed to a Reciprocal Curve. See Figure 11-6: SCM 3 Correction Curve. Note: The EQ & correction curves will be normalized to 0dB at the frequency specified in the Sensitivity field [Sens(Hz)]. Units are automatically set to + dB re 1 so that pure gain is applied. Figure 11-5: Copy From Memory List - The curve in the example is from the DAT file that comes with an SCM 3 microphone. This is a response curve of the SCM 3 and is normalized to 0dB at 1 kHz. In this case, to create a reciprocal curve, Invert Curve must be checked. Click Apply to overwrite the Destination Curve with the Source Curve selected. Click OK to leave the selection window and click OK to close the editor. Save the sequence to save the change to disk. Figure 11-6: SCM 3 Correction Curve Subsequent measurements will apply this new correction curve to the input response, provided that “Apply Correction In“ is checked in the Analysis Step. See Apply Correction on Page 140 for more information. Copy From Memory List - Output Similarly, curves can be copied in the Output Tab as well. These can be used as correction curves or as equalization curves. For more information see Equalization and Correction Curve on Page 77. Figure 11-7: Copy From Memory List - Output SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 71 Output Tab Output Signal Paths are made up of the following: The Calibrated Output Device The sensitivity of that specific device and its units The hardware channel that it is connected to The type of calibration that is used for the device The Calibration Sequence selected is the sequence that runs when the Calibrate button is selected. The functions in the Output Tab are identical to those in the Input Tab with one addition: Input Signal Path - Must be selected so that the system knows where the Output Device is connected to The functions of Open Table, Import, Save and Cancel are the same as the Input Tab. See Input Tab on Page 69 for more information. Figure 11-8: Output Channel Definition Table View Figure 11-9: Table View Click on Table View at the bottom of the editor to open the complete list of Signal Paths. The “Last Cal Date“ field cannot be edited. This updates when a new calibration is run on a Signal Path. Similarly the “Sens Unit” field can only be changed by selecting a new setting under “Physical Unit”. 72 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The following fields can be edited directly: Signal Path Sens Sens (dB) Sens (Hz) dB Ref The following fields have drop down selection menus: Calibrated Device Phys Unit - Button opens Units Setup menu HW Channel Calibration Sequence Input Channel (Output Channels Only) Calibrate (Button) Figure 11-10: Table Drop Down Example Click Calibrate to run the selected calibration sequence. See Figure 11-10. Remember that the Input Signal Path must be selected prior to running the output calibration. Note: All calibration procedures are specialized sequences located in the folder C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\Calibration. You can create your own calibration sequences as well. If you save the new calibration sequence in the calibration input or output sub-folders, it will appear in the respective drop down list in the Calibration Editor. See Reference Codec & dBm0 on Page 90 for more information. Naming - Best Practices Signal Path - This name is used in the sequence (i.e.; Analysis Step - The Channel name can be appended to the output curve name). A generic name should be used that indicates the type of device being used. Since the name is used in the sequence, it is hard to change once the sequence is created. Changing this name could effect how subsequent steps in the sequence operate. Calibrated Device - Specific name of the device being used (i.e.; type of microphone). It is also the name of the .DAT file for the specific calibration data. This can be changed easily since the name is not used in sequence steps. This allows you to have several different possible devices to use under the generic Signal Path name. HW Channel - This is the name of the physical channel of the audio interface. In this example, the Ref Mic is an SCM 3 which is connected to Input 1 of the audio interface. (This is named in the System Hardware Configuration, e.g., Input 1). Figure 11-11: Naming Convention SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 73 Right Click Function Right Click on the table to open the Channel Modification window. With this, you can Add, Delete Signal Paths to the table as well as Copy a channel to a new row of the table. Defining the Units Input Physical unit is defined at this point Output Physical unit is defined at this point. This is the signal from the DUT. This is the signal to the DUT. Figure 11-12: Input and Output Calibration of a Measurement System The Figure 11-12 shows the Input and Output Calibration of a Measurement System and Definition of the Input and the Output Terminals of the DUT. The Physical Units are specifically related to each Calibrated Device in the Calibration Editor. They are dependent on the type of device that is used in the input or output of the calibration. Input: Signal from DUT Output: Signal to DUT DUT Type Unit Output Signal Conditioning Response Unit Examples Unit Input Signal Conditioning Loudspeaker Pa Microphone V Amplifier Pa/V Microphone V Microphone (Itself) Pa Mouth or Anechoic Chamber V/Pa Amplifier, analog electronics V Direct V Amplifier (no longer Direct In) V/V Motor, Fan, Bearings, etc. G Accelerometer V DUT Itself or Shaker G/V Haptic Sensor N Force Transducer V DUT Itself V/N Hearing Aid Pa Microphone (in coupler) Pa Anechoic Chamber Pa/Pa Telephone Pa Microphone (in coupler) Pa Mouth Pa/Pa Figure 11-13: Common Units for Inputs and Outputs 74 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The Calibration Sequence selected determines what type of calibration sequence is performed after selecting Calibrate. The ratio of the audio interface signal to the Device Under Test Unit is automatically determined by SoundCheck. You are required to determine the units of the DUT in the Calibration. SoundCheck uses the physical units when displaying measurement data. Define Linear and Logarithmic Units Linear units are absolute (e.g., Voltage, Watt, Pascal, G). Logarithmic units are relative to a reference level (e.g., dB re 20µPa). For example: dBSPL = 20 log dBV = 20 log ? Pa 20 µPa ?V 1V Convert Linear to Logarithmic Units To convert linear units to logarithmic units, the following examples are useful references: 0 dBV = 20 log 1V 1V 94 dBSPL = 20 log SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 1 Pa 20 µPa 75 Calibrating SoundCheck Important! Do not open the Calibration Sequences found in the Calibration folder. These sequences are accessed from the Calibration Editor when performing a calibration. The calibration of SoundCheck enables response measurements to be performed directly in terms of the input and output terminals of the Device Under Test (DUT). The Calibrate Device function in the System Calibration Configuration measures the sensitivity or gain of any external device such as a microphone or amplifier in the measurement chain. Once this is done, the values and units in the Calibration Setup menu correspond to the signal level at the DUT and not at the connectors of the audio interface in the computer. Default calibration sequences are included with SoundCheck. You can also create custom calibration sequences. Please refer to Reference Codec & dBm0 on Page 90 for more information. Sensitivity is a relative measurement of output to input. By definition, an electroacoustic transducer converts either voltage into acoustical output (e.g., loudspeaker); acoustical input into an electrical voltage (e.g., microphone); or both, an acoustical input into electrical voltage and back again to an acoustical output (e.g., hearing aid). As another example, analog electronics, which usually amplify, attenuate, or shape the electrical signal (e.g., Preamplifiers, Amplifiers or Signal Processors). Calibrating the Input establishes the correlation between the input voltage to the audio interface and the measured units. Input sensitivity is represented as Volts per measured unit (e.g., V/Pa). Calibrating the Output establishes the correlation between the output voltage of the audio interface and the measured units. Output sensitivity is represented as measured units per Volt (e.g., Pa/V). Note: The units selected for calibration can be redefined when displaying data and results. Select units for displaying data in the Analysis Editor (See Units on Page 176). In addition, the Device (e.g., microphone or amp) Sensitivity is measured when Calibrate Device is clicked. Note: We recommend that you Not use periods or commas in step names. This is known to cause a problem with System Calibration Configuration not saving the calibration information when the configuration is saved. Note: Upon completing a calibration sequence, the newly acquired date is stored to the calibrated device file. Any Signal Paths that are set to this calibrated device will use the updated data. Calibration History This feature allows you to view past calibration data for a device. This data can be used to identify trends such as “changing sensitivity”. The history is stored in the .DAT file for the calibrated device. Each time you recalibrate and save the System Calibration Configuration, a new entry is created in the calibration history. Theses entries are tracked by calibration date (e.g., SCM 2 Mic corr-in 9/17/2008 10:16 AM). The history can be viewed by opening the Memory List, selecting File and then Open Data. Browse to the calibrated device .DAT file (e.g., SCM 2 Mic.dat), select and click OK. The calibration history is then loaded into the Memory List. 76 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Digital signals When an audio interface channel is set to digital in the Hardware Editor, the Units for that channel in the Calibration Editor will change such that V (Volts) is replaced by FS (Full Scale). This is because the input/ output values of the audio interface are expressed relative to 100% Full Scale Deflection instead of Volts. The choice of physical unit remains the same. Sensitivities are expressed in Unit/FS for output or FS/Unit for inputs. The input and output of the audio interface are normalized to 100% FS. Any digital signal cannot exceed +1/-1 FS, where 1 represents the maximum number of bits selected in the System Hardware Configuration. Please refer to Reference Codec & dBm0 on Page 90 for more information. Equalization and Correction Curve Correction vs Equalization can be a little tricky to understand at first. Let's start with the input side. The input correction will typically be a correction curve for a reference microphone. This would be utilized when performing loudspeaker measurements or when that reference mic is being used to calibrate a speaker for microphone measurements. All output calibrated devices have two curves, the correction and the EQ. The EQ is only used in cases where you want to change the stimulus before it gets played, e.g.: equalizing a loudspeaker. EQ (if selected in stimulus) will modify the voltage that gets sent out of the audio interface on a per frequency basis in accordance with the curve. If calibrated correctly, this results in a flat acoustical output from the speaker. The output correction curve is optionally applied in the analysis step as a sort of post processing operation. This is a mathematical correction that is performed after the signal has already been played and acquired. If you have equalized a speaker you will find that the correction is very small. It is just the residual part of the speaker response that the calibration sequence could not perfectly flatten. To view this look in your memory list and graph the eq-out and corr-out curves for a given calibrated device. The time when the output correction is more important is in loudspeaker testing. In this case we are calibrating an amplifier. Because the amplifier has a flat magnitude response there is no need to use equalization. However, we do want to account for the amp's phase response, which we do by generating the correction. Input Signal Path The System Calibration Configuration loads a complete set of EQ and correction curves into memory from the calibration folders. When a Calibration Sequence is run, from the System Calibration Configuration, these curves are updated. These curves are used to correct for the response of devices in the input or output signal chain. The correction curves can be displayed since they are selectable items in the Memory List. An example of this is to correct the measured signal for the measurement microphone’s frequency and phase response (typically on its calibration chart) or for telephone measurements, where the DRP to ERP correction curve is needed to compensate for the microphone’s position in the artificial ear. The correction file is named according to the Calibrated Device: <Calibrated Device Name> corr-in.dat for Input Signal Path correction See Copy From Memory List - Input on Page 71 for more information. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 77 Output Signal Path An equalization curve will equalize the stimulus when the EQ check box is selected in the Stimulus Editor or Signal Generator. (See Stimulus Editor on Page 97) The output correction curve is applied when it is selected in the Analysis Editor. The Output Signal Path correction and equalization files are named according to the Calibrated Device: <Calibrated Device Name> corr-out.dat for Output Signal Path correction <Calibrated Device Name> eq-out.dat for Output Signal Path equalization See Copy From Memory List - Output on Page 71 for more information. The files are updated when an Output calibration is run and the step is saved. If you Import a frequency response curve to use for Correction or Equalization you have to “Invert“ it by selecting Invert Curve as shown in Figure 11-14. If the curve is the result of a process that creates a reciprocal of the response, it will not need to be inverted. Note: EQ out correction curves are populated with data when the Speaker Equalization or Simulated Free Field calibration sequences are selected in the output calibration process. Important! Correction Curve Units should be set to + dB re 1 so that pure gain is applied. Figure 11-14: Copy From Memory List - Correction Curve SI units are used throughout SoundCheck 16.0. For example, to display decibel values referenced to 20 microPascals, the dB ref value would be twenty (20) with a “u“ added at the end and the unit would be Pa resulting in 20 µPa. See SI Units on Page 43 for more information. For output calibration, the measured response will automatically be stored and used to correct any future measurements. (e.g., if the amplifier’s magnitude and phase responses are not perfectly flat, the system will correct the measured response as if it were perfectly flat.) 78 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Input Calibration Direct Calibration Sequence Direct refers to the input of the audio interface. Direct Calibration should be used when there is no signal conditioning between the device under test (DUT) and the audio interface. For example, when measuring electronics such as amplifiers, the direct input sensitivity should be set to 1 V/V or 0 dBV. Note: Direct Calibration cannot be done on the default input channels Direct In 1 and 2, which are protected. Create a new Direct In channel that uses a new Unity Gain Calibrated Input Device as shown in Figure 11-15. Clicking Calibrate Device will bring up a Multimeter virtual instrument. Check the input calibration of the test system by applying a known signal source, e.g., 1 VRMS at 1 kHz from an external signal generator, into the audio interface. You should read the same level, e.g., 1 volt, on the SoundCheck Multimeter virtual instrument. Note: Figure 11-15: Direct In Calibration Please be aware that the input impedance of the audio interface and the output impedance of the signal generator can affect the reading. Attenuator Calibration Sequence The Attenuator setting should be used when there is an attenuator or pre-amplifier between the DUT and the input of an audio interface. For example, this would be used to optimize the signal-to-noise ratio of a measurement when using a measuring amplifier with gain and/or attenuation, such as the Listen SoundConnect™ microphone power supply. This allows for a wider dynamic range of test levels and a better match to the input range of the audio interface. Clicking Calibrate will open the manually-controlled Signal Generator and Multimeter instruments. Use these virtual instruments to measure the input gain or attenuation of your measuring amplifier. Microphone Calibration Sequence Use the Microphone setting when measuring the sound pressure level from the DUT (e.g., earphone or mouth simulator) with a measurement microphone, e.g., SCM 3 microphone. Enter the correct sensitivity from the calibration chart or click Calibrate to measure its sensitivity with an acoustic calibrator. This is the preferred method since it takes into account the entire Input Signal Path including signal conditioning from the microphone power supply. Accelerometer Calibration Sequence Used when making measurements with an accelerometer or other vibration transducer, e.g.: B&K 4533-B, where force units are used. dB re 1 m/s2, dB re 1 N and dB re 1 g are currently supported. As with Microphone Calibration above, the sensitivity can be entered manually or click Calibrate to measure its sensitivity with an accelerometer calibrator such as the B&K 4294. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 79 Microphone Calibration Procedure This procedure will allow you to check your measured microphone’s sensitivity against the microphone manufacturer’s specifications. 1. Enter the gain or attenuation in dB that corresponds to the settings on your microphone power supply or measuring amplifier in the Gain field. This gain will be used in the Gain field of the Transducer Calibration window. If you are using Listen Hardware you can select Auto Read to automatically get the gain for the selected channel from the device. Using Auto Read in Calibration allows you to change the gain of the input without having to re-calibrate the mic. Current supported hardware includes AudioConnect and SoundConnect 2. Figure 11-16 shows AudioConnect is set to 20 dB of gain on Channel 1. This gain is automatically updated in the Transducer Calibration window. Figure 11-16: Microphone Calibration If you are using a Brüel & Kjær Nexus, please see Calibrating using a Brüel & Kjær Nexus on page 81. 2. Open the Calibration Editor and select the Input tab. The Calibration Sequence should be set to Microphone. 3. Click Calibrate 4. Select your calibrator model # from the drop down menu or select Other Calibrator and enter the acoustic calibrator’s reference level and frequency. The microphone calibrator's reference level should be indicated in its specifications as a given dB SPL value (relative to 20µPa) at a reference frequency. e.g., for the Brüel & Kjær Type 4231 Acoustic Calibrator: Sound Pressure Level: 94.00 dB ± 0.20 dB Frequency: 1000 Hz ± 0.1% (When calibrating an artificial ear mic, you may need to select “B&K 4231 and UA1546”.) 5. Select your measurement microphone model number from the drop down menu. If your microphone is not listed in the drop down menu, choose Add New Mic. 6. Place your acoustic calibrator on your reference microphone and click Calibrate to measure its sensitivity. 80 The measured sensitivity of your reference microphone is displayed under Measured Sensitivity in mV/Pa. If the measured sensitivity is outside the manufacturer’s specifications, a flashing FAILED message will appear. Check first to see if your connections are correct or if the calibrator is turned on before assuming something is wrong with the microphone. The FAILED message can also appear if the Calibrator’s frequency is not correct. If a Reference Frequency of 1000 Hz is entered, but the Calibrator’s actual frequency is 1008 Hz, the Calibration Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual may Fail. To verify the Calibrator’s frequency, use the Spectrum Analyzer under the Instruments menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. The meter on the right side indicates the corresponding dB level relative to 1 Volt per Pascal. If it varies by a few tenths of a dB from your last calibration measurement, do not be alarmed, this is normal. If it varies by more than 1 dB or failed the sensitivity test, you may want to have your microphone checked by a qualified calibration lab. Add New Mic This allows you to enter a different microphone into the list. The sensitivity limits can be entered for each new mic so that calibrations are made according to the microphone’s specifications. The check box for 1/2” Free Field Microphone should be checked only when using this type of microphone The calibration level is set to 93.85 dB SPL @ 1 kHz when measured in a pressure field, (such as a B&K 4231 Acoustical Calibrator). Figure 11-17: Add New Mic Calibrating using a Brüel & Kjær Nexus Method 1: Nexus Unity Gain Set the Microphone Input Sensitivity of the Nexus to 100 mV/Pa (or other appropriate input value) Set the Nexus Output to the same level: 100 mV/Pa As long as the input and output levels of Nexus are the same, the Gain value for the SoundCheck Microphone Calibration Editor is 0 dB Changes in the Nexus output setting can be easily converted to Gain in dB. A change of a factor 10 in the Nexus output is equivalent to an increase of 20 dB, e.g.: 100 mV/Pa to 1 V/Pa = 20 dB of gain. Method 2 The Brüel & Kjær Nexus Type 2690 is designed to provide an output voltage regulated in 10 dB steps (e.g., 100 mV/unit, 316 mV/unit, etc.). To ensure proper calibration using SoundCheck, you must do the following to enter the proper Gain field value: 1. Enter the transducer sensitivity in Nexus per the Brüel & Kjær instructions. 2. Choose the Nexus output level you want (e.g., 1.00 volt per Pascal). NexusOutputVoltage − Gain = 20 Log 3. Enter the Gain value in SoundCheck using the following TransducerSensitivity equation: Example: A B&K microphone is used with a sensitivity of 50 mV/Pa and the Nexus is set to an output of 1.00 V/Pa. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 1.00V − Gain = 20 Log 0.050V 81 Accelerometer Calibration Procedure This procedure will allow you to check your measured accelerometer’s sensitivity against the accelerometer manufacturer’s specifications. 1. Enter the gain or attenuation in dB that corresponds to the settings on your microphone power supply or measuring amplifier in the Gain field. This gain will be used in the Gain field of the Transducer Calibration window. If you are using Listen Hardware you can select Auto Read to automatically get the gain for the selected channel from the device. Using Auto Read in Calibration allows you to change the gain of the input without having to re-calibrate the mic. Current supported hardware includes AudioConnect and SoundConnect 2. 2. Open the Calibration Editor and select the Input tab. The Calibration Sequence should be set to Accelerometer. Figure 11-18: Accelerometer Calibration 3. Select your calibrator model # from the drop down menu or select Other Calibrator and enter the calibrator’s reference level and frequency. The accelerometer calibrator's reference level should be indicated in its specifications as a given V/m/ s2, at a reference frequency, e.g.: for the Brüel & Kjær Type 4294 Calibrator: Cal Input: 10 m/s2 Frequency: 159.2 Hz 4. Select your measurement accelerometer model number from the drop down menu. If your accelerometer is not listed in the drop down menu, choose Add New Accelerometer. The add process is the same as shown in Add New Mic on Page 81. 5. Mount the accelerometer on the accelerometer calibrator according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Click Calibrate to measure the sensitivity. 82 The measured sensitivity of your reference accelerometer is displayed under Measured Sensitivity in V/m/s2. If the measured sensitivity is outside the manufacturer’s specifications, a flashing FAILED message will appear. Check first to see if your connections are correct or if the calibrator is turned on before assuming something is wrong with the accelerometer. The FAILED message can also appear if the Calibrator’s frequency is not correct. If a Reference Frequency of 159.2 Hz is entered, but the Calibrator’s actual frequency is 162 Hz, the calibration may Fail. To verify the Calibrator’s frequency, use the Spectrum Analyzer under the Instruments menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. The meter on the right side indicates the corresponding dB level relative to 1 V/m/s2. If it varies by a few tenths of a dB from your last calibration measurement, do not be alarmed, this is normal. If it varies by more than 1 dB or failed the sensitivity test, you may want to have your accelerometer checked by a qualified calibration lab. Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Output Calibration Amplifier The Amplifier setting should be used when there is an amplifier between the output of the audio interface and the device under test. This might be required for loudspeaker measurements, to drive difficult loads (e.g., low impedance devices) or to test at levels above 2 VRMS. Enter the gain of your amplifier or run the Calibration test to measure it. If you are going to measure it, make sure your input is calibrated first, and then follow the Amplifier Calibration Procedure (below). Figure 11-19: Output Calibration Sequence List Important! For Amplifier Calibration, select an Input Signal Path in the Calibration Editor that is set to 1 V/V, to get an accurate calibration. Important! Note that the AmpConnect Amplifier Calibration sequence must be used to correctly calibrate AmpConnect ISC. Headphone Amplifier Calibration Procedure The procedure is the same as noted below, except that the sequence used is called Headphone Amplifier Calibration and the wiring requirements are different. Please refer to the AudioConnect and AmpConnect ISC manuals for wiring examples. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 83 Amplifier Calibration Procedure A general wiring diagram and outline of the steps for amp calibration can be found in Connection Procedures on page 501. 1. In SoundCheck, open the System Calibration Editor from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. Important! Do not open the Amplifier Calibration sequence. Run the calibration from the System Calibration Editor. 2. Select the Output Tab and select the Output Signal Path to calibrate. In the example in Figure 11-20 “Amp ch 1” is selected. 3. Select the proper Calibrated Device: “Crown AmpL.dat“ If a new device is used with the system, click Add and enter a name. Calibration values will be stored for this new device when the calibration process is complete. 4. Select the Output Hardware Channel that provides signal to the Amplifier Input: “Output 1“ Figure 11-20: Amp Calibration 5. Calibration Sequence should be set to “Amplifier Calibration“ 6. The Input Signal Path should be set to a Direct Input that is set for Unity Gain. The sensitivity of this channel must be unity gain in order to get an accurate calibration. 7. Turn the power amplifier off. 8. Connect SoundCheck Output 1 to the input of the Amplifier. 9. Connect the corresponding output of the amplifier to SoundCheck Direct In 1. The amplifier output should not have an added Load. 10. Turn the power amplifier on. If it has a gain control, set it to maximum. This is the most stable position for a gain control. Note: Some applications may require a lower gain amp. In that case, setting the volume control to a lower level is acceptable, but less stable. If anyone bumps the control, the calibration will be off. 11. Click Calibrate to measure the amplifier’s sensitivity (gain) and frequency response. The measured sensitivity of your amplifier is automatically entered in the output sensitivity field. If the measured sensitivity fails, check your wiring and connections and try calibrating again. If the measured response margin fails, check to see that the amplifier is not connected to anything other than the audio interface and that it is properly grounded. If there is a bump around 120 Hz (or 100 Hz if line frequency is 50 Hz), you might be picking up hum due to poor grounding or bad cabling. For more troubleshooting information, go to www.listeninc.com and click Support. 84 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Direct This is for calibrating low gain electronics with a sensitivity range between 700 mV/V and 1.4 V/V. This creates a Correction Out curve for the device which can be used in Analysis Steps to correct for the output response of the device, e.g.: correcting for the frequency response of an audio interface or transducer preamp. Headphone Amp The Headphone Amp calibration process is the same as Amplifier calibration. The Headphone Amp sequence is setup to account for the lower sensitivity typical of headphone amplifiers. These amps may have no gain or negative gain. Simulated Free Field Calibration This is required when using Frequency Log Sweep Stimulus and Time Selective Response Analysis. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 85 Speaker Equalization This calibration sequence prompts you to input a Stimulus Level, in dB, for the calibration signal. Usually this is the level that will be used in the actual test sequence. The sequence will Loop to “Fine Tune“ the equalization curve and output correction. Use when calibrating one of the following devices: Mouth Simulator Anechoic Chamber/speaker Anechoic Test Box Note: Speaker Equalization must be done at the same resolution or higher than the stimulus resolution of test sequence. This can be done by making a copy of the Speaker EQ sequence and changing the resolution of the 2 stimulus steps. If using a Compound Resolution Stimulus Step in the test sequence, the resolution in the Speaker Equalization sequence should be no less than the highest resolution of the Compound Stimulus. Mouth Simulator Calibration and Correction Example When calibrating a Mouth Simulator the recommended calibration sequence is Speaker Equalization. This is normally for use with an acoustic mouth simulator or sound source for testing microphones close to the source (e.g., vocal mics) with a swept sine at a constant sound pressure level. Output Signal Path set to Source Speaker Mouth Simulator.dat selected under Calibrated Device Output Hardware Channel set to Output 1 Speaker Equalization selected under Calibration Sequence Input Signal Path set to Reference Mic Figure 11-21: Mouth Simulator Calibration Figure 11-22: Calibration Sequence Menu 1. Using a calibrated reference microphone (e.g.; SCM 3), place the microphone in the same position that you intend to measure the Device Under Test. 2. Click the Calibrate Device button at the bottom of the Output Tab to begin the calibration procedure. 86 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 3. The first step in the calibration procedure is a message stating that the reference microphone needs to be calibrated first. Click Enter. 4. Enter the level in dB SPL for the calibration signal. This should be the level that will be used in the test sequence. This example uses a level of 80 dB SPL. Click OK or Enter to continue. The system will play back a short sine tone to get the sensitivity of the speaker. This allows the sequence to automatically adjust the stimulus level to 80 dB SPL. Figure 11-23: Set Signal Level 5. Set the lowest frequency to equalize down to. In this example, 100 Hz. Click OK or Enter to continue. 6. Set the highest frequency to equalize up to. In this example, 10 kHz. Click OK or Enter to continue. Important! Do not try to EQ beyond the designed range of the loudspeaker or mouth simulator. Damage can occur due to excessive low or high frequency output, as the correction process attempts to create a Flat Output Response from the speaker. Figure 11-24: Set EQ Stop Points 7. SoundCheck will measure the speaker’s response and sensitivity. These are compared to preset upper and lower limits. Figure 11-25 shows the response before it is corrected. 8. If the Mouth frequency response is within acceptable limits, the sequence will continue. If the response is not within limits you will be prompted to stop the equalization process and change the equalization range. Figure 11-25: Response Before Correction SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 87 9. SoundCheck will generate an equalized stimulus and play it through the speaker. The typical equalized response for a Mouth Simulator is ±0.5 dB from 100 Hz to 10 kHz. Figure 11-26: Equalized Response 10. If the equalized response or sensitivity are outside of the limits set in the calibration sequence, the sequence will prompt you to stop or attempt equalization anyway. If both pass, a sequence prompt asks if the EQ’s Response is flat enough. Selecting “No” will run another pass of equalization to “fine tune“ the correction curve. This can be run as many times as desired, but at some point the correction will show no further improvement. Select “Yes” to complete the calibration and correction process. Figure 11-27: Prompt To Measure Again 11. Once the calibration procedure is complete, SoundCheck will update the Mouth sensitivity. You can then choose Save to overwrite the original Mouth Simulator.dat calibration. Select Rename under Calibrated Device to give the calibration a different name. 12. Select Save to store the changes to the System Calibration Configuration. Figure 11-28: Updated Mouth Sensitivity 88 Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Digital Channel Calibration FS and dB re 1 FS Definition Digital Full Scale (FS) and dB relative to 1 FS (dBFS) though widely used are not normatively defined. In SoundCheck, FS as a unit is used to express peak and RMS amplitude. When used to define peak amplitude the maximum values are +1 and -1 FS which correspond to the maximum positive and negative digital codes in a digital audio sample stream. 1 FS RMS or 0 dB re 1 FS correspond to the RMS amplitude of a square wave that reaches the maximum positive and negative digital codes. The maximum amplitude of a sine wave in this scheme is therefore .707 FS or -3.01 dB re 1 FS. This represents the maximum amplitude of a sine wave where the peak positive and negative deflections reach the maximum positive and negative digital code. The other commonly used definition of FS comes from the Audio Engineering Society standard 17 (AES17) which defines FS as the RMS amplitude of a sine whose peak positive and negative values reach the maximum digital code of the system. +1 SoundCheck Digital Definition 1 FS Peak .707 FS RMS -3 dB FS -1 +1 AES17 Digital Definition Peak = Undefined 1 FS RMS 0 dB FS -1 In AES17, the maximum amplitude of a sine wave is 1 FS or 0 dBFS and the maximum amplitude of a square wave is 1.414 FS or +3 dBFS. The AES17 definition of FS cannot be used to express peak signal amplitudes. For a signal of given amplitude the AES17 and SoundCheck definition of FS differ by 3.01 dB. This difference in scaling between SoundCheck and AES17 can be compensated for by using FS (AES17) when importing a .wav file or Unity Digital (AES) calibration with digital inputs and outputs. See WAV File General Rules on page 293. As of SoundCheck 14, Unity Digital In (AES17).dat and Unity Digital Out (AES17).dat are included as calibrated devices. When these devices are used in the Calibration Editor, they adjust the sensitivity to match the AES17 definition and include the proper units. See Figure 11-29. Figure 11-29: Calibration Editor Digital Channels SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 89 WAV Analysis When analyzing a WAV file no signal path is used and results will be scaled according to the SoundCheck definition of FS. In order to scale the results according to the AES17 definition of FS you must add 3 dB to your results using a Post Processing step. Reference Codec & dBm0 Bluetooth HeadSet (Receive) SoundCheck Digital Output FS Ref Codec V Receiver Pa SoundCheck Analog Input Figure 11-30: Bluetooth Test - Signal Chain When performing a Receive test on a Bluetooth Headset, SoundCheck sends a digital audio signal to the DUT. SoundCheck then records and analyzes the acoustic output of the DUT. Therefore, assuming that the DUT operates in a linear manner, a digital sine wave in yields an acoustic sine wave out. Moreover, you will be able to measure the overall Receive Gain of the DUT in Pa/FS. Definition: 1 Full Scale = maximum absolute value of the digital wave. e.g., 32767 ≡ 1 FS for a 16 bit encoded wave. (FSD: Full Scale Deflection) Normally, in telephone testing, the output units are expressed in Pa/Volt. Since the input signal is digital audio we need to translate the FSD units to Volts using a virtual reference CODEC. The ref CODEC of the blue tooth device handles the conversion of the digital signal into volts (Virtual Volts). The ref CODEC states that a digital sine at zero dBm0 applied at the input yields 0.775 Vrms at the output of the CODEC. The ref level of zero dBm0 is defined differently, depending on which coding law is used: A-law or law). 90 Calibration Configuration μ -law (mu- SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual A-law 0 dBm0 is the level of a sine signal which is 3.14 dB below saturation. That means that the absolute peak amplitude of the sine is 10^(-3.14/20) = 0.6966 FS and the rms value is 0.4927 FS, equivalent to –3.14 -3.01 = -6.15 dB FS.1 0dBm0 ≡ – 6.15dBFS = 0.4927FS μ -law 0 dBm0 the level of the sine signal is 3.17 dB below saturation. That yields: 0.6942 FS pk ≡ 0.4910 FS rms, equivalent to –6.18 dB FS. Note: 0dBm0 ≡ – 6.18dBFS = 0.4910FS dBm0: A reference voltage of 775 mV applied to a load of 600 Ohm yields 1 mW. Distortion 1.5787 1 -3.17 dB 0.6942 -6.18 dB Peak Level -3.01 dB RMS Level 0 dBm0 0.775 FS Virtual Volts 0.4909 Time__ μ-law coding Figure 11-31: μ -law Coding - Sine @ 0 dBm0 1. 3.01 dB ≡ √2, crest-factor of sine. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Calibration Configuration 91 Bluetooth Sequence Setup Example The following example is from the Bluetooth Receive sequence which is part of the default sequences included with SoundCheck. It is located in the Headphones & Headsets folder. Hardware Settings In System Hardware create an input channel and an output channel for the Bluetooth interface Select Digital for both Set the Sampling Rate and Bit Depth appropriately for the device under test (typically 8 kHz and 16 bit) The Max Out value is automatically set to100% since Digital Output has been selected Figure 11-32: Bluetooth Headset System Calibration Configuration 92 Click on the Output Tab of the Calibration Editor and select the ‘BT Headset’ Signal Path from the list Set the hardware channel to the Bluetooth interface output For purely digital data leave the sensitivity and units as-is For µ -law: Set the Output Calibration Sensitivity to 1.578 V/FS (0.775/0.491 = 1.578) For A-law: Set the Output Calibration Sensitivity to 1.573 V/FS (0.775/0.4927 = 1.573) If using either codec, set the Output Calibration Units dB ref to: 0.775 V (0 dBm0) In the end, 0 dB = 0.775 “Volts“. The saturation point for µ-law is +3.17 dB above this level. For Alaw it is +3.14. Anything above saturation (1 FS) is distortion. You can also use vV (virtual Volt) as an output calibration unit. Figure 11-33: Calibration Bluetooth Headset Calibration Configuration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Units Units Overview SoundCheck® 16.0 is set up to provide you with a great deal of flexibility regarding measurement units. Units can be defined in five different places. The Calibration Editor, Analysis Editor, Post-processing Editor, Display Editor, and Message Editor allow you to make changes to the units of the curves, single values and results generated by the sequence. SI Units are used throughout SoundCheck 16.0. For more explanation on SI Units please refer to SI Units on page 43. Calibration Editor The Units button in the Calibration Editor will set the units for only the Signal Generator, Multimeter, FFT, and Real Time Analyzer (RTA) virtual instruments. In the example below, the microphone that is connected to the Left Signal Path has a sensitivity of 14 mV (0.014 Volts) per Pascal. By clicking Units, you can choose the units for the decibel reference. In Figure 12-1 the reference has been chosen to be 20 µPa. This enables the Multimeter to display the measurement in both dB re 20 µPa and absolute units (Pascals). Figure 12-1: Input Signal Path Units Affect Units of Virtual Instruments In Figure 12-2, we switch the Signal Path to Accelerometer which has a decibel reference of dB re 1 m/s^2. The Multimeter will now read out in dB re 1 m/s^2. The virtual instruments adopt the unit of the selected channel. Any changes made to the units in the Calibration Editor will change the units that are displayed in the virtual instruments. Figure 12-2: Virtual Instrument Units SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Units 93 Several common dB references are already pre-programmed in SoundCheck. dB SPL Re 20 μPa dB Pa Re 1 Pa dB V Re 1 Volt dB m Re 1 mWatt dB u Re 0.775 V (600 Ohm load) dB FS Re 1 FS dB m/s^2 Re 1 m/s2 Figure 12-3: Common Decibel References dB N Re 1 N dB g Re 1 g Note: The Use Custom Units check box is available in the following editors: Analysis, Post-Processing, User Equation and Memory List. If the box is left unchecked, the units from the Input and Output Calibration editors will be used. If the Analysis-Response Measurement is set to Absolute, the units will be that of the Input in the Calibration Configuration. If it is set to Relative then the units will be the Input Units over the Output Units. Please refer to Defining the Units on page 74 for more information on Physical Units. Note: When Use Custom Units is checked, the units can be modified to be any type desired. Analysis Editor The Analysis Editor enables you to process measured time signals using a variety of analysis algorithms. The curves and single values created by this step will use the units indicated in the Units tab. The units selected here apply to the DUT response and typically agree with the units selected for your input and output devices in the System Calibration Configuration. For more details on how to use this editor, please refer Analysis Editor on page 135. The Units button in the Analysis Editor will set the units for the data generated by that particular Analysis Figure 12-4: Analysis Editor Units Step (e.g., frequency response). In the example below, the units were changed from electrical voltage decibels (dB V) to electrical power decibels (dBm) by choosing “dBm” from the drop down menu (See Figure 12-4: Analysis Editor Units). The corresponding data display will show the measured curves in dBm (dB re 1 mW). 94 Units SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor – Memory List Use the Display Editor to format the presentation of data on the screen using six types of display windows. Refer to Display Editing on page 296. Typically the units for the curves and single values are set up in the Analysis Editor. However, the units can be temporarily modified if a curve needs to be rescaled, for example by changing the decibel reference. These changes will disappear when the sequence is run again, unless the curve or value with the new units is protected in the Memory List. Refer to Display Editing on page 296 for more information on Protected Items. Figure 12-5: Memory List Units In Figure 12-5, the units of the y-axis for the curve Harmonic 10 are modified in the Display Editor. To do this, open the Memory List and choose a curve or single value with values in the y-axis. Note that only one curve can be selected in the current tab of the Memory List. The Units Setup window will then appear and userdefined units can be entered once the Use Custom Units box has been checked. These new units are only valid while the display is open. Once the test sequence is run again, the units for the measured data will revert back to the units defined in the Analysis Editor. Post-Processing Editor By clicking Units in the Post-Processing Editor, the Units Setup screen appears. The default units in this editor are that of Operand A, as modified by the post-processing operation. In this example, the units of Operand A are dBm re 1.00 mW. Since the operation being performed is Reciprocal Value, the new units will be dB re 1.00 x 103 Watts since this is the reciprocal of 1 mW. This unit can be changed by clicking Use custom units in the Units Setup window. The post-processed result will then be displayed in these user-defined units. Each mode of the Post-Processing Editor has a Units button located as in Figure 12-6, except the User Equation. In the User Equation mode, you must designate the units of the equation results on the right of the editor, and set the units for any User Defined Constants created on the left side of the Editor. Units cannot be changed on curves or single values created by other steps in the sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Units Figure 12-6: Post-Processing Units 95 The units can also be changed in the User Equation Post Processing step. After selecting an Input Curve or Value, and then filling in the other associated fields, Click on the “Select Unit” field to open the Units Setup window. Figure 12-7: Equation Editor Units Message Step Editor The Units button becomes available when the Message Step is set to ask the Operator for a numerical value during the sequence. The Units Setup screen appears when this button is clicked. There are no units for this value by default. Figure 12-8: Message Editor Units 96 Units SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor Features The Stimulus Editor offers two views, basic and advanced. Basic view shows only the commonly adjusted settings, and by clicking on the advanced tab, more are visible. This keeps the software simple for novice and production line users while retaining the flexibility demanded by R&D applications. Note: As of SC 8.1, when "Memory List Selection" is selected in the Stimulus Editor, a message will pop up as a reminder to "shut off" Preload Stimulus in the Sequence Configuration. See Configure Sequence on page 397. The Stimulus Editor (Ctrl+Shift+S) creates or loads a WAV file that the Acquisition Step can play. See Stimulus Type on page 99. Frequency Stepped Sweep (Stweep™) Excitation Signal Parameters The Stweep stimulus offers faster and more accurate measurements. Typically a digitally generated stepped-sine excitation will contain discontinuities because the frequencies do not change at a zero phase and amplitude crossing. By using an integer number of cycles at each frequency step, the STWEEP ensures that transition from frequency to frequency is always smooth. This ensures significantly less transducer settling time and results in faster and more accurate measurements. New - Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients In stepped sine, amplitude and frequency sweeps, selecting equalization now also enables a smooth transition between steps. These smooth transitions minimize the transient response in the device under test. This results in shorter test times, and is particularly useful for microphone testing where a source speaker needs to be equalized. Select “Apply EQ” in a Stimulus Step. See Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients on page 103. Sweeping Hi Frequency to Low Frequency The default sweep direction of Stimulus Steps using Frequency Stepped Sweep is from Hi to Low. A device's fundamental frequency response should not change with frequency sweep direction or test signal since it is a linear approximation. Since loudspeakers are inherently non-linear, extra care should be taken in getting a reliable and repeatable linear response e.g. the fundamental. The non-linear response, e.g. distortion, is a different matter and is even more affected by how the test signal is applied. The goal is to get the loudspeaker in a stable state before measuring it in order to get repeatable results. When sweeping from low to high frequencies, the loudspeaker sees a burst of energy at the first low frequency and can continue ringing throughout the measurement before reaching a stable state. When sweeping from high to low frequencies, the first high frequency has very little energy compared to a low frequency. It reaches stability faster and consequently there is less chance for the loudspeaker to ring throughout the measurement. The other advantage to sweeping from high to low frequencies has to do with system delays but that should not matter when testing a simple loudspeaker driver without any electronics. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 97 Stimulus Settings The following uses a stepped sine sweep (Stweep™) as an example. Some Stimulus Types will require different settings. To view and change the Stimulus step settings, select Stimulus from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen or double click the Stimulus Step in the Sequence Editor. The Stimulus Editor will appear indicating the current test signal settings for the selected step. Figure 13-1: Stimulus Editor Right Click Functions Right click on the fields for Level, Start Frequency and Stop Frequency to select Memory List Selection or User Input. The Memory List item must be created or added to the Memory List before the Stimulus Step occurs in the order of steps in the sequence. When setting the units for the stimulus, remember to set the units in the Message Step that is used to generate the Memory List item. See “Numeric Message” on page 245. Important! When selecting “Memory List Selection“ in the Stimulus Editor, the sequence must be configured to NOT Preload the Stimulus. In the Sequence Editor select Sequence from the Drop Down Menu and select Configure Sequence. Uncheck “Preload Stimulus“. Level This allows you to set the stimulus level dynamically during the sequence execution. Examples: The default sequence, “Headphones”, shows an example of how the Level is entered through a Message Step at the start of the sequence. The Speaker Equalization sequence also shows how the level is determined through Post Processing. 98 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Start and Stop Frequencies from Memory List Values Right click on the Start or Stop Frequency fields and select Memory List Selection as shown in Figure 13-2. Stimulus frequencies can be entered from a prompt in the sequence, automatically generated, or even automatically incremented. This is particularly useful when you need to use a different test frequency range for each test run. You can also automatically increment the stimulus frequency and perform sequential measurements at different frequencies, e.g.: testing Max SPL. Figure 13-2: Memory List Selection Important! Select the Y axis in the Stimulus Editor for Start/Stop Frequency values. The Index generated by Step Configuration is always a Y axis value. See Index (Loop Index) on page 399 for more on setting this in Step Configuration. Stimulus Step Controls Stimulus Type Select the type of stimulus the step will use from the dropdown list. Note that DC Connect stimulus can only be created using Listen's DC-Connect™ interface. Stepped-sine Frequency sweep (Stweep™) – a stepped-sine sweep using an integer number of cycles at each frequency step, ensuring a smooth transition from frequency to frequency. This ensures significantly less transducer settling time and results in faster and more accurate measurements. Frequency Log Sweep - an optional continuous log sine sweep used for simulated free-field measurements. Log Amplitude Sweep at a single frequency. As of SoundCheck 8, the Log Sweep can use a faster sweep rate, e.g., 100 ms/decade, which dramatically decreases the measurement time. WAV file (Windows audio file), user selectable. Note: Stimulus Editor The WAV file must have the same sample rate as the System Hardware configuration. See Figure 13-3. See WAV File Types on page 293 for supported WAV file types. Hardware Editor Figure 13-3: WAV file sample rate SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 99 DC Connect – allowing SoundCheck® to control DC Connect™ for making DC voltage/current measurements (requires DC Connect™ optional hardware). Two Tone – two simultaneous stimuli to use for IM and Difference distortion measurements. Noise – featuring Pink and White Noise, with scalable Duration (s) and Band limits: Fmin and Fmax. MLS (Maximum Length Sequence) noise - equalized and band limited in the same way as white noise. SoundCheck includes MLS stimulus to enable direct comparison with other measurement systems. Multitone – an ensemble of tones regularly spaced in frequency. The amplitudes are equal. The phases follow a deterministic mathematical law and are optimized to lower the crest-factor. An example of the step setup is shown in Figure 13-33: Multitone Stimulus - Frequency Rounding. Memory List Selection - (Right Click Function) allows the Level and Start/Stop Frequencies to be read from Memory List values. See Right Click Functions on page 98. Step Progression Resolution Determines the number of measurable frequencies, including the start and stop frequency. Sweep Low to Hi, Hi to Low or Single Frequency You can choose standard ISO frequency steps such as R10, which corresponds to preferred 1/3 octave center frequency steps, or choose User Defined linear or log step sizes. Steps (#) - Shows the number of steps according to the selected resolution. If User Defined is selected, the number of steps is manually set in this field. The number of steps will determine how many unique frequencies are generated. See Step Size on page 101. Figure 13-4: Step Progression Start Frequency First excitation frequency in the Stweep. Generally it is best to set this to the highest frequency you want to measure, so that the measurement sweeps from high to low frequency in order to minimize transducer settling time (low frequencies have more energy than high frequencies). Stop Frequency Last excitation frequency in the Stweep. Generally it is best to set this to the lowest frequency you want to measure, so that the measurement sweeps from high to low frequency in order to minimize transducer settling time. 100 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Step Size Min Cycles (#) & Min Duration (s) To ensure proper measurement accuracy, each sine step must have a minimum number of cycles AND a minimum duration. To properly measure the level of a sine, you need at least three (3) cycles. In the presence of background noise, it is likely more cycles will be required. Because of noise, settling time and input-output delay, you also need a minimum duration to achieve a precise measurement. In regard to noise only, the S/N ratio measurement increases by three (3) dB each time the duration is doubled. The Stweep algorithm ensures that each step has a duration that is greater than the Min Duration AND contains an integer number of sine cycles that is at least equal to Min Cycles. As the Stweep covers the specified range of frequencies, each step has a number of cycles equal to Min Cycles in frequencies below the transition frequency, and a duration equal to Min Duration in frequencies above the transition frequency. By adjusting these two parameters, it is possible to optimize the total duration of your Stweep as well as the measurement accuracy. Min Cycles – Minimum number of cycles of sine at each step (See Figure 13-4) Min Duration – Minimum Dwell time or the minimum time in seconds at each step Note: Stimulus steps using the Stweep excitation from SC4.x and SC5.x will have a Min Duration value of zero (0) s. Transition - The frequency at which the Minimum Duration exactly matches the Minimum Cycles as selected in the editor. Below that frequency the Min Cycles condition is applied. Above that frequency the Min Duration condition is applied. Example: If a Stweep of 20k to 20 Hz is set to have eight (8) Cycles minimum per step and 10 mSec minimum duration, then the transition frequency will be 800 Hz. Below 800 Hz, all steps will be eight (8) cycles long and above 800 Hz all steps will be 10 ms long. If you do the math, at 20 Hz, eight cycles will require 400 ms and at 20 KHz, 10 ms contains 200 cycles. User Defined Stimulus Frequency Points The following formula are used to determine the number of frequency points in a User Defined Stimulus. For example, a step size of one (1) allows only one frequency (the stop frequency) to be entered. In Figure 13-5, a 100-cycle, 1 kHz tone has been generated. Figure 13-5: User Defined Step size Log Formula Linear Formula n N f stop – 1 f n = f start ------------- f start ----------------- n f n = f start + ( f stop – f start ) ------------N–1 Where: N is the number of steps n is the frequency index from 0 to N-1 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 101 Level Enter the correct test level in either dB or linear units. The output level and units are influenced by the output calibration sensitivity and units. The level set in the Stimulus Editor is the RMS (root mean square) value at the terminals of the device under test (e.g., if an amplifier is powering a loudspeaker and its gain has been entered in the output calibration sensitivity field, the output level in the Stimulus Editor will be the output level coming out of the amplifier). Define the output level in linear or dB units based on the selected Output Signal Path Select User Input, Memory List Selection or Copy/Paste Data Copy/Paste Data is used to copy the value for use in another step Figure 13-6: Level Duration (s) Figure 13-7: Buttons and Lower Fields Shows the total duration in seconds required to complete the playback of the stimulus. This field is updated after clicking on the Update or Play buttons. This calculated time is dependent on the test parameters selected in the Stimulus Editor (for example, step size and cycles (#); this does not include system overhead time for data and display processing). See Figure 13-7. Custom Stimulus Name Names the stimulus waveform created in the Memory List. This item is selected in the Acquistion and Analysis Steps. Apply EQ As of SoundCheck 16, Apply EQ also features “Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients”. See Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients on page 103. When checked, this applies the EQ curve to the Stimulus Signal for the Output Signal Path that the Stimulus is played out of. See Figure 13-7. If you click Play, it will use the EQ curve for the Output Signal Path selected in the Output Path section. When the sequence is run, it will use the EQ curve for the Output Signal Path selected in the Acquisition Step. The EQ curve is a correction for the response of the Output Signal Path device selected in the System Calibration Configuration. This curve is created in the Calibration process for each Output Signal Path. The curve is always present, even though it may be a Flat Curve. (The curve can also be imported. See Copy From Memory List - Output on page 71.) Important! A complete calibration of the Output Signal Path must be run in order to store an EQ curve. 102 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Important! Equalization curves are applied, no matter what is selected in the Output Calibration Sequence field of the System Calibration Configuration, e.g., Amplifier Calibration, Speaker Equalization, etc. The “Apply EQ” selection must be checked in the Stimulus Step, Signal Generator VI or “Acquisition Step using Generator” in order to utilize this function. See “Calibration Configuration” on page 65. Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients In stepped sine, amplitude and frequency sweeps, selecting equalization will also enable a smooth transition between steps. These “smooth transitions” minimize the transient response in the device under test. This results in shorter test times, and is particularly useful for microphone testing where a source speaker needs to be equalized. Select “Apply EQ” in a Stimulus Step. The example SoundMap 3D plots show the difference between a sine sweep without Sweep Equalization compared to the same stimulus with “Apply EQ” on. Figure 13-8: Without Sweep Equalization The ringing circled in Figure 13-8 is not present in Figure 13-9. Advanced View Used to show or hide advanced settings Figure 13-9: With Sweep Equalization Output Path This allows you to select the Output Signal Path for this Stimulus Step. This determines the Units of the Level field, the max/min frequencies for Frequency Range and the amplitude range of the stimulus. Any Output Signal Path defined in the System Calibration Configuration can be selected as the Output Signal Path for the stimulus. Note: As of SoundCheck 8, a separate Stimulus Step is required for each Output Signal Path “with a unique Calibrated Device” used in the sequence. Using this method, each Stimulus Step will conform to the settings of that Channel in the System Calibration Configuration. To create signals on multiple channels, multiple Stimulus Steps are used, each one referencing a different Output Signal Path. A single Acquisition Step is used to start the multiple stimulus signals. Important! When multiple output devices use Unity Gain, a single Stimulus Step can be used. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 103 The Acquisition Step will determine which channel the Stimulus is played out of when the sequence runs. Multiple channels can be selected and the same stimulus can be used for those channels. The Play button in the Stimulus Editor uses the Output Path specified in the Stimulus Editor. Figure 13-10: Output Path View Table Used to create and modify Compound Stimulus, e.g.; 1/12th oct High with 1/3rd oct Low in a single sweep See Signal Parameters for Amplitude Sweep Excitation on page 110 and Compound Stimulus - WAV File With Pilot Tone on page 108. Play Plays the stimulus that is present in the Stimulus Editor to the Output Signal Path selected in the Output Path section. This allows you to hear the signal from the editor, without having to run the entire sequence. Update Click to update the stimulus display after making changes Load Loads the settings from a previously saved Stimulus Step Figure 13-11: Channel Selection Revert Discards any changes made to the Stimulus Editor since the last time it was saved Save As Allows you to save the Stimulus Step to the Steps library OK Accept changes and closes the Stimulus Editor. Save the sequence to save the changes to disk. Cancel Closes the editor and discards all changes made since the last save 104 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analyze/Ignore Option The 'Analyze' option in the Stimulus Editor allows you to choose whether or not sections of the stimulus will be analyzed or ignored by an analysis step. This feature is particularly useful for telephony testing and for other devices that need to be conditioned before achieving a stable measurement. For example, the first section of the stimulus will contain a conditioning signal (like artificial speech) that will open the Voice Activity Detector. A second section will be the sine-based test signal to analyze (e.g., multitone or sine sweep). The StimulusAnalyze option will tell the analysis step to process only the test signal and ignore the conditioning signal. The Stimulus Step is opened in Table View as shown in Figure 13-12. The first section is a Pink Noise signal, played for 500 mSec. The analyze field is set to “No”. When the Stimulus Step runs, this section will be ignored. The second and third sections are frequency stepped sweeps, each with start and stop frequencies set. This is the signal area in the blue box. Analyze is set to “Yes”. Figure 13-12: Analyze Option Important! Compound Stimulus of other types, created in the table, will analyze only the first stimulus element flagged to Analyze and ignore the following ones. For example, if you have a Log Sweep followed by a Multitone, both setup to be analyzed, only the Log Sweep will be analyzed. Note: Multiple Stweeps can be chained and analyzed as one Compound Stimulus. See Signal Parameters for Amplitude Sweep Excitation on page 110 and Compound Stimulus - WAV File With Pilot Tone on page 108. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 105 Compound Stimulus - Stweep Optimized Combinations of different stimuli can be created using the View Table function of the Stimulus Editor. Each line in the stimulus can have its own Cycles (#), Level, Start/Stop Frequency, etc. This enables you to create a variety of stimuli that can accentuate the DUT’s linear and non-linear characteristics. In this case, we will use the default Stimulus Step “Stweep - 12th&3rd Oct” as shown in Figure 13-13. If the stimulus was in a single resolution of R40 the duration would be 2.58 seconds. Instead, this optimized stimulus has a duration of approx. 1.46 seconds. Highlight a line and click Edit or double click on a line to open the Line Editor window. Table Buttons Edit - Each line can be edited separately Double click on a line to edit or highlight the line and click edit. Insert - Add new lines to the table Move Up/Move Down - Any section can be moved independently. Click Update to show the changes in the graphic display and to see the new duration. Figure 13-13: Stweep - 12th&3rd Oct Figure 13-14 shows how Table Mode allows editing of each line. Stimulus Line 1: Resolution: R40 Start: 20k Hz Stop: 300 Hz Min Cycles: 6 Min Duration: 10m Stimulus Line 2: Resolution: R10 Start: 250 Hz Stop: 50 Hz Min Cycles: 8 Min Duration: 10m Figure 13-14: Table Editing Both lines are set to Analyze and the Level is 100mV. Note: 106 Use “Memory List Selection” for the Level values in a Compound Stimulus so that editing the level is easier. You only need to set the level once, at the start of the sequence. A Message Step creates the value “Level” in the Memory List, which is then used in the Stimulus Step. This Message Step must occur before any Stimulus Step that uses the Memory List value it creates. The Message Step does not need to be set to “Display Step when run” in Step Configuration. Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual ISO Frequency Points Each Start Frequency must be at the next ISO frequency point, for that resolution, following the stop frequency of the previous step. Example: The Line 1 Stweep ends at 300 Hz. Line 2, with a resolution of R10, must start at 250 Hz. Stimulus Line 1 Stimulus Line 2 Figure 13-15: ISO Frequency Points You can easily find the appropriate start frequency: Enter the stop frequency from the previous step, 300 Hz, and click Enter. The frequency automatically jumps up to the nearest frequency point, 315 Hz. Click on the down arrow next to the field and value will switch to the next available ISO point that is below 300 Hz (250Hz). This prevents an overlap of frequencies between the two lines of stimulus. Click the down arrow A complete ISO frequency chart for all available resolutions can be found in Windows Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 107 Compound Stimulus - WAV File With Pilot Tone In this example a 1 kHz Pilot Tone is added to a WAV file. This is used in some of the Open Loop test sequences available on the Listen Website. Step 1 Start with a Stimulus Step set to play a WAV file. Figure 13-16 shows the initial step. The table is not visible since there is only one stimulus. Click View Table Figure 13-16: WAV Stimulus Click Insert and the Add Stimulus window will open Enter the stimulus parameters for the new line as shown in Figure 13-17 Level: 84 dB Analyze: Unchecked Resolution: R10 Start Frequency: 1 kHz (Automatically “greyed out” when Stop Frequency is the same) Stop Frequency: 1 kHz Min Cycles: 1 Min Duration: 500 mSec Analyze: Unchecked Analyze must not be enabled so that only the recorded response of the WAV file is analyzed. Figure 13-17: Insert Frequency Sweep See Analyze/Ignore Option on page 105. 108 Click OK to close the line editor Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Step 3 Click Update to show the actual Duration of the stimulus and to update the waveform view Figure 13-18: Compound Stimulus Note: Use “Memory List Selection” for the Level values in a Compound Stimulus so that editing the level is easier. You only need to set the level once, at the start of the sequence. A Message Step creates the value “Level” in the Memory List, which is then used in the Stimulus Step. This Message Step must occur before any Stimulus Step that uses the Memory List value it creates. The Message Step does not need to be set to “Display Step when run” in Step Configuration. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 109 Signal Parameters for Amplitude Sweep Excitation Frequency Enter the frequency you want to sweep in amplitude. You can only choose a single frequency here. Start Level & Stop Level Choose the amplitude level, either in linear or dB units. Cycles (#) Choose the number of cycles of the selected frequency for each step. Steps # The number of steps is the total number of equal level increments needed to go from Start Level to Stop Level. The progression is done in dB. Figure 13-19: Amplitude Sweep The Start Level counts for one step. Then, the step size (in dB) is given by: (Stop Level dB – Start Level dB)/ (Steps # -1). Tip: 110 To increase the level in integer increments, (e.g., 1 dB steps), enter the Start and Stop levels and select the proper unit (dB). Increment the value in the Steps field until the value in the Step Size field is 1. By putting the cursor to the right of the Steps Value, you can use the Up/Down arrow keys of the keyboard to quickly scroll to the desired value. Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual WAV File Excitation SoundCheck can load any stereo or mono WAV file to be used as an excitation signal. See System Requirements on page 1 for information regarding large WAV files and computer memory. See WAV File Types on page 293 for more information on supported WAV file types. Important! The sampling rate of the WAV file must match the sampling rate of the System Hardware configuration. The Stimulus Step creates a signal for only one channel at a time. To output a stereo WAV file with a different signal on each channel, you need to use two Stimulus Steps with the proper channel assignment; one Stimulus Step plays the left channel of the WAV file, the other plays the right. You also need to assign them to two appropriate channels in the Acquisition Editor. You need to play a WAV using the Stimulus Step if you want to capture the Time Record of the WAV as a test signal in the Acquisition Editor later in the sequence. In Figure 13-20, WAV File is selected as the Stimulus Type. The Duration refers to the actual length of the WAV file. In this case, an 11 second sample of artificial speech is displayed. Note: Using the WAV File option in the Stimulus Editor limits you to the Broadband or Spectrum Algorithms in the Analysis Editor. Level The Output Level field allows you to set the playback level of the WAV file. The level is set in physical units. The output units will vary depending on the output units of the System Calibration Configuration. For example, if using an artificial mouth or anechoic test box the output level will be Pa rms. For an amplifier or direct output the level will be V rms. The output level will be the actual level out of the calibrated output transducer or device. This requires an accurate calibration of the output signal chain. (See Calibration Configuration on page 65 for instructions on output calibration.) The Drop Down Menu next to the Level field has the following selections: RMS level (Pa rms, V rms) dB level Peak level Memory List Selection This option gets the WAV playback level from a Memory List value. Figure 13-20: P50 Artificial Speech SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 111 WAV Info This section shows the properties of the selected WAV file. These values are for reference only, they cannot be changed. Peak: The maximum absolute value of the file (in dB FS, or %FS). RMS: The RMS value of the entire wave file (in dB FS, or %FS). WAV format: Stereo/mono, sampling rate, bit depth. Time: Total duration of the wave file in mm:ss.ms. WAV file Channel: Allows you to choose the left or right side of a Stereo WAV file. Apply EQ This allows you to create an Equalized version of the WAV file. Refer to Equalize a WAV file on page 414 for more information. When checked, this applies the EQ curve to the WAV file for the Output Signal Path that the Stimulus is played out of. If you click Play, it will use the EQ curve for the Output Signal Path selected in the Output Path section. When the sequence is run, it will use the EQ curve for the Output Signal Path selected in the Acquisition Step. The EQ curve is a correction for the response of the Output Signal Path device selected in the System Calibration Configuration. This curve is created in the Calibration process for each Output Signal Path. The curve is always present, even though it may be a Flat Curve. (The curve can also be imported. See Copy From Memory List - Output on page 71.) Important! A complete calibration of the Output Signal Path must be run in order to store an EQ curve. Important! Equalization curves are applied, no matter what is selected in the Output Calibration Sequence field of the System Calibration Configuration, e.g., Amplifier Calibration, Speaker Equalization, etc. The “Apply EQ” selection must be checked in the Stimulus Step, Signal Generator VI or “Acquisition Step using Generator” in order to utilize this function. See “Calibration Configuration” on page 65. More information on the use of WAV files in SoundCheck can be found in: WAV file playback on page 413 and WAV File Types on page 293. 112 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual DC Connect Control Method: USB This method is used to produce a steady voltage or current output from DC Connect. The Stimulus Step in Figure 13-21 will send the following settings to the DC Connect™ device assigned to this channel: Control Method = USB Source Type = Voltage Polarity = Positive Max Current = 30mA range Level = 100mV If your Sequence Configuration is set to Preload Stimulus (which is a default setting), the first Figure 13-21: DC Connect USB Control Stimulus Step of this type will run when the sequence is loaded, and the DC Connect LEDs will show all the settings designated in these four fields before you run the sequence. If Preload Stimulus is not selected, you will see the LEDs on the front panel of the DC Connect light up to match these four settings when the Stimulus Step runs. Important! Preload Stimulus in Sequence Configuration will make DC Connect operational even if the sequence Start button has not been clicked. For example, if DC Connect is set to provide 9 VDC to power the DUT, the 9 V will be applied to the DUT once the sequence is loaded into memory. This will take place BEFORE you click Start. Use the Level field to set the output voltage source or current source level. That level will be output when the Stimulus Step runs, which again, may be when the sequence is loaded. If Source Type is set to voltage, the Level unit is V (volts). If the Source Type is set to current, the Level unit is mA (milliamps). DC Output - rate of change When controlling DC Connect via USB with SoundCheck, the maximum source level stepping rate is about 5 steps per second. When controlling the source level with an audio interface (Analog Control), the maximum stepping rate is 500 steps per second. This means that the Time/Step, as set in the Stimulus Editor, can be as small as 2 mSec. Single Output Setting When Sequence Loads If the Sequence Configuration is set to “Preload Stimulus” (which is the default setting), the first Stimulus Step of the sequence will load when the sequence is loaded. If this is a DC Connect stimulus, DC Connect will switch to the settings for that stimulus step and output the voltage or current selected in the step. The DC Connect LEDs will show all the settings designated in the Instrument Settings field of the Stimulus Editor. By selecting Preload Stimulus, DC Connect will be operational even if the sequence “Start” button has not been clicked as in the Note above. Important! DC Connect levels and settings cannot be changed with subsequent Stimulus Steps when Preload Stimulus is selected. DC Connect will use the settings of the first Stimulus Step until a new sequence is loaded. Subsequent Stimulus Steps will be ignored. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 113 Dynamic Control In Sequence If “Preload Stimulus” is not selected in the Configure Sequence menu, DC Connect will switch to the settings of each DC Connect Stimulus Step as they occur in the sequence. This can be useful if the output of DC Connect needs to change during the operation of the sequence. The example sequence in Figure 13-22, shows a DC Connect stimulus set to output 1.5 VDC when the sequence is started. After the Broadband RMS Analysis is complete a second DC Connect Stimulus switches to 0 VDC, shutting the device under test off, until another test is made. The Configure Sequence window for the overall sequence shows that Preload Stimulus is not checked. Figure 13-22: DC Connect Voltage Switching in Sequence Control Method: Analog This method allows you to have Dynamic control over the output level of DC Connect. Analog Control provides a much faster rate of change than what is available with USB control. See DC Output - rate of change on page 113. When the Control Method is set to analog, the Level field is replaced with the Settings/Sweep selector. The remaining settings allow for selection of Source Type, Output Polarity and Maximum Current. Confirmation of these settings is indicated by LEDs on the DC Connect front panel. When Analog Sweep is selected, the controls allow you to construct a voltage source (or current source) stepped waveform. Do not use a compound stimulus as it is not compatible. Figure 13-23: Analog Sweep Settings These are the same controls used in the audio log amplitude sweep stimulus type, and they operate in the same way regarding number of steps, Start and Stop levels, and the View Table function. Here the units are V or mA. See Signal Parameters for Amplitude Sweep Excitation on page 110. Note: 114 Please refer to the DC Connect Instruction Manual for more information on this product. This can be found on the Listen website; https://support.listeninc.com/hc/en-us/sections/200836954Hardware-User-Manuals. Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Two Tone Stimulus When you play two tones in a non-linear system, they interact in such a way that frequencies are present at the output that were not part of the stimulus. These by-product frequencies are different linear combinations of the two original frequencies and are called Intermodulation Products. Intermodulation Products are highly undesirable since they have no harmonic relationship to the original signal. Types of two-tone stimulus available: Intermodulation stimulus: This superimposes a sweeping frequency tone against a fixed frequency tone. The fixed slave tone is usually a low frequency tone. For IM distortion, the Stweep Master and fixed Slave frequencies should be set according to the equation: f min ≥ f slave + 14 ⁄ T fmin where T= the minimum step duration and fmin is the minimum frequency of the Master Tone. T Figure 13-24: Two Tone IM Stimulus This method insures that there are at least 14 beat cycles in each step and the closest IM products can be resolved with good accuracy. For example: If fslave is set to 43.1 Hz and T= 100 ms, then fmin should be set to at least 183 Hz in order to yield good results. In the Stimulus Editor, pick the closest value available depending on the resolution of the stimulus. For the example in Figure 13-24, the minimum frequency for a resolution of R40 is 190 Hz. (Refer to Stweep Table - ISO Stepped-sine Frequencies on page 522.) As a sanity check you can select the stimulus itself in the Analysis Step. Apply the analysis and there should be no IM distortion in the result. Difference frequency stimulus: This consists of two sweeping tones which are separated by a specified frequency interval. This frequency interval can be a fixed difference or a fixed ratio. Similar to Intermodulation stimulus, the difference between the two frequencies should be greater than or equal to 14/T. Application to Loudspeaker measurements Intermodulation distortion is useful to detect amplitude and Doppler modulations on high frequencies when a low frequency signal produces a large excursion of the diaphragm. Difference frequency distortion is useful to detect distortion at high frequencies, where single tone harmonic distortion would fall far out of the frequency range of the loudspeaker or the ear. For more details on these techniques see : Steve Temme, “Audio Distortion Measurements”, Bruel & Kjaer, Application Note BO 0385-11. Note: An example sequence is included in the Default Sequences: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\How To examples\IM Distortion.sqc and Diff Distortion.sqc. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 115 Two Tone Stimulus Type Sweep Type set to IM Master Tone settings Figure 13-25: Stimulus for IM Distortion – Master Tone Settings Slave Tone Fixed tone frequency Level Set Value or Use value from Memory List Option Figure 13-26: Stimulus for IM Distortion – Slave Tone Settings 116 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sweep Type - Difference Set Master Tone properties Sweep Type set to Difference Figure 13-27: Stimulus for Difference Distortion – Master Tone Settings Slave Tone Select Fixed and set difference frequency. Figure 13-28: Stimulus for Difference Distortion – Slave Tone Settings SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 117 As an alternative the Slave Tone can be set to Ratio. Figure 13-29: Slave Tone Set to Ratios Active Speech Level Stimulus Control (requires active speech module p/n 2033) In telephony standards (IEEE, TIA), speech stimuli levels are often specified in term of Active Speech Level (ASL). That way the pauses are ignored and the level is set only for the active portion. Select WAV under Stimulus Type Select the WAV file to use The RMS level of the WAV file itself can be shown in dB ASL From the Level drop down menu select dB ASL, as shown in Figure 13-30, and set the level of the stimulus The Active Speech Module calculates the ASL of the WAV file rather than its average level ASL is calculated according to P56 Method B 118 Figure 13-30: Active Speech Level Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Noise Pink and White noise stimulus is available with variable Duration, Band limits (Freq-min and Freq-max) and control of RMS Level in physical unit (linear or dB). Pink Noise: Noise with a continuous frequency spectrum and with equal power per constant percentage bandwidth. For example, equal power is any one-third octave band. White Noise: Noise with a continuous frequency spectrum and with equal power per unit bandwidth. For example, equal power in any band of 100 Hz width. MLS (Maximum Length Sequence): A special kind of white noise with low crest factor. Technically it is a square wave Figure 13-31: Band Limited Pink Noise with randomly varied duty cycle. Therefore, the crest-factor is 1, which is only true for full-band MLS (DC to Nyquist). If the signal is filtered or band-limited, the crest factor may rise up to 4, as with standard white noise. In SoundCheck the MLS signal is intended to be used as a stimulus for transfer function measurements (Analysis algorithm = transfer functions). It will yield about the same results as the standard (Gaussian) White Noise also available in Stimulus. Notably, it is a legacy stimulus made available in SoundCheck for comparison purposes with other acoustic measurement systems. The white noise and pink noise used in SoundCheck have a Gaussian amplitude distribution. Theoretically, the crest-factor is infinite. Of course that doesn't happen in a WAV file. Practically, the expected crest-factor can be anywhere between 3 and 5. The longer the wave file, the greater the chance of being close to 5. Figure 13-32: RTA display of Band Limited Pink Noise SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stimulus Editor 119 Multitone A Multitone is an ensemble of tones that are regularly spaced in frequency. The amplitudes are equal and the phases follow a deterministic mathematical law so that they are optimized to lower the crest-factor. Choice of Fmin, Fmax Choice of resolution (frequency spacing): R10 to R80, User Defined Log and User Defined Linear Control of Duration (s) Control of global RMS or Peak level Frequency Rounding An option has been created to align the frequencies of tones in order to round integer values (e.g.multiple of 5). The Rounding Value chosen in the Stimulus Step must be the same as the Curve Resolution specified in the Analysis Step Frequency tab. This helps to avoid leakage and makes the multitone analysis more accurate. The example in Figure 13-33 shows the Stimulus Rounding Value set to 5 Hz with the corresponding Analysis Step set to 5 Hz Curve Resolution. By doing this, the spacing of the stimulus tones match the FFT spacing in Analysis. Figure 13-33: Multitone Stimulus - Frequency Rounding The Stimulus Editor has two unique fields for Multitone Stimulus: Check-box for Frequency Rounding Rounding value control in Hz. Min rounding value= 0.1 Hz. Default= 5 Hz. All frequencies are rounded to the nearest Rounding Value. Frequencies that are duplicated, as a result of the rounding process, are deleted. Multitone is repeatable (Not Random) which is useful for MP3 testing. You can now recreate in memory, a perfect copy of the multitone stimulus that has been transferred to an MP3 player. By playing the stimulus on the MP3 player and comparing it to the stimulus in memory, the response of the MP3 player can be analyzed. 120 Stimulus Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor Acquisition determines how test signals (Stimuli) are played and how measured signals are recorded or analyzed in a sequence. The flexibility of the Acquisition Step allows measurements to be made in a variety of ways. The Acquisition Step establishes: The relationship between the Input/Output Signal Paths defined in the System Calibration Configuration The Stimulus that is to be applied on each Output Signal Path The resulting Waveform at each Input Signal Path A simple table interface is used to show the Signal Path names and the Input/Output waveforms. Select Acquisition (Ctrl + Shift + A) from the Setup drop down menu on the main SoundCheck® menu bar to view and change the system's acquisition settings. Features Auto Range - When using Listen hardware, you can automatically adjust the microphone preamplifier gain in order to optimize the dynamic range of the test Table interface for selecting Play and Record channels Multiple channels are selected by holding down the Control key while clicking on channels in the table Capability to mix different sampling rates within a measurement, using different output and input interfaces for each of the different sample rates Max FSD - Record level monitoring allows you to optimize the dynamic range of the measurement, resulting in a better SNR ratio and therefore more accurate measurements Multiple Virtual Instruments can be opened simultaneously in the acquisition step for automation. See Virtual Instruments on page 126. Record Level Monitoring - Max FSD The Input and Output Max FSD values are added to the Memory List for recorded waveforms. These values can be used to optimize the signal to noise and to show that the signal is in a "comfortable" operating range; i.e., not clipping. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 121 Auto-Range This feature allows those using Listen hardware to automatically adjust the microphone preamplifier gain in order to optimize the dynamic range of the test. When auto-ranging is enabled in an Acquisition Step, SoundCheck will monitor the digital headroom of the audio interface and if necessary increase or decrease the preamp gain, selecting the optimal setting for maximum signal to noise ratio. If a change to the gain is made, the acquisition step runs again with the new settings. Available for input channels only Click on the Auto Range field drop down to turn on and off This can only be selected if Auto Read is enabled for that input channel in the Calibration Editor. See Input Hardware Channel on page 70. Figure 14-1: Auto-Range Play & Record Simultaneously play a stimulus and record the time response. This common mode is used when measuring a device’s response to a test signal and then analyzing its response (e.g., magnitude, phase, distortion) in an Analysis Step. Available Measurement modes Record Padding: add extra time to the Record time Custom Curve Name The Waveforms in the Memory List are named according to the Curve Names in Acquisition Step plus the Signal Path Name. For this, “Use Signal Path Name” must be selected. Figure 14-2: Play and Record Acquisition Step The Channel Name, as seen in the input or output section of the Acquisition Step, is set in the System Calibration Configuration. The resulting Waveform is a combination of the Curve Name plus the Channel Name, as shown in Figure 14-2. The default name, “Recorded Time Waveform”, is used unless a custom curve name is entered. When an Acquisition Step is added to a sequence, you are prompted to select the Input Channel(s) and Output Channel(s). This can also be edited by clicking on the Input/Output Channel buttons. (To select multiple channels, hold down the Control key while clicking on channels.) Tip: 122 When appending Long Channels names to Curve Names it may be a good idea to shorten the curve name. RTW is used in place of Recorded Time Waveform in Figure 14-2. Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual You can choose the specific stimulus to play for each Output Signal Path. The stimulus is selected from the drop down list as shown in Figure 14-3. Note: The sampling rate and the bit depth must be the same for all inputs and outputs of a specific audio interface. Time (sec) In Record mode, Time (sec) specifies the total record time. This is typically used for measuring background noise or noise from the DUT. The minimum Record time is 50 mSeconds. Figure 14-3: Select Stimulus for Output Signal Paths Record Padding (sec) Available in Play & Record mode. This allows you to add extra time to the Record process to capture information beyond the length of the stimulus. This can be used to compensate for "Time of Flight" when there is a great distance between the mic and the source. (Especially useful for Telephony measurements where there can be a long delay due to the signal chain.) Record Delay (sec) With Virtual Instrument modes, the Record Delay (sec) is the time in seconds before the acquisition of signal starts. (Not available in all modes.) Note: SI units are used throughout SoundCheck. A time of 0.5 seconds will be represented as 500 mSec. Curve Name This field allows you to use a custom name for the acquired waveform or curve. (Not available in all modes.) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 123 Use Signal Path Name When this is checked, the acquired waveform or curve will also have the Signal Path name appended to the Curve Name. This can be seen in the Memory List. See Figure 14-4 as an example. (Refer to Display Editor and Memory List on page 279 for more information.) “Use Signal Path Name” Unchecked “Use Signal Path Name“ Checked [Reference Mic] is appended to the name Figure 14-4: Waveform Name in Memory List Stimulus Any stimulus in memory can be selected. (Only available in Play & Record mode.) Input/Output Channel Input and Output Signal Paths are selected here. Any channel that has been set up in the System Calibration Configuration can be selected. Refer to Calibration Configuration on page 65 for more information. Configure Record / Configure Generator Configure Record / Configure Generator is used to set the properties of the Virtual Instruments that are selected in the Mode field. (Not available in all modes.) Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 for more information. Mode Measurements can be made in the following ways: Record a time signal from a device under test (DUT). Play a stimulus into a DUT and record a DUT’s time response. Use the Multimeter, Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer, or Real Time Analyzer (RTA) as stand-alone instruments. (Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 for more details.) Use the Signal Generator in combination with the Multimeter, Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer, or RTA. The Acquisition Step allows you to combine SoundCheck’s Virtual Instruments to play test signals and acquire signals for analysis. The following are the different Acquisition modes available: Figure 14-5: Play and Record Acquisition Step Play & Record Simultaneously play a stimulus and record the time response. This common mode is used when measuring a device’s response to a test signal and then analyzing its response (e.g., magnitude, phase, distortion) in an Analysis Step. See Figure 14-5. 124 Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Record Only When the Acquisition Mode is set to Record, Triggering can be used to automatically capture a spectrum when the signal level exceeds the value set in the “Trigger Level” field. One of the Input Signal Paths can be selected as the Trigger Source. Record Trigger Parameters The Trigger Options are the same as what are available in the Scope FFT Virtual Instrument. Trigger Channel - Any input from the Calibration Table can be used Trigger Level - Sets level of measurement trigger, in either Physical Units or dB If dB is chosen, the trigger threshold is on the positive value of the waveform The trigger level is a Peak value. The trigger value has the same dB reference as the trigger signal path. Figure 14-6: Record Only with Triggered Input Slope - Selects whether Positive going signal triggers before negative going signal Time Out - The amount of time the Acquisition Step should wait for a signal before issuing an error message Trigger Offset - Sets the amount of time that the Acquired Signal is shifted, relative to the point at which it is triggered. A negative offset indicates that the signal will be shifted to the right by the time that is in the field e.g., -100 mSec When recording a time signal (in Record, Play & Record or Oscilloscope mode), the recorded time waveform will appear in the WFM tab of the Memory List. You can give this waveform a custom name in the Acquisition Editor. You can then analyze the recorded time waveform from the DUT, to find the peak SPL, for example. You can also display or save the DUT time signal to disk, using the WAV file format in the Autosave Step, or by using Save Data As… WAV in the Data Menu of the Memory List. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 125 Virtual Instruments Multiple Virtual Instruments can be opened simultaneously in the acquisition step for automation in a sequence. Select Virtual Instruments from the Mode drop down menu This displays a table showing all the virtual instruments in that step Right Click on a row to configure the item Virtual instrument configuration files can be loaded into the acquisition step for quick setup in any sequence Under Panel, select Show to have the Virtual Instrument visible during sequence run or Hide to have it run in the background Figure 14-7: Multiple Virtual Instruments Show/Hide You can’t Hide a Virtual Instrument that is configured to run Continuously or Exponential. The editor must be set to Duration or Linear as shown in Figure 14-8 in order to see the Show/Hide option. Figure 14-8: Show/Hide Panel 126 Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Rules - Virtual Instrument Acquisition Step Configuration When the virtual instruments in a step are set to Run Continuously, they are expecting you to hit the Enter key in order to stop the operation and close the step. If the virtual instruments in a step are set to Run for Duration, Linear, etc, the step will automatically close when the virtual instruments finish. In either case, the step should not be configured to Wait for Confirmation. Right click on the step in the Sequence Editor and Select Configure Step as shown in Figure 14-9 to change the setting. Figure 14-9: Step Configuration Signal Generator The Signal Generator can be used for manual control of a test signal during a sequence, (e.g., audible tuning of a transducer), or playing a WAV file (Refer to the Virtual Instruments on page 407). Specify a Frequency and Output Level for a Sine Wave, or the file path and percentage of the originally recorded level of a WAV file. Select Stimulus type from the drop down menu Select Signal Path Set Stimulus Frequency, and Level in physical units Play a sine wave or a WAV file continuously or for a specified duration of time WAV files can also be configured to play a user defined (N) number of times The WAV file can also be equalized to a target spectrum stored in the System Calibration Configuration (Refer to Signal Generator on page 411 for more information). Sync allows you to Start, Stop and Mute multiple signal generators by clicking on only 1 button. It also synchronizes the phase of sine signals and the start of WAV files. Figure 14-10: Signal Generator Options The EQ output function can be applied to all types of output signals available in the Signal Generator (Sine Wave as well as WAV and noise). When the EQ box is checked the EQ Out Correction curve that is created in the output calibration process is applied to the output signal. This allows you to equalize the response of an artificial mouth or anechoic chamber. EQ out correction curves are populated with data when the Speaker Equalization or Simulated Free Field calibration sequences are selected in the output calibration process. See Equalization and Correction Curve on page 77 in the Calibration chapter. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 127 Multimeter The Multimeter can be used for measuring overall signal level. Choose between linear and exponential averaging and the number of averages you wish to make. Linear - The Multimeter will run for the duration set in the Time field Exponential - The Multimeter will run continuously until you click OK or Cancel in the Multimeter window Averaging Time: Fast (250 mSec), Slow (2 Sec) or User Defined Limits On - The Multimeter Limits function can be used to set a visual Pass/Fail indicator on the multimeter. A Limit Step should be added after the Multimeter Acquisition Step to read the value and put the Result in the Memory List. Hide Panel (Acquistion Step window) - The Multimeter is not shown during the sequence run. If Exponential Averaging is selected, the Hide Panel option is not available since the Virtual Instrument requires user intervention to be stopped. Data Name (Acquistion Step window) - Enter a custom name for the Multimeter Value in the Memory List For more information on the individual controls of the Multimeter refer to Multimeter on page 417. The Multimeter step can generate is the Linear or Log values. These values are dependent on the calibrated values of the signal path selected in the Multimeter. The Pass/Fail state of the Multimeter Acquisition can be used for conditional branching. In some cases you may need to put the Meter in a “loop” while the DUT is being adjusted to produce a passing level. Have the second Limit Step “Jump on fail” back to the first Limit Step. When the level passes, the sequence will continue past the loop. Note: 128 Figure 14-11: Multimeter Options The Multimeter frequency range is the full range of the audio interface based on its sampling rate. The broadband dynamic range of most audio interfaces is limited by their DC offset. Their AC dynamic range is typically much greater and sometimes it makes more sense to use the Spectrum Analyzer and power sum the “frequency range of interest” in a Post-Processing Step. Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Oscilloscope (Scope-FFT/Time) The Oscilloscope can be used to make sure the recorded waveform does not look clipped or distorted. Note that delta µs cannot be changed, since this is based on the sampling rate of the audio interface. If you want the Oscilloscope to run for a preset time, choose Lin and the number of averages multiplied by the record time will determine the total measurement time. If you choose Exp, the Oscilloscope will run continuously until you click OK or Cancel in the Oscilloscope window. If running as a step in a sequence you can click Enter or Stop. If you do not want the Oscilloscope to appear during the sequence, check Hide Panel. As with the Multimeter, if exponential averaging is selected, the Hide Panel option is not available since the Virtual Instrument requires user intervention to be stopped. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Oscilloscope via the Acquisition Step. The minimum Time value is 50 mSec. Calculate Spectrum Off - FFTs are not being done in the background which makes it faster. On - Collect data while the Scope is running and then switch to FFT scope to view or save the spectrum. Note: As of SoundCheck 7, all spectrum are summable. Sequences from versions prior to SoundCheck 7 will need to be revised if Summable Spectrum is selected from the Memory List for use in other steps. Figure 14-12: Oscilloscope Options SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 129 Spectrum Analyzer (Scope-FFT/Spectrum) Note: As of SoundCheck 7, all spectrum are summable. Sequences from versions prior to SoundCheck 7 will need to be revised if Summable Spectrum is selected from the Memory List for use in other steps. The Spectrum Analyzer can be used for analyzing pure tones or noise coming from the DUT, since these signals are typically flat when plotted on a linear frequency scale. Lin will average for only the number of averages entered (e.g., 3). Exp applies an exponential time weighting where Time Sec is the exponential time constant tau (τ). Power averages the RMS amplitude of each FFT bin and excludes phase information. Complex averages the RMS amplitude of each FFT bin but includes phase information. Note that the delta µs is based on the audio interface’s sampling frequency. Because of this, it can only be changed via the audio interface driver and/or switching jumper cables on the see itself. If you do not want the Spectrum Analyzer to appear during the sequence, check Hide Panel. As with the Multimeter, if exponential averaging is selected, the Hide Panel option is not available since the Virtual Instrument requires user intervention to be stopped. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Spectrum Analyzer via the Acquisition Step. FFT record length in seconds and/or number of Spectral lines. Minimum value of 50 mSec. Figure 14-13: Spectrum Analyzer Options The “Snap to Max” button on the Scope-FFT control panel moves Cursor 1 to the peak of the acquired spectrum. The Estimated Frequency and Estimated Level are shown in the fields at the top of the Spectrum Display. This function is available when the mode is set to Time or Spectrum but the cursor location is only shown when the mode is set to Spectrum as shown in Figure 14-13. The Estimated Frequency and Level are shown in either mode. Clicking on the Harmonic Cursor will then plot and show the Harmonics on the FFT display as well as calculate the THD. 130 Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Save to Memory When “Save to Memory” is selected, the FFT Spectrum will be added to the Curves tab in the Memory List. If Snap to Max is selected before hand, the FFT Cursor values will be added to the Memory List: Est. Freq, Est. Level and THD. This value can then be shown in a Display Table as shown in Figure 14-14. Figure 14-14: Memory List - Snap to Max Values Real Time Analyzer The Real Time Analyzer (RTA) analyzes a signal, using constant-percentage bandwidth (1-Nth octave) filters. This can be used to analyze background noise, since it is usually flat when plotted on a log frequency scale. The RTA has 1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, and 1/24 octave digital recursive filters. The upper frequency range is based on the audio interface’s sampling frequency. The highest frequency that can be measured will be no more than one-half the audio interface sampling rate (Fsample). For example, if you are using an audio interface with a 44.1 kHz maximum sampling rate, the maximum measurement you can acquire will be at approximately 22 kHz. The Detector Time determines the time duration of the window to be sampled. Fast sampling averages every 0.25 Sec of data, and Slow averages every 2 Sec of data. You can input your own averaging time by using Other and entering a value in the field to the right. As with the above Virtual Instruments, you can choose Linear or Exponential averaging. Additionally, you can choose A, B, or C Weighting to display, but not save, the overall weighted level of your measurement (this setting will not affect the display or saving of the acquired data). If you do not want the RTA to appear during the sequence, check Hide Panel. As with the Multimeter, if exponential averaging is selected, the Hide Panel option is not available since the Virtual Instrument requires user intervention to be stopped. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Real Time Analyzer via the Acquisition Step. Figure 14-15: RTA Options SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 131 Signal Generator & Multimeter The Signal Generator and Multimeter are typically used for trimming output or input levels on electronic devices, e.g., active loudspeakers or crossovers. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Signal Generator and Multimeter via the Acquisition Step. The Record Delay (sec) allows for a wait time before the Multimeter is started. Record Delay sets the amount of time before the Multimeter is started Create custom curve names Figure 14-16: Generator and Multimeter Figure 14-17: Signal Generator & Multimeter 132 Acquisition Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Generator & Oscilloscope or Generator & Spectrum Analyzer The Signal Generator and Oscilloscope or Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer are used to play and analyze a test signal in a sequence. The Signal Generator produces a constant frequency sine wave, or plays a WAV file. The Oscilloscope displays the time signal on the screen. The Oscilloscope will add the Oscilloscope time record to the WFM tab of the Memory List. The Spectrum Analyzer will add the FFT Spectrum to the Curves tab of the Memory List. Typically, white noise is used as a test signal when analyzing a DUT with a spectrum analyzer, since it is flat when analyzed with constant bandwidth (FFT) filters. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Oscilloscope via the Acquisition Step. Note: All FFT spectrum are summable spectrum as of SoundCheck 7. Figure 14-18: Combine Signal Generator and Oscilloscope or Spectrum Analyzer SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 133 Generator & Real Time Analyzer The Signal Generator and Real Time Analyzer will play and analyze the test signal. Typically, pink noise is used as a test signal when analyzing a DUT with an RTA, since it is flat when analyzed with constant percentage bandwidth (Nth octave) filters. Check Hide Panel if you do not want the Signal Generator or RTA to open when the sequence is run. As with the Multimeter, if exponential averaging is selected, the Hide Panel option is not available, since the Virtual Instrument requires user intervention to be stopped. The RTA will add the 1/Nth Octave RTA to the Curves tab of the Memory List. Refer to Virtual Instruments on page 407 regarding functions available for the Signal Generator or RTA via the Acquisition Step. Figure 14-19: Generator & RTA Read from DC Connect™ When you select Read from DC Connect from the Mode drop down list, the Acquisition Step will read a single measured value from the DC Connect device over the USB interface. Ignore the channel assignment, since the communication with the device is through USB. This type of Acquisition Step would likely follow a Stimulus Step that sets the DC Connect output voltage or current source level. If DC Connect is set up as a voltage source, choose units of mA DC, since the current draw of the load is being measured. If DC Connect is set up as a current source, choose units of V, since the voltage across the load that results from the applied source current is being measured. Figure 14-20: DC Connect Options SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Acquisition Editor 134 Analysis Editor The Analysis Editor (Ctrl+Shift+N) enables you to process measured time signals using a variety of analysis algorithms. Choose an algorithm based on the type of measurement needed. See Algorithms and Suggested Use on page 136 for more information on what measurements are possible with each algorithm. Please note that the HarmonicTrak and Time Selective Response algorithms are optional and only available in advanced versions of SoundCheck®. To view and change the system's analysis settings, select Analysis from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. The Analysis setup allows for a variety of measurement types which generate many different types of curves that can be viewed from the Memory List and further processed in SoundCheck. Note: Apply allows you to change the settings in the editor and apply a new analysis without making a new measurement. The result of the new calculations will appear immediately in Memory List. Features Optimized THD+N algorithm with Traditional and Synthetic Notch Filters - See THD + Noise on page 157 Simplified Polarity measurement - See Simplified Polarity Test on page 178 Curve Resolution is selectable in any FFT based algorithm - See Curve Resolution on page 153 Maximum Valid Harmonic indication - See Max Valid Harmonic on page 147 Impedance Box vs. AmpConnect ISC or SC Amp measurement method is selectable - See Impedance Box Measurement Method on page 169 Loose Particle Algorithm - See Loose Particle on page 174 Loose Particle Relative Envelope - See Absolute or Relative envelope on page 174 Loose Particle Maximum Stimulus Frequency - See Maximum Stimulus Frequency on page 174 Waveform Batch Processing allows a group of waveforms to be analyzed with just one step in a sequence, rather than having to program multiple analysis steps - See Waveform Batch Processing on page 141 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 135 Algorithms The following table shows the algorithms available in SoundCheck along with suggestions for use of each. Algorithm Broadband Feature No filtering other than bandwidth of sound card Stimulus Desired Measurement Stweep Unfiltered Frequency Response, DC values Application Some Hearing Aid standards, DC Connect measurements General purpose: near field acoustic or electronics measurements Most often used for noise measurements background noise of microphones or electronics Near field acoustic or electronics measurements DualChannel (Transfer Function) Can be used with program material Noise, speech or music Frequency Response, Phase, Non-Coherent Distortion, Impedance, Impulse Response FFT Spectrum Single Channel Noise Response spectrum Stweep Frequency Response, Phase, Harmonic Distortion, Impedance Stweep Frequency Response, Phase, Impedance High precision frequency response measurements Frequency Response, Phase, Non-Coherent Distortion, Impedance Input, Output Nth Octave Spectrum and Nth Octave Frequency Response Fast frequency response measurements Very useful for telephony and devices with DSP, Some Hearing Aid standards Frequency Response, Phase, Harmonic Distortion, Impedance, Impulse Response Measurement of acoustic devices in a real room HarmonicTrak Heterodyne Tracks level and phase of any userselected harmonics Measure frequency and phase response with optimal accuracy Plays a group of tones simultaneously Multitone RTA Spectrum Nth octave spectrum Noise, speech or music Time Selective Response (TSR) Simulated Free Field - Suppress the effects of reflections in an ordinary room, Fast Log Sweep Multitone Figure 15-1: Algorithms and Suggested Use Note: 136 Time Envelope and Loose Particles are available in all algorithms. See Figure 15-2: Appropriate Algorithm vs. Desired Measurement. Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appropriate Algorithm vs. Desired Measurement Noise X Heterodyne Time Selective Response Transfer Functions Multitone RTA Spectrum Frequency Response Harmonic Trak Desired Measurement FFT Spectrum Broadband RMS You can select options from the Analysis Editor to add curves and single values in the sequence. For example, checking the Loose Particles box will add a Loose Particle Count single value to the Memory List. In the Analysis Editor, many of the options become available only when an appropriate algorithm is selected. Figure 15-2: Appropriate Algorithm vs. Desired Measurement, shows a chart displaying available measurements when each algorithm is active. X X X X X X X Harmonic Distortion X X X Non-Coherent Distortion Impedance Loose Particles X X X DC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Impulse Response Time Envelope X X X Figure 15-2: Appropriate Algorithm vs. Desired Measurement SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 137 Curve Names SoundCheck allows you to alter the curve names created in the Analysis Step through the Curve Names tab. Highlight the default names and enter custom names for your curves and single values. This may be especially helpful when using multiple Analysis Steps to measure multiple Stimuli, in a single sequence or in subsequences. If two Analysis Steps in the same sequence have the same curve name, the 2nd Analysis Step will append a 2 in front of the curve name, e.g.; 2-Fundamental, 3-Fundamental, and so on. Add Input Data Name - Select to append the Input Waveform name to the curve name, e.g.; Fundamental + (Recorded Time Waveform) Use Signal Path Name - Select to append the Signal Path name to the curve name, e.g.; Fundamental + (Dut Mic) Use Default - Select to delete changes to all curve names. The Custom Curve Names field will be grayed out and revert the names back to their original state. No edits will be possible. To create edits, uncheck the Use Default box. Note: Changing curve names in an existing sequence may affect your displays. Figure 15-3: Use Default Curve Names For example: Fundamental (DUT Mic) was originally selected to display on the XY Graph The curve name is then changed to Model ABC Frequency Response (DUT Mic), The display will cease to display Fundamental (DUT Mic) You then need to open your Display Step and Memory list. Then drag Model ABC Frequency Response (DUT Mic) to the appropriate XY Graph. Naming - Best Practices Selecting Add Input Data Name and Use Signal Path Name can create long file names that are difficult to read in the Memory List. We recommend that shorter names should be used in the Calibration Editor and the Acquisition Steps if you plan to append the Input Data Name or Signal Path Name. For example: Calibration Signal Path = Reference Mic SCM 3 SN 1234. Selecting Use Signal Path Name as in Figure 15-3 results in a Memory List name of: Fundamental [Reference Mic SCM 3 SN 1234]. An alternative would be to name the Signal Path: RefMic-SN1234 which yields a Memory List name of: Fundamental [RefMic-SN1234] Long Acquisition names can cause similar problems when Use Signal Path Name is selected in the Acquisition Step. This can result in a Memory List data name of: Fundamental (Recorded Time Wave Form [Reference Mic SCM 3 SN 1234]) 1. Further post processing of the data can result in even longer names, so shortening names in Analysis can be beneficial. 2. It can be helpful to abbreviate the Waveform Name in Acquisition to RTW, especially when Use Signal Path Name is selected in Acquisition. 3. Additionally, shortening the Curve Names in the Analysis Curves Tab can help make data names shorter and easier to manage. 138 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual View Modes The Analysis editor has two modes to view step information: Simple and Advanced. Figure 15-4 shows the low level information that is provided in Simple View. This is the default view. Figure 15-4: Analysis Editor - Simple View Additional settings can be accessed by switching to Advanced View as shown in Figure 15-5. The settings of the items on these screens is active whether the view is Advanced or Simple. Figure: 15-5 Analysis Editor - Advanced View SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 139 Waveforms Apply is used to update the Memory List with the new results and curves. You can also change the settings in the Analysis Step and then click Apply to run a new analysis without making a new measurement. This analysis can be applied to any waveform in the Memory List by selecting it in the Response - Waveform In section. Seven Algorithms for analyzing time domain signals Relative response is the response level divided by the stimulus level Absolute Response is the response level only All waveforms in memory appear in the Waveform drop down menus Select the desired Stimulus from the Waveform Out drop down menu Select the Response from the Waveform In menu that is related to the selected Stimulus Apply allows you to change the settings and apply a new analysis without making a new measurement. The result of calculation will appear immediately in Memory List Relative or Absolute Relative response is the response level divided by the stimulus level. The response is stimulus level independent or “normalized” to the input level. When increasing the input level, the relative response amplitude level will not change if the system is linear, because the output level will increase by the same amount as the stimulus level. Sensitivity measurements use Relative. This is also useful when looking at compression. Figure 15-6: Analysis Setup Absolute Response is the response level only and is stimulus level dependent. i.e.: If the stimulus increases from 1 Volts to 2 Volts, there will be a 6 dB output level increase. Max SPL measurements use Absolute. Apply Correction Checking the Apply Correction boxes will apply the input or output correction curves to the input or output signal, as part of the analysis process. This is particularly useful for removing the response curve of an amplifier from a loudspeaker test as well as removing the response of the measurement microphone. This is not the same thing as an Equalization Curve. (See Equalization and Correction Curve on page 77.) It occurs in Analysis, after the signal has been acquired. Apply Correction In This is usually checked if you are using a reference microphone in your test and you have imported the correction curve for that specific microphone (usually supplied by the manufacturer). Another less common usage is to import a correction curve for an ear simulator, like a free-field or diffuse-field correction curve for a manikin. 140 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Apply Correction Out Generally, this is always checked unless you have a very specific exception. Here are the two most common scenarios: Microphone Test - When testing microphones you have likely equalized a loudspeaker. In this case the output correction is the remaining few tenths of a dB that the equalization was unable to flatten. In this case the EQ will be accounting for 99% of the loudspeaker response, and the correction accounts for that last 1%. You will probably not even notice it. Loudspeaker Test - When testing a loudspeaker using an external amplifier, the amp needs to be calibrated. During the calibration SoundCheck creates an output correction curve that compensates for the magnitude and phase response of the amp. The magnitude is typically very flat, but the phase curve is not. Having the Apply Correction Out checked compensates for this phase response. Waveform Batch Processing 1 Waveform batch processing is a powerful analysis tool that enables a group of waveforms to be analyzed with just one step in a sequence, rather than having to program multiple analysis steps. This significantly simplifies sequences with multichannel acquisition. The feature is also available in offline mode where multiple waveforms can be grouped together in a custom group and the batch processing operand applied to all simultaneously. Such offline analysis may be useful for detailed analysis of production line data. To help distinguish the output curves and values, the name of the response waveform can optionally be appended to the resulting data via a new option to “Add Input Data Name”. The following procedure should be used for Waveform Batch Processing: (See Figure 15-7) 1. In the sequence Memory List create a Custom Group of the waveforms This example shows a group named “Multichannel“. The number of curves in the group is indicated by the value in parenthesis (4), which is added automatically. 2 2. In the Analysis Step > Waveform Tab > under Waveform In > select custom group: Multichannel (4), from the drop down list 3. Switch to the Curves Tab, select “Add Input Data Name“ to append this to the Output Curve Name 3 This makes identifying the output curves much easier. 4. After the Analysis step runs the output curves are populated in the Memory List 4 Figure 15-7: Batch Process Procedure SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 141 Algorithm Details You can select an algorithm from the drop down list at the top of the Analysis Editor. Algorithm details start on page. Figure 15-8: Algorithm Broadband RMS This algorithm does not utilize any filtering. This measures the total RMS energy at each excitation frequency. The upper frequency limit used to determine the total RMS energy is based on the audio interface's sampling rate. For example, at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz, the upper frequency limit is approximately 22 kHz. Please note that this value is also influenced by the audio interface's anti-aliasing filter. Typically the highest usable frequency is 45% of the maximum sampling rate. Uses include measuring buzzers and other harmonically-rich devices. To measure OSPL on hearing aids according to ANSI S3.22 and other similar standards, you must use this algorithm. FFT Spectrum The spectrum algorithm calculates an averaged FFT of the response waveform. This is performed according to the Frequency Resolution Weighting and Overlap settings in the editor. This algorithm can be used to measure the background noise prior to applying a stimulus to the Device Under Test (DUT). Resolution The default resolution of 20 Hz requires a measurement length of at least 0.1 Second. A resolution of 1 Hz requires a measurement length of at least 1 Second. The resolution is inversely proportional to the time required. Figure 15-9: Default Resolution When acquiring the signal with a Play/Record Acquisition step the following should be selected in the Waveform Tab of the Analysis Step: Waveform In = Recorded Time Waveform of the Acquisition Waveform Out = Stimulus Waveform of the Acquisition The resolution is determined by the length of the stimulus waveform (See Figure 15-10) Figure 15-10: Waveform Selection Play/Record 142 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual When acquiring the signal with a Record Only Acquisition step (See Figure 15-11) The Waveform In and Out should be the Recorded Time Waveform of the Acquisition Note: Warning! A resolution smaller than 1 Hz can require a great amount of system memory. Out of memory errors may result. Figure 15-11: Waveform Selection Record Only Weighting The Weighting function selected will also set default values for the Overlap Percentage. Figure 15-12 shows the selections of the Time Tab for Spectrum Analysis. It also includes a table of Weighting and the Default Overlap Percentage. Weighting Type Select proper weighting window type Refer to Table of Weighting Window Applications on page 153 for more information Default Overlap % None 0 Hanning 4 Term BlackmanHarris 7 Term BlackmanHarris 75 85 90 Figure: 15-12 Weighting and Default Overlap % SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 143 Spectral Scaling RMS - The result is the RMS level according to the FFT resolution. This is best used for Pure Tone/Sine measurements. Spectral Density - The result is independent of the frequency resolution of the FFT. This is used for noise based measurements, e.g., Self Noise, noise stimulus, speech or music. The unit of the result will be: InputUnits ---------------------------Hz Note: Custom Units can be used to simplify the Spectral Density unit, e.g., “dB V“ instead of “dB V/sqrt(Hz)”. Figure 15-13: Spectral Scaling HarmonicTrak™ This module allows multiple harmonics to be measured in one stepped-sine sweep (Stweep™). You would also choose this algorithm in order to measure the DUT's THD and/or Rub & Buzz distortion characteristics. To choose a specific range of Harmonics, click Edit List in the Editor (See THD w H2, H3 on page 154) This measures the levels of any harmonic or sub-harmonic when using sinusoidal excitation. This algorithm also includes Two Tone distortion and normalized distortion. Figure 15-14: HarmonicTrak 144 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Heterodyne This is the same algorithm used in the Brüel & Kjær Type 2010 and 2012 analyzers. This algorithm is very accurate but, unlike HarmonicTrak, it cannot measure the harmonics and fundamental simultaneously. It serves as an alternative to HarmonicTrak, when distortion measurements are not required or when the distortion module is not available. Heterodyne measures just the fundamental response using sinusoidal excitation with excellent background noise rejection and fast calculation speed. Detection in synchronous A Quadrature Detector is employed, i.e., mixing or multiplication is by both sine and cosine, in order to obtain the phase for the complete complex steady state response. Figure 15-15: Heterodyne Time Selective Response (TSR) This module enables time selective measurements with a logarithmically swept sine wave, which can be used for simulated free-field measurements in non-anechoic environments. By removing the stimulus from the response waveform (deconvolution operation) the global impulse response is calculated directly, and from that, the frequency response is determined. The result of the deconvolution process can be added to the Memory List by selecting ”Deconvolved Response” in the time tab. See Deconvolved Response on page 181 for more information. Note: The time window used by the Time Selective Response algorithm has a 10% taper at each end. The Fundamental Impulse Response must be inside these tapers. See Figure 15-62: TSR Window Cosine Taper on Pg 181 for more information. In just one sweep, the free-field response of the fundamental and harmonics can be measured and analyzed (See Time Selective Measurements With Log Sweep on page 527 for technical details). This algorithm is only available when using a Frequency Log Sweep in the Stimulus Step of the current sequence. Please note that the Frequency Log Sweep must sweep from low to high frequency. Use this to measure free-field frequency response without requiring an anechoic environment. The Impulse response of the fundamental can be displayed using linear or log amplitude. Figure 15-16: Curve Resolution SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 145 Curve Resolution This is the Base Resolution for the analysis. e.g.: 10 Hz The Resolution can be set to a number of predetermined ranges or User Defined Log or User Defined Lin. This allows you to manually set the resolution of the result curve as shown in Figure 15-16. Start and Stop Time Selection You can enter values in the Start and Stop Time fields from the Time Tab. This determines the Windowed Resolution. See example below. See TSR Window on page 181 for instructions. TSR Window Type Adrienne is the default. Other available types are: None, Cosine Tapered, Half-Cosine Tapered, Exponential, Half-Hanning and HalfBH4. Windowed Resolution (Hz) This can be considered "Smoothing" rather than interpolation. e.g.: 66.7 Hz Figure 15-17: Memory List Start/Stop Time For example: Figure 15-16 and Figure 15-17 show the Curve Resolution set to 10 Hz and the Windowed Resolution at 66.7 Hz. The Windowed Resolution always takes priority over Curve Resolution. BT=1 (Bandwidth x Time equals unity) This means that the “truly realizable frequency resolution” is determined by the reciprocal of the measured signal duration (F=1/T). So even if you measure for many seconds, what matters is the time from the beginning of your impulse response to the end of the time window. Think of the actual frequency response Curve Resolution as oversampling and the time Windowed Resolution as smoothing. Good old fashion chart recorders had something similar relating to the pen and paper speed. If the paper speed was too fast, the effect was like curve smoothing. If the pen moved too fast, the effect was like oversampling. 146 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Memory List Selection This allows the window to be set dynamically during the sequence using recalled or calculated values rather than fixed. You can use two message steps prior to the TSR Analysis Step to set the desired Start and Stop times. The operator can be prompted to enter the Start and Stop times during the run of the sequence. Right click on the Start and Stop Time fields and click on Memory List Selection as shown in Figure 15-17. TSR requires a LogTSR Stimulus A faster LogTSR stimulus with a choice of time windows enables LogTSR testing of loudspeakers, microphones, etc. at production line throughput rates up to six times as fast as earlier versions. The TSR window waveform is output in the Memory List and can be displayed on top of the impulse response or the deconvolved response to check the time alignment. Max Valid Harmonic The maximum valid harmonic is the maximum harmonic order that can be time separated from its immediate harmonic neighbors. This is a function of the Start Time, Stop Time and Sweep Rate. (This is the Maximum Harmonic that can be selected while still having a valid result.) While Log TSR sweeps are a popular test method, users unfamiliar with this method may inadvertently miss important measurement details by sweeping too fast. For example, a given combination of window size and speed may be adequate for measuring Rub & Buzz, but insufficient to enable analysis of individual harmonics. The new indicator shows the maximum harmonic that can be selected independently of its neighbors. The indicator, while it does not place any restrictions on your ability to define the speed and window size, will offer an advisory when the settings are such that individual harmonics will not be accurately calculated. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor Figure 15-18: Max Valid Harmonic 147 Transfer Functions Stimulus Response Dual-Channel spectrum analysis yields the true transfer function between the input and output. This technique should be used mainly with broadband stimulus such as noise. However, it could also be used with arbitrary waveforms such as voice or music. Spectral Scaling Spectral Density should be used and is necessary for determining NonCoherent Distortion. Refer to Spectral Scaling on page 144 for more information. A scan FFT is performed in parallel on x(t) and y(t), which yields to two series of spectrum: {X0, X1,… , XN-1} and {Y0, Y1,… , YN-1}. By averaging these spectrum together we get: Auto-spectrum: G XX = E XX Stimulus Average Power Spectrum E[.] is the mean and X denotes the complex conjugate of X. Auto-spectrum: G YY = E YY Response Average Power Spectrum Cross-spectrum: G XY = E XY Stimulus/Response Average Cross Spectrum The average cross-spectrum between stimulus & response. Frequency Response: G XY An unbiased estimator when noise is present at the output. H 1 = ---------G XX Impulse Response: –1 h1( t ) = ℑ [ H1( f ) ] Response of the DUT to an ideally short impulse. ℑ –1 is the inverse Fourier Transform. Coherence & Non-coherence: 2 G XY γ = ---------------------G XX G YY 2 1-γ2, these functions give you the degree of linear relationship between the stimulus and response for each frequency. 148 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Coherent Power (CP) 2 CP = γ ⋅ G YY CP is the part of GYY which is linearly related to the stimulus. Non-Coherent Power (NCP) 2 NCP = ( 1 – γ ) ⋅ G YY NCP is the part of GYY which is not linearly related to the stimulus, such as noise and distortion. Signal to Noise Ratio: 2 γ CP SNR = -------------2 = ----------NCP 1–γ The Signal to Noise Ratio is the ratio at each frequency, between the power linearly related to the stimulus and the part non-linearly related, such as noise and distortion. Non-Coherent Distortion in % NCP NCD ( f ) = 100 ---------------- GYY The NCD gives the proportion of noise and distortion which is present in the f Response Spectrum GYY. It is a function of frequency. Making a power sum of it with Post-processing will give you a single Noise & Distortion number. The NCD function used along with multitone or noise stimulus will give you a global assessment of the non-linearizes of your DUT. Auto Correlation of Stimulus: –1 C xx ( t ) = ℑ [ G XX ( f ) ] Stimulus Auto Correlation The peak value is equal to the total power of the stimulus. Auto Correlation of Response: –1 C yy ( t ) = ℑ [ G YY ( f ) ] Response Auto Correlation The peak value is equal to the total power of the response. Cross Correlation of Stimulus and Response: –1 C xy ( t ) = ℑ [ G XY ( f ) ] Stimulus & Response Cross Correlation SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The position of the peak yields the delay of the input to the output. Analysis Editor 149 Multitone The results are similar to Dual-Channel Analysis but the Frequency Response is the amplitude and phase of only the tones that are present. Because all the tones are analyzed in parallel, Multitone is the fastest way to get the Frequency Response. Regarding distortion; because a Multitone stimulus has a rich frequency content (like "real-life" signals, e.g., music), it produces more realistic distortion components. Using Multitone, the Non-Coherent Distortion curve yields a quick and global distortion assessment of the DUT. In addition, one can make the Power Sum (using Post-Processing) of the Non-Coherent Distortion curve to get a single percentage. That number quantifies the global Distortion & Noise present at the DUT and can be used as a quality figure. Spectral Scaling In most cases, RMS should be used since Multitone is a collection of fixed sine tones. Spectral Density should be used and is necessary for determining Non-Coherent Distortion. Refer to Spectral Scaling on page 144 for more information. Applying EQ In Dual Channel and Multitone Analysis, the frequency response of the DUT is normally obtained by dividing the Response Spectrum (Y) by the Spectrum at the input of the DUT (X). Frequency Response = Y ---X When EQ is applied in the Stimulus Step, the Spectrum at the input of DUT (X) is assumed to be the Stimulus Spectrum (S) divided by the EQ Curve (EQ). Y Frequency Response = -------------S ⁄ EQ 150 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Complex vs. Power Averaging For Dual-Channel and Multitone Analysis, the cross-spectrum yields the average phase relationship between input and output. The cross-spectrum is calculated when the Complex Averaging option is selected from the Frequency tab of the Analysis Editor. See Figure 15-19: Complex vs. Power Averaging. Figure 15-19: Complex vs. Power Averaging Complex is selected by default. Cross-spectrum cannot be used when making measurements on devices with non-stable phase due to frequency shift or jitter (e.g., Bluetooth headsets or MP3 players). As an alternative, select Power, which gives an estimate of the frequency response based on the Auto-Spectra only. In this case, the cross-spectrum is not calculated so phase information is no longer available and the list of analysis functions is reduced. When Power is selected, the following functions are available in the Analysis Editor: Auto Spectrum - Stimulus and Response Frequency Response (Magnitude Only) Time Envelope (Time Tab) Auto Correlation - Stimulus and Response (Time Tab - Dual-Channel only) The Complex and Power options apply only to Dual-channel and Multitone Analysis. Note: A faster frequency shift algorithm with output of the jitter curve in the Memory List offers increased testing speeds for digital devices which have their own digital clock. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 151 RTA Spectrum In addition to calculating the RTA spectrum of the response waveform, the RTA analysis algorithm now allows the option to calculate the spectrum of the stimulus as well as the overall frequency response (comparing the response to the stimulus). This is useful when analyzing non-stationary signals, for example speech signals in telephony where compensation needs to be made for a non-flat stimulus. The RTA Algorithm applies the RTA filter bank on the selected response waveform and yields the average 1/n octave spectrum in the Memory List. The advantage of this method over the RTA virtual instrument is that the analysis is perfectly synchronized with the stimulus, and the averaging time fits exactly to the length of the waveform. This eliminates the need for several stimulus repetitions and reduces the total test time. This algorithm yields the exact same response spectrum measured with the RTA virtual instrument, and it conforms to the ANSI S1.11 - 2004 class 0 standard. Figure 15-20: RTA Spectrum This can also be used to perform a multichannel acquisition and analysis of the stimulus, which yields a synchronized RTA spectrum for all channels, with only one run of the stimulus. It is sometimes difficult to start the RTA virtual instrument at exactly the right time to capture the desired spectrum. This process eliminates such a synchronization problem. For example: Play P50 speech only one time Record two channels (send and receive or left and right) Figure 15-21: RTA Spectrum Graph Both spectrums are synchronous since they were recorded at the same time The RTA spectrum for both channels requires only two analysis steps The algorithm processing time has been optimized to reduce sequence runtime In addition to calculating the RTA spectrum of the response waveform, the RTA analysis algorithm also allows the option to calculate the spectrum of the stimulus as well as the overall frequency response (comparing the response to the stimulus). Spectra - Select to output either of the RTA curves to the Memory List Functions - Select Frequency Response to output the curve to the Memory List Applying EQ In RTA Spectrum Analysis, the frequency response of the DUT is normally obtained by dividing the Response Spectrum (Y) by the Spectrum at the input of the DUT (X). When EQ is applied in the Stimulus Step, the Spectrum at the input of DUT (X) is assumed to be the Stimulus Spectrum (S) divided by the EQ Curve (EQ). Figure 15-22: RTA Spectrum Settings Y Frequency Response = Y ---- = -------------X S ⁄ EQ 152 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Settings Curve Resolution Curve Resolution is available for all FFT based frequency curves: LogTSR, Spectrum, Transfer Functions and Multitone. Selecting 1/Nth Octave resolution automatically sets the resolution of the curves that are output by the sequence, and performs smoothing on those curves. This resolution change reduces the number of points in the resulting curve, making the sequence operate faster. Preset selections: 1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24 octave (ISO frequencies) User Defined lin (Hz) For backward compatibility, Analysis Steps from previous versions of SoundCheck will copy the frequency resolution value from the old version into the User defined lin resolution field. Figure 15-23: Curve Resolution User Defined log (1/n oct) Allows you to define the 1/Nth octave resolution. Distortion Weighting HarmonicTrak uses a step FFT analysis: at each sine step of the response, a weighting window is applied and an FFT is performed. The available Weighting Window types are: Hanning, 4 Term Blackman-Harris and 7 Term Blackman-Harris. The performances of the windows are shown in Figure 15-24: Table of Weighting Window Applications. Min Cycles per Step Min H2 Lowest Measurable Distortion Hanning 5 -40 dB 1.0% General purpose, high-speed but sidelobe attenuation is low compared to other windows Blackman-Harris 4 Term 10 -90 dB 0.003% More precise but require more time. Good for most electroacoustic measurements. Blackman-Harris 7 Term 15 -120 dB 0.0001% Most precise due to greatest attenuation of side lobes. Best window to use when measuring very low distortion devices, such as electronic circuits and products. Weighting Window Type Comment Figure 15-24: Table of Weighting Window Applications SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 153 Harmonic Distortion Harmonics The Harmonics field value indicates the harmonic number; 1 is the fundamental, 2 is the 2nd harmonic, etc. Select which harmonics to measure, either individually or as a group. You can also measure sub-harmonics, e.g., 0.5 harmonic. Use the Edit List button to modify list preferences. Note: Checking 1 in the Harmonics list of the Analysis Editor does not change the analysis process. The Fundamental is always available, even if 1 is not checked. Data added to Memory List is shown in the Curves Tab. Default names are: Fundamental, Harmonic 2, Harmonic 3, etc. These can be shortened if you are checking “Add Input Data Name” or “Use Signal Path Name”. Figure 15-25: THD w H2, H3 Edit List This button enables modification of the list of harmonics. To add a single harmonic, enter the single harmonic value (e.g., 5) and click Add. To enter a range (e.g., 10 through 15) enter the starting harmonic in the box to the left of the To button. Then click To and enter the ending harmonic. Clicking Add will add the harmonic family to the list. Figure 15-26: Edit List 154 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Harmonics Plotted at Actual Measured Frequency Traditionally, the harmonics of the signal are displayed at the excitation frequency. When Harmonics at measured frequency is selected, harmonics will be displayed on the XY Graph at the actual measured frequency. By displaying the shifted harmonics and the Fundamental, one can determine whether harmonic amplitude levels increase or decrease due to amplitude changes in the frequency response or are actual increases or decreases in distortion energy. THD and Rub & Buzz distortion calculated using the amplitude normalized distortion method removes the effects of DUT's frequency response modifying distortion levels. For more information, please see: How to Graph Distortion Measurements by Steve F.Temme, found at the Listen website, https:// www.listeninc.com/how-to-graph-distortionmeasurements/ In Harmonics at Actual Measured Frequency on page 155 you can see the harmonics plotted at actual measured frequencies. Figure 15-27: Harmonics at Actual Measured Frequency Total Distortion Total Distortion (TD) is the power sum of all the harmonics selected in the Analysis Step. It is presented in the units of the Harmonics themselves. It represents the level of distortion at each excitation frequency. The calculation is based on the Harmonics selected in the Analysis Editor. TD = 2 2 2 ( H2 + H3 + … + Hn ) Total Distortion References: Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). All above equations are a function of frequency (f) n indicates the distortion order F is the Fundamental (aka H1) Figure 15-28: Total Distortion Hn is the harmonic of nth order SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 155 Total Harmonic Distortion Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) is the percentage of the total signal that is affected by distortion due to the harmonics. Total Distortion (TD) is referenced in the equations. See Total Distortion on page 155. Selecting IEC method means that the distortion ratio is the power sum of the distortion components divided by the total input power (fundamental + distortion components). The square root of this ratio is presented in percent. The distortion is always <100%. TD % THD = 100 × -------------------------2 2 F + TD Total Harmonic Distortion in % (IEC) Selecting IEEE method means that the distortion ratio is the power sum of the distortion components divided by the power of the fundamental. The square root of this ratio is presented in percent. The distortion may be >100%. (The IEEE standard allows for this method and what is described as the IEC method mentioned above.) Figure 15-29: THD TD% THD = 100 × ------F Total Harmonic Distortion in % (IEEE) (See Intermodulation and Difference Distortion on page 164 for more options). The THD measurement only takes into account the harmonics selected in the Analysis Step Distortion tab. Note: Checking 1 in the Harmonics list of the Analysis Editor does not change the analysis process. The Fundamental is always available, even if 1 is not checked. References: Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). All above equations are a function of frequency (f) n indicates the distortion order F is the Fundamental (aka H1) Hn is the harmonic of nth order N is Noise 156 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual THD + Noise Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise (THD+N) is a measurement that expresses the ratio of all the harmonic and noise energy to the total signal. DC is excluded. As of SoundCheck 16, the THD+N algorithm has been improved as follows: Accurate THD+N measurements can now be made with far shorter stimulus times The notch filter used complies with AES17 and will produce identical results to alternative measurement systems Optionally, a Synthetic Notch Filter will produce more accurate and much faster results User defined High Pass and Low Pass filters are available to define the bandwidth of the measurement Controls: Checking THD+Noise (%) produces a curve in the Memory List. If High Pass Filter is unchecked, no High Pass filter is applied If the Low Pass Filter is not checked a default low pass filter defined by the Anti-alias Frequency set in Hardware Editor is used If High Pass Filter is checked, you are able to set the low frequency limit of the measurement High-pass filter is Elliptic, Brick Wall, 5th order. The Corner Frequency is set in the Corner (Hz) field. Default value is 10Hz. Low-pass filter is Elliptic, Brick Wall, 8th order. The Corner Frequency is set in the Corner (Hz) field. Default value is 20kHz. Note: Figure 15-30: THD+N The THD+N algorithm requires a Stimulus Step Minimum Duration of 20 mSec. Any time discarded in Analysis requires a corresponding increase in Stimulus Step Duration. Measurement Accuracy and Repeatability The key to measuring THD+N accurately is to understand that the Noise component is a broadband measurement. The Step Size defined for the stimulus must be sufficiently long in time to accurately measure a signal at the High Pass Frequency. In addition, if the device is noise dominated, to produce repeatable measurements will require a long Step Size in order to average the random noise. Example: The high pass frequency is set to 20 Hz. The Step Size cannot be less than 1 cycle or 50 mSec. The practical minimum Step Size would be 3 cycles or 150 mSec. To account for typical transients between sweep steps, would normally require 5 cycles or 250 mSec. For a typical noise dominated electronic device, dwell times of 1 second or more may be required for repeatable measurements. These time constants will scale with the High Pass frequency. See Transition Discard Time on page 179. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 157 THD+N Equations THD+N IEC 2 2 2 2 H2 + H 3 + … + H n + N -------------------------------------------------------------------------% THD+N = 100 × 2 2 2 2 2 F + H2 + H 3 + … + H n + N Total Harmonic Distortion in % (IEC) THD+N IEEE 2 2 2 2 H2 + H 3 + … + H n + N % THD+N = 100 × --------------------------------------------------------------F Total Harmonic Distortion in % (IEEE) Figure 15-31: THD+N Virtual Instrument THD+N Options THD+N Residual - The level of all the noise and distortion products in the measurement bandwidth SINAD - Is the reciprocal of THD+N, if and only if THD+N is calculated without High and Low Pass filters in the Analysis Editor P signal + P noise + P distortion SINAD = ---------------------------------------------------------------P noise + P distortion SINAD (Signal to noise and distortion ratio) References: Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). All above equations are a function of frequency (f) n indicates the distortion order F is the Fundamental (aka H1) Hn is the harmonic of nth order N is Noise Pn is the Average Power of the n component 158 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Rub & Buzz Rub & Buzz is the power sum of all harmonics selected above the 9th harmonic divided by the fundamental. Harmonics 10 and higher are the main contributors to the audible rub and buzz even though lower order harmonics may be higher in level. For more information refer to: Are you Shipping Defective Speakers to your Customers by Steve F. Temme, found on the Listen website. Hn ( f ) 2 ≥ 10 Rub & Buzz ( f ) = 100 n---------------------------------H1 ( f ) 2 Rub and Buzz in % Normalized THD or Normalized Rub and Buzz An alternate algorithm for the THD and Rub & Buzz measurements is calculated using the harmonics after re-plotting them at the actual measured frequency of their signals (See Harmonics Plotted at Actual Measured Frequency on page 155). The % THD and % Rub & Buzz is then calculated using the following methods: THD Normalized Equation Normalized THD ( f ) = 100 Normalized THD in % n≠1 Figure 15-32: Rub and Buzz Hn ( f ) 2 ------------------H1 ( n f ) Rub & Buzz Normalized Equation Normalized Rub & Buzz ( f ) = 100 Normalized Rub and Buzz in % n ≥ 10 Hn ( f ) 2 -------------------H1 ( n f ) The values of THD Normalized and Rub & Buzz Normalized can be compared to the Harmonic “n” shifted curves (where “n” is from 2 to your highest harmonic requested). The formulas above use the IEEE method. The IEC method can also be used. Please Refer to Intermodulation and Difference Distortion on page 164 for information on IEC vs. IEEE. References: Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). All above equations are a function of frequency (f) n indicates the distortion order H1 (or F) is the Fundamental Hn is the harmonic of nth order SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 159 Rules - Normalized THD/Normalized Rub and Buzz Even though your response measurement may go to 20 kHz, Normalized THD measurements stop at 10 kHz. For a normalized distortion measurement, the maximum measured frequency is the stimulus frequency divided by the highest order harmonic being measured. For example: if you are sweeping up to 20 kHz and measuring the 2nd through 5th harmonic (as is common for THD measurements): the 2nd harmonic distortion product will be measured up to 10 kHz, the 3rd up to 6.67 kHz, the 4th up to 5 kHz and the 5th up to 4 kHz. Your measurement will therefore stop at 10 kHz as you have no normalized harmonic distortion components calculated above this frequency. You should also be aware that above 4 kHz, you are not including all the harmonics. In other words, it is impossible to normalize (ratio) the “harmonics at their measured frequencies” to the fundamental, at stimulus frequencies not present in the measurement. [i.e., If the stimulus range does not include the frequency range of high order harmonics.] In regular Rub and Buzz, the ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental are compared at the stimulus frequency but still have to be within the passband (Alias free Freq) of the sampling rate. Please refer to the following papers on the Listen website: Harmonic Distortion Measurement: The effects of sampling rate and stimulus frequency on the measured harmonic frequency (including THD and Rub & Buzz) by Steve F. Temme. How to Graph Distortion Measurements by Steve F. Temme. Measure Relative to Fundamental Only THD and Rub & Buzz measurements can be calculated using one of two methods. Choose IEC to include the fundamental and all the harmonics (Total Distortion) in the denominator (typically used in Europe), or IEEE to use the fundamental (first harmonic, typically used in the USA). These are selected in the bottom section of the Analysis Editor - HarmonicTrak Algorithm - Distortion Tab as shown in Figure 15-33. Figure 15-33: THD and Rub & Buzz Selections 160 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Perceptual Rub & Buzz - CLEARTM Distortion Measurement (optional module required) The new CLEAR (Cepstral Loudness Enhanced Algorithm for Rub & Buzz) algorithm from Listen offers true Perceptual Rub & Buzz analysis for production line applications. This is selected in the bottom section of the Analysis Editor - Distortion Tab as shown in Figure 15-34. Note: The Distortion Tab is only available for the HarmonicTrak and Time Selective Response algorithms. It uses a simplified auditory perceptual model to measure the loudness of Rub & Buzz distortion in phons rather than the more traditional dB SPL and % distortion units. These better identify whether distortion due to manufacturing defects can be heard by the listener than conventional measurements. In addition to a result which corresponds more accurately to the human ear, this new test method also offers two significant advantages for use on the production line: It is less sensitive to transient background noises than traditional methods, therefore is reliable in noisy environments It is much simpler to set limits than when using conventional distortion measurements Figure 15-34: Perceptual Rub & Buzz Important! As of SoundCheck 11.0, a threshold was added to the Perceptual Rub & Buzz algorithm that will output zero if that threshold isn’t met. In this case it is normal to see a flat line at 0 Phons. See Comparison on page 162. Perceptual vs. Conventional Rub & Buzz Conventional Rub & Buzz detection has been widely used on the production line since Listen introduced it in SoundCheck Version 1 back in 1996. It offers excellent identification of Rub and Buzz defects caused by manufacturing problems, and will continue to do so. In recent years, some manufacturers have moved to a defect detection model where they prefer only speakers with audible faults to fail QC checks. This is because yields are higher when only speakers with audible faults are rejected rather than any faults at all. Perceptual Rub & Buzz offers a means of identifying and precisely quantifying this with all the benefits and reliability of an automated test system. Perceptual Rub & Buzz using the CLEAR™ algorithm shows audible distortion more clearly. Traditional Rub & Buzz measurements do not take into account the insensitivity of the human ear to low and high frequencies, therefore it is more difficult to identify problem areas and set limits on a production line. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 161 Comparison Figure 15-35: Example A - Good Speaker: Rub and Buzz is a low percentage - Red line Perceptual Rub and Buzz is below the threshold of perception across the range of the measurement, so the resulting curve is a flat line at 0_Phons - Black dotted line Perceptual Rub & Buzz Dashed Line Figure 15-35: Example A - Good Speaker Figure 15-36: Example B - Bad Speaker: Rub and Buzz is very high at low frequencies with an 8% peak at 160_Hz Red line The Perceptual Rub and Buzz curve shows the more audible cone breakup of 8.9 Phons at 530 Hz, along with the noticeable low frequency distortion at 125_Hz - Black dotted line Perceptual Rub & Buzz Dashed Line Figure 15-36: Example B - Bad Speaker The CLEAR Rub & Buzz Detection Algorithm Listen’s CLEARTM Rub & Buzz detection algorithm uses true perceptual analysis to ‘hear’ any faults in the speaker. It offers many advantages over other ‘perceptual’ Rub & Buzz analysis systems: True Perceptual Rub & Buzz: The CLEAR Algorithm is a true perceptual Rub & Buzz algorithm. Based on well-proven psychoacoustic principles, it accurately replicates the human ear using mathematical models found in MP3 encoders that mimic the way that both the ear and the brain interpret sound. This results in close to 100% correlation to the human ear. Less sensitive to transient background noise: A significant advantage of our Perceptual Rub & Buzz algorithm is that it is very insensitive to transient background noise – tests show that it offers far more consistent results with high background noise levels than other Rub & Buzz measurement methods. This makes it ideal for noisy factory environments. Flexible: The CLEAR Rub & Buzz detection system is extremely flexible. While it can of course be configured for a simple pass/fail result, it can also offer detailed results including defect analysis and offers a calibrated loudness value rather than simply a comparison to a reference. Better Correlation to Human Ear: Testing carried out by an independent laboratory shows excellent correlation to the human ear. More details of the research leading to the development of this algorithm are presented in the paper: 'Practical Measurement of Loudspeaker Distortion Using a Simplified Auditory Perceptual Model', found on the Listen website. 162 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual CLEARTM Algorithm For Perceptual Rub & Buzz Analysis FFT Spectrum Stimulus applied to transducer The algorithm uses a sine wave stimulus because this is widely accepted as the standard test signal for production line testing in the loudspeaker industry. Response Spectrum Hz to Bark Auditory Filter Bands Auditory Filter Bands Auditory filter bands are applied to the response signal to convert the FFT spectrum (constant bandwidth) to a Bark scale (auditory filter bands). This replicates the way the ear filters sound. Internal Noise Floor Harmonic Structure The harmonic structure of the response is quantified using the power cepstrum (a cepstrum is a spectrum of a log spectrum). A strong and extended harmonic structure is a signature of Rub & Buzz. Ear Weighting Ear Weighting Filter An ear weighting filter compensates for the transfer function of the outer to inner ear, and the internal noise of the ear (noise floor due to blood flow) is added. Together these model the frequency response of the ear. Internal Noise Frequency Spreading A frequency spreading function is applied. This is a simple mathematical representation of auditory masking curves. Partial Loudness Calculation PARTIAL LOUDNESS combined with HARMONIC STRUCTURE This is how the algorithm mimics the psychoacoustic filters of the ear in hearing Rub & Buzz defects. These complex curves change with frequency and level. The fundamental and its masking effects are subtracted out from the result for the response signal to give the distortion of the speaker plus noise. This is summed over the frequency range to give the perceptual partial loudness (in phons) for a single tone of the input signal. The result of the harmonic analysis (a percentage measurement) is combined with the perceptual distortion for each frequency. This accentuates the rub & buzz, making it easier to identify and set limits. PERCEPTUAL RUB & BUZZ SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 163 Intermodulation and Difference Distortion When you play two tones in a non-linear system, they interact in such a way that you get new frequencies at the output. These frequencies are different linear combinations of the two original frequencies and are called orders. This is the case when music is played through a loudspeaker. These orders are particularly annoying because they have no harmonic relationship with the original frequencies. Two types of two-tone distortion are commonly used. Intermodulation distortion (IM): this distortion occurs when a high frequency tone is superimposed on a high-level, low frequency tone. The high frequency signal is modulated by the low frequency. Difference frequency distortion (DF): this distortion arises when 2 tones are separated by a small frequency difference. This distortion is similar to harmonic distortion but is especially noticeable when the 2 tones are at high frequencies. Figure 15-37: Total IMD Application to Loudspeakers Measurements Intermodulation distortion is used to detect amplitude and Doppler modulations that occur when low frequency signals produce large excursions of the speaker voice coil. Difference frequency distortion is used to detect distortion at high frequencies, where single tone harmonic distortion would fall far out the frequency range of the loudspeaker or of the ear. For more details on these techniques see: Steve Temme, Audio Distortion Measurements, Bruel & Kjaer, Application Note BO 0385-11, found on the Listen website. IM (or difference frequencies) are measured using step FFT analysis in a method similar to HarmonicTrak. For each step frequency, processing is applied on the entire spectrum of the signal. 164 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual IM Distortion Formulas Total IM Total IM = ( H n + H –n ) 2 n>1 Total IM Distortion dB (IEC) Total IM = ( H n + H –n ) 2 2 n>1 Total IM Distortion dB (IEEE) Total IMD % Figure 15-38: Total IMD Total IM % IMD = 100 × --------------------------( F1 + F2 ) Total IM Distortion % (IEC) Total IM % IMD = 100 × -------------------------2 2 F1 + F2 Total IM Distortion % (IEEE) References: All above equations are a function of frequency (f) Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). n indicates the distortion order F1 is the IM Fundamental F2 is the IM Fixed Tone Hn are the nth distortion orders N is Noise SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 165 Difference Distortion Formulas DFD = Hn 2 n < 0, even + ( Hn + H–n ) 2 n > 1, odd Total Diff Distortion in dB (IEC) DFD = Hn2 Total Diff Distortion in dB (IEEE) DFD TotalDFD = 100 × ---------------------( F1 + F2 ) Figure 15-39: Total DFD Total DF Distortion in % (IEC) DFD TotalDFD = 100 × ---------------------2 2 F1 + F2 Total DF Distortion in % (IEEE) References: All above equations are a function of frequency (f) Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). n indicates the distortion order F1 is the Diff Upper Fundamental F2 is the Diff Lower Fundamental Hn are the nth distortion orders N is Noise 166 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Total Distortion + Noise The power sum of TD and Noise (IM or Diff) 2 2 TD + N TotalD + N = 100 × ----------------------------F1 + F2 Total Distortion + Noise in % (IEC) TotalD + N = 100 × 2 2 TD + N----------------------2 2 F1 + F2 Total Distortion + Noise in % (IEEE) Figure 15-40: Total DFD + Noise References: All above equations are a function of frequency (f) Values in the equations are RMS engineering units, unless labeled in %. However, the final distortion curves are frequently shown in dB (SoundCheck default). n indicates the distortion order Hn are the nth distortion orders N is Noise For IM Distortion: F1 is the IM Fundamental F2 is the IM Fixed Tone For Diff Distortion: F1 is the Diff Upper Fundamental F2 is the Diff Lower Fundamental SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 167 Confidence and Noise When making any measurement there is always a level of measurement uncertainty, partly due to noise. That noise adds randomness to the level of the measurement. Therefore a measurement is only an estimate of the true value. Since we know the level of noise, it is possible to calculate the Standard Error (σ) of the estimated level. Confidence Limits If we consider one measurement with a value of x and a standard error of σ, then the confidence that the true value will be within the limits ±nσ is as follows: [x-σ , x+σ] with 68% confidence [x-2σ , x+2σ] with 97% confidence [x-3σ , x+3σ] with 99.7% confidence. These are the Confidence Limits, as selected in Figure 15-41. Figure 15-41: Confidence Standard Error The Standard Error for the Fundamental as well as every selected harmonic or order can be displayed. The Standard Error is calculated in the same units as the Fundamental and the resulting curve is based on one standard deviation (σ). There is a choice of having the Standard Error as a single curve (σ) or the Confidence Limits as 2 curves (measured curve ±a σ). The factor a, is chosen by the user. Total Noise A Noise curve can also be displayed. This is the RMS level of Total Noise for each stimulus frequency. Note: Please refer to the How To Example sequence: Confidence and Noise This can also be used for frequency pairs when measuring Intermodulation and Difference Frequency distortion. For more information on the Stimulus required for these measurements please Refer to Two Tone Stimulus on page 115. Note: Please refer to the How To Example sequences: IM Distortion.sqc and Diff Distortion.sqc. Measurement Confidence Rules: Here are some general recommendations to help to increase the measurement confidence and improve the repeatability of THD and THD+N results. 168 Increase the input gain if Max FSD is below -30 dB Change the sweep direction to “High to Low” Increase the bit depth to 24 Bit Increase the min cycles/min duration in the Stimulus Step Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Impedance Impedance measures the voltage level across a known reference resistor and calculates the impedance. SI units are used throughout SoundCheck 16.0. 0.25 Ohms is represented as 250 milliohms as shown in Figure 15-42. Ref Resistor Value of the reference resistor, in Ohms, placed in series with the transducer under test. See Impedance Setup on page 170 for more details. Impedance Box Measurement Method Select Impedance Box if using the Impedance Measurement Interface box from Listen, Inc. as shown in Figure 15-42. Enter the value of the internal reference resistor in the Analysis editor. Figure 15-42: Enter Known Reference Resistor AmpConnect/SC Amp Measurement Method If using the AmpConnect ISC test and measurement interface or SC Amp™, select AmpConnect/SC Amp under Measurement Method. Z-High is selected by default. See Figure 15-43. If the Z-Low Rref resistor is needed for a test, it can be selected manually. The AmpConnect ISC front panel will switch to Z-Low after the Analysis step is Applied or runs in a sequence. Note: The AmpConnect ISC power amplifier uses a proprietary system to push the output impedance close to 0 Ohms even when the 1Ohm / Z-High Reference Resistor is selected. No changes need to be made to the Amplifier Sensitivity in the SoundCheck Calibration Configuration. The AmpConnect front panel or AmpConnect Message Step will need to be set to the same Reference Resistor value as set in the Analysis Step of the sequence. Figure 15-43: Impedance AmpConnect/SC Amp SC Amp™ Important! Select AmpConnect/SC Amp as shown above but Z-Low must be selected for the Reference Resistor. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 169 Impedance Setup Listen offers an optional Impedance Measurement Interface Box for connecting the power amplifier, transducer, and SoundCheck system. This features dual banana leads, alligator clips, a removable cable for the impedance measurement channel input and a removable cover for easy access when changing the reference resistor. For more information, please contact Listen, Inc. (Refer to Loudspeaker Test Connections with Impedance Box on page 506 for a detailed drawing of the impedance box) To measure the transducer's impedance, a small resistor is connected in series with the transducer between its negative terminal and ground. A general rule of thumb is that the DUT Impedance should be somewhere between 20 to 40 times greater than the Reference Resistor. Refer to Impedance Measurement Details on page 171 for more information. For example, use a 0.25 Ohm resistor for an 8 Ohm loudspeaker. This way both the acoustic response (e.g., left channel) and impedance response (e.g., right channel) of the transducer can be measured at the same time. To measure the current flow through the resistor, connect Input 2 of the audio interface across the Reference Resistor as shown in Figure 15-44. Important! WARNING! Make sure to connect the ground of the output from the amplifier to the ground on Input 2 of the audio interface. The positive lead of Input 2 should be connected to the negative terminal of the transducer, the same as the resistor. Enter the value of current sensing resistor in series with the transducer in the Ref. Resistor field of the Analysis Editor as shown in Figure 15-42. The formulas below apply only to the Impedance Box Method. VS Measurement Mic Amplifier + + - i Sound Card Left Input Z (DUT) Sound Card Left Output VR - RREF Common Ground + Sound Card Input 2 - Figure 15-44: Impedance Measurement Circuit Using Impedance Box Z = impedance of device under test (e.g., loudspeaker) VS = voltage out of amplifier (measured during calibration) VR = voltage across resistor (e.g., 0.1 W reference) i = current running through DUT and reference resistor Z= 170 (VS − VR ) i i= VR V R => Z = ( S × REF ) − RREF RREF VR Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Impedance Measurement Details When measuring impedance with SoundCheck, it helps to know the expected impedance of the Device Under Test.‘ This allows you to select a Reference Resistor value that provides a signal level to return to SoundCheck that is significantly above the noise floor of the system, but not so high that it overloads the inputs. If the Impedance curve as measured in SoundCheck appears to have jagged edges, this would indicate that the signal across the Reference Resistor is too low. You also have to take into consideration the signal drop at the DUT due to the added Reference Resistor. This signal drop is not included in the Amp Calibration process, so it needs to be as small as possible. The idea is to minimize the Signal Drop at the DUT while maintaining a sufficient signal level across the Reference Resistor. Rules - Impedance Measurement A general rule of thumb is that the DUT Impedance should be somewhere between 20 to 40 times greater than the Reference Resistor. To calculate the Signal Drop at the DUT: DUT Imp DUT Signal Drop (dB) = 20 × log 10 -------------------------------------------------- DUT Imp + Ref Res Signal Drop at DUT in dB To calculate the Signal Level at the Reference Resistor: Ref Res Ref Res Level (dBV) = 20 × log 10 -------------------------------------------------- × Stimulus Level DUT Imp + Ref Res Level Across Reference Resistor in dBV The charts in Figure 15-45 and Figure 15-46 show how the Drop at the DUT and Level across Ref Res change, depending on the equation variables. For example: If you are testing an 8 Ω loudspeaker with a Stimulus of 3 Volt and a Ref Res of 0.25 Ohms: Signal Drop at DUT (due to added resistance) = -0.267 dB Level across Ref Res = -20.83 dBV or 91 mVolts SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 171 Spe a ke r Im p (Ohm s) 2 4 8 16 32 64 150 250 Re f Re s Drop a t Re f (Ohm s) Stim ulus (V) DUT (dB) Le ve l 0.25 3 -1.023 0.25 3 -0.527 0.25 3 -0.267 0.25 3 -0.135 0.25 3 -0.068 0.25 3 -0.034 0.25 3 -0.014 0.25 3 -0.009 Re s Re f Re s (dBV) Le ve l (V) -9.54 0.333 -15.07 0.176 -20.83 0.091 -26.72 0.046 -32.67 0.023 -38.66 0.012 -46.04 0.005 -50.47 0.003 Figure 15-45: Reference Resistor 0.25 Ohm By changing the Ref Res to 1 Ohm the values are: Signal Drop at DUT = -1.023 dB Level across Ref Res = -9.54 dBV or 333 mVolts Spe a ke r Im p (Ohm s) 2 4 8 16 32 64 150 250 Re f Re s (Ohm s) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stim ulus (V) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Drop a t Re f DUT (dB) Le ve l -3.522 -1.938 -1.023 -0.527 -0.267 -0.135 -0.058 -0.035 Re s Re f Re s (dBV) Le ve l (V) 0.00 1.000 -4.44 0.600 -9.54 0.333 -15.07 0.176 -20.83 0.091 -26.72 0.046 -34.04 0.020 -38.45 0.012 Figure 15-46: Reference Resistor 1 Ohm The 1 Ohm Ref Res provides a sufficient level to SoundCheck, but there is a large signal drop of -1.023 dB at the DUT. The 0.25 Ohm Ref Res only presents a drop of -0.267 dB, but still has a signal level well above the noise floor of the audio interface: 91 mVolts. The 0.25 Ohm Ref Res would be a better choice in this case. Note: As the DUT impedance goes up or down significantly, you will want to scale the Ref Res value accordingly. Reference Information For more information on Impedance please refer to: Practical Impedance measurements using SoundCheck found on the Listen website. 172 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Headphone Impedance Testing The larger impedance of headphones will of course require the use of a larger reference resistor. Important! The amplifier used to drive the headphones should have an output impedance of near zero Ohms. Headphone amplifiers, which tend to have higher output impedances (5 to 30 Ohms), should not be used. If the DUT impedance is 150 Ohms with a stimulus of 0.5 V, the calculator chart shows that a Ref Res of 15 yields sufficient signal while presenting a reasonable drop at the DUT. Spe a ke r Im p (Ohm s) 2 4 8 16 32 64 150 250 Re f Re s Drop a t Re f (Ohm s) Stim ulus (V) DUT (dB) Le ve l 15 0.5 -18.588 15 0.5 -13.534 15 0.5 -9.173 15 0.5 -5.745 15 0.5 -3.339 15 0.5 -1.829 15 0.5 -0.828 15 0.5 -0.506 Re s Re f Re s (dBV) Le ve l (V) -7.11 0.441 -8.07 0.395 -9.73 0.326 -12.33 0.242 -15.94 0.160 -20.45 0.095 -26.85 0.045 -30.96 0.028 Figure 15-47: Headphone Impedance vs Reference Resistor Measuring Left and Right Headphone Impedance Simultaneously Due to the common ground between left and right headphones, feedback loops can occur when measuring headphone impedance. In this case, you can use two Impedance Boxes connected to a stereo amplifier. Both Impedance Boxes must use the same resistor value. The boxes should be wired as follows: Simply reverse the Red and Black connectors for both impedance boxes at both ends: Red Left + Red Right to Amp Common Black L and R to Amp L and R and Red Left + Red Right to Headphone Common Black L and R to Headphone L and R 15 This puts the load resistor in the positive side of the signal path. The Impedance Analysis Step in the SoundCheck sequence must also be modified as shown in Figure 15-48. Click on the electrical tab and change the Method to AmpConnect. This method expects the load resistor to be on the positive side of the signal path. Set Rref to Custom. Under Reference Resistor, enter the value of the resistor in the impedance boxes. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor Figure 15-48: Modify Electrical Tab 173 Loose Particle During the manufacturing process of a loudspeaker, some loose particles of foreign material may stay trapped in the gap behind the diaphragm or dust cap. During operation at low frequencies, these particles randomly hit the diaphragm making a click or pop noise. This algorithm detects loose particles as impulses in the sound emitted by a loudspeaker during a measurement. Loose particle defects are easier to catch at low frequencies (typically at or below resonance) where maximum driver displacement occurs. A Sine Sweep stimulus should be used for this type of measurement. For greater accuracy, a Stepped Sine Sweep (Stweep) should be used. The Loose Particle Algorithm in SoundCheck offers better noise immunity in production and other noisy environments as limits float with the normalized background noise rather than being set absolutely. In addition to simplifying limit setting, false rejections due to sudden increases in background noise are less likely. There is also a setting for choosing a maximum stimulus frequency, above which the loose particle envelope is not calculated. As loose particles tend to present themselves during the low frequency portion of a stimulus sweep, this feature further prevents false rejects. The Loose Particle algorithm has the following features: The loose particles algorithm is optimized for speed and offers a cleaner envelope, which makes it easier to set limits The Loose Particle tab is always available in the Analysis Editor, for all of the Analysis Algorithms In Basic View the only available parameter to edit is Attack Threshold In Advanced View the following parameters are available with the noted default values Threshold: Absolute Attack Threshold: 50 dB Averaging Time: 5 ms Minimum Duration: 2.5 ms Max Duration: 25 ms Hysteresis: -3 dB Max Stimulus Frequency The Loose Particle Waveform can be added to the Memory List by clicking on the check box. See Figure 15-49. Figure 15-49: Loose Particle Detection Settings Absolute or Relative envelope Relative envelope has a steady state at 0. This makes the Threshold become relative to the steady state level as well. This allows you to utilize a standard detection threshold independent of the test level. Absolute envelope will reflect the Response level as before. Maximum Stimulus Frequency This allows you to choose a maximum stimulus frequency, above which the loose particle envelope is not calculated. As loose particles tend to present themselves during the low frequency portion of a stimulus sweep, this feature further prevents false rejects. A typical default value for max Stimulus frequency would be 1 kHz. 174 Analysis Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Averaging Time This is the width of the running rms averaging applied on the time signal to generate the time envelope used to detect loose particles. Min/Max Duration Allows you to ignore transients which do not fit within these limits. Figure 15-50: Min and Max Duration Attack Threshold & Hysteresis All peaks that exceed the threshold are counted as loose particles. You must define this threshold and set it high enough to exclude random background noise. Establishing the threshold level will require some trial and error. Use a known good speaker (or Golden Speaker) to choose a level above the background noise. Then, measure a loudspeaker with known loose particle defects to verify that the threshold is exceeded. To avoid false peak detection, the hysteresis level should be set to a value greater than the background noise. Note: Figure 15-52: Threshold and Hysteresis The Loose Particle Detection Algorithm gives you the total number of individual peaks that exceed the threshold (Particle Count). Sometimes you will get false peaks from transient background noise events such as a box dropping or an air gun going off. This can be limited by setting the Min/Max Duration levels. The hysteresis level can be used to ignore steady state background noise. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 175 For more information regarding Loose Particle Analysis please refer to two AES papers presented by Listen, Inc.: Enhancements for Loose Particle Detection in Loudspeakers by Pascal Brunet & Steve Temme; Listen, Inc. Loose Particle Detection in Loudspeakers, found on the Listen website. A Single Value Limit Step is used to obtain a Pass/Fail verdict for the DUT. Figure 15-53: Loose Particle Count Limits Units Abs/relative - the measurement can be relative or absolute (Waveform Tab). See “Relative or Absolute” on page 140. Default Unit: In case of Absolute, the frequency curves are in the physical unit of the response waveform (e.g Pa). The dB ref is the one setup in calibration at acquisition time. In case of Relative, the frequency curves are in relative unit (e.g., Pa/V). The unit is the ratio of the response unit over stimulus unit, with a dB ref of 1. All algorithms are subjected to Rel/ Abs except Spectrum, Time Envelope & Loose Particles, which are always in abs unit. Custom Unit: the unit is set by the user and determines the string used and the dB ref. Figure 15-54: Set Units Important! Be aware, the math applied for absolute/relative stays the same. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 176 Delay Auto Delay The Auto Delay is the delay, in seconds (then converted to meters and inches based on the speed of sound in air), between the output and input terminals of the SoundCheck system. By clicking Set Values you can manually enter the delay based on the distance in meters or inches from the acoustic center of the loudspeaker to the microphone. By selecting Auto Delay, SoundCheck will automatically calculate the delay. Using Auto Delay will cause the test time to increase due to additional CPU usage required for calculating the crosscorrelation. Memory List Selection allows you to set the delay by selecting an item from the Memory List. A value named Record Delay will appear in the Memory List, enabling you to save this value with other test information. Auto Delay uses the peak of the impulse response to determine the delay. Several situations may arise where Auto Delay can be “fooled”. High background noise: noisy production environment Strong reflection: side wall reflections during Polar Plot measurement Sampling rate errors: sample rate variation in Blue Tooth devices Note: Figure 15-55: Auto Delay Selection The Auto Delay value will only be correct if the proper audio interface delay is entered in the Hardware Editor. Calibrate the audio interface to determine/confirm the hardware delay. Additionally, be aware that measuring in an environment that has strong reflections can produce an erroneous time delay. Set Values This allows you to enter the specific distance or time in the Record Delay fields. Delay can be set in Samples, Seconds or Distance Distance can be set in Feet or Meters Memory List Selection Select a Memory List item in order to set the delay Select X, Y or Z axis depending on the Memory List data Figure 15-56: Set Values SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 177 Simplified Polarity Test A polarity test is often used to verify that a device is wired correctly. The quick polarity test is performed in an analysis step, and uses the impulse response from the Auto Delay function (See Figure 15-55). It analyzes the peak of this impulse response and measures if it is negative or positive to determine overall polarity. It is a simple and easy alternative to phase domain testing for simple devices or single drivers where the phase does not change more than 180 degrees. Polarity measurement using phase response is still available as an alternative method for more complex devices. Speaker wired correctly + Positive Impulse yields y-axis value of +1 Speaker wiring reversed + Negative Impulse yields y-axis value of -1 Figure 15-57: Speaker Polarity Impulse Auto Delay must be selected on the Delay tab in order to use this feature The polarity function is available in any of the analysis algorithms Polarity will appear as a value in the Memory List A value of +1 shows that the device under test has a positive polarity A value of -1 shows the device under test has a negative polarity This value can then be used in a limit step with a lower limit set to zero to show when a device has been wired correctly or has correct polarity Note: The limit step allows you to determine if a value of +1 is a pass or fail, depending on the overall phase of the measurement chain. (e.g., the microphone output is inverted) Note: Polarity measurement using phase response is still available as an alternative method for more complex devices. Figure 15-58: Limit Step and Results SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 178 Transition Discard Time Most devices exhibit some transient phenomena between each step of a stepped sweep. Transition Discard Time allows you to exclude these transients for the measurement and return the true steady state response of the device under test. The analysis algorithm will ignore the beginning of the step defined as a number of cycles of the fundamental stimulus or a fixed amount of time, which ever is longer in time. Minimum Cycles This is the number of cycles that are discarded at the beginning of each frequency step, up to the Transition Frequency. Transition (Hz) Below this frequency the analysis algorithm will discard the Minimum Cycles. Above this frequency the Minimum Duration will be discarded. Minimum Duration This is the minimum amount of time that will be discarded from the beginning of each step. NOTE: The Stimulus Step settings for “Min Cycles” and “Min Duration per step” must be greater than the Transition Discard Time settings in Analysis. If either of the discard settings are equal to or greater than the corresponding values in the Stimulus Step, there will be nothing left over for SoundCheck to analyze. No data will be passed to the Memory List. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor Figure 15-59: Transition Discard Time 179 DC If your audio interface or data acquisition card is DC coupled, select DC to measure the DC voltage. If the audio interface is not DC coupled, the DC current or voltage waveform can be read from a DC Connect™† instrument using your AC coupled, audio interface. An audio interface input is connected to the DC Connect Analog Monitor back-panel output. The Analysis Step is preceded by an Acquisition Step set to Record or Play & Record. Be sure to assign the Analysis and the Acquisition Step’s Input Signal Path to the audio interface input channel that you've connected to the DC Connect™. Note: † DC Connect, made by Listen, Inc., is a USB-controlled DC voltage and current source and measuring amplifier. See the Listen website for more details. https://www.listeninc.com/ products/ Figure 15-60: DC Coupling When you check the DC Connect measurement checkbox, a mA or V choice appears. Choose the mA current measurement if you are operating DC Connect in voltage source mode, or choose the V voltage measurement if you are in current source mode. This step will create a DC Current Waveform or DC Voltage Waveform curve. For example, when this type of Analysis Step follows a Play & Record Acquisition Step, the X-axis of the DC Current Waveform curve matches the X-axis of the played stimulus. The stimulus will likely be an audio amplitude/frequency sweep, or a sweep of the DC voltage. If you also check the Time Envelope checkbox, you create a Time Envelope curve whose units are also in mA or V. The x-axis of this curve is time. Time Time Envelope The Time Envelope is used to view the magnitude of the response time signal. This is useful in analyzing the effects of compression in an electrical circuit and/or an electroacoustic transducer. The Scaling can be set to dB or Linear. The magnitude is calculated only between Fmin and Fmax. This helps to create a cleaner, smoother or “less noisy” envelope. Note: To avoid ripple effects in the time domain, Fmin and Fmax must be outside the stimulus bandwidth. Figure 15-61: Define Envelope & Impulse Response Units SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 180 Impulse Response The Impulse Response is the time domain response of a system to an idealized infinitely short impulse. An impulse response is the time domain equivalent of a frequency response function, and can be computed using the Inverse Fourier Transform on a frequency response function. This can only be accessed when Time Selective Response or Dual-Channel is the chosen algorithm. The units for the impulse response can either be dB, where the resulting display is an Energy Time Curve, or linear values. With linear units, the impulse response will look like a ring-down curve that you would see on an oscilloscope. To change the impulse response units, select the Units tab. Deconvolved Response The Deconvolved Response is the response waveform divided by the stimulus waveform, in the spectral domain. It shows the Linear or Fundamental Impulse Response of the DUT, the Harmonic Impulse Response that occurs before it and the reflections (if any) that occur after it. The deconvolved Response is a result of the Time Selective Response algorithm. This helps you to properly position the time window so that the Fundamental Impulse Response is between the start and stop time, while leaving the Harmonic Impulse Response and Reflections outside the window. This can be tested by clicking the Apply button before using the algorithm in a sequence. TSR Window The Cosine Taper window used by the Time Selective Response algorithm, has a 10% taper at each end. The Fundamental Impulse Response must be inside these tapers. The example in Figure 15-62: TSR Window - Cosine Taper shows a 100 mSec window set on an impulse response. The taper of the TSR window disregards the first and last 10 mSec of the impulse. 10mS Total 1mS 1mS H1 10 % 10 % H2 H3 Harmonic IR Fundamental IR Reflections Figure 15-62: TSR Window - Cosine Taper Definitions of each of the window types can be found in Weighting and Window Types on page 525. Note: As of SoundCheck 8, you can choose other window types, as shown in Figure 15-63. Figure 15-63: TSR Window Type SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 181 The TSR Window is output in the Memory List as a waveform. This can be displayed on top of the Impulse Response or the Deconvolved Response waveforms to check the time alignment as shown in Figure 15-64. The fundamental impulse response must fall inside the window. If it does not, simply edit the Start and Stop times in the Analysis Editor as shown in Figure 15-63. The start time should be slightly before the start of the impulse (0.20 mSec for Adrienne) and the stop time should be before the first reflection. Figure 15-64: Impulse Response and TSR Window Curve Names SoundCheck allows you to alter the curve names created in the Analysis Step through the Curve Names tab. Highlight the default names and enter custom names for your curves and single values. This may be especially helpful when using multiple Analysis Steps to measure multiple Stimuli, in a single sequence or in subsequences. If two Analysis Steps in the same sequence have the same curve name, the 2nd Analysis Step will append a 2 in front of the curve name, e.g.; 2-Fundamental, 3-Fundamental, and so on. Add Input Data Name - Select to append the Input Waveform name to the curve name, e.g.; Fundamental + (Recorded Time Waveform) Use Signal Path Name - Select to append the Signal Path name to the curve name, e.g.; Fundamental + (Dut Mic) Use Default - Select to delete changes to all curve names. The Custom Curve Names field will be grayed out and revert the names back to their original state. No edits will be possible. To create edits, uncheck the Use Default box. Figure 15-65: Curve Name Options Note: Changing curve names in an existing sequence may affect your displays. For example, if Fundamental (DUT Mic) was originally selected to display on the XY Graph and the curve name is changed to Model ABC Frequency Response (DUT Mic), the display will cease to display Fundamental (DUT Mic). You then need to open your Display Step, select the XY Graph to make it active, and select Model ABC Frequency Response (DUT Mic) from the Curves tab of the Memory List. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Editor 182 Autosave Editor SoundCheck® can automatically store data from the Memory List by using an Autosave Step (Ctrl+Shift+U). This allows any item appearing in the Memory List to be saved to disk when the sequence runs. The following file types are available: Text (.txt) - delimited text file Curves and Single Values (.DAT) - SoundCheck specific file Results (.res) - SoundCheck specific file Waveforms (.wfm) - SoundCheck specific file Database - DB: save to an SQL database Excel (.xls or .xlsx) - each data item is saved or appended to a separate worksheet of the Excel file. WAV (.wav) - Any Waveform (WFM) in the Memory List can be saved as a WAV file. The WAV file will be saved with the sample rate and bit depth that are set in the System Hardware configuration. See WAV File Types on page 293 for more information on supported WAV file types. Figure 16-1: Autosave - to Excel Note: As of SoundCheck 14.01, Excel Macro-enabled files with the XLSM file extension are allowed. The XLSM file extension is used in the generated file. Note: Separate Autosave Steps must be used to save Data and Results. When converting sequences from versions prior to SoundCheck 8, Autosave Steps will need to be updated if a single step is used for both Data and Results. Important! As of SoundCheck 8, the functionality of the Autosave and Recall Steps has been matched. This assures that data saved with an Autosave Step can easily be accessed by a Recall Step. Refer to Recall Editor on page 195 for more information. To view and change the Autosave settings, select Autosave from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. You can also create a new Autosave Step, or insert an Autosave Step into an existing sequence using the Sequence Editor. The Autosave Editor is divided into four major sections – Save, Format, Test Information, and Filename. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Autosave Editor 183 Save You can choose to save only Data, only Results, or only Waveforms. Separate Autosave Steps must be used for each data type. They can all be saved to the same folder. Figure 16-2 shows that three Autosave steps save data to the same folder. In this case, the files have different extensions (.DAT, .RES and .WFM) so the file names can be the same without the possibility of files being overwritten. When saving to Excel, Data and Results can be appended to a single Excel file. Each data item will appear in its own worksheet. See Excel Mode on page 321 for another method of saving to Excel. Note: It is not possible to save both Data and Results to the same text file. If you intend to import SoundCheck data into other applications that use .TXT files, Data and Results must be in separate files. You can do this by specifying different file names in the File Name field of each Autosave Step. This has very little effect on the speed of a measurement. Figure 16-2: Saving Data, Results or Waveforms Autosave Folder Path Select Use Default to use the “Default Data Path” that is selected in the Edit > Preferences > Folder Paths options on the SoundCheck Main Screen. See Folder Paths on page 36. You can specify the file path by unchecking Use Default and Browsing to file location. When converting a sequence to SoundCheck 16.0, Autosave and Recall Steps will need to be updated if the file location on the new computer is not identical to the original computer. Rules - Relative File Path Rules in Autosave 184 This indicates that the location of the saved file is relative to the folder path of the sequence, e.g., an exported sequence folder. This is useful when sharing sequences with other SoundCheck users as it keeps the data in the same location as the sequence. The relative path can even include sub-folders. Delete any text in the File Path field and leave it blank. This indicates that the file will be saved in the same folder as the sequence file location. This also applies to the Template File location Sub-folders are indicated by just the name of the folder (no back slash): My DATA. If the sub-folder does not exist, SoundCheck will automatically create it. A 2nd level of sub-folder does require a back slash: My DATA\Product 1 Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Format In this area of the Autosave Editor, the file type selected by the user (e.g., Text, Dat, DB, etc.) defines the other options that can be configured. All options are linked to the format selected; many fields will toggle between active and inactive as the file type is changed. Figure 16-3: Custom Formatting Options File Type There are five options to choose from. You must use a separate Autosave Step in the sequence for each File Type required. Text Files Save output to a text file. Output can be imported into other programs such as a filter design program. When Text is selected, you can then choose to store either frequency or time headers (x), amplitude (y), and/or phase data (z). A test saving five 3-D curves (x, y, and z axes) of 100 points each takes under 200 mSec, and creates a file size of 15KB. Data and Results must be saved using separate Autosave Steps. Rules of use for Text Files: SoundCheck saves the x-axis values at least once when saving to a text file. If you want to append y and or z values to a text file, DO NOT check the x-axis box. The x-axis will be written in the first row or column, depending on the layout. Subsequent curves will then only contain y and/or z data, since the x values would be redundant. If the X axis values change, the x axis will be saved, even if the x axis box is unchecked. If multiple curves are saved to one text file, the x axis will always appear, even if x axis is unchecked. See Delimiter on page 188. DAT, RES, WFM Data (*.DAT), Results (*.RES) and Waveform (*.WFM) are saved to a binary file. This can be used with SoundCheck’s internal data processing modules. The x, y, and z data are stored automatically in the DAT format. A test saving five 3-D curves of 100 points each takes under 200 mSec, and creates a file of 11KB. DB Save directly to database. You are required to enter a Universal Data Link (UDL) or Data Source Name (DSN) to gain access to a database either on the local machine or on a connected server. A test saving 5 3-D curves of 100 points each takes 6 to 8 seconds, and adds approximately 200KB to a Microsoft Access file. Below is an example of one table created by SoundCheck. You can find a more extensive description of the relational table structure in Relationship of Access Tables for SoundCheck on page 469. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure 16-4: Database Schema Autosave Editor 185 UDL or DSN - If DB (Database) is selected, you MUST browse for a Universal Data Link (UDL) or Data Source Name (DSN) to access their target database. See Database Setup for use with SoundCheck on page 467 for more information on using DSNs and UDLs. You must select a pre-existing UDL or DSN file. Create a UDL or DSN with the help of your company database administrator or consult your Windows manual to create one, using the correct provider for your database software. When you browse for this file, SoundCheck will verify the connection to your database, and create the set of tables for your SoundCheck data. Note: The fastest way to save directly to a database is to save single values or results, such as the Pass/Fail verdict of a Limit Step. The curves can be saved to a *.DAT file for subsequent analysis. By adding Serial Number to the curve in the DAT file, it will be easy to correlate the curve to the items saved in the database. Excel Saves selected curves and/or results to an Excel file. Each selected curve, value, or result is saved on a separate worksheet, that has the same name as the item selected from the Memory List (e.g., there will be a worksheet named Fundamental if the Fundamental curve is selected). A test saving five 3-D curves of 100 points each takes 2 to 5 seconds, and creates a file of 21KB. Save to a new Excel file, or append a file previously created by SoundCheck. See Excel Template on page 187 for a note on Excel templates. See Excel Template Tutorial on page 529. Note: SoundCheck saves the x-axis values at least once when saving to Excel. If you want to append y and or z values to an Excel workbook, DO NOT check the x-axis box. The x-axis will be written in the first row or column, depending on the layout. Subsequent curves will then only contain y and/or z data, since the x values would be redundant. Figure 16-5: Save to Excel in Rows Important! Excel files that are Targets of an Autosave Step should not be open when the sequence is run. Open files may prevent data from being saved. Do not attempt to close Excel manually when it is opened by an Autosave Step. Let SoundCheck close Excel in the run of the sequence. Office 97 and 2000 are no longer compatible with SoundCheck. Note: 186 Waveform and WAV files cannot be saved to Excel. Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Excel Template If Excel is selected from the File Type choices, you have the option of browsing to a pre-defined Excel template to arrange or analyze data. This template can utilize a master worksheet to collect data from other worksheets in the Excel workbook. The master worksheet can then be used for presentation and graphing of the data in any format that can be utilized in Excel. Refer to Excel Template Tutorial on page 529 for step by step instructions. Note: If an error exists in a cell of an Excel template, SoundCheck cannot create a new Excel file for saving data. SoundCheck will open and close Excel but is not able to report an error. If this occurs, check the Excel template, repair the broken cells, save the template and run the SoundCheck test again. Important! Excel files that are Targets of an Autosave Step should not be open when the sequence is run. Open files may prevent data from being saved. Do not attempt to close Excel manually when it is opened by an Autosave Step. Let SoundCheck close Excel in the run of the sequence. Office 97 and 2000 are no longer compatible with SoundCheck. Note: As of SoundCheck 14.01, Excel Macro-enabled files with the XLSM file extension are allowed. The XLSM file extension is used in the generated file.. WAV SoundCheck will create a *.WAV file of the selected Data or Waveform. In data mode, this option is only appropriate for timebased curves. WAV File Scaling - When saving a waveform to WAV file, three options are available: Normalize to peak: Saves the waveform so that the peak value of the WAV file is 100% Full Scale (FS), regardless of the level of the waveform Audio Interface Values: Replicates what was recorded by the audio interface, according to the Hardware and Calibration data for the SoundCheck system. The WAV file is scaled according to the full scale deflection of the audio interface digital level. User defined: Scales the waveform relative to a user defined Maximum Level in physical units WAV File = Input Waveform (in physical units) / Maximum Level The resulting WAV cannot be scaled so that its peak value is above 100% FS. Figure 16-6: WAV File Scaling The last two options make it simple to return the measurement back to the physical unit. This can be used to export data for customized mathematical analysis using other tools such as MatLab™. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Autosave Editor 187 Axes Choose one or more axes to be saved. To store only the magnitude data (e.g., decibel values), check just the Y-axis box. Selecting axes only applies to Text and Excel file types. For Dat, Res, and DB, x, y, and z-axes are automatically stored. Header None – For a *.TXT file, the first row or column will contain the frequencies. The Data is in subsequent rows or columns based on the Display being used. Standard – Header information related to the data and/or results will be the first row or column. (Curve name, axis units, freq. points, etc.) Custom – Allows user to define header for compatibility with other programs and personal preferences. When using this option, you can choose among tab, comma, space, or other as the delimiter. Figure 16-7: Text File With Standard Header For tab, use \t between the custom header fields (e.g., Header1\tHeader2\tHeader3). Layout Rows – Aligns data in rows with headers above each column. Columns – Aligns data in columns with headers along each row. Important! Excel .XLS files are limited to 256 Columns. Rows are unlimited. In Excel 2007 and later the .XLSX file maximum worksheet size is 1048576 rows by 16384 columns. Delimiter When saving a *.TXT file, you can choose to separate data values using commas, tabs, spaces, or a user defined character Space Delimited can only be used with files that have NO HEADER INFO. If there are spaces in the header info, the Autosave Step will reject the file. Notation 188 Scientific – Scientific notation is used. (1.03E+2) Floating Point – Floating Point notation is used. (102.86) Decimal places – Enter the desired precision for your data. Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Test Information These settings will need to be configured after you insert an Autosave Step into a new sequence. When DB is selected as your Figure 16-8: Select Test Information file type, Operator, Time Stamp, Lot No, and Serial No will be automatically saved to database. See Relationship of Access Tables for SoundCheck on page 469 for more information on the data stored in your database. All other file types allow you to save only the selected test information. Operator – Keeps the Operator name (login name) with the curves or results being saved. Time – Attaches a time and date stamp to the information being saved (up to one second resolution). Lot No. – The lot number entered on the SoundCheck Main Screen is recorded with the data. Serial No. – The serial number entered on the SoundCheck Main Screen is recorded with the data. To have a unique serial number assigned to each row or column of data, choose the SN auto increment step in the Serial No sequence step category. Prompt for comment – After the test has run, the operator can enter a text note. This appears as a separate field on the same line as the test data. Note: As of SoundCheck 15, the clipboard is cleared after each Autosave Step. You will not be able to Copy the text from one Comment field and Paste it into another Autosave prompt. Figure 16-9 shows an example of a Text file with the lot number and serial number added. Other Test information would be added to the left of the serial number, and would also follow the row or column format selected by the user. If a *.DAT, *.RES or *.WFM file is chosen, all Test Information will be appended to the curve or result name. Figure 16-9: Text File With Comment Filename The Autosave Step saves the selected curves, values or results to a file whose type is pre-selected. The name of the file being saved can also be determined in the Autosave Editor. New – Every time the Autosave Step runs, it will create a new file and overwrite an existing file of the same name without prompting you. The first time SoundCheck is asked to copy over an existing file, it will ask if the file should be replaced. Select Always Replace without Prompting to disable this message in the future. You can change this setting back to enable prompting by exiting SoundCheck and opening SoundCheck 16.0.ini from the SoundCheck directory. Find the entry PROMPT TO OVERWRITE FILE=False and set it to PROMPT TO OVERWRITE FILE=True. Save the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file and open SoundCheck.) Append – If a file of the same name exists in the same folder, the Autosave Step will append the new data to it. If a file of the same name does not exist in the folder, Autosave will create a new file. It the name template includes the date, the file will only be appended if the current date is the same as the date in the file name. If not, a new file will be created. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Autosave Editor 189 Automatic – SoundCheck automatically stores the file to the specified location using the constructed filename template. This option can also be used to append multiple tests to the same file (e.g., as a table). In the example below, Option is set to Automatic. From the Construction Drop Down Menu select “Sequence Name” and click Add. Select “Lot Number” and click Add. To erase the Template name, click Clear. To make a User Defined name (e.g., Prototype or Pilot Run), click User Defined from the Construction drop down menu. Click Add. Any text in the User Defined field will be added to the filename. Prompt Operator – SoundCheck will prompt the Operator to enter a filename without an extension. Construction & Template Choose the item(s) to add to the filename template. In the following example, the sequence name is “Autosave” and the lot number entered on the SoundCheck Main Screen is “Demo 99”. The template adds these two together to form the filename: “Autosave Demo 99.txt”. Figure 16-10: Filename Construction Choose from the options listed in the Construction list box to build a filename for your data. Sequence name – uses current sequence name for filename. The sequence name is typically the model number of the product being tested. Lot name or number – uses current lot name for filename. User defined – text entered in the User Defined field is added to the filename, e.g., DUT model name or model number. Entries in this box will only be applied to the filename when <user> is added to the Template field. Invalid characters are shown in Figure 16-11. Serial number – uses current serial number for filename. Note: Figure 16-11: Character Type Error Date – uses current date for filename. Time – uses current time for filename. This has one-second resolution and will generate a unique filename each time the sequence is run. For this reason it is not appropriate to be used with the “Append” option. Note: 190 If the test sequence automatically increments the serial number (SN auto increment step), a separate file will be created for each measurement. To store all the measurements in one file, do not use this text string (<sn>) as part of the file name. If you want to append a file and include date/time stamp information, check the Time checkbox in the Test Information section of the Autosave Editor. Data or Results – append “data” or “results” to the filename to distinguish data files from results files. Memory List Selection – a value from the Memory List can be used as part of the filename. See Memory List Value Example on page 193 for an example. This could be the Loop Index of a Step Configuration, e.g., the Degrees that a turntable turns for each increment of a polar plot measurement. Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The Loop Index field is always a Y axis value. See Step Configuration on page 251 and Index (Loop Index) on page 399 for more information. User Name – the User Name from the SoundCheck Login can be added to the file name. Separator Both the Autosave and Recall Steps feature a Separator to add to the file name template. This insures that the filename saved in the Autosave Step can be accessed in a Recall Step. The selected separator will be used between every item added to the template. The following options are available: Spaces - a single space will be added between each item in the template. Underscores - a single underscore will be added between each item in the template. None - no space or underscore is added between items in the template. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Autosave Editor 191 Apply Button The Apply Button allows you to test the action of the Autosave Step without having to run the sequence. In a Sequence Using the Autosave Step with the Sequence Editor, the Autosave Step can be inserted into any existing test sequence. It should be inserted after any analysis or post processing. In this example, it has been placed immediately before the Display Step. Figure 16-12: Autosave Step in Sequence With the variety of file types available to save user data, keep in mind that one Autosave Step is needed for each type of file you wish to create or append. If you wish to save curves to a *.TXT file and results to a *.RES file, two steps must be inserted in the sequence to accomplish this. Similarly, you may wish to use three Autosave Steps to save the Time Response in a *.WAV file, the curves to an *.XLS file and then record all the results information to database. The default Autosave sequence that is delivered with SoundCheck uses a Serial Number Step to automatically increment the serial number before proceeding to the Autosave Step. (The sequence can be found in the “How To examples“ folder.) The functions of the Sequence Editor (such as Step Configuration of the Limit Steps) could be adjusted to jump over the Serial Number and Autosave Steps if the device under test failed the Limit Step conditions. In a sequence without jumps, data for all items tested would be saved, regardless whether the DUT passes or fails. Note: 192 Autosave Steps from SoundCheck 4.13 and earlier may need to be revised. Previous versions allowed you to choose two file types in a single Autosave Step. If you copy a 4.13 or earlier sequence into the new folders, the data file type (*.DAT) will be used in the sequence and the results file type (.RES) will be ignored. Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Memory List Value Example The following example uses the “Polar Plot with Turntable” example sequence that is included with SoundCheck. Figure 16-13 shows the configuration of the first Rotate Speaker Message Step. It is set to create a value in the Memory List named “Angle“. The starting value of “Angle” is 0 degrees. Each time the step runs the value “Angle” is incremented 10 degrees. After 18 repetitions, (180 degrees) the step instructs the sequence to jump to the second Rotate Speaker Message. Figure 16-13: Loop Index If you add an Autosave Step to the sequence that saves the fundamental curve at each angle, the Filename of the step can be set as shown in Figure 16-14 through Figure 16-16. The User Defined name entered is “DUT“. The Separator is set to Spaces. Memory list value is added to the Template. This opens the Memory List Value Field. Angle is chosen in the Memory List Value field. The Axis of the value is set to “Y”. The Format Value window is shown in Figure 16-14. It is important to note that Hide Trailing Zeros is checked. The .DAT files are saved starting at “DUT 0.dat“ as shown in Figure 16-16. Figure 16-14: Memory List Value Figure 16-15: Number Format Figure 16-16: Output Example SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Autosave Editor 193 page intentionally left blank 194 Autosave Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor The Recall Editor (Ctrl+Shift+R) allows you to open previously saved data into your current sequence for postprocessing or display. Any SoundCheck® data or results file (marked by *.DAT and *.RES file extensions) can be accessed and entered into the current Memory List. Waveform (WFM) files saved with SoundCheck can be recalled as well. The Recall Step uses the same controls as the Autosave Step: Specify File Path - A specific file can be picked from any available folder location. Prompt Operator - You can choose the file when prompted during the sequence run. Automatic - Allows the sequence to recall saved data with the same rules or criteria used in the Autosave Step which saved the data. This can be useful when running Statistics, e.g., Recall all curves with the model name; “xyz“. File selection can be limited to “Last Only” or any specific curve from the list. Automatic File Addressing using Index values from the Memory List. The Index number generated by the Configuration of a Step can be used in the File Name Template for Dynamic file naming. The Apply Button is used to test the validity of a file path/address, e.g., Test recalling files from a network folder. Note: DAT files created with SoundCheck 16.0 are not viewable in versions of SoundCheck prior to and including SoundCheck 6.0x. The DAT file format was updated in SoundCheck 6.1. Note: Recalled data can be added to a Custom Group. See Sorting and Grouping on page 289. File Path When a sequence is exported, dependent files are exported to the selected folder along with the .SQC file, i.e.; DAT, RES, WFM and TXT files that are the object of the Recall Step. When converting a sequence to SoundCheck 16.0, Autosave and Recall Steps will need to be updated if the file location on the new computer is not identical to the original computer. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor 195 Specify File Path The default behavior for the Recall Step is Specify File Path. The step will operate in the same manner as in previous versions of SoundCheck. (Figure 17-1 shows that individual curves can be selected in the list.) Exact File Path By indicating the exact path in the File Path field, the file will be recalled from that location, even if the sequence is saved to a new location. Select the Folder Browse button to the right of the file path window to select the proper folder. Figure 17-1: Specify File Path Rules - Relative File Path Rules in Recall Editor 196 This indicates that the location of the file selected is relative to the folder path of the sequence, e.g., from an exported sequence folder. This is useful when sharing sequences with other SoundCheck users as it keeps the data in the same location as the sequence. The relative path can even include sub-folders. This is for Automatic and Prompt Operator selections only. Delete any text in the File Path field and leave it blank. This indicates that the file to be recalled is in the same folder as the sequence file location. Sub-folders are indicated by just the name of the folder (no back slash): My DATA. If the sub-folder does not exist, SoundCheck will automatically create it. A 2nd level of sub-folder does require a back slash: My DATA\Product 1 Recall Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Automatic With Automatic mode, only the Base Path for the file is specified. The Base Path is the location the step will open files from. The file name is created using the controls for the Template field. In the Construction List, the option(s) for the file name are selected and added to the Template. This forms the full filename, which is to be recalled by the step. Figure 17-2 shows a User Defined name in the Template. The Serial Number entered is “1”. When the step runs, it will look for any file, in the Base Path, with the name “DUT 1.dat“. The standard Autosave options for Filename Construction apply to the Recall Step. Please refer to Filename on page 189 for a description of each of the Filename Construction options. Separator The separator used in the Recall Step must match what is used in the Autosave Step. Figure 17-2: Automatic The Memory List Value option has the same function as in Autosave, so that users can select a Memory List value (such as loop index) to be added to the Recall file name. See Memory List Value Example on page 193 for an example of this type of construction. Prompt Operator With a Prompt Operator step, a “Select File” window will open when the step runs in the sequence. The operator can then select any file available for recall. Base Path allows for a default directory to be specified. This directs the operator to a specific folder for file selection. Under Recalled Curves, a custom name has been entered. When “Pro Mic 2.dat” is opened, the curve will be added to the Memory List as “Fundamental“. Figure 17-3: Prompt Operator SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor 197 File Types The following files types can be recalled: Curves (.DAT), Results (.RES), Waveforms (.WFM and .WAV), Text (.TXT) and Values (.DAT). WAV files must match the sample rate of the System Hardware configuration in order to be used. See WAV File Types on page 293 for more information on supported WAV types. WAV Recall Recalled WAV files can now be scaled so that subsequent analysis will provide results in FS and dBFS as defined by AES17. When recalling a WAV file, select units of FS or FS(AES17) from the drop down menu as shown in Figure 17-4 When opening a stereo WAV file, SoundCheck will automatically split the file into two waveforms, adding [L] or [R] to the file names Wav File Scaling Options: ‘FS’ – SoundCheck default value, the max amplitude of a digital sine wave is -3 dBFS ‘FS (AES17)’ – Value corresponding to AES17 standard definition, the max amplitude of a digital sine wave is 0 dBFS Figure 17-4: WAV Recall Data Import Wizard As of SoundCheck 14, the first time you recall text in the step, the Data Import Wizard runs. Once the text import settings are correct, you can create an .IMP file which saves the settings used in the Data Import Wizard. When the Recall Step runs in a sequence the .IMP file allows the step to run with no operator action required. The Data Import Wizard also runs when importing text files in the Memory List. For more information refer to Data Import Wizard Tutorial on page 539. File Path Info Browse to the .DAT or .RES file you wish to reference. The file path and file name will appear in the File Path field. Figure 17-5: Import Wizard 198 Recall Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Curve Names to be Recalled After selecting the file, the Recall Editor will display the names of the curves, results or waveforms saved to that file in the Curve or Result Names to be Recalled text box. These names will be inserted into the Memory list as placeholders for data that will be created during the sequence run. These names will include any Test Information that was saved with the file. See the Autosave Editor on page 183 for more information. The Add… and Clear buttons on the right hand side of the editor allow you to edit your selected list of data. The Add… button will allow you to add a name (an empty curve, single value or result) to the Curve Names to be Recalled text box. You may wish to do this when you know the data will be created later in the sequence. Clear will empty the text box of all information, removing placeholders from the Memory List until the step is executed in the sequence. Order of Data The recall data list is only generated the first time you point to the file. If the order of the data changes after that it will be populated into the wrong names in the memory list. This can occur when the order of Autosave Steps changes, putting the data into the .DAT file in the wrong order. It can also happen when you manually save the data from the Memory List. Pointing directly to the file again refreshes the list to fix the issue. Recall in a Sequence The Recall selection is the only information specific to the step. You can choose to enter All Curves into the current sequence, or use the Last Curve Only choice to recall only the most recent curve or result saved to the file. Note: When a SoundCheck 16.0 sequence that contains a Recall Step(s) is exported, a copy of the recalled file(s) is also exported to the Exported Sequence Folder. The file path to this data will change once the sequence is exported (to point to the file when it is in the exported folder that the "*.SQC" file is in). An example of the use of the Recall Editor can be found in the Limits in Reference to Standard sequence located in the How To examples folder. In the example sequence, the curve of a reference standard “golden” loudspeaker is stored and then recalled by the sequence in order to compare it to the response of the speaker under test. The Recall step must be placed before the Post Processing step that will be using the recalled data. An example of the Post Processing step can be found in Figure 17-8: Curve used in Post Processing. Figure 17-6: Recall Step in Sequence SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor 199 The Reference Standard.dat file is located by browsing to the Data folder. The proper curve is then selected. Note that in this example Last Curve Only has been selected to use the latest Reference Standard calibration. This limits the list to only one item. Figure 17-7: Last Only Selected This curve can now be used in the Post Processing Step to perform a curve division calculation. Figure 17-8 shows the recalled curve selected as Operand B in the Post Processing step. Figure 17-8: Curve used in Post Processing Rename By clicking on Rename, the name of any curve or result can be given a custom name. The example in Figure 17-9 shows that the name has been changed from “Reference Std” to “Golden Unit“. By selecting New Curve, the original item will remain in the list and a copy of the item will be added, using the new name. Clear All By clicking on Clear All, all the curves in the list are unchecked. This can be used to de-select a large number of curves and then select the desired curve(s). 200 Recall Editor Select specific curve from drop down list. Figure 17-9: Custom Curve Name SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Add This allows you to add curve names to the list, as replacement names for existing items to be recalled. This is useful for changing a long list of curve names; e.g., Polar Plot Curves. Clear This will clear the contents of the Names to be Recalled. You can then add custom names using the Add button. It is important to know the number of curves in the list and the order of the curves, so that a corresponding number of new names are added. Renaming Example The example in Figure 17-10 shows 20 curves are present in the Polar.Dat file. After clicking the Clear button, 20 new names can be added to the list. These new names will replace the old curve names in the Memory List. 1. The Polar.dat file contains named from “Fundamental” to “19-Fundamental” 2. Click Clear to empty the list 3. Click the Add button to enter new curve names 4. Each curve must be entered one at a time Note that the curves must be entered in the proper order: 0 Degrees to 180 Degrees. This puts “place markers” in the Memory List for each of the curves, without actually having to recall the Polar.dat file. When the sequence runs, the new step names will be used. This can be used to open polar plot.DAT files and rename the curves with more descriptive names. Figure 17-10: Renaming Example SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor 201 Page Intentionally Left Blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Recall Editor 202 Post-Processing Editor Note: As of SoundCheck® 7, all spectrum are summable. Sequences from previous versions of SoundCheck will need to be revised if Summable Spectrum is selected from the Memory List. To view and change the system’s post-processing settings; select Post-Processing from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen, or use the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+O. Post-Processing allows a variety of operations to be applied to measurement data, including additional calculations, smoothing, and statistics. The Post Processing Use Chart on page 233 provides an overview of the Post Processing functions available in SoundCheck along with examples of use. Post Processing and the Equation Editor are optional modules and may not be available depending on the modules enabled on your Hardware Key. They can always be purchased from Listen and added to a Hardware Key license if needed. Select Calculation Type Select Curves from the Memory List Select Operation type Uncheck "Use Default" to create a custom result name Check to Show Data for the selected axes Create custom Units Click on "Apply" to update result in the Memory List Figure 18-1: Post-processing Editor Search Range Many post processing operations in SoundCheck have a search range, which allows the user to select discrete points or ranges along the x-axis over which to perform the desired calculation. Examples include scalar functions such as average, max and min, as well as windowing intersection, and more. As of SoundCheck 14, the search range function uses a very simple table control and allows memory list values to be selected. This means that search range parameters can be variables that are dynamically calculated by the sequence. If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. Figure 18-2: Search Range SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 203 Batch Processing This allows you to select a group of items from the Memory List to Post Process. Any Custom Group created in the Memory List can be used for the appropriate Postprocessing type. Please refer to Sorting and Grouping on page 289 for instructions on creating a Custom Group. Figure 18-1 shows a group of 4 curves selected in Operand A. Add Input Data Name is checked. The curves are labeled, Mic 1 through Mic 4. The result of this step will be 4 values added to the Memory List. The values are labeled: “Sens @ 1 kHz (Mic 1)“ to “Sens @ 1 kHz (Mic 4)“ When using Batch Processing it is recommended that you use the Add Input Data Name option so that the results are clearly named. Figure 18-3: Batch Processing Desired Result This is the name of the newly created curve. If Use default is checked, the Result name is automatically generated. A new name will be created using the original curve name concatenated with the mathematical operator, e.g., <Operand A><mathematical operator><Operand B>. This applies to all types of Post Processing steps except the User Equation. See User Equation (optional module) Equation Editor on page 221 for more details. When this box is unchecked, a custom name can be entered manually. In Figure 18-1 the result has been named Relative to Reference. Arithmetic Select Type Allows block arithmetic operations (e.g., addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division) to be performed between two complex data sets (magnitude and phase vs. frequency) or waveforms. Operand A and B can be any curve, waveform or value chosen from the Memory List. Mathematical operations are performed in parallel on Operand A and B: Point by point operation. Interpolation is performed when the frequency axis of the two operands do not match. Available Operations: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division Work in mode: Mathematical operations can be performed on the dB or power values instead of Linear values (for Y axis) Select Operand A Select Operand B Select Operation and "Work in" Mode Example of Work in dB: 90 dB + 90 dB = 180 dB (The math is applied on the dB values.) Example of Work in Linear: 90 dB + 90 dB = 96 dB (The math is applied on the linear values.) Example of Work in Power: 90 dB + 90 dB = 93 dB (The math is applied on the power values.) Note: 204 Choose axes for Result Figure 18-4: Arithmetic Postprocessing Multiplication or Division of dB to dB values is NOT allowed. Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Units are combined according to the operation chosen. For more information on the combination of units, refer to Equation Editor Functions on page 523. (The units of the final result can be modified by clicking Units in the editor.) Result x-axis same as: Allows you to set the x-axis scale from the selected operand or combination of operands. X-axis combination: Operand type X-axis Combin A B A Curve Point x Curve Point Curve Point Curve Curve Curve Curve Curve Curve Point Point Point Point Point Point B A&B x x x x x x x x Output type Rule applied Curve YB, ZB is applied as a complex constant on the entire curve A regardless of XB. Point Curve value is applied on point value @ XB using interpolation. Curve Result curve is the same as A except at XB, where points A and B are combined. Curve Points with XA only. Curve Points with XB only. Curve Points with XA & XB combined. Point One point with XA.. Point One point with XB. Curve Two points of same values @ XA & XB. You can choose A & B combined as your x-axis, instead of choosing to combine magnitude values regardless of frequency. This allows you to splice curves with different ranges together. This works best when the range of one curve ends when the range of the next curve begins (See Windowing on page 223). Figure 18-5 shows a Low Frequency and a High Frequency curve (in the XY Graph of the Display Editor). Figure 18-6 shows the resulting curve when the two curves are added and the x-axis is the same as A & B combined. Figure 18-5: Separate Curves Microphone or loudspeaker measurements that require two different measurements to acquire the proper response data can be combined into one curve using this technique. Figure 18-6: Combined Curves SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 205 Constant Allows any curve, value or waveform in the Memory List (Operand A) to be modified by block arithmetic operations (e.g., addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division). Operand B can either be a single value or a user defined constant. The operation is made on real data. The constant is applied on only one axis: each value of a single axis of Operand A is combined with the constant, Operand B. Select Type Select Operand A Select Operand B Rules - Axis choices for Operand A in Post Processing X – Modifies (+, -, x, /) Operand A by the factor entered in the Constant value box, ONLY ON THE X Axis. e.g., Frequency Y – Modifies (+, -, x, /) Operand A by the amount entered in the Constant value box, ONLY ON THE Y Axis. e.g., Magnitude Z – Modifies (+, -, x, /) Operand A by the amount entered in the Constant value box, ONLY ON THE Z Axis. e.g., Phase curve Operand B can be a Single Value item from the Memory List. In this case you can chose the x, y or z value in the Operand B selection field. This value can then be applied to Operand A as per the rules stated above. Select Operation & Work In Mode Enter Name Figure 18-7: Curve Shifting Using a Constant Work in mode is the same as in Arithmetic except: Multiplication or Division of dB to dB values is allowed. Units combination is the same as in Arithmetic. Refer to Arithmetic on page 204 for more information. 206 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Unary Select Type Allows unary operations to be performed on a complex data curve as well as waveforms. Single values, curves and waveforms are available as Operand A. However, it should be noted that not all operations are valid with all operand types. Please refer to Figure 18-9. Select Operand A Select Operation All operations allow you to select the axis and Default or Custom Name for the Desired Result. Figure 18-8: Unary Options Change Sign Multiplies the Operand by -1 Inv FFT Typically Used For Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Math operations on linear values Inverting curves used as correction curves Y Y Y Y N Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N Y N N Calculates the Group Delay (negative Y derivative of Phase) of Operand A N N N N Y Same as OperMath operation and A Allows Unwrapped Phase to Curve be exported as a curve Loudspeaker or other freCurve quency response function analysis Curve Spectrum analysis Y N N Waveform Calculates the Inverse (1/X) of Operand A Returns the positive valued magnitude Absolute Value of Operand A Returns the Square of Operand A Square (Operand A x Operand A) Returns the Square Root of Operand Square Root A Calculates the exponential of Operand Exp A (expOperand A) Returns the natural Logarithm of Ln Operand A Returns the Unwrapped phase of Unwrap Phase Operand A FFT Result Type Y Reciprocal Value Group Delay Waveforms Operation Values Name Curves Operand A Calculates the FFT of a Waveform Returns a real-valued time signal (waveform) from a complex (Mag & Phase) spectrum or response Math operation Math operation Math operation Same as OperMath operation and A Time Domain Analysis Figure 18-9: Unary Operations Chart SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 207 208 Change Sign: Changes the sign from + to - (or - to +) Curves - Only affects the phase (Z axis). Magnitude remains unchanged. Values - You are allowed to select one axis to process: x, y or z. Waveforms - Creates inverse of waveform, swapping positive and negative values of only the Y axis Reciprocal Value: Calculates the Reciprocal (1/X) or Inverse of Operand A Curves - Creates inverse of curve, swapping positive and negative values of the y and z axis Values - Allowed to select one axis to process; x, y or z. For log data in dB, calculates the inverted transfer function (Input/Output). Useful for setting target equalization curves. Absolute Value: Returns the non-negative value of Operand A Curves - Returns the magnitude (all values positive) of Operand A. Works on complex frequency domain data and deletes the phase (sets all phase values to zero). Values - Allowed to select one axis to process; x, y or z. Returns the magnitude of the item selected Square: Returns the Square of Operand A: Operand A x Operand A Select axis for result Curves - Values - Allowed to select one axis to process; x, y or z. Waveforms - Square Root: Returns the Square Root of Operand A Select axis for result Curves - Values - Allowed to select one axis to process; x, y or z. Waveforms - Exp: Calculates the exponential of Operand A (expOperand A) Curves - Convert dB back to real values, calculate the exponential, then convert the result back to dB. Values - Allows you to select one axis to process; x, y or z. Ln: Returns the Natural Logarithm of Operand A Curves - To extract the all-pass portion (pure delay) from the linear phase of a response. Many steps are required, but this is a key element. Values - Allowed to select one axis to process; x, y or z. Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Unwrap Phase: Allows Unwrapped Phase to be exported as a curve. It also allows Unwrapped Phase to be shown in a Display without having to select Unwrapped Phase from the Right Click Options of the display window. See Unwrap Phase on page 298 for details and an example. Options: Under “Show Data” X, Y and Z must be selected. Curves - Returns Unwrapped Phase as a curve. Group Delay: The derivative of the ‘unwrapped phase’ as delay (not absolute time) vs. frequency. Options: Under “Show Data”, X, Y and Z must be selected Curves - This is a curve only operation. Smoothing width in Hz - Increasing width can obscure details 1dϕτ = – ----------2πdf FFT: Calculates the FFT of a waveform. Select the Impulse Response Waveform from the Memory List. The Waveform must be in linear Y units only (not dB). Select the Weighting window: None (Rectangular), Cosine Tapered, Exponential, etc. Check Search Range and right click in the field Select Add, Edit or Remove Select Single Point or Range In the Select Search Range section, edit the time range on which to apply the FFT and weighting Data outside of the time range is ignored The result will be a frequency curve with a linear X axis, default Y unit in dB and Phase in degrees. If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. Figure 18-10: FFT and Inverse FFT Inv FFT: Returns a real-valued time signal (waveform) from a complex (Mag & Phase) spectrum or response. Select the response curve from the Memory List. The output is a Linear or dB (envelope) Waveform. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 209 Scalar (Statistics) This allows calculations of a single value from a specified curve or waveform. Again, not all operations are valid for all operand types. Select Type Select Operand A None of these functions can be applied on single values. IEEE and ITU loudness operations can only be performed on frequency curves. Select Operation Optional modules for telephone loudness measurements Optional modules for hearing aid measurements Figure 18-11: Scalar Operations Average N Calculates the mean of the curve Y values y = i=1 y----i over the search range, regardless of the units (e.g., N averaging a curve with 3 points, 10, 12 and 14 dB, will yield a value of 12 dB. Power Sum Calculates the square root of the sum of the squares of each Y value in a spectrum. PwrSum = 1- 2 -- yi B i This is dependent on the Bandwidth Value, “B”. The Bandwidth Value varies, depending the analysis method selected in the Analysis Step. e.g., The square root of the sum of the power of each RTA bin, or the sum of the power of a specific frequency band of an FFT spectrum. Note: As of SoundCheck® 7, all spectrum are summable. Sequences from previous versions of SoundCheck will need to be revised if Summable Spectrum is selected from the Memory List. Maximum Finds the maximum curve Y value in the specified search range and returns X, Y and Z values at that point. 210 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Minimum Finds the minimum curve Y value in the specified search range and returns X, Y and Z values at that point. Est. Resonance Finds the resonance frequency, amplitude, and quality factor (Q) of a peak in a curve. The calculation is based on an algorithm that fits a quadratic polynomial to sequential groups of data points. The number of data points used in the fit is specified by the width control in terms of either how many dB down from the peak or % of the peak. For most woofers, -3 dB will suffice, but for low Q drivers (such as tweeters) -1 dB may be required in order to resolve the resonance frequency from the fitted curve. Est. Notch Finds the antiresonance frequency, amplitude, and quality factor of a dip or notch in a curve. IEEE-661 OLR This calculates the average of the Freq. Response from Start Freq to Stop Freq. The average is taken of the amplitude raised to the power of (1/Exponent). The Freq. Response must be given in dB. The average is calculated using the trapezoid rule. Values for Freq. Response at the exact Start and Stop Frequencies are found by interpolation. To calculate OLR according to ANSI/IEEE 661, the Start Freq must be no higher than 300 Hz and the Stop Freq must be no lower than 3300 Hz. The Frequency Response shall (according to the standard) cover this frequency range and include at least 12 measurement points within the frequency range. α S S i i–1 --------- --------20α 20α 10 + 10 N fi log ----------- ⋅ -----------------------------------------2 LoudnessRating = – 20log i = 2 f i – 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- f N log ----- f1 α = Loudness compression exponent. The default value, based on the standard, is 2.2. N = number of measured frequencies fi = frequency at index i. The frequency range is usually 300 - 3300 Hz Si = electroacoustic sensitivity of the path at frequency fi. This sensitivity is usually expressed in units of dB mV/Pa or dB Pa/mV A correction may be applied to the sensitivities in these formula to account for leakage of (legacy) Type 1 ear simulators, or for impedance, depending on the application and/or applicable performance standards. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 211 ITU-T SLR & RLR (Optional Module Required) Calculates the send and receive loudness ratings according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 Loudness Rating from the m ( Si – Wi ) N2 --------------------------- 10 10 values in the Freq. Response. The formula is: LoudnessRating = – ------ log 10 m i = N1 m = Loudness growth exponent i = frequency band index (ISO R10 1/3-octave bands) Wi = frequency weighting in dB Si = electroacoustic sensitivity of the path at frequency fi N = frequency band number (typically 4-17 where band no. 1 = 100 Hz) A correction may be applied to the sensitivities in these formula to account for leakage of (legacy) Type 1 ear simulators, or for impedance, depending on the application and/or applicable performance standards. ITU-T STMR (Optional Module Required) Calculates the sidetone loudness ratings according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 Loudness Rating from the values in Freq. Response. For IEEE standards, the exponent can be user defined. For ITU standards, both the exponent and the weighting curve can be user defined. This is for future use and modifications of standards. The step is set to Use Default Values by default. Select Type: Scalar Select Operand A: Fundamental Operation: ITU-T options; SLR, RLR, RLR with Leak and STMR Weighting Function: Select “Use Default Values” or select an item from the Memory List Search Range If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. Check Search Range and right click in the field 212 Figure 18-12: ITU-T SLR Settings Select Add, Edit or Remove Select Single Point or Range In the Select Search Range section, edit the frequency range From and To values Select Name option: Use Default or Custom Name for output Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual ITU Wideband Weighting Curves The default ITU weighting curves used for loudness rating are narrowband (200-4 kHz). They are from ITU Recommendation P.79, Table 1. Wideband weighting curves (100-10 kHz) can be used instead. They are from ITU Recommendation P.79, Table A.2. They are intended for use on devices that can operate both in narrowband and wideband modes. Wideband weighting curves are available in the SoundCheck Data folder: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\data\. Figure 18-13 shows an example of how the weighting curves are used. 1. Open the RLR or SLR DAT file in the Memory List 2. The weighting curve can then be selected in the Post Processing step 3. Exponent is same as default 4. If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. RLR is calculated on each point in the weighting curve, according to the standard. 5. For better results, Operand A should be the received frequency response in 1/3rd octave resolution. This can be the result of a 1/3rd octave RTA measurement, or conversion from another format using “band-averaging” as described in IEEE 269-2012 Figure 18-13: Wideband Weighting Curve 6. For use in a sequence, use a Recall Step to load the RLR or SLR DAT file into the Memory List Attack and Release (Optional Module Required) This function can be used to test the time it takes for the signal from a DUT to stabilize after a sudden change in signal level. This function requires optional module 2008 - Attack and Release In this example, Stimulus is set to 2 kHz, with 2 different stimulus levels (Figure 18-14) Time Envelope must be turned on in the Analysis Step of the sequence (Figure 18-14) See the default sequence “Release Time“ in the Hearing Aid folder for an example SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure 18-14: Stimulus and Analysis Step Settings Post-Processing Editor 213 Attack Time Figure 18-15 shows the settings for the Attack Time function in Post Processing. By making an initial measurement of the device under test, you can look at the Attack Time Envelope to determine if the Search Range of the example sequence is correct for that particular device. In this case, the Attack level is set to 3 dB and the search range is set at 1 to 2.5 seconds. Note: The Search Range of the Post Processing step must be set to start before the onset of the transient and end well after the point were the signal has become stable. An initial measurement of the device will provide and Attack Envelope so that you can determine what the actual range should be. See Figure 18-16. Right click on the Search Range field to edit. Figure 18-15: Attack Time Important! In order to avoid “turn on transients” the Search Range should never start at 0 mS. Figure 18-16: Attack Envelope The process starts by searching the Attack Time Envelope in reverse, from the Search Range End Point as specified in the Post Processing step. The green cursor in Figure 18-17 indicates this point. From here, the Post Processing step searches back to the point where the signal is 3 dB greater than the stable level. The red cursor indicates this point. The difference in level between the two points is shown in the Delta Y field (Δ y); 3 dB as specified in the Parameters section of the Post Processing step. 214 -0.348 3.0013 Figure 18-17: Start of stability after Attack Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The next step is to determine the actual attack time. Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 are positioned Attack time is the difference between the transient onset time and the 3 dB up time: Δ t. This is the time from the onset of the transient to the “3 dB up” point. Figure 1818 shows the attack time in the Delta X – Time box (Δ t). (Delta X and Delta Y are visible by clicking the Double Down Arrow at the right side of the display window.) Figure 18-18: Attack Time Release Time In the example sequence, the Release level Parameter is set to –4 dB with a Search Range of 1 to 2.5 seconds. The Search Range may need to be increased if testing a device with a long release time. The Release Time function in the Post Processing step works in a similar fashion to the Attack Time. Figure 18-19: Release Time It searches in reverse for the point where the signal becomes stable after release. From this point it then searches for the point where the envelope level drops below the stable level, by the value specified in the Parameters section of the Post Processing Step. -0.308 The Release time is then determined to be the time from where the level of the envelope drops below the threshold level to the point where the envelope level is 4 dB down from the stable level. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual -4.038 Figure 18-20: Start of stability after Release Post-Processing Editor 215 This method of determining the attack and release time, as well as the values noted in the setup of the sequence, is in accordance with ANSI standard S3.22 – 1996, section 6.15.2. The actual Attack and Release Limits will vary according to the specifications of the device under test. 0.4687 -31.650 Figure 18-21: Release Time 216 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Zwicker Loudness (Optional Module Required) Zwicker Loudness calculates the overall perceived loudness of a sound. This post-processing operation uses a psycho-acoustic model which takes into account the nonlinearity of the human ear to sound at different frequencies and levels. It provides the capability to measure the perceived loudness of complex sounds, e.g., telephone ring tones. This is the actual loudness of the sound recorded, with a value in PHONS and SONES. Spectrum dB SPL Auditory Bands Ear Weighting Freq. Spreading Level Compression Loudness in Phons Figure 18-22: Zwicker Loudness Process The Zwicker Loudness process from Figure 18-22 is detailed below. 1. The spectrum in dB SPL is recorded. It must be a "Calibrated Acoustic Pressure" in Pascals or dB SPL. 2. It is regrouped into auditory bands, according to Bark Scale 3. The spectrum is remapped 4. A frequency weighting is then applied to take into account the response of the ear 5. A frequency masking effect is applied 6. A mathematical compression is applied to achieve the final loudness number 7. This yields the actual loudness in PHONS, by power summing the compressed level Figure 18-23: Zwicker Settings Zwicker Loudness uses an up-to-date algorithm that conforms to the ITU-R Rec. BS.1387 PEAQ standard. It is similar to ISO532, which is simpler and only processes 3rd Octave spectrums. Zwicker Loudness is intended for use with broadband signals such as speech. It is not for use with single tones. Zwicker can be applied to any spectrum, as long as it is a calibrated acoustic spectrum in Pascals or dB SPL. The curve must be consistent in resolution, e.g.: 5 Hz, 3rd Octave, etc. The frequency resolution of the spectrum is not necessarily important. The algorithm converts the spectrum to power spectral density before calculating the loudness. Zwicker Loudness also features an option to output the Loudness Spectrum to the Memory List. The units for the X-axis are selectable between Hz and Bark scale (See Bark Scale on page 219). The loudness spectrum allows you to determine which frequencies are responsible for the loudness, and is useful for analysis of signals such as: telephone ring tones, speech and music. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 217 Zwicker Example This example shows the Zwicker Loudness results for a set of headphones. The Post-Processing step in Figure 18-23 shows the Corrected Fundamental selected under Operand A Two Post Processing steps are required to create separate results with unique names for left and right headphones Loudness Spectrum is checked and the X-axis unit is set to Hz You have the option of selecting which axis to show in the Loudness Value Figure 18-24: Zwicker Example Output The Zwicker Loudness Post Processing output is shown in Figure 18-25. Separate Loudness values are shown for Left and Right Headphones The Diffuse Field Corrected Response is used as Operand A in the Zwicker Post Processing step X axis = Loudness in Phons Y axis = Power sum of original spectrum Z axis = Loudness in Sones Zwicker Loudness Spectrum - This shows which frequencies are responsible for the loudness Figure 18-25: Zwicker Loudness Output 218 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Bark Scale The auditory pitch scale is expressed in Barks. The relationship between Barks and Frequency (Hz) is shown in Figure 18-26. Figure 18-26: Bark Scale Active Speech Level - P56 (Optional Module Required) Used with a speech signal, this operation evaluates levels for only the parts of the waveform where speech is actually present. Silent gaps are excluded but short interruptions that are part of continuous speech are included. It is widely used in telephony applications, i.e.: testing to ITU-T P.56 05/93 Method B. The Active Speech Level of the WAV file can be set in the Stimulus Editor. See Stimulus Settings on page 98. Parameters: Operand A - This should be a speech waveform Time Constant (Sec) - Time constant of exponential averaging used to smooth the envelope of the speech signal (30 ms default) Hangover Time (Sec) - Allowable time for silence during active speech. Longer silent gaps between active speech sections are ignored and left out of the calculation. (200 ms default) Margin (dB) - Difference, in dB, between threshold of activity and active speech level. When the level of the background noise is high, the margin can be reduced in order to exclude the noise. (15.9 dB default) Figure 18-27: Active Speech Level Output: The Active Speech Level value in the Memory List shows the following: X - Activity Factor (%): Percentage of time during waveform where speech is active Y - Active Speech Level (dB): Mean power of speech measured over the aggregate time of activity Z - Long-term Level (dB): Mean power of the waveform measured over its entire duration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor Figure 18-28: Value in Memory List 219 Smoothing Selects the degree of smoothing for the displayed curve. Smoothing corresponds to a running average on a frequency axis with a window of the given width (1/n octave or number of Hertz). The running average can be weighted using a Hanning window in order to get a smoother curve result. Figure 18-29: One-third Octave Curve Smoothing compares an 8196-line with the same curve smoothed by 1/3 octave. Figure 18-29: One-third Octave Curve Smoothing Note: To keep both the beginning and end points of the smoothed curve untouched, the smoothing width is gradually reduced down to zero when it reaches the extremities of the curve. In Figure 18-29, the two curves merge at 20 kHz. Intersection (search) This is used to find the intersection points between two curves or waveforms, or between a curve/waveform and a single point. Search Up - Determines the first intersection point Select Type Select Operand A Search Down - Determines the last intersection point Return all intersection points - Yields a curve of all of the intersection points. (This can also be displayed as a table of values in a Display Step.) Search Range allows you to narrow the range of the search or to exclude regions that a search should not occur within. Select Operand B Select Search Criteria If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. Result The Intersection Value is available in the Memory List. Figure 18-30: Intersection of Two Curves Figure 18-31: Intersection Value 220 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual User Equation (optional module) Equation Editor This section allows you to build an arithmetic equation using constants and the values generated by the sequence. You can build an equation (similar syntax to writing an equation in Excel) and define the variables and results at the top of the editor. Build this equation by selecting a curve, single value name, or defining a constant from the pull down lists that appear in the top table of the User Equation Parameters window. Assign variable names for these data in the Variables column, using numbers and letters, but no spaces. Choose which axis of the curve or value you wish to use. The Values and Units columns are only accessible if you are in a user defined constant row. Curves and Values from the Memory List have sequence-determined values and units. Use these variables in the equation box in the Post Processing Editor. ALL CALCULATIONS ARE PERFORMED IN LINEAR UNITS IN THE REAL DOMAIN. Units drawn from the Memory List are analyzed, and if a log scale is in use, it will be first converted to linear before being used in calculation. The Editor will then convert back to the log scale to output results, if desired. Define the units of the results by clicking Units. Complex Math operations are not supported. You will need to break the operation down to its arithmetic equivalent. Operations on the Z axis (phase) is not supported in the Equation Editor. Create Variables Create equation(s). Use the syntax in the Appendix for User Equations Assign units Clears the Equation window and all fields in the Parameters Table Input Name for results Figure 18-32: Assign Variable Names to Curves and Values From the Memory List You can find a list of valid function syntax for this equation box in Equation Editor Functions on page 523. Each equation must produce only one new variable as the result. In the equation box, the result must be on the left, an equal sign immediately to the right of the result, and then the remainder of the equation. A semicolon (;) should end every individual equation. Each result will be listed on the right hand of the editor, and will appear in the Memory List as you have named it. You can use numbers and letters, but no spaces. You must assign unit information for this new value, created in your equation. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 221 User Equation Syntax Each equation must start with the result variable, followed by the equal sign, then the operators, variables and constants that will produce your result. Equations shall be separated by a semi colon. Help menus are available for the User Equation (optional module) Equation Editor section of SoundCheck. Press Ctrl+H on your keyboard or Click the “? mark” on the editor to open the Context Help window (See Figure 18-33: Equation Context Help). It will give information on the last item your mouse has scrolled over. Press Ctrl+H again to make the Context Help window disappear, or click the close box button in the upper right hand corner. Figure 18-33: Equation Context Help In general, use the following procedures: 1. Define the Input Operands Define the variables of input operands. Default is “a0, a1 …aX”. Define the units of user defined variables. 2. Create Equation The desired results list will be generated by the equation. Default curve names are the same as the result variables but can be changed manually by the user. 3. Modify results parameters Change the name of the desired results. (This name will appear in the Memory List.) Define the units of the desired results. In the column labeled Select Units and then click Units… to change the units for that line. (See Figure 18-32: Assign Variable Names to Curves and Values From the Memory List). Note: 222 When creating or editing very large equations, it may be helpful to use a text editor such as Wordpad since it has more space for typing. The equation can then be copied and pasted into the Equation field in SoundCheck. A useful tool in Wordpad is Find and Replace. Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Windowing This type allows you to trim the curve selected in Operand A with respect to the X axis. Select a range of X values to include in the new curve from the Search Range list box, or define a new range by clicking Edit Range (See Search Range) then name the new windowed curve before leaving the step. by default, the new curve will be named as seen in Figure 1834: Frequency Window Options, with the range appended to the original name). You can select All Points to include the entire acquired range of the test signal. This feature allows you to splice curves together cleanly. You can trim curves first by setting the Frequency Window and then splice them in an additional Post Processing step. If Search Range is unchecked, this indicates it is set to “All” points in the selected data. Check Search Range and right click in the field Select Add Select Range In the Select Search Range section, edit the frequency range From and To values SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor Figure 18-34: Frequency Window Options 223 Resolution A curve can be resampled according to a new resolution. e.g., a Linear Spectrum can be resampled to 1/3 octave. The Resolution Post-Processing operation should be used on signals acquired with HarmonicTrak, Heterodyne and Time Selective Response Analysis modes. Smoothing There is no need to use a separate Smoothing Step before a Resolution Step as this operation is available with the step. The smoothing function is applied before resampling The smoothing width is the same as the selected resolution Select Type Select Operand A Original Resolution Select New Resolution Select Smoothing Operation Smoothing Off: The Resolution step creates the output curve by linearly interpolating the magnitude and phase data (y and z axes) of Operand A at frequencies (x-axis values) defined by the selected resolution. Figure 18-35: Resolution Smoothing On: Resolution will first linearly interpolate Operand A data to the highest possible resolution. (This is the equivalent of the original curve being “User defined lin” with a value of 1 Hz). Next, the Resolution Step resamples the interpolated data at the selected resolution to create the result curve in the Memory List. Smoothing is only likely useful if the final curve resolution is higher than or “not a mathematical factor” of the original resolution. See Example 2 and Example 3. Example 1 Operand A is smoothed at 1/24th (R80) octave resolution and the desired resolution is 1/3rd octave (R10). Smoothing is optional. The values corresponding to the 1/3rd octave frequencies will be picked out of Operand A to create the result curve in the Memory List. Example 2 Operand A is smoothed at 1/24th (R80) octave resolution and the selected resolution is User Defined, 1/10th octave. Smoothing is optional. Without smoothing: New 1/10th octave frequencies will be calculated and the original values in Operand A will be used to linearly interpolate new values for the output curve. With smoothing: Operand A will be used to interpolate values for every frequency between the original 1/24th octave frequencies. Then the calculated values that correspond to the 1/10th octave frequencies will be used to create the output curve. Example 3 Operand A is non-standard 1/10th octave resolution and the selected result resolution is standard R40 1/12th octave. In this case, smoothing should applied. Resolution will interpolate values for basically every frequency between the original 1/10th octave frequencies. Then, just the values corresponding to 1/12th octave frequencies will be picked out to create the result curve in the Memory List. 224 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The example in Figure 18-36 shows a comparison of the original spectrum to two different results: 1/3 octave with no smoothing and 1/3 octave with smoothing. Smoothing yields a curve that better tracks the midline of the original spectrum. Figure 18-36: Resolution Comparison ISO or RTA Frequencies In measurement resolutions above 1/3rd octave, ISO and RTA frequency points no longer coincide. When the “New Resolution” field is set to 1/6TH octave or above, you can select either ISO or RTA frequencies. This is useful for comparing measurements made with HarmonicTrak to measurements made with the RTA virtual instrument. When set to ISO, the result can be compared to a curve made with the HarmonicTrak algorithm When set to RTA, the result can be compared to measurements made with the RTA virtual instrument When using a Stweep with a resolution of R40 (1/12th Octave), the ISO frequency points of the measured response curve can be converted to RTA frequency points. The result of the example in Figure 18-37 can be compared to a curve made with the RTA virtual instrument. Conversely, RTA curves can be converted to ISO curves. Please refer to Appendix H: Windows Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521, for a chart of ISO frequencies according to resolution. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor Figure 18-37: Resolution: ISO and RTA frequency 225 Directivity Index This function is used to calculate the Directivity Index from a set of off axis response curves. These curves must be measured on an arc, around the DUT (based on Polar Response). This process yields a single curve that indicates the directivity at specific frequencies. Reference Curve: This is the On Axis measurement (0 degrees). Weighting Function: This is a means of applying a weighting curve that will emphasize/de-emphasize measurement values according to the angle of the measurement. This is applied to the group of selected curves. The standard is: w(q)=|Sine q|. Select Type Select Reference Curve A Select Curve Group Select Weighting and Increment Formula Applied: For a set of off-axis frequency responses L(f, q) and a defined weighting function w(q), the directivity index function is defined by: maxθ L ( f, 0 ) ⋅ w ( θ ) dθ 0 Index ( f ) = 10 log -----------------------------------------------------------maxθ 2 w ( θ ) ⋅ L ( f, θ ) dθ 2 0 Figure 18-38: Directivity Index Directivity Index where Maxθ is the total range of angle. The formula used for Directivity Index is the one described in [1], with the assumption that the DUT is symmetrical around its nominal axis. [1] Beranek LL. Acoustics. New York: McGraw-Hill Electrical and Electronic Engineering Series, McGraw Hill; 1954 Incrementation: Auto Increment: equally divides the selected curves across the Total Rotation in degrees, e.g.; If Total Rotation is set to 180 degrees and there is one Reference curve and nineteen Off Axis curves, Auto Increment will calculate an angle of 10 degrees between each measurement. 226 Increment (deg.): Sets the Angle of increment in degrees for each measured curve Desired Result: This can use the default name or a user selected name Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Nth Octave Synthesis This operator is meant to transform an FFT Spectrum into an RTA Spectrum. The transform is done by making a power sum of all adjacent FFT lines that are encompassed in the target Nth-octave bands. The final RTA Spectrum has the same frequencies as the RTA analyzer. This can be used after an analysis step using the Spectrum or Dual-Channel algorithms. e.g., A response auto-spectrum with 1 Hz resolution can then be transformed into a 3rd octave spectrum, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. It can be used to reduce the resolution of an RTA spectrum, e.g., going from a 1/24th octave to a 1/3rd octave spectrum. The algorithm can be used to convert the Summable Spectrum saved from a “pre-SoundCheck 7 FFT Spectrum Analyzer”. Note: All FFT spectrum are summable spectrum as of SoundCheck 7. Any FFT Spectrum acquired with SoundCheck can be processed with Nth Octave Synthesis. The example in Figure 18-39: 1/Nth Octave Synthesis shows the Spectrum (acquired with the Spectrum Analysis module) being synthesized to an RTA Spectrum with a resolution of 3rd Octave. The result is compared to the Summable Spectrum in the XY Graph. The FFT Spectrum is in Blue (lower) and the RTA Spectrum is in Red (upper). Note: This operation should not be used on a frequency response result (Fundamental from HarmonicTrak), because one cannot make a power sum of the ratios of output over input. In the case of frequency response, use the Resolution and Smoothing operations in Post Processing. FFT Spectrum Minim um Tim e Resolution Required Figure 18-39: 1/Nth Octave Synthesis nth Octave RTA Low Frequency Cut-off apply nth octave synthesis R10 Cut-off (1/3rd oct) R20 Cut-off (1/6th oct) R40 Cut-off (1/12th oct) R80 Cut-off (1/24th oct) 100 Hz 10 mS > 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz 16000 Hz 10 Hz 100 mS > 200 Hz 400 Hz 800 Hz 1600 Hz 1 Hz 1S > 20 Hz 40 Hz 80 Hz 160 Hz Figure 18-40: FFT to RTA Nth Octave Synthesis A minimum of 5 lines is enforced to ensure ANSI Nth octave filter compliance. That constraint gives a lower frequency cut-off for the operation. The chart in Figure 18-40: FFT to RTA Nth Octave Synthesis shows the relationship between the resolution of the FFT Spectrum and the result of applying Nth Octave Synthesis to get the RTA Spectrum. The chart shows the resulting low frequency cut-off point. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 227 Rules - Resampling and Frequency Shift SoundCheck cannot analyze response signals that do not match the sample rate of the corresponding stimulus. Resampling and Frequency Shift post-processing steps allow you to synchronize waveforms that do not have the same sample rate or where generated and recorded by systems with different sample clock sources. Resampling and Frequency Shift may be required when: Different audio interfaces operating at different sample rates are used to generate the stimulus and record the response waveforms: e.g. AmpConnect ISC (44.1 kHz) generates the stimulus and DCC1448 (48 kHz) records it. The sample rate of the device under test does not match the SoundCheck sample rate, e.g.: Bluetooth Headsets that have a fixed sample rate of 8 kHz The audio interface(s) and DUT do not have a common clock source, which means that the resulting waveforms may not match in sample rate. In general, first apply a Resampling Step, then apply a Frequency Shift Step. Please see Resampling and Frequency Shift on page 229. Resampling This function changes the sampling rate of a waveform up or down. The original sampling rate is displayed and the new sampling rate is entered by the user. For example, when measuring Bluetooth devices that only support a sample rate of 8000 Hz, the measured waveform can be resampled to 44.1 kHz as shown in Figure 18-41. Since the original sample rate of the DUT may not be exactly 8 kHz, the result waveform should have Frequency Shift applied as well. This will correct for any sample rate error. Figure 18-41: Resampling 228 Post-Processing Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Frequency Shift Essentially it allows you to match the sample rate of the device under test to the sample rate of the stimulus used in SoundCheck. When a stimulus is played back as a WAV file on a digital device, such as an MP3 player, the device may not play the file at its original sample rate. The frequencies present in the response are artificially offset, which corrupts the analysis. In order to perform the analysis, the response waveform must be adjusted so its frequency points match the stimulus waveform. Figure 18-42 shows the Frequency Shift function used to shift the measured Response to match the original stimulus. After the Response Waveform is shifted, the Analysis Step will yield an accurate frequency response. Dualchannel or Multitone analysis will then have the correct coherence function Frequency Shift can also be used with a Stweep stimulus and HarmonicTrak Analysis Figure 18-42: Frequency Shift Waveform Selection Operand A: Select the Input waveform that should be corrected, e.g.; Response Waveform Playback Sampling Rate: This is the method used to estimate the playback sampling rate of Operand A Automatically Calculated: The playback sampling rate is calculated by comparing the frequency content of Operand A to the selected Reference Frequency User Def: Use if the sampling rate of Waveform A is already known Reference Frequency Reference Waveform: Select the waveform to be used as the target sampling rate, e.g.; Stimulus Waveform Automatic: The sampling rate of the Reference Waveform is used. (This is the recommended method.) User Defined mode: Enter the Reference Frequency to use for synchronization. (present in Reference Waveform and shifted in Response Waveform (Operand A) Desired Result Enter a custom name for the new Shifted Waveform or select Use Default. The new waveform is the result of Operand A being shifted to match the sampling rate of the Reference Waveform. This new waveform should be used in subsequent Analysis steps. For an example sequence using this step refer to the default sequences: Bluetooth Headset - Send and Bluetooth Headset - Receive. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 229 Time Domain Waveform Filter (Optional Module Required) Arbitrary Waveform Filter FFT-1 The Waveform Filter post-processing operation allows you to choose a curve from the Memory List, use it as the frequency response and apply it to a waveform in the Memory List. The result is a new waveform that has its spectral content shaped by the selected curve. There is also an option for minimum phase and inverting the curve. This may be used, for example, for measuring the A-weighted peak acoustic pressure of a waveform. The A-weighting curve is first applied to the acoustic waveform via the waveform filtering post processing step, and then the peak value of the resulting waveform is measured. This method is used in the IEEE 269 and TIA 920 telephony standards. FFT Input Waveform Output Waveform Filter Operation Memory List Curve A weighting Figure 18-43: Waveform Filter Process The example in Figure 18-43 shows the process of using an arbitrary waveform filter: A target waveform is selected from the Memory List: P50 Speech A curve from the Memory List is then applied: A Weighting curve The result is a new waveform that is shaped by the A weighting curve: P50 (Filtered-min phase) Filter Options: 230 Min Phase - use when selected curve for filter has no phase information Invert Curve - useful for creating the inverse of the selected curve when using it as a correction curve The filtering process can be applied on the incoming waveform and can be used in a sequence in real-time This is the same algorithm used in the Stimulus Step for creating Equalization Curves Waveform filtering can also be useful for applying ERP to DRP correction Post-Processing Editor Figure 18-44: Waveform Filter SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Standard Waveform Filter In addition to the Arbitrary waveform filters (introduced in SoundCheck 11.0), a selection of Standard Waveform filters are also available, including Butterworth high-pass, low-pass, band-pass and band-stop filters. These standard filters are useful for conditioning stimulus and response waveforms when you are making time domain measurements, or for band pass analysis in the time domain (e.g., speech intelligibility or attack and release testing). The arbitrary filters are often used for telephony and hearing aid applications and can also be used when you need to listen to the processed time signal for subjective evaluation. Both the Arbitrary and Standard waveform filters require Optional Module 2032: Waveform Filter. When the post processing step is applied, the filtered waveform is output to the Memory List. Filter Options: Filter Shape - Select Lowpass, Highpass, Bandpass and Bandstop Lowpass and Highpass filters only show one Cutoff field. Bandpass and Bandstop show Low Cutoff and High Cutoff fields. Cutoff (Hz) – the corner frequency for lowpass and highpass filters (nominal 3 dB – down point) Low Cutoff (Hz) – the lower corner frequency for bandpass and bandstop filters (nominal 3 dB – down point) High Cutoff (Hz) - the upper corner frequency for bandpass and bandstop filters (nominal 3 dB – down point) Filter Order - Enter 1 to n as a value for the filter order Figure 18-45: Standard Waveform Filter The slope of the attenuation is proportional to the filter order: An order “n” will result in an attenuation rate of 20*n dB/ decade = 6*n dB/ octave. e.g.; A 5th order filter will have an attenuation slope of 100 dB/decade. In other words, the higher the order of the filter, the steeper the attenuation. Figure 18-46: Comparison of Filters SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 231 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post-Processing Editor 232 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post Processing Use Chart Post P Type Operation Description Unary Change Sign Multiplies the Operand by -1 Unary Reciprocal Value Absolute Value Calculates the Inverse (1/X) of Unary Example use Operand A Axis X Y Z Y Y Y Y Y N Returns the positive valued magnitude of Operand A change polarity e.g. polarized mics which invert time signal Inverting curves used for equalization and correction curves Removes phase e.g. when adding harmonics to calculate total distortion Y Y N Square Returns the Square of Operand A (Operand A x Operand A) e.g. first step in calculating RMS and removes phase Y Y Unary Square Root e.g. last step in RMS calculation Y Unary Exp Math operation Unary Ln Unary Unwrap Phase Unary Group Delay Unary FFT Unary Inv FFT Arithmetic "+, -, x, /" Constant "+, -, x, /" Scalar Average Returns the Square Root of Operand A Raises the Operand to the user input power (exponent) Returns the natural Logarithm of Operand A Returns the Unwrapped phase of Operand A Calculates the Group Delay (negative derivative of Phase) of Operand A Calculates the FFT of a Waveform Returns a real-valued time signal (waveform) from a complex (Mag & Phase) spectrum or response Allows you to perform basic math operations on data. Work In allows math to be done on the y axis dB or Power values as well as Linear values. Allows you to apply a single value constant from the Memory List or from the User Defined field to the selected axis of the data. Calculates the mean of the curve Y values over the search range, regardless of the units. Unary Post Processing Use Chart (Statistics) Result Type Post P Step Template 233 Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Same as Operand A none Y Same as Operand A none Y Y none Y Y N Math operation Y Y N Allows Unwrapped Phase to be treated as a separate curve from magnitude converts phase response to delay in seconds vs. frequency Y N N Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Same as Operand A Curve Y N N Curve Group Delay Spectrum analysis N N Y Curve FFT Time Domain Analysis Y N N Waveform See FFT Block math operations are performed between two complex data sets (magnitude and phase vs. frequency) or waveforms. Multiplication or Division of dB to dB values is NOT allowed Y Y Y Same as Operand A Curve Addition dB, Curve Addition, Curve division, Curve Subtraction dB, Curve Subtraction Multiplication or Division of dB to dB values is allowed Y Y Y Same as Operand A Can be used to determine the Sensitivity from a Fundamental curve at a single frequency or series of frequencies Y N Y Value Curve divided by constant, Curve minus constant dB, Curve multiplied by constant, Curve plus constant dB, Curve plus constant Sensitivity & HFA (OSPL 90 sequence) Reciprocal Absolute Value none none Unwrap Phase 234 Post P Type Scalar Operation Power Sum (Statistics) Scalar Maximum / (Statistics) Minimum Scalar Est. Resonance (Statistics) Scalar Est. Notch (Statistics) Post Processing Use Chart Scalar IEEE TOLR (Statistics) Scalar IEEE ROLR (Statistics) Scalar IEEE SOLR (Statistics) Scalar ITU-T SLR (Statistics) Scalar ITU-T RLR (Statistics) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Scalar (Statistics) Scalar (Statistics) ITU-T RLR w/ Leak ITU-T STMR Description Calculates the square root of the sum of the squares of each Y value in a spectrum Finds the max or min Y value of a curve in the specified search range and returns X, Y and Z values at that point. Finds the resonance frequency, amplitude, and quality factor (Q) of a peak in a curve. Finds the antiresonance frequency, amplitude, and quality factor of a dip or notch in a curve. This calculates the average of the Freq. Response from Start Freq to Stop Freq according to IEEE Standard. This calculates the average of the Freq. Response from Start Freq to Stop Freq according to IEEE Standard. This calculates the average of the Freq. Response from Start Freq to Stop Freq according to IEEE Standard. Calculates the send loudness rating according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 from the Freq. Response. Calculates the receive loudness rating according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 from the Freq. Response. Calculates the receive loudness rating according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 from the Freq. Response. Calculates the sidetone loudness rating according to the ITU-T Rec. P79 from the Freq. Response. Example use Operand A Axis X Y Z Result Type Post P Step Template Y N Y Value Power sum Y N Y Value Maximum, Minimum Y N N Value Est. Resonance Y N N Value none Transmitting Objective Loudness Rating Y N N Value none Receiving Objective Loudness Rating Y N N Value none Sidetone Objective Loudness Rating Y N N Value none For IEEE standards, the exponent can be user defined. For ITU standards, both the exponent and the weighting curve can be user defined. Y N N Value none For ITU standards Y N N Value none For ITU standards Y N N Value none For ITU standards Y N N Value none SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Post P Type Scalar (Statistics) Scalar (Statistics) Scalar (Statistics) Post Processing Use Chart Description Attack Time / Release Time Used to test the time it takes for the signal from a DUT to stabilize after a sudden change in signal level. Calculates the overall perceived loudness of a sound. Requires a time envelope waveform in dB. N N Y Value Attack Time & Release time Used to measure the perceived loudness of complex sounds, e.g., telephone ring tones. Y N N Curve & Value Zwicker Loudness Used with a speech signal, this operation evaluates levels for only the parts of the waveform where speech is actually present. Used to find the intersection points between two curves or waveforms, or between a curve/ waveform and a single point. corresponds to a running average on a frequency axis with a window of the given width: 1/n octave. Used to calculate the Directivity Index from a set of off axis response curves (Polar Response). Used to transform an FFT Spectrum into an RTA Spectrum. Curves acquired with HarmonicTrak, Heterodyne and Time Selective Response Analysis can be resampled according to a new resolution: 1/3rd Octave. Used to trim the selected curve according to the selected X axis range. Allows you to match the sample rate of the device under test to the sample rate of the stimulus used in SoundCheck. Changes the sampling rate of a waveform up or down. Widely used in telephony applications, i.e.: testing to ITU-T P.56 05/93 Method B. N N Y Value Active Speech Level Y Y N Value Intersection Y Y N Curve or Smoothing Y N N Curve Directivity Index Y N N Curve none Y N N Curve Resolution Y Y N Curve or Windowing Commonly used to account for sample rate inaccuracies of portable audio devices. Apply after using a Resampling step. N N Y Waveform Frequency Shift Example: measuring Bluetooth devices with a sample rate of 8000Hz, the waveform can be resampled to 44.1kHz. N N Y Waveform none Zwicker Loudness Active Speech Level Intersection same Smoothing same Directivity Index same 1/n Octave Synthesis Resolution same same Windowing same Frequency Shift same Resampling same Example use Operand A Axis X Y Z Operation Result Type Post P Step Template 235 236 Post P Type Operation Waveform Filter same User same Equation Module Description Allows you to choose a Memory List Curve, apply it to a Memory List Waveform and create a new waveform shaped by the spectral content of the selected curve. Allows you to build an arithmetic equation using constants and the values generated by the sequence. Example use Operand A Axis X Y Z Example: measuring the A-weighted peak acoustic pressure of a waveform. Used in the IEEE 269 and TIA 920 telephony standards N N Y Complex Math operations are not supported. You will need to break the operation down to its arithmetic equivalent. Y Y Y Result Type Waveform Post P Step Template Waveform Filter none Post Processing Use Chart SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step The Message Step (Ctrl+Shift+M) is used in a test sequence to: Provide messages to the operator. Enable the operator to input information needed to complete the test (e.g., a reference resistance value when measuring loudspeaker impedance). Communicate to devices through the PC’s RS232 or IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface. To view and change the system’s message settings, select Messages from the Setup drop down menu on the main SoundCheck® menu bar. The Message Setup dialog provides user prompts, control of external equipment and calls to other programs. There are three choices for communication of your message. You can send a message to the Operator, a Digital I/O card, or an external Interface connected to your PC. Note: Messages Steps can be run from the Offline menu as well as from a sequence. Listen Hardware Control Message Message steps can be used to control the functions of the following Listen hardware products: AmpConnect ISC, AudioConnect, SoundConnect 2 and DC Connect Also included is software control for the Portland Tool & Die BTC-4148 Bluetooth interface Specific details on how a device is controlled through Message Steps is covered in the manuals for each device. The settings of the Listen Hardware Message Step are the same as the Startup Default found in the Hardware Editor > Listen Hardware page. We recommend that you set the Startup Default for each piece of Listen Hardware. See Listen Hardware Page on page 56. The alternative is to always use Listen Hardware Message Steps at the beginning of each sequence to configure the devices for use in the sequence. (AudioConnect requires either a Startup Default or a Message Step in order to be used properly in SoundCheck.) An AudioConnect Message Step is shown in Figure 20-1. The use of message steps in a sequence allows you to automate gain settings, signal routing, microphone bias and other features so that the settings are stored with the test sequence. Common Controls Apply - This is used to send the setting to the device without having to run the sequence Read Settings - Click to load the current settings from the device OK - Exit the step editor. Save the sequence in order to save the step changes. Cancel - Close the step editor and discard changes Figure: 20-1 AudioConnect Control SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 237 AmpConnectTM Message The following controls are available in an AmpConnect Message Step (details are in the AmpConnect ISC manual): Inputs Gain - Select: -20 dB, -10 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB, +20 dB, +30 dB, +40 dB This gain value is used in Calibration Configuration > Auto Read. See Auto Read on Page 70. Bias - None, Voltage (for SCM Mic) and IEPE Signal Routing Input Select Ref/Dut, Impedance, Amp and Toggle Ref & DUT. See Toggle Inputs/Toggle Outputs below. Amplifier Select Output A or Output B Toggle Amplifier Output Figure: 20-2 AmpConnect Control Toggle Inputs/Toggle Outputs The Toggle control can be used to switch the Microphone Input and Amplifier Output as a test sequence runs in Continuous or Loop operation. This can be used to test a loudspeaker on one test fixture while setting up a different speaker on another fixture. (The fixtures and test microphones should be identical.) Toggle Inputs (Ch.1 only): Switches so that on the first pass of the sequence, Channel 1 uses the Reference Microphone Input and the second pass uses the DUT Microphone Input. (Output section.) This works on Channel 1 only. Toggle Outputs: Switches so that the first pass of the sequence uses Amplifier Output A and the second pass uses Amplifier Output B. Control Digital I/O - The AmpConnect ISC DIO can read or write external TTL voltage levels and switch closures in a SoundCheck test sequence Panel Lock - When On the front panel buttons are disabled Headphone SoundCheck Output - Sends the SoundCheck Stimulus to the headphone output. This setting should be used when testing 2 channel headphones. Gain is grayed out when SoundCheck Output is selected and fixed at 0.1 dB. Input Monitor - Allows you to monitor the Left Input of the internal audio interface Gain - Allows you to adjust the level of the Headphone Out. The default setting is 0 dB. (Available only when Input Monitor is selected.) 238 Mute - Mute signal to headphone output Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual AudioConnectTM Message The following controls are available in an AudioConnect Message Step (details are in the AudioConnect manual): Mic Bias - Turns mic bias voltage on for both Mic Input channels Source - Set to Line or Mic independently for each channel Gain - Set to 0 dB or +20 dB independently for each channel This gain value is used in Calibration Configuration > Auto Read. See Auto Read on Page 70. Headphone SoundCheck Output - Sends the SoundCheck Stimulus to the headphone output. Gain is grayed out when SoundCheck Output is selected and fixed at 0.1 dB. Figure: 20-3 AudioConnect Control Input Monitor - Allows you to monitor the Left Input of the internal audio interface Gain - Allows you to adjust the level of the Headphone Out. The default setting is 0 dB. (Available only when Input Monitor is selected.) Mute - Mute signal to headphone output SoundConnect 2TM Message The following controls are available in an SoundConnect Message Step (details are in the SoundConnect 2 manual): Input - Muted, Line In, Mic In, Mic SCM, Mic IEPE and Lemo Gain - Select: -20 dB, -10 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB, +20 dB, +30 dB, +40 dB This gain value is used in Calibration Configuration > Auto Read. See Auto Read on Page 70. Bias - No Bias, 7.5 kOhm (for SCM mics), 2.2 kOhm (typically used for testing electret capsules) High Pass - 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 20 Hz, 100 Hz Low Pass - 22.4 kHz, 120 kHz Figure: 20-4 SoundConnect 2 Control Overall settings for unit: Panel Lock - When On the front panel buttons are disabled Output Gain - When on the Output Gain of channels 1 and 2 are increased by 6 dB. (Refer to the SoundConnect 2 manual for an explanation of this feature.) Ground Lift - Off = Chassis Ground (default). Allows you to interrupt the connection between the Line In/Out Grounds and the Chassis Ground. Only select Lift when you are trying to resolve noise issues due to a Ground Loop. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 239 DC ConnectTM Message The following controls are available in a DC Connect Message Step (details are in the DC Connect manual): Output Mode - Voltage or Current Control - USB or Analog Polarity - Pos or Neg Max I - Select maximum current range for measurement Voltage Level - Set output voltage level DC Measured - Shows the DC value measured by DC Connect Figure: 20-5 DC Connect Control BTC-4148 Message The following Message Type selections for the BTC-4148 are presented in the order they typically appear in a sequence. The settings of each step are applied to BTC-4148 when the step is run in a sequence or when the Apply button is pressed. (Details of use are in the BTC-4148 manual): Codec Selection Select an item from both profile drop downs. A2DP Profile - Select SBC or AptX HFP Profile - Select CVSD or mSBC Figure: 20-6 Codec Selection Device Connections This Message Type allows you to choose which device to connect to. Device Connection Type Connect by Name - Friendly name Connect by Address - Bluetooth address Disconnect - This disables the audio and closes both profiles. You can also select the “Clear the paired list” check box at the same time. (These options are typically used at the end of the sequence.) Device Selection Method Automatic: Fill in the field - Connect To: (This field is grayed out when Prompt is selected.) Figure: 20-7 Device Connections Prompt: 240 Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Run Inquiry - BTC-4148 will scan for any available Bluetooth devices Inquiry time - Set time limit to search for devices Show paired list - Shows history of devices previously paired with BTC-4148 Clear paired list - Removes devices from history list. Usually done at the end of sequence. See Example of Prompt on page 241. Example of Prompt When the step runs you are presented with a window as shown in Figure 20-8. Name/Address This is populated by selecting a device in the fields: Available Devices or Paired Devices You can also type the address in manually or scan it in using a bar code reader The Refresh Icon allows you to run the inquiry again Available Devices Shows all devices found during the scan The Paired Devices field will be filled in once the pairing process has been completed in the next step. See Audio Connections below. Figure: 20-8 Prompt Example Click OK to close the window and continue with the sequence. Audio Connections A2DP and HFP Connections From the two connection type drop down menus select the profiles you would like to use. Connected - Connect using the selected profile No change - Allows you to leave BTC-4148 in the state of a previous step so another connection method can be added Audio Channel This is where the profile is enabled. Select A2DP, HFP or Close audio channel Figure: 20-9 Audio Connections The pairing process starts when this step is Applied or run in the sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 241 Operator Message - Dialog Display messages or instructions on the computer screen for the operator to read (e.g., test signal is not present or the DUT needs to be placed in a test fixture). You can send a text message to the operator during the sequence, or poll the user for information during the sequence (such as temperature or humidity conditions). Pass/Fail Sets the Pass or Fail verdict the message is associated with, e.g., No Signal Detected – Fail. Wait Control length of time (in milliseconds) the Message Step waits before finishing. This can be used to ensure commands or devices settle before continuing to measure. Format Text Formatting is available Operator Message Steps. This allows you to change the settings for the text that will be displayed so the message is easier to read. Default Value By setting the Default Value to “Yes (F2)“ in the Message Step, the Key Focus is to the Yes button by default. This means that the Yes button will be “Highlighted“ each time the step runs in the sequence. The operator can then click the Enter key to answer Yes. (As well as the F2 key or clicking on Yes in the message.) 242 Note: The Message Step must be configured to “Display step when run“ in order for the Dialog to display in the sequence. Note: Operator messages can be displayed in local languages based on the Windows operating system in use on the machine running SoundCheck. See Display Local Language Characters on page 244. Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The Dialog Message allows you to select one of two conditions: yes or no. This can be used to determine functionality of the test system, (Was the test signal audible?) or to determine how the sequence will proceed (Do you want to save this data?). Figure: 20-10 Operator Message - Dialog, shows an example of a Message that can be used to prompt the operator to enter a Yes/No answer regarding Visual Inspection. The displayed Message Title can be different than the step name Default value setting Format Text This allows you to set the font, font size, font color and attributes. The Dialog Window that the operator sees will resize according to the font size chosen for the text. Only one font format can be set in each message step. In other words, you cannot mix text colors or font sizes. Message Step when run in the sequence shows alternate title Memory List Item This result will show up on the Memory List. The name of the result is the Name of the Message Step. The result of the Message Step is available in the Memory List and can be added to the Result window Figure: 20-10 Operator Message - Dialog The Apply Button in the message editor allows you to test the message to see if it is displayed as required. This also allows you to test the communication of the message step with external devices that are connected via Serial - RS232 or GPIB. You can also Right Click on a Message step in the Sequence Editor to test the action of the step without having to run the sequence. The Default Value setting is available when the Operator Message Step is set to Dialog or Numeric. Note: If the step is configured to “not display when run”, the default value for either Dialog (T/F) or Numeric (#), is sent to the Memory list for that step's result/value. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 243 Display Local Language Characters In order to display Local Language Characters in a SoundCheck Message Step or Text Display, the following changes must be made to your Windows operating system. In this example Simplified Chinese is selected. Note: These instructions apply to Windows 7 operating systems. The instructions may vary in other versions of Windows. 1. Install the Chinese (Simplified) Language Pack via Windows Updates. For detailed instructions see: https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/14236/ language-packs 2. Go to Control Panel > Clock, Language and Region. Select Keyboards and other input methods 3. Click the Change Keyboards button and add Chinese (Simplified, PRC) 4. Select the Administrative Tab, click the Change system locale button and select Chinese (Simplified, PRC) 5. Click OK to exit all editors 6. You must restart your computer for these changes to take effect 7. You can now enter and display Simplified Chinese characters in SoundCheck Message Steps and Text Displays. 244 Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Numeric Message When the Operator Message is set to Numeric, a number can be entered by the operator for use as a value in the sequence. This prompts the operator when a numeric value needs to be entered in a sequence. An example of a Message Step setup to request a numeric during the sequence is shown in Figure 20-11. The example shown in Figure 20-11, shows how the Numeric Message prompts the operator for a Stimulus Level. Since the name of the Message Step is “Stimulus Level“, an item is added to the Memory List called Stimulus Level. This item can then be used in Stimulus Step. This will allow the operator to change the stimulus level on each run of the sequence. The Memory List item is named the same as the Message Step name When Apply is selected in the Message Editor, the value is sent to the Memory List. The specific axis of a numeric value to be stored can be selected, e.g., Y axis only. Other axes will have NAN as a value and will be shown this way when selected in a Display Table. Units are shown next to numeric inputs when specified. Preload Stimulus must be Off in the Sequence Configuration. See Preload Stimulus vs Memory List Selection on page 397. The message as it is displayed during the run of the sequence See Units on page 93 for more information on using the Units dialog box. In the Stimulus Editor, Right Click on the level field and select Memory List Selection. Select “Stimulus Level” from the Memory List. Figure: 20-11 Operator Message - Numeric SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 245 Digital I/O Bit State Bits 0-7 can be controlled through the Message Step Editor. Check the box above the appropriate bit to enable it. Next, set the bit to ON or OFF depending on the required state of the Digital I/O. This is the state of the bit that will occur when the Message Step runs in the sequence. Corresponding Message Steps with opposite Bit States may be required, e.g.: Switch Bit 0 On at the beginning of the sequence and the switch it Off at the end. Pass/Fail Set the Pass/Fail condition the message should show when it runs in the sequence. This can be used in Conditional Branching. See Configure Step on page 398 and Conditional Branching Rules - Sequence Editor on page 400. Figure 20-12: Digital I/O Message Setup Port Select Port number (1, 2, 3, etc). The text field below the Port number will indicate whether you have selected an Input or Output Port. Inputs and Outputs are configured in the External page of the Hardware Editor. See Figure 20-12. Wait You can set an amount of time for the step to pause before proceeding to the next step in the sequence. This may be needed to allow for settling time or operation time of external devices. External Interface Communicate with other devices via a computer interface such as RS232 or IEEE488 (GPIB). Select the Interface Number and the Interface Type field will update according to the matching device number in the Hardware Editor - External Tab. For more information see Interface Table on page 60. When setting up multiple devices in the Hardware Editor - External Tab, the Interface Number order must be the same Figure 20-13: Hardware Editor - External 246 Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual RS232 Setting the Interface Type to RS232 enables SoundCheck to send control messages to an external device that accepts RS232 commands. Add a Message Step to the sequence to send a command to the selected device. Choose the interface type (RS232 or IEEE488) by selecting the device number Figure 20-14: RS232 - Write/Read Message RS232 Interface Actions 1. Invoke RS232 command based on the PASS/FAIL status of the previous step in the sequence. 2. Read message from another instrument or write (send) message to another instrument. 3. Wait for n number of milliseconds before executing the RS232 step configured in the Message Step Editor. Figure 20-15: RS232 - Set Control Lines Figure 20-16: RS232 - Read Control Lines SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 247 IEEE-488 (GPIB) Setting the Interface Type to IEEE-488 enables SoundCheck to send control messages to an external device that accepts IEEE-488 commands. Output Message IEEE commands that SoundCheck uses to control an addressed device. Messages must be entered in full (e.g., including Header, Header Separator, Data and Data Separator where appropriate). Only ASCII characters are allowed. Interface Message Figure 20-17: IEEE Message Setup The IEEE commands listed below. These commands are used to setup and control the interface itself, rather than a particular device. Device Clear (DCL) – causes all connected devices that implement the command to return to a predefined devicedependent state. Selected Device Clear (SDC) – sets all devices currently addressed as listeners to a predefined device-dependent state. Otherwise identical to Device Clear. Group Execute Trigger (GET) – provides a means of triggering devices simultaneously. GET causes all capable devices, which are currently addressed as listeners, to initiate a preprogrammed action (e.g., trigger, start a sweep etc.) Figure 20-18: Interface Message Choices Go To Local (GTL) – returns all devices currently addressed as listeners to local control. A device will return to remote when it is again addressed as a listener with REN true. Unlisten (UNL) – unaddresses all current listeners connected to the bus. UNL is used to guarantee that only the desired listeners are addressed. Remote Enable Enables SoundCheck to be controlled. Serial Poll SoundCheck interrogates an addressed device to ascertain the state of each bit in its status byte. A serial poll is typically used to synchronize SoundCheck with an external device, such as a turntable, to make sure it is in the desired position before making a measurement. 248 Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Syntax for Sending RS232 (serial) or IEEE-488 (GPIB) Commands in SoundCheck S Y S Visible Characters: T In SoundCheck, you need to use a specific syntax in the Message Step Editor to send generic ASCII commands to your device. Any visible characters in the command field of the Message Step Editor are sent through without being altered. For example, the command SYSTEM would be sent to the device as the ASCII byte stream for the characters shown in the example on the right. E M which would be: 83 89 Non-visible (Termination) Characters: 83 Some devices require a termination character at the end of each sent command, which most often is not a visible character. To send any non-visible characters using the SoundCheck Message Step, you must enclose the decimal ASCII code for that character in brackets like this: <10> Note: 84 69 77 Some external devices state that termination characters are entered as: (CR) or [CR]. Always replace parenthesis or braces with bracket arrows: <CR>. Termination characters must use this format in SoundCheck message steps. Here are a few characters that are not visible but are often used in serial communication, followed by their decimal ASCII codes: To include any of these characters in the command string, you must surround the decimal ASCII code for that character in brackets (e.g., line feed is <10> and carriage return is <13>). Parenthesis () and Bar Braces [] are not allowed. To produce an end-of-line character (\r\n), you need to combine both line feed and carriage return characters: Line Feed (or \n): 10 Carriage Return (or \r): 13 Tab: 9 Line Feed + Carriage Return: <10><13> Example: When sending commands to a device like the Agilent 34401a, you must terminate each command with a line feed character. To initiate RS232 control over this device, you must send a SYSTEM:REMOTE command before sending any other commas. In the SoundCheck Message Step, this command would look like: SYSTEM:REMOTE<10> Figure 20-19: Message Step RS232 Example SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 249 Reading RS232 Messages SoundCheck can “Poll” the RS232 input for a “start” command. The trigger can be any alpha/numeric character or a simple string. (Single characters are preferred since there is less chance that there will be a communication error during the transmission of one character.) The Message Step can be set to automatically “Loop” back to itself, until the RS232 string has been received. Once a sequence has been started, a Message Step can be set to look for input on the Serial Port specified in the Message Figure 20-20: Hardware Config - RS232 Settings Editor. This device must be Enabled in the System Hardware configuration before it can be selected in the Message Step. See Figure 20-20. The Hardware Configuration must match the RS232 settings of the device that is sending RS232 data. This is extremely important since incorrect settings can cause the SoundCheck computer to shut down when a message is sent. The Message Step is then set according to the example in Figure 20-21. Select “Interface“ Select number of RS232 line that is set in the System Hardware Configuration Select Function: Write/Read Message Enter the character string that will be sent from the external device. In this example: “start“ (case sensitive) Settings: Select “Pass” and “Read” with a Timeout that is slightly greater than the amount of time needed for the external device to send its string of characters. (Using single characters for a trigger is preferred.) Do not set the Timeout to 0 mSec. This can cause a communication error. Figure 20-21: RS232 Settings Click OK to exit or Save As to give the step a new name. When the sequence is run, the Message Step will appear as shown in. When the serial message has been received, the text will be displayed and the step will close so the that the sequence can continue. The Configuration of the Message Step must be set in order for it to Loop and Display. Figure 20-22: Displayed Message Step 250 Message Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Step Configuration The Step Configuration of the Message Step should be set as shown in . (Step Configuration is found in the Sequence Drop Down Menu of the Sequence Editor window.) “Display step when run“ should be checked if you want to see the “Waiting for message prompt” during the run of the sequence. Normally this can be set to 0 seconds. Check “Jump on FAIL“ and select the same message step. This creates the loop that recycles until the RS232 text has been received. Select “Overwrite Data“ so that only one instance of the Index value (Loop Index) is created in the Memory List. See Index (Loop Index) on page 399. Figure 20-23: Message Step Configuration The Message Step must be positioned in the sequence so that all desired measurement operations occur after it. shows the Message Step in the sequence along with its configuration settings. Once the RS232 string has been received, (and the message status changes to “Passed“) the sequence will proceed to the next step (Sti - 20k-20 Hz R10) and the operation of the sequence will finish. Figure 20-24: RS232 Step In Sequence Testing with HyperTerminal A second computer can use Windows HyperTerminal to send RS232 Test Commands. The Message Step in SoundCheck, that is reading RS232, must be configured to “Display step when run“, long enough for all of the characters sent to be present in the RS232 buffer of the SoundCheck computer. It is important to note that characters are sent from HyperTerminal as soon as they are typed. A message of “start“ may take a person 2 or 3 seconds to type into HyperTerminal. If the Message Step is not open for this period of time, all of the characters may not make it into the buffer before the step recycles. Since the complete string was not read, the step status will indicate “Failed“ and the loop will continue. This is one of the reasons that single characters are recommended for use as triggers. Connection Type The connection between two computers should be a Serial Port Null Modem cable. Other devices with RS232 outputs may use a standard serial port cable. Please refer to the documentation for that device for the correct cable type. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 251 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Message Step 252 AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck AmpConnect ISC is fully controllable via SoundCheck which means that adjustments of parameters such as gain can be included in test sequences. All Front Panel settings can be changed via USB during the run of a test sequence. An eight-bit digital I/O port provides digital control and/or status monitoring of external devices for operator feedback, test fixture control, etc. Digital I/O is only accessed by USB through SoundCheck. The following example shows how to use a Message Step in SoundCheck to control AmpConnect ISC. Important! As of SoundCheck 13, after installing SoundCheck you cannot use AmpConnect ISC with versions prior to SoundCheck 13, unless you manually switch the drivers in Windows Device Manger. See the AmpConnect ISC manual for a step by step driver rollback procedure. Note: In SoundCheck ONE, you do not have access to creating a new Message Step. Only the settings in the existing step can be changed. AmpConnect Message Step Open the SoundCheck sequence editor Select the Messages Category Select "AmpConnect Step" and drag it into the first step position in the sequence You should rename the step after it has been added to a sequence. Creating unique names helps make future sequence editing easier. Open the AmpConnect Message Step Click Configure Listen Hardware Refer to Configure AmpConnect on page 254 and AmpConnect Message Step on page 254 for information on settings Figure 21-1: Add Message Step When the sequence runs, this step will set the AmpConnect options for its first use in the sequence. Important! Turning Bias on at the beginning of a sequence may require the use of “Wait Time” in the first panel of the AmpConnect Message Step. As an alternative, we recommend that Bias should be turned on in the Startup Default settings for Listen Hardware. See Listen Hardware Page on page 56. Other AmpConnect Steps may appear in the sequence with different settings. These steps should be named to identify the function of the step. This will make later sequence editing and trouble shooting easier. Note: AmpConnect settings can be changed during the run of a test sequence. This will require individual Message Steps at various points in the sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck 253 AmpConnect Message Step Open the AmpConnect Message Step from the Active Sequence in the right hand section of the editor, as shown in Figure 21-1. Message Title - This is the text that will be in the top of the step window as it is run Message - The example in Figure 21-2 shows that the Message Step is set to AmpConnect Listen Hardware - Must be selected to select Device ID of hardware Device ID - Select AmpConnect from the list of Listen Hardware available in the drop down menu. Figure 21-2: AmpConnect Listen Hardware Configure AmpConnect - Set the front panel settings of AmpConnect (See below) Settings - Select the Pass/Fail state the step will yield in the Results section of the Memory List Wait - Allows you to set a time period for the step to pause the run of the sequence. This allows for “switch closure times” associated with external devices connected to the Digital IO of AmpConnect. Apply - Click Apply to switch AmpConnect to the new settings from Configure AmpConnect without having to run the sequence. This is useful for testing the settings. Configure AmpConnect Click on Configure Listen Hardware to set the front panel settings of AmpConnect. The standard front panel controls are explained in the Front Panel Functions chapter of the AmpConnect ISC Manual. Inputs Gain - Select: -20 dB, -10 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB, +20 dB, +30 dB, +40 dB Bias - Select: None, Voltage (for SCM Mic) and IEPE Signal Routing - Input Select: Quiet, Reference, DUT, Impedance (Z-High/Low), Amp, 1 V Sine and Toggle Ref & DUT. See Toggle Inputs/ Toggle Outputs on page 255. Signal Routing - Amplifier Select: Output A or Output B Toggle Amplifier Output - See Toggle Inputs/Toggle Outputs on page 255. Apply - Click to send new settings to AmpConnect ISC Read Settings - Allows you to update the settings of the Message Step by Reading the current settings of the AmpConnect ISC Front Panel OK - Accept changes and close configuration window Cancel - Disregard changes and close configuration window Figure 21-3: AmpConnect Panel In addition to the physical front panel controls, the AmpConnect Message Step allows you to control the following: 254 AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Control - Digital I/O Bit 0 through 7: Shows the state that the Bit expects to see when set to Read. If the actual state of the input agrees with the setting, the step result will be “Pass“. If it does not agree, the result will be “Fail“. When set to write, this is the state that the Bit will change to when the Message Step runs in the sequence. AmpConnect ISC must be connect to SoundCheck system via USB Toggle Inputs/Toggle Outputs The Toggle control can be used to switch the Microphone Input and Amplifier Output as a test sequence runs in Continuous or Loop operation. This can be used to test a loudspeaker on one test fixture while setting up a different speaker on another fixture. (The fixtures and test microphones should be identical.) Toggle Inputs: The input toggle control is in the Signal Routing drop down for Channel 1 only. Switches so that on the first pass of the sequence, Channel 1 uses the Reference Microphone Input and the second pass uses the DUT Microphone Input. Toggle Outputs: The output toggle control is in the Amplifier section. Switches so that the first pass of the sequence uses Amplifier Output A and the second pass uses Amplifier Output B. Headphone Monitoring This allows you to monitor the input and output signal on headphones, during the run of a test. Input Monitor - Listen to signal at input of SoundCheck audio interface SoundCheck Output - Listen to output of SoundCheck audio interface Mute - Mute Headphone output Gain - Headphone output level can be adjusted: -60 dB to +4 dB A Message Step must be added to the beginning of a sequence to set the AmpConnect ISC Headphone output to it’s maximum level. Inserting this step turns off the 27 dB output pad on the Headphone Output (AmpConnect ISC default). WARNING! When monitoring AmpConnect ISC signals with headphones, REMOVE HEADPHONES before making any changes to AmpConnect settings or SoundCheck settings. This is to prevent hearing damage due to high sound pressure levels. Caution! Dynamic headphones typically need very little voltage, e.g., 100 mV to produce high sound pressure levels. A dedicated headphone amplifier, like the AmpConnect ISC headphone amplifier, is recommended to limit sound pressure levels. A normal power amplifier can output a voltage level that will damage most headphones if used at full gain. Important! The maximum output voltage of the Headphone Output is limited to 1.5 Vp (1.06 V rms) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck 255 Sequence Example The Loudspeaker Impedance Test Sequence will require the settings as shown in Figure 21-4. (Refer to the Single Loudspeaker Test section of the SoundCheck ONE manual for wiring suggestions.) Panel Lock is ON. This disables the front panel controls. Input Section Reference In Bias is set to Voltage DUT In Bias is set to None Gain set to 0 dB for both Signal Routing Reference Mic is selected on Channel 1 Amplifier output is set to Output A Z-Low is selected on Channel 2. This is used for the Impedance measurement input in the SoundCheck sequence. Figure 21-4: AmpConnect Settings Click Apply to send these settings to AmpConnect. This allows you to check the settings without having to run the sequence. Verify the settings on the front panel of the AmpConnect. When the sequence runs, AmpConnect ISC will automatically change to these settings. Note: Overload of the Front Panel Input Level or Output Level indicators currently requires a hard reset of AmpConnect ISC. Turn the AmpConnect ISC power switch off and then back on to reset. Custom Step Conversion SoundCheck 9 users controlling AmpConnect with the Custom Step will need to use the following procedure to re-create the step in SoundCheck 16.0. 256 Open the AmpConnect Custom Step(s) in SoundCheck 9 Write down the settings for the step. (The AmpConnect ISC manual has a blank front panel drawing which makes notation of settings easier.) In SoundCheck 16.0, edit the Hardware Configuration for AmpConnect. See AmpConnect ISC on page 57 Make a new Message Step in SoundCheck 16.0 and enter the settings from the front panel notation SoundCheck 16.0 will not open AmpConnect Custom Steps AmpConnect USB Control Via SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor To view and change the system’s test limits, select Limits from the Setup drop down menu on the main SoundCheck® menu bar, or use the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+L. You can use this step to set Pass/Fail bounds for your measured curves, waveforms and single values. A curve or value that crosses the upper or lower limit set by the step will give a Fail result, while a curve or value that lies between or equal to the set boundaries will Pass. There are many different ways of applying limits to measurement data. Features include: Floating limit curves to fixed data Floating data to fixed limit curves Setting Absolute limits Allowing data to float on the x axis Data from the Memory List can be used to create limit curves which can be offset by a predetermined amount in the Limits Editor Data from the Memory List can be used as a limit curve, e.g., +/- 3 sigma of running statistics. The Limits Editor functions are divided between two tabs; Data and Parameters. Figure 22-1 shows the settings available under the two tabs. Drag limit points with a mouse. Resolution of the X and Y axis can be set from 0 to 6 decimal places Data Tab Select one curve from the Memory List that limits will be applied to Remove existing Limits (Clear). Use current measurements to create limits (Copy), or use previously saved measurements or test items as limits. Parameters tab Figure 22-1: Limits Editor Tabs: Data and Parameters SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 257 Features The Limits Editor offers two views. Basic view shows only the commonly adjusted settings, and by clicking on the Advanced tab, many more are revealed. This keeps the software simple for novice and production line users while retaining the flexibility required in R&D applications. Batch Processing allows you to select a Custom Group of multiple curves to apply limits on Custom Result Name allows you to change the default name for the limit curves in the Memory List without having to rename the step Add Input Data Name appends the name of the selected data to the Limit name in the Memory List Click on Apply and the limit curves and results are updated in the Memory List. Settings can be changed and tested without having to run a new measurement. Note the additional condition in Save or OK Warning after Apply on page 270. Dynamic Selection of limit curves in Memory List, so that limits can come from another measurement or Recalled DAT file Show measurement curve on table (disabled for waveform) SI Units are implemented The editor incorporates the look and behavior of the Display Step. Easy “dragging” of limit points Graph or Plot items such as the Mapping Mode or Precision of the X and Y axis are stored when the step is saved Failed Points can be stored as curves in the Memory List Note: 258 Limits can be applied to single data items or a Custom Group created in the Memory List. Sequences from SoundCheck 6.01 (and previous versions) that applied limits to multiple curves in one step (e.g.; Self Test) will need to be updated to work in SoundCheck 16.0. Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Precision of Limits Display The precision of the Limits Editor display is set through the graph controls located below the graph. Click on x.xx or y.yy, click on Precision and select the number of decimal places to display. This changes only the precision of the graph. It does not change the precision of how the limits are applied to the data. See Absolute Comparison Precision on page 273 for an explanation of changing the precision of the applied limits. Note: Setting the Absolute Comparison Precision overrides the Display Precision set by the user. Format and Mapping Mode selections are also available. Format - Select Decimal, Scientific, Engineering, etc. Mapping Mode - Select Linear or Logarithmic Critical Points One critical point is generated for the upper limit and a second is generated for the lower limit. These points show up as yellow circles on the Limits Editor Display but are not passed on to the Memory List. This is to be used as a visual marker to aid in building and editing limit steps. In the case where the data is within the bounds of the limit curve, this point shows where the data is closest to the limit curve. In the case where the data lies outside the bounds of the limit curve, this point shows the greatest deviation of the data relative to that limit curve. Limits Editor Summary Table Limits Type Data Tolerance(s) Individual Points Stays fixed at measured level. Same as Absolute but with no interpolation between data and limits resolution. Absolute Stays fixed at measured level. Stays fixed at values entered in Limits Editor. Floating Limits Stays fixed at measured level. Moves up or down such that maximum number of points in data curve can fit between tolerances. Floating Data Moves up or down such that maximum number of points in data curve can fit between tolerances. Stays fixed at values entered in Limits Editor. Aligned Limits Stays fixed at measured level. Used in some telephone (e.g., TIA 470B) and military standards. (not used in new TIA 470C standard) Moves up or down to align the Reference x, y value to the measurement curve. Aligned Data Moves up or down to the anchor point (X and Y values entered in Alignment Reference section of Limits Editor). An example is anchoring the 1 kHz measured curve value at 0 dB. Stays fixed at values entered in Limits Editor. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 259 Using the Limits Editor You only need to specify the minimum number of X-Y data pairs (or knee points) that define the shape of the tolerance curve. All other points in between the specified knee points of the limit curve will be interpolated and compared to see if any point on the measurement curve intersects. In the example below, a frequency response curve for a telephone headset is shown in green. The upper and lower limits (red) were entered in the table manually. After the points are entered you can click on any of the limit curve points on the graph to move them. Holding down the control key restricts the movement of the graph point so it can only move along the y axis. Frequencies and dB levels can be entered/deleted manually in table Figure 22-2: Entering Limits in Table Upper and Lower Limits Note: Floating Limits or Floating Data will require upper and lower limits. Select whether to apply an upper, lower limit or both. Distortion, for example, should only require an upper limit, but response limits will require both an upper and lower limits if Floating Limits or Floating Data is selected. See Alignment on page 268 for more information. Clear Deletes all of the limit data in the cells. This allows you to enter new limits data manually or copy Data from a Memory List curve into the cells (single value or curve). Figure 22-3: Clearing (deleting) Values To select a range of cells to delete, left mouse click and hold on the first cell and drag the mouse to highlight the desired cells. The selected cells will be highlighted in blue. Click the Delete button at the right of the editor. 260 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Copy Copies the selected data curve from the Memory List and inserts the curve values into the Upper or Lower Limits table. In the example in Figure 22-4: 1. Select Advanced View 2. In the Data section, select a data curve from the Memory List. 3. Click Copy on both Upper and Lower Limits table buttons. Data points are copied into these fields. 4. Enter the Offset for the Upper and Lower tables. +6 dB for the Upper and -6 dB for the Lower. 5. Click the Offset button for both tables. The upper limit is offset by +6 dB and the lower limit is offset by -6 dB. 1. Select Advanced View 3. Copy Data 4. Enter Offset in dB 2. Selected Curve 5. Click Offset in both upper and lower sections to shift Limit Curve Figure 22-4: Creating Limits by Using Data From Memory List Note: SoundCheck may have difficulty copying very large arrays (>2000 points). For example, copying an FFT Spectrum into the Limits Table may cause you difficulty. Computer hardware will dictate full capability. Delete Removes those points that have been selected in the Upper Limit and/or Lower Limit curves. To select one or more points, Left click on the first UPPER cell in the range and then click on the last Lower cell in the range. In the example in Figure 22-5, points above 6300 Hz will be deleted. You can also Left-click the mouse and drag it to the right to highlight both frequency and amplitude values. A blue border surrounds the cells in the table that will be deleted. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 261 Clicking the Delete button will remove these cells from the table. By deleting the same cells in Lower Limit, the resulting Pass/Fail limits are shown in Figure 22-5. Offset Enables you to move or offset the entire or selected section of a limit curve(s) by a specified amount. The values you want to offset must be highlighted in blue. Enter the number you want to offset by (usually you will offset in the Y-axis, leave the X-axis field at 0.0 to make no changes there) and then click Offset. You can select all the values in the limit table by clicking the horizontal line between the two unit specifications. Figure 22-5: Deleting Values in Limits Table To select the entire table, hold down the control key and click on any cell in the table. Offset by Percent Offset by percent allows you to set the percent difference from a mean value that is acceptable for upper and/or lower limits. In Figure 22-6 the mean value is 1 and the limits should be + or - 10%. 1. Enter the mean value (1) in the Upper and Lower Limit value boxes. 2. Enter the Percent of offset in the Upper and Lower Limit Offset boxes and select %. 3. Click Offset for the Upper and Lower Limits. 4. The Upper and Lower Limit values are updated in the value boxes and on the meter or graphs. Figure: 22-6 Offset by Percent Insert X-Y cells can be added to the limit table by clicking on a cell and then clicking on the Insert button. 262 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Pass/Fail Tolerance Axis You can choose which axis will be compared to a Pass/Fail tolerance. Typically it is the y (magnitude) axis, but tolerances can be generated for the other axes. The units for the tolerance curves or values are automatically assigned based on the x, y, or z-axis units. Dynamic Limits - Recall from Memory List Limits can be called from an item in the Memory List by clicking on the Drop Down Menu. These limits could be recalled from a DAT file or from a previous measurement in the sequence. The example in Figure 22-7 shows the upper and lower limits being called from 2 files; +3 Sigma and -3 Sigma. Only applicable data types from the Memory List are available to be used as dynamic limits for any given data type. i.e; Only single values and curves can be applied as limits on curves. If a curve is selected as data, a waveform cannot be selected from the Memory List. Select “Memory List” and then Select Curves from Memory List Drop Figure: 22-7 Limits from Memory List Note: No offset is available when using dynamic limits. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 263 Data Tab Settings The following choices are available in the Data selection field: Single Values - Any single number value or group of values from the Memory List Curves - Any curve or group of curves in the Memory List Waveforms - WFM and WAV files and groups Batch Processing allows you to select a group of curves as show in Figure 22-5. Any Custom Group created in the Memory List can be used for Figure 22-8: Batch Processing in Limits Editor the appropriate limit type. Please refer to Sorting and Grouping on page 289 for instructions on creating a Custom Group. Single Values Single Values is used when applying limits to items from the Memory List that are single number values. This can be used for comparing the measured level at a specified frequency to a lower and upper threshold or a single value created from a Post-processing Step, such Curve Average or Loose Particle Count. The use of Single Value is not limited to values acquired by a measurement. Figure 22-9 shows limits applied to the value of “Diaphragm Diameter”. This number was entered by a technician during the execution of the sequence. The number was passed from a Message step to the Memory List. User defined limit values can be entered manually in the numeric input field or by clicking and dragging the Upper and/or Lower Limit arrows. If either the upper or lower limit is defined from the Memory List, the ability to click and drag the arrows is disabled. Figure: 22-9 Single Values 264 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Offset for single value (linear or %) Linear allows you to select specific upper and/or lower values. Offset by percent allows you to select the percent difference from a target mean value that is acceptable for upper and/or lower limits. See Figure 22-6 for an example. Curves Select Curve from Memory List Figure: 22-10 Curve selected, User Defined Limits SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 265 Waveforms Select Waveform from Memory List Figure: 22-11 Waveform Rules - Waveform in Limit Steps Because waveforms have so many points, the following rules apply: 266 User defined limits may be created as X-Y (Time-Amplitude) "knee points" by the user. User defined limits will be converted to waveforms and output to the Memory List so you can plot data and limits together. Dynamic limits may be applied to waveforms. However, You can not copy a waveform in the Limits Editor to create "static Limits" (i.e., limits saved with the step) because of the large waveform size. A Single Value may be applied as a limit on a waveform. User will not be able to view the waveform data in the table to which the limits are to be applied in the Limits Editor. This will only be visible in the graph. Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Multimeter Limit Steps Important! Sequences prior to SoundCheck 15: Multimeter Limit steps that were used to set the Limit Range of the Multimeter Virtual Instrument Acquisition Step require changes. The Multimeter Acquisition Step must be modified to set the Limit Range. The Limit Step used for setting the limit range can be deleted from the sequence. When opening sequences from prior versions you will encounter the message as shown in Figure 22-12. Figure: 22-12 Multimeter Update A separate Limit Step is then used after the Multimeter Acquisition Step to add the Results to the Memory List. See Limits Tab on page 419 for more information. Batch Processing This allows you to select a group of curves from the Memory List to apply limits on. Figure 22-13 shows the custom group Array at the top of the Memory List. This custom group is then selected in the Limit Step. Any Custom Group created in the Memory List can be used for the appropriate limit type. Please refer to Sorting and Grouping on page 289 for instructions on creating a Custom Group. Custom Result Name The default name for a Limit Step is the name of the step itself. Custom Result Name allows you to change that name. This name will only appear in the sequence it is used in. The example in Figure 22-13 shows a Limit Step with the name “Resp“. The Memory List shows the new limit name, “Resp lower limit...“. You can have a unique name for the limits in the Memory List, for every instance of the step. Figure: 22-13 Naming Features Add Input Data Name When using the Batch Limits feature to apply limits to a Custom Group of curves, it is recommend that you use Add Input Data Name to make it easier to keep track of the resulting limit curves in the Memory List. Figure 22-13 shows the nine data curves in the Custom Group: Array. Each curve name, in parenthesis, is appended to the limit curve names, e.g.; “RESP lower limit (Driver 1)“ through “RESP lower limit (Driver 9)“. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 267 Parameters Tab - Settings Note: Advanced View is enabled in examples to show all features. Note: The Resolution for X & Y can be set independently. Alignment Five methods of Aligning Limits to the selected data can be found on the Parameters Tab. Individual Points Absolute Limits Floating Limits Floating Data Aligned Limits Aligned Data Individual Points The measurement is compared to the absolute values of the individual tolerance points. Only when the measurement exceeds the tolerance at specific limit points will a failure be indicated. In Figure 22-14 the level at 1700 Hz is above the level of the limits at 1000 and 2000 Hz, but the limit status indicates Passed. There is no interpolation between limit points. Select Individual Points Since there is no Limit Line or Single Limit Point at 3.35k Hz, the limit status indicates Passed Figure 22-14: Individual Limit Points 268 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Absolute Limits The measurement is compared to the absolute values of the tolerance limit(s). When Apply is clicked, SoundCheck will highlight those points where the data exceeds the upper and lower limits by the greatest amount. In Figure 22-15, the measured curve (Test Monitor) failed by -1.0 dB at 4250 Hz (note the small yellow circle at 4250 Hz). Yellow circle at point of maximum deviation Failure Margin Figure 22-15: Curve Compared to Absolute Limits Floating Limits The tolerance limits will float (shift up and down) in reference to the measurement curve such that the maximum number of data points will fit between the tolerances. By clicking Apply, the curve that previously failed now passes by 0.8 dB, because the tolerances have shifted so the measured data fits between the limits. When Floating Limits is chosen, SoundCheck will execute a “Best Fit” curve fitting routine between the upper and lower limits. Yellow circles will highlight those points closest to the limits (in this case 4250 Hz). Limits have shifted up to “Best Fit” the data Figure 22-16: Curve Compared to Floating Limits SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 269 Save or OK Warning after Apply When using Floating Limits or Floating Data a warning message will appear when you click on “Ok” or “Save as”, after clicking Apply. This warning appears because “Apply” may have moved the limits. You are then prompted to: Save Current - Save using the new position of the limits. Cancel & Revert - Undo the modified limit step settings and return to the editor. Save Previous - Save the limits as they were before the last time the Apply button was clicked. Figure: 22-17 Warning - Floated/ Aligned Output to Memory List Upper and Lower Limits are added to the Memory List for the data item selected Limits are named according to the name entered in the Custom Result Name field Add Input Data Name will append the data name to the Custom Result Name, e.g., “Response margin Upper Limit (Fundamental)” If a Custom Group is selected for Batch Limits, limits are created for each item in the group. Selecting “Add Input Data Name“ is recommended when selecting a Custom Group. See Sorting and Grouping on page 289. Note: Floating Limits or Floating Data always create upper and lower limits. Floating Limits on y axis Limit curves will adjust to “Best Fit“ the selected data. This adjustment is made each time the data curve changes for each sequence run. Floating Limits on x axis In many instances, electroacoustic transducers will exhibit sharp resonance or anti-resonance in their frequency response curves. Figure: 22-18 Y axis Floating Limits For example, a small shift or reflection due to a slight change in microphone position can cause false rejects. SoundCheck can take into account these slight changes in peaks and dips in the frequency response curve by floating an X-axis tolerance. When the x-axis Float Limits box is checked, SoundCheck will shift the frequency response curve by the amount specified in the Step Size box. See Figure 22-19. The X-axis tolerance can be either logarithmic or linear. If it is set to Log, the step size (amount that SoundCheck will shift the Figure: 22-19 X axis Floating Limits curve in the X direction) is in percent (%). If you want to shift the curve by 1/24th of an octave, you would set this value to 3 percent. Maximum and Minimum refer to the greatest amount, in percent, that the curve will be shifted. If Lin is chosen, the step size is in Hz as well as the Maximum and Minimum frequency limits (e.g., ± 10 Hz). 270 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Floating Data The amplitude of the Limit Curves stays fixed as it does when set to Absolute. The data points will float (shift up and down) in reference to the upper and lower tolerances, such that the maximum number of data points will fit between these tolerances. The example in Figure 22-20 shows a reference point of 1 kHz at 82.3 dB. In the first frame, the Data curve is obviously outside the range of the limits even though the shape of the response is correct. By selecting Float Data from the Parameters Tab, the Upper and Lower Limit Curves will remain at their current levels. After clicking Apply the Data curve has shifted to best fit the Limit Curves. Note that the reference point of 1 kHz is now at 77.3 dB. Note: A copy of the Floating Data is passed to the Memory List with “Floated“ appended to the end of the name. Before Floating Data: Data curve is above Limits. Reference point 1 kHz at 109 dB. Select Floating Data Click Apply to Float Data & update the editor Data curve shifts. The Reference point is at 106.2 dB. Figure 22-20: Data Floats and Tolerance Curves Stay Fixed SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 271 Aligned Limits Positions the tolerance limits relative to the curve by a specified offset at a user-defined reference point in the Align Reference fields. The Alignment Reference numeric fields are enabled when this tolerance type is selected. See Figure 22-21. Select a frequency point on the Data Curve and enter it in the x axis Alignment Reference field Select the midpoint of the Upper and Lower Limits curves, at the frequency point entered in the x axis field. Enter this in the y axis Alignment Reference field On each sequence run, the limits will adjust so that selected center point of the limits always tracks the specified frequency point on the data curve Used in older telecom and military standards Figure: 22-21 Aligned Limits Output to Memory List Upper and Lower Limits are added to the Memory List for the data item selected Limits are named according to the name entered in the Custom Result Name field Add Input Data Name will append the data name to the Custom Result Name, e.g., “Response margin Upper Limit (Fundamental)” If a Custom Group is selected for Batch Limits, limits are created for each item in the group. Selecting “Add Input Data Name“ is recommended when selecting a Custom Group. See Sorting and Grouping on page 289. Aligned Data Moves the selected data curve so that the specified x axis point of the curve is at the specified y axis point on the graph. Limit curves are not adjusted. On each sequence run, the data curve will adjust so that selected center point of the limits always tracks the specified frequency point on the data curve Commonly used for microphone frequency response, as shown in the “Microphone” example sequence. Figure 22-22 shows the response, Normalized to 0 dB at 1 kHz. Figure 22-22: Aligned Data Selection Output to Memory List 272 Upper Limits, Lower Limits or both are added to the Memory List for the data item selected Limits are named according to the name entered in the Custom Result Name field Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual A new version of the data curve is created with “Aligned” append to the data curve name, e.g., “Fundamental Aligned“. This appears in the Limits Group when Autogroup is turned on. Add Input Data Name will append the data name to the Custom Result Name, e.g., “Response margin Upper Limit (Fundamental)” If a Custom Group is selected for Batch Limits, selected limits are created for each item in the group. Selecting “Add Input Data Name“ is recommended when selecting a Custom Group. Absolute Comparison Precision To pass or fail the device under test to within 1 dB, choose Precision = 0; within 0.1 dB choose Precision = 1; within 0.01 dB choose Precision = 2, etc. The default precision is one (1) decimal place. In this case, a data point of 0.05 is rounded up to 0.1 and then the limit, which has also be rounded to the selected precision, is applied. When the data equals the limit, a Pass verdict is returned. Only when the data is outside the bounds of the limits is a Fail verdict returned. Note: Regardless of the resolution set in the Limits step, the default resolution for the Results Display window is two (2) digits of precision. Note: Setting the Absolute Comparison Precision overrides the Display Precision set by the user. See Precision of Limits Display on page 259. The example in Figure 22-23 show the Absolute Comparison Precision set to 2 decimal places on the y axis. The value of 77.79 dB at 6.3 kHz is outside the limit tolerance by 0.01 B (-10m dB). In this case the Limit step returns a Failed verdict. Figure: 22-23 Absolute Comparison Precision 2 decimal places SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 273 By changing the Absolute Comparison Precision to 1 decimal place the y axis value is rounded to 77.8 dB. The data values have not changed. Only the precision of the application of the data has changed. Since the Limit value and the Data value are the same, a Pass verdict is returned with a margin of 0 dB. This is shown in Figure 22-24. Figure: 22-24 Absolute Comparison Precision 1 decimal place 274 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual X Axis - Log vs. Linear Interpolation If a data point lies between two points along a limit curve, SoundCheck must interpolate along the Limit Curve in order to determine how the data point is compared to the limit curve. When Log is selected, the data value is compared to the limit curve using a Log, X axis scale. See Figure 22-25. The data point is 4.4 dB at 1000 Hz. The Lower Limit curve starts at 5 dB at 100 Hz and ends at 3 dB at 10 kHz. In this case, log interpolation compares the data to a value of 4 dB at 1 kHz. This is the default setting for the Limit Step. The result is PASS since the Data Point is ABOVE the Interpolated Point along the limit curve. Data point: 4.4 dB at 1 kHz Log Interpolated Point: 4.0 dB at 1 kHz Result: Pass since the Interpolated point is Above the Data point Figure 22-25: Log Interpolation Using the same limit curve and data point, Figure 22-26 shows the Linear Interpolation result. The Limit Curve is interpolated to be 4.82 dB at 1 kHz. The X axis of the graph has been switched to Linear to match the Linear Mapping selected in Parameters. The result is FAIL since the data point is BELOW the Interpolated Point along the limit curve. Log Interpolated Point: 4.82 dB at 1 kHz Data point: 4.4 dB at 1 kHz X axis set to linear in both the Parameters tab and on the Graph control Result: Fail since the Interpolated point is BELOW the Data point Figure 22-26: Linear Interpolation SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 275 This shows why the display X axis mapping and the interpolation control should be set to the same scale. This way, the interpolation matches the visual representation of the curves. This should prevent false visual failures. Interpolation along the Y axis is always Linear regardless of the settings of the X Y Graph Display For no interpolation between limit points, select Individual Points under Limits Parameters - Alignment. See Individual Points on page 268 For Displays with Linearity Limits, where both axis’ are dB, select Linear Mapping for the X axis on both the Parameters Tab and on the Limit Graph Selection. See Precision of Limits Display on page 259 Failed Points When Failed Points is selected on the Parameters tab the points of failure are stored in the Memory List as a curve. One curve for Upper Limit and another for Lower Limit If a Custom Group is selected, Upper and Lower Failed Points are created for each curve in the group Curve of failed points contains all (and only) the points that exceed the limit curve If only one failed point is produced, the curve will not show up in a Display Step unless the curve is set to Solid Points (See Figure 22-26) Figure: 22-27 Failed Points If the limit step is executed and there are no failed points (PASS situation), the failed points curve is populated with a value of NaN (Not a Number). If the limit step is not executed, the failed points curve will remain empty Display Step example of Failed Points Green and Purple Failed Points curves are set to have “Square Point Style”. Figure: 22-28 Failed Points 276 Limits Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Comparison of Absolute Limits, Floating Limits and Floating Data The following three figures show how the same response curve can have limits applied in three different ways. Absolute Limits The measured curve is outside of absolute value of the limits, so the condition is FAIL. The level of the response is 108.9 dB at 1 kHz. Figure 22-29: Absolute Limits Floating Limits The measured curve stays at its measured level,108.9 dB at 1 kHz, but the limits shift downward to match this level (Best Fit to Average). No values exceed the limits, so the result is a PASS verdict. Figure 22-30: Floating Limits Floating Data The measured curve shifts upward to fit in between the absolute values of the limit curves. The 108.9 dB level at 1 kHz shifts upward to 113.9 dB. No values exceed the limits so the result is a PASS verdict. A copy of the Floated Data is added to the Memory List with “Floated” appended to the data name. Figure 22-31: Floating Data SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 277 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Limits Editor 278 Display Editor and Memory List Figure 23-1: Display Step Example The Display Editor (Ctrl+Shift+D) allows you to control the “on screen” display of: XY Graphs for data Waveform graphs Polar plots (optional) Result windows Table of values Text boxes Pictures To edit an existing Display Step in a sequence, choose Display from the Setup menu. See Display Editing on page 296 for more information on displays and their properties. Memory List The control center of the Display Editor is the Memory List. Select Memory List from the Setup menu in the main SoundCheck® window (Ctrl+Shift+Y). To edit a Display, click on the desired Display Tab on the Main Screen. When a sequence contains multiple Display Steps you can select Display from the Setup menu and select a Display Step from the list (Ctrl+Shift+D). See Display Editing on page 296. Open the Memory List to show the data available for displays. The Memory List can produce seven types of Display windows as shown in Figure 23-2. See Display Editing on page 296. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List Figure 23-2: Display Drop down 279 Memory List Tabs (Curves, Values, Results and WFM) Data in the Memory List is divided into four tabs: Curves, Values, Results and WFM (Waveforms). The data content of these items is generated by the sequence can be accessed by clicking on any of these tabs. Names with an empty circle contain no data and act as placeholders when creating a sequence. After the sequence is run, the circle will be filled indicating that data is in memory and can be displayed. If one or more steps are added to the sequence after it is run, the associated names will be preceded by an open circle until the sequence is run. Data items can also be filled by clicking on the Apply button in some editors and by recalling data from disk. Only certain types of data are appropriate for each display. Curves - Can be added to an XY Graph, Table or Polar Plot Values - Can be added to a Table Results - Can be added to a Results display or a Table WFM - Can be added to a Waveform Graph or a Table For example, if the display consists of only XY Graphs, and a result item is selected from the Results tab of the Memory List, you will not be able to “Left Click and Drag” the item to a display. Memory List Data Items Prior to running a sequence, the only curves in the Memory List that contain data, are the calibration curves (filled circles at top of list as in Figure 23-3). Empty Circle - Item contains no data Filled Circle - Item contains data Blue Group Heading - Data added to Custom Group. See Sorting and Grouping on page 289. Check Mark - Protected data Empty Diamond - Autoprotected & contains no data Filled Diamond - Autoprotected & contains data Grey Group Heading - Protected data. See Auto Grouping General Rules - Memory List on page 290. Figure 23-3: Empty Circle - No Data After the sequence has been run, the Memory List indicates that the curves contain data (filled circles). Figure 23-3: Curve Contains Data 280 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Memory List Features Clicking on items in the Memory List does not break the relationship of those items to a display Simply double clicking on a memory list item will open it in its default display window You can use Drag and Drop to add other items to an Active Display Autogroup items in the Memory List and create Custom Groups (See Sorting and Grouping on page 289) Right Click on items to set properties (See Right Click - Memory List on page 281) Right click on an item to display it on the Active Display, on a different display or create a new display Alt+click on an item to add or remove it from an Active Display The Protect and Autoprotect functions append the serial number to the Protected Data name. This offers a quick and easy way to annotate data by typing a comment into the Serial Number field on the SoundCheck Main Screen. Open Multiple Dat Files in the Memory List Lock Display to prevent unwanted changes to displays - See Lock Display Off on page 282 Report Generator - Replaces printing to Word, Excel, HTML or image file from the Memory List Report Menu. Templates are now used to add flexibility and repeatability when printing data. See Report Generator on page 317 for more information. Set Text Size and Text Color of a Value Table. See Table - Preferences on page 314. Right Click - Memory List Right click on a single item or several items in any of the Memory List Tabs and select: Show on Active Display - For data that is not linked to the active display, select an item, right click on it and select Show. Select a range of items by selecting the top item, hold the Shift Key and select the bottom item. Right click to Show or select another function. An alternative is to hold the Alt Key and left click on an item to add it to the selected display window. Hold Alt and Ctrl then left click on items to add them Figure 23-4: Right Click Menu Remove from Active Display - Use the above methods to break the connection of the items to the active display Display On - Add the selected item(s) to an existing display New Group - Creates a new group in the Memory List See Sorting and Grouping on page 289. The following features are available in the Right Click menu as well as in the Data Drop Down Menu: Delete, Protect, Autoprotect, Undo Autoprotect, Rename, Overwrite, Units and Comment. Explanations can be found starting under Data Menu on page 284. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 281 Memory List Drop Down Menus Display Menu Open display layouts, data, results and Waveforms previously saved to disk. Lock Display prevents display overwrite. Load Display - Opens a new display in place of the currently selected Display Tab. This display is added to the active sequence and will overwrite the existing step. The sequence editor is updated the next time the sequence is run or when it is saved. Figure 23-5: Display Menu Save Display As Template - Renames the step in the sequence and saves the current display as a template. You are prompted for a file name and the location to save the file. The default location is the Display folder in SoundCheck. The sequence must be saved in order to remember the name change in the active sequence. Revert - Discard changes, returning display to last saved version New - Open a blank display for: XY Graph, Waveform Graph, Text, Results, Polar Plot, Table and Picture Lock Display - This control prevents you from closing the displays out of habit, as one would in other windows applications. Locked displays can be edited, but the changes are lost when the sequence is changed or the application is closed. When the lock is off, displays can be edited. For Technician and Operator login level, the lock is always on. The Lock feature can only be unlocked by the Engineer user level. Figure 23-6: Lock Display Off Display Lock Rules When Display Lock is on: 282 Locking the display affects all displays in all sequences (until it is explicitly unlocked) The display windows cannot be closed, resized or "minimized". The Minimize/Maximize buttons are removed from the display headers. New displays can be opened, but will not be saved in memory. The display will revert back to the “Last Saved State“ when the sequence is run. The ONLY exception to this rule is when the display is left open, if you have added or moved some display windows, they will stay in their new positions until they are closed (either by File->Close in the Memory List, by the sequence, or by another display opening). None of the temporary edits (like positioning) will be saved in memory. You will not be prompted to save display-related changes upon sequence exit Changes to the displays are not saved when the sequence is saved You can select Save Display as Template from the Memory List - Display menu A new display cannot be loaded into Active Display Tabs (you can load a display in the Offline Tab) The lock state is remembered in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Duplicate - Opens a copy of a display window, retaining the Properties of the display but not the link to Memory List items. This allows you to “Clone“ the Active Display type. This way, all displays within a sequence can have the same preferences. The Line Style settings; width, color, etc, are not duplicated. Figure 23-7: Save as Default Save as Default - This allows you to save the Display Preferences for the Active Display, as the default settings for that type of display. There is a default template for each type of display; XY Graph, Waveform, etc. Close Memory List - Closes only the Memory List, leaves display windows open Close Display - Closes all display windows and the Memory List. Allows you to clear the display windows from the desktop without deleting the display layout. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 283 Data Menu The Memory List can be used to recall saved *.DAT and *.RES files and display saved curves, values and results in the current Memory List. (See alsoRecall Editor on pg 195) You can also open text (*.TXT) files. This will automatically open the Data Import Wizard (See Importing text from a saved file on pg 539). Open Data - Opens selected .DAT file Multiple DAT files can be opened at once from the Memory List. This is convenient when running statistics on a batch of curves and working with large numbers of files. If a DAT file contains multiple curves, a new Group is created in the Memory List, which contains the curves for that DAT file. When opening data, hold down the Control Key to select individual files. Click on the first item in the list and hold down the Shift Key while clicking on the last item to select that range of items. All items opened from disk are Protected Data, denoted with a check mark. Protected Data can only be added to Protected Groups. See Auto Grouping General Rules - Memory List on page 290. When opening a Dat file in the Memory List, a Protected Group is added Figure 23-8: Data to the Memory List that contains all the curves from the Dat file. The Drop down curves are not automatically added to the Active Display. The curves can be individually selected (or selected as a group) so that only the required curves show up in the display. This makes loading a large number of curves into memory much faster. Grouping makes it easier to manage a large number of curves. Note: DAT files created with SoundCheck 16.0 are not viewable in versions of SoundCheck prior to and including SoundCheck 6.0x. The DAT file format was updated in SoundCheck 6.1. 284 Save Data as - Saves the data selected in the Memory List to a .DAT and allows you to specify the name for the file If the hardware is set to 24 bit, the waveform saved will be 24 bit Lock Display prevents display overwrite The item name is used as the default file name when saving an item to disk Waveforms can be saved to a WAV file: You are prompted to select the Bit Depth to save as and the scaling Select two Waveforms (WFM), select "Save As” then select .WAV". This creates a single stereo WAV file. The first waveform selected will be the left and the second will be the right. If three or more WFM files are selected, an error message will indicate that this is not allowed. Save multiple Waveforms to a single *.WFM file. You can save curves, values or results to a *.TXT file Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual If save to a *.TXT file is selected, you will be asked to make formatting choices, as shown in Figure 23-9. The options available in this window are identical to those of the Autosave Editor when saving to a Text file. You can choose which axes to save, whether to include a standard or custom header, to orient the data into rows or columns, and the notation and precision of the numerical values. See Autosave Editor on page 183. Figure 23-9: Formatting Choices Recently Opened Files - Shows the most recent Displays, DAT, RES and WFM files (useful when opening the same files on a regular basis) Delete - will remove only the selected item(s) from the active Memory List Tab (Available in both the Right Click and Data Menu) Delete All In Tab - removes all of the items from the active Memory List Tab (Data Menu Only) Delete All In All Tabs - removes all of the items from all tabs: Curves, Values, Results and WFM (Data Menu Only) Protect Data - Items in the Memory List can be protected so that subsequent runs of the sequence do not overwrite the data Any unprotected Curves, Values, Results and WFMs generated by a sequence are overwritten in memory each time the sequence is run. To keep the current data and results in memory as more tests are run, highlight the item(s), Right Click or click on the Data Menu and select Protect . Protecting items will keep them in the Memory List until they are deleted or the application is restarted. Protected Data will be shown in the Memory List with the same name as the original curve, with a suffix of "-p" appended to the data name. Protected items are also identified with a Check Mark to the left of the name, which only appears in the Memory List. Figure 23-10: Protect Data You can also choose to Protect any information after the sequence has been run. Protected data is not discarded when changing sequences. The Protect and Autoprotect functions append the serial number to the Protected Data name. This offers a quick and easy way to annotate data by typing a comment into the Serial Number field. The protected data should be removed by using the Delete option in the Data Menu or the Right Click Menu. Protected Data can only be added to Protected Groups. See Auto Grouping General Rules Memory List on page 290. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 285 Autoprotect data - Used to keep data contents of items in memory every time a sequence is run When an item is highlighted in the Memory List and Autoprotect is selected, the icon to the left of the item(s) changes to a diamond shape (). Autoprotecting allows you to designate items that should be protected before the sequence is run. A copy of the item is generated each time the sequence is run and will be protected in the Memory List (until Undo Autoprotect is selected). Each time the sequence runs, the selected item will be protected and numbered in ascending order. If a serial number is entered in the Serial Number field, either manually or with a Serial Number step, that number will be appended to the Autoprotected items. Choosing Autoprotect for the Fundamental curve will create a diamond next to that curve, and all information will be protected. Fundamental [L] is a place holder for information, indicating that the item is to be Protected. Each time the sequence is run the data for Fundamental [L] is appended to the end of the Memory List and protected. Protected Data will have checkmarks on the left, and items that are protected multiple times, with the same name, will be given a prefix number. Note: If the Serial Number Step is used at the beginning of the sequence, the Autoprotected data has the serial number automatically appended to the data name, for all autoprotected items in the Memory List. Figure 23-11: Fundamental Autoprotected Autoprotect/Undo Autoprotect Rules The Autoprotect and Undo Autoprotect functions require that a Display Step is in the sequence The Display MUST be open to access the Autoprotect and Undo functions in the Memory List Autoprotect with multiple Displayes: The Autoprotect state of a Memory List item is unique for each Display Step in a sequence. You should only autoprotect data on one display, unless you have a step in between the displays which regenerates the data such that there is new data to autoprotect on the second display. Remember: Autoprotect renames the data, e.g.: 2 - Fundamental - p, 3 - Fundamental - p, etc. The display does not need to be configured to “Display Step When Run”. See Configure Step on page 398. Once the item is selected for Autoprotect, the Diamond marker is only visible while the display is open. Items are still Autoprotected, but not marked with a Diamond. Autoprotected data will remain in the Memory List after changing sequences. The data is deleted when SoundCheck is closed or the data is selected and deleted manually. When Autogrouping is enabled, a “Protected Group” (Grey Text) is automatically created. See Figure 23-11. See Auto Grouping General Rules - Memory List on page 290. Undo Autoprotect - Selected Items are no longer Autoprotected in subsequent measurements To stop Autoprotecting an item, highlight the original name (with the diamond to the left []) and select Undo Autoprotect. The Protected Data will remain in the Memory List, but all measurements following 286 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual this action will only remain in the list until the next time the sequence is run. Future measurements will no longer protect the item automatically. The data and results are in Memory and will only be saved to disk by using commands in the Data Menu or using one or more Autosave Steps. Rename - Creates a Protected copy of the item and prompts you for a new name The new item appears in the Memory List with a Check Mark and a “-p” suffix. A Memory List item can be renamed at any time. Renaming an item will automatically protect it, since a curve of that name may not exist in the sequence. Select the item(s) from the current tab to rename. Right Click on an item and select Rename. (Or select Rename from the Data Menu of the Memory List.) Units - To increase flexibility, the units of Memory List Items can be temporarily changed These changes disappear each time the sequence is executed. To retain the Unit changes the Item must be Protected. Otherwise, the unit information will revert to the values created by the sequence, on the next sequence run. Unit changes are not available on Autoprotected Items. The sequence Units will be used in the Autoprotected item. TIP: To temporarily change the Units of a curve in a display (or table), right click on the curve in the Memory List and select Units. The new Units will appear in the display. This is a one time change. The next time the sequence runs, the units will revert back to the original units. Overwrite - Allows you to select a Subject item from the Memory List and then choose another item as the Target to be overwritten Note: In general, overwriting a correction in or out curve with a Reference Calibration File is handled in the Calibration Editor by using the “Copy from Memory List” button. In special cases, you might want to overwrite a curve in the Memory List manually. The data of a Reference.DAT file (magnitude and phase of a curve) can be used to replace the contents of a Correction In or Out.DAT in the Memory List. This can be used in special cases for importing custom correction curves and/or EQ curves. Figure 23-12: Overwrite a curve - step 1 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 287 1. In Figure 23-12, we have loaded a Microphone Correction Curve into the Memory List (See Data Menu on pg 284). 2. Right click on the curve and click Overwrite or select Overwrite from the Data Drop Down menu. 3. In Figure 23-13 the Calibration Curve for the Input is selected: Special Reference corr-in 4. Click on OK to replace the data of this curve with the data from “Special Reference Corr s/n: X1234“. The name of the target curve does not change, only the data changes The new curve can be used in the Calibration Editor to correct for the response of the microphone in future measurements Figure 23-13: Overwrite - step 2 Comment - Comments can be attached to Curves in the Memory List. They appear in green text, to the right of the item, in the Memory List. Comments are normally added to curves or items that have already been protected or recalled from disk Comments on an Autoprotected source curve () only appear on the next curve that is protected. Subsequent runs will have no comment. This will also leave a copy of the comment on associated Limits. (Remove these by entering a blank comment on the source curve) The comment is saved with the data when saved as a .DAT file When importing the .DAT file, the comment will still be attached to the data Figure 23-14: Comment Protected Memory List Item Right Click on an item and select Comment or select an item and then click on Comment from the Memory Drop Down menu. See Figure 23-14. The comment can then be entered in the editing window. Long comments will not “text wrap“ in the Memory List, so the entire comment may not be easily visible. Use the Comment function to view the text in the editor window. Important! Comments should only be added to Protected or Recalled items in the Memory List. Adding comments to Unprotected items is not recommended. Comments added to empty items, before sequence run, will be erased. Comments added to Unprotected items after sequence run will duplicate the comments to related Limits and other related items. 288 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sorting and Grouping In order to improve organization and ease of use, items in the Memory List can be grouped and sorted. Data can be sorted alphabetically by Name or by the Order in which generated by sequence Data cannot be manually sorted by moving an item in the list Data can be set to Auto Group by Category or Step Sort and Auto Group are continuously applied to all data in the Memory List so data is automatically sorted into the correct place Custom Groups can be created allowing you to put selected data into a custom named group Figure 23-15: Group Curves Items can be added to a Custom Group through the menu option or by clicking on an item and dragging it to a group Items can also be removed from a Custom Group by clicking and dragging them to the root of the Memory List Tab Custom Groups can also have Subgroups Custom Groups always appear at the top of the list Group names should not contain Parenthesis, ( ), or other types of brackets Protected Data can only be added to Protected Groups. See Auto Grouping General Rules Memory List on page 290. Grouping is constantly updated as steps are added to a sequence Sorting and Grouping functions are independent for the four items tabs: Data, Values, Results and WFM New Group - Selected items will be added to a Custom Group and you are prompted to enter a name for the group Uncheck “Group Selected Items“ to create a Group without adding items to it Ungroup - Removes the Group heading and returns the Items to the root of the Memory List Expand All - Opens all Groups in the Memory List (show all Items) Contract All - Closes all Groups in the Memory List Sorting and Grouping Figure 23-16: Group Clicking on any of the following functions will Undo all AutoGroups in the current Tab. Sort functions will return the grouped items to the root of the Memory List. This does not effect Custom Groups (User Groups). Sort By Order - Arranges all items in the current Tab in the order created by the sequence Sort By Name - Arranges all items in the current Tab in alphabetical order Figure 23-17: Sorting SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 289 Autogrouping Off - Autogroups are disolved, returning Autogrouped items in the current Tab to the root of the Memory List and sorted according to the Sort function (Custom Groups are not effected) Autogroup By Category - Automatically creates groups for items in the current Tab based on the data type of the Items Autogroup By Step - Automatically creates groups for items in the current Tab based on the Sequence Step that created the items Auto Grouping General Rules - Memory List Memory List items can be moved to Custom Groups. The group title is in Blue Text. Protected Data (noted with a check mark before the curve name) can only be added to Protected Groups indicated by Grey Text, not Custom Groups (Blue Text) Turning off auto grouping does not remove Custom Groups Memory List items cannot be moved between Auto Groups Switching between sort by category or sort by step does not break sorting of Custom Group items Memory List items can be moved back to auto groups if the Custom Group remains (is not deleted) When all items in a Protected group are deleted, the group is not visible in the Memory List until new items fill the group When saving an Autogroup of items, the default file name will be the first item in the group Search - The Data Drop Down Menu has a search function feature to find and highlight all items which match a search string. Advanced searching through the use of regular expressions is also possible as described in the context sensitive help window of the search string (See Figure 23-18). This is particularly useful when the Memory List contains a large number of curves such as in production line applications. Example: A user wants to display a group of curves from a large list, all on the same graph, even though each curve has an appended number, e.g., 2Fundamental, 3-Fundamental, etc. Use the Memory List Search function to find all the curves with the characters, “Fun”. Then Right Click on the any of the highlighted curves and select Display On - Graph or New Group. Figure 23-18: Search Function Select All - Highlights all of the items in the current Memory List tab From the Data Menu click on Select All (not available in Right Click Menu). This is useful for adding all Results to a Results display for an Overall Pass/Fail verdict, or to add a long series of curves to a XY Graph or Polar Plot. 290 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Menu Load Logo - select .BMP or .JPG file for the heading of a report Report Setup - Opens the Report Generator Create and print company reports in Word, Excel, HTML and image files. The Report Menu is available in the Memory List - Report Menu, and in each of the Display Windows. See Report Generator on page 317 for more information. Open Report - Opens a report based on the current display and the settings in Report Setup Print Preview - Opens the report in Print Preview Print Report - Sends the report to the default system printer Figure 23-19: Report Generator Right Click Right Click on a single item or several items in any of the Memory List Tabs and select: Add/Remove from Active Display - (Press Alt+Left Click on an item to break the connection of all items to the active display) Display On - Add the selected item(s) to an existing or new display window The options vary depending on which Memory List Tab is selected. The example in Figure 23-20 shows that a curve can be added to: One of the current display windows in the “Display On“ list New XY Graph - Creates a graph for the selected items New Table - Creates a table for the selected items New Polar Plot - Creates a polar plot for the selected items Figure 23-20: Right Click Menu New Group - Creates a new group in the Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 291 The following features are available in the Right Click menu as well as in the Data Menu. They follow the same explanations and rules. For more information See Data Menu on page 284. Rename - Creates a Protected copy of the item and prompts you for a new name Overwrite - Allows you to select a Subject item from the Memory List and then choose another item as the Target to be overwritten Delete - will remove only the selected item(s) from the active Memory List Tab (Available in both the Right Click and Data Menus) Units - To increase flexibility, the units of Memory List Items can be temporarily changed Comment - Comments can be attached to Curves in the Memory List Protect - Items in the Memory List can be protected so that subsequent runs of the sequence do not overwrite the data Autoprotect - Used to keep data contents of Items in memory every time a sequence is run Undo Autoprotect - Selected Items are no longer Autoprotected in subsequent measurements Right Click on a Group Show on Active Display - Add all items in group to display Display On - Select display to add group items to Save Data As - Save all items in group as selectable data type Ungroup - Removes the selected Custom Group heading and returns the Items to the root of the Memory List (Will not remove Auto Groups) Delete Group and Data - Deletes the selected Custom Group heading and all of the Items under that heading (Cannot be Undone) Figure 23-21: Right Click on Group Will not delete Autogroups but will clear data in items Rename - Change the name of the selected Group New Group - Creates a new Group and adds the selected Group to it Window Menu Full Size - Set the SoundCheck Main Screen to fill the computer desktop (Does not allow application window to be resized) Clicking on an Open Window Title brings that display window to the front - useful when smaller windows are inadvertently hidden behind larger display windows Figure 23-22: Window Menu Help Menu Context Help menus are available for many items in SoundCheck. Press Ctrl+H to open the Context Help window or select it from the Help Drop Down menu. This will give information on the last item the mouse has scrolled over. Press Ctrl+H again to make the Context Help window disappear, or click the close box button in the upper right hand corner. Figure 23-23: Help Menu 292 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual WAV File Types SoundCheck will read and write 8, 16, 24 and 32 bit WAV files. 8 bit WAV files in PCM format are stored as unsigned integers, each sample ranging from 0-255. However, there are two other compressed formats, A-law and mu-law (commonly used in telephony). These files are stored as 8 bit files, but decompress to 16 bit Integer when read. SoundCheck will read 8 bit files in all three formats, PCM, A-law and mu-law, but writes only in PCM format. See table below. WAV File General Rules When opening a WAV file, SoundCheck will prompt you to select units of FS or FS(AES17) ‘FS’ – SoundCheck default value, the max amplitude of a digital sine wave is -3 dBFS ‘FS (AES17)’ – Value corresponding to AES17 standard definition, the max amplitude of a digital sine wave is 0 dBFS When opening a stereo WAV file, SoundCheck will automatically split the file into two waveforms in the memory list, adding [L] or [R] to the file names 16 bit files are stored as 16 bit Integer PCM format WAV. SoundCheck reads and writes 16 bit WAV files in PCM format. 24 bit files are stored as 32 bit Integer PCM format WAV. SoundCheck reads and writes 24 bit WAV files in PCM format. 32 bit files are stored as 32 bit Integer PCM format WAV ranging from -2147483648 to +2147483648. SoundCheck reads PCM and IEEE float but writes only PCM format. The sample rate of the WAV file must match the sample rate of the System Hardware Configuration WAV File Format Table SoundCheck reads and writes WAV files according to the following table. Bit Depth Read Write 8 bit PCM uncompressed unsigned 8 8 bit A-law compressed unsigned 8 bit PCM uncompressed unsigned 8 bit mu-law compressed unsigned 16 24 32 16 bit Integer PCM 16 bit Integer PCM 32 bit Integer PCM 32 bit Integer PCM 32 bit Integer PCM 32 bit IEEE Floating Point 32 bit Integer PCM A-law and mu-law WAV files are mostly used in Telephony (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/G.711). Most popular audio editing programs can write WAV files in these formats. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 293 WAV File Scaling In SoundCheck versions 6.11 and higher, WAV files are scaled according the following rules. (In versions 6.00, 6.01, and 6.10 WAV files were normalized to +/- full scale deflection when saved). Rules for scaling Waveforms when they are saved as WAV files: A Waveform is not scaled or normalized if the amplitude unit is FS, FSD, dB re:FS, or dB re:FSD. Waveforms with dB re:[any unit] get converted to their linear version upon being saved as a WAV. If the waveform has units based on Full Scale Deflection (dB FS or dB FSD), but the Absolute Linear Peak Amplitude is greater than 1.0, the data of the resultant WAV file will be clipped. For any waveform with units that are not based on FSD (e.g., Pa, dB SPL, V/V, etc.), data will be normalized to +/- 1.0 FS (or 0 dB FSD), which is the maximum allowed amplitude of a WAV file. The scaling either increases or decreases the amplitude values of the data so that the Peak value of the data in the WAV file is +/- 1.0 FS. It is possible for a SoundCheck user to convert the units of a waveform from anything to FS (either directly from the Memory List or via Post-Processing), so its peak amplitude could be greater than +/1.0. In this case, no scaling occurs. Saving such a waveform as a WAV file means that there are points lying outside the allowable range. Upon saving this WAV file, these points will be coerced to either +1.0 or -1.0 FS (i.e., clipped). See Figure 23-24 When a WFM with an amplitude greater than 1 FS is saved to a WAV file, the resulting WAV file is clipped. When a WFM with an amplitude less than 1 FS is saved to a WAV file, the resulting WAV file is not scaled. Figure 23-24: WFM saved as WAV examples When acquiring data on a digital channel or creating a stimulus for a digital channel, the waveform will, by definition, have an absolute peak amplitude of less than or equal to 1.0 FS. Saving these WFMs as WAV files will not result in clipping. When saving the waveform as a WFM, the data is never scaled, normalized, or clipped. In SoundCheck, when a WAV is opened from disk, it has units of FS. (Peak allowable range of +/- 1.0) More information on the use of WAV files in SoundCheck can be found in: WAV File Excitation on page 111 and WAV file playback on page 413. 294 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Displays The SoundCheck Main Screen tool bar allows you to quickly switch between display steps when viewing sequence results. Offline Tab The Offline Tab is available with or without a sequence loaded. This allows you to open, process, and view data without loading a test sequence. In the Offline Tab, data can be examined or analyzed without affecting the layout of the display steps of the sequence. It minimizes the risk of accidentally editing sequences. In this mode, virtual instruments such as the signal generator, multimeter etc. can also be used, without a sequence being open. This is especially useful for those who view data on a regular basis: Development engineers who run a series of experiments and then post-process the data Production engineers who need to view large sets of data from the factory Note: The Lock Display function does not apply to the Offline Tab. Display Tabs The Display Steps in a sequence are always available via the Display Tabs on the SoundCheck Main Screen as shown in Figure 23-25. This allows you to easily manage multiple displays in a sequence. When a sequence is loaded, new tabs are added for each display step in the sequence. Figure 23-25: Display Tabs When the Memory List is Unlocked, any changes to the display windows, in any of the tabs, are saved when the sequence is saved. See Lock Display Off on page 282. If you remove the display windows and save the sequence, those windows are deleted from the display tab In a sequence with multiple displays, clicking Setup and then Display opens a drop down list of available Display Steps to choose from. Selecting a step opens that Display Tab. In a sequence with only one display, simply click on that Display Tab to edit You can Revert the display to its most recently saved form Opening a Display Step DOES NOT open the Memory List Opening the Memory List DOES NOT open a Display Step Closing the Display Step will close the display windows for that tab as well as the Memory List. This is not saved with the sequence. For more information See Memory List Display Menu on page 282. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 295 Display Editing You can easily display info from the Memory List in a sequence by adding a Display Step. Under the Display Menu - New, you can choose from six types of displays: XY Graph Waveform Graph Table Results Polar Plot (optional module required) Text Box Picture A Display Step can have many display windows, in any combination. The only limitation is in organizing the displays so that they can be seen on the computer screen. To view the data associated with the items in the Memory List, select one or more items under the Curves, Values, Results or WFM tabs. Select a single item by left clicking on it once To select more than one item, hold down the Control key while making multiple selections To de-select an item, click on it a second time while holding down the Control key To select a range of curves highlight the first curve in the range, hold down the Shift key and then select the last curve in the range Figure 23-26: Multiple Items Selected 296 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Right Click on Graph Copy Image This takes a screen shot of only the selected graph window and puts it in the Windows Clipboard. This graphic can be cut and pasted into a document or image editor to save it. Tool Arrow - When active you can click on the XY axis to change the values. You can also click on the cursor to drag it to a location. Zoom - Click to zoom into a specific part of the display XY allows you to drag a box to select zoom area X allows you to drag between two points on the X Axis Y allows you to drag between two points on the Y Axis Hand - Click on the graph and move it within the graph window Original - Graph returns to the view from the last saved version of the sequence Annotation - Right click on the graph and select Annotation to put the Curve name and its co-ordinates on the graph. When multiple curves are displayed in the same X axis range, only the curve coordinates are shown. Cursors Cur1 and Cur2 Right click on a graph, Select Cur1 or Cur2, then select: Drop Here - Places the cursor on the closest curve Drag the cursor to any point on the curve Drag the cursor to a different curve Snap to Max - The cursor jumps to the maximum value of the curve Snap to Min - The cursor jumps to the minimum value of the curve Remove the cursor from the graph window The cursor can be moved by Left Clicking and dragging the cursor marker (+) to the desired point on the curve. The cursor will snap to the closest curve you drag to. The XY coordinates of a cursor are displayed next to the cursor on the display. The XY coordinate box can be moved so that it does not cover the graph line. Cursors can be placed on the graph to note specific coordinates or find the X/Y difference between 2 cursors. Delta X and Delta Y are displayed in the bottom right corner of the graph window. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 297 Legend Legend - The curve legend can be placed on the Top of the graph or on the Right as shown in Figure 23-27. Autosize Legend - Insures that the full title of curves or waveforms in the legend is visible. When Autosize is disabled, placing the mouse pointer over a curve or waveform name will display the entire name. Legend Visible - Allows you to hide the legend Figure 23-27: Legend On Right Magnitude Shows the XY relationship of the selected curve Phase Shows the XZ relationship of the selected curve Unwrap Phase Allows you to show the phase as a continuous plot, even if the phase exceeds + 180 degrees. Note: Magnitude, Phase and Unwrap Phase are not available on Waveform Graphs. In a wrapped phase graph, the phase offset of the device under test is only expressed between 180 and -180 degrees. If the device has a fixed delay that exceeds the wavelength of the highest frequency of interest, then the results in the phase graph will "wrap around" as shown in Figure 23-28. Figure 23-28: Wrapped Phase When you un-wrap the phase you take this into account and plot phase offset values greater than 180 degrees. This allows phase to be shown as a continuous plot. Figure 23-29 shows the same Fundamental phase curved with Unwrap Phase selected. Figure 23-29: Unwrap Phase Note: 298 Unwrap Phase can also be accomplished in a Post Processing step if you want to save the Unwrap Phase data. See Unary on page 207. Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Open Report Follows same rules from Memory List Report Generator. See Report Generator on page 317. Print Preview Opens report in print preview Print Report Sends report to printer. No print preview or print setup. Save Image as You can save the current view of the selected display window as a JPG or PNG file. The graph header and footer can be expanded so that they are included in the image. Randomize Colors This function is especially useful in polar plot measurements or sequences with a large number of curves. Right click on the graph area and click Randomize Colors. It creates a random list of colors for the curves displayed in the active graph. These new colors are linked to the curves in the Memory List. If one of the curves is added to a different display, it will use the same color assigned by “Randomize Color”. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure 23-30: Randomize Colors Display Editor and Memory List 299 Preferences Right Click on the graph window and select Preferences. Click on a tab to change graph settings. Graph Title - Enter a name for the graph window. This name appears on exported graphics for reports. Color - Select colors for: Plot Area, Cursor 1, Cursor 2, X and Y Major and Minor divisions. When the Major or Minor divisions are not selected, the color selection is marked with “T” to indicate Transparent. Logo - The Listen Logo is displayed in all graph windows Autosize - The logo will change size as the graph window is changed. When Autosize is not selected you can select fixed sizes of small, medium and large. Position - Select: Upper Right or Left, Lower Right or Left Color - Select black logo background or white logo background Legend The Legend can be Autosized so that it alway shows all of the curves selected for a graph. This disables the re-sizing bar on the graph. Visible allows chose whether or not to show the legend Legend Position allows you to place the legend on top or on the right side of the graph X Axis Lin or Log Axis Show Major and/or Minor Grid lines Free or Autoscale 300 Autoscale will automatically scale the graph to fit the full X Axis extents of the graph information Free allows you to set fixed Max and Min values Standard axis ratio (requires that Auto Offset is on in Y Axis). See Standard Axis Ratio on page 301 for instructions. Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Y Axis Lin or Log Axis Show Major and/or Minor Grid lines Free or Autoscale Note: Autoscale will automatically scale the graph to fit the full Y Axis extents of the graph information Free allows you to set fixed Max and Min values Auto Offset - Used to fix the Y Axis scale to a set range. The graph will always perform a Best Fit on full extents of the graph information. In this example the Y Axis range is 30 dB. Y Axis 2 is available if two graph items have different Unit Sets. Only two unit sets are supported on a graph window. If an third type is added you will see the following message: “Cannot plot these data together! You must select curves with a maximum of two different unit sets, including phase.” Standard Axis Ratio This allows the XY Graph to display a user-defined dB range per decade of frequencies. The example below insures that the XY Graph will always be 50 dB per decade, regardless of actual size of the screen. Note: IEC 263 specifies 10, 25, and 50 dB/decade. B&K chart paper conforms to this standard. 1. Right Click on the display and select Preferences. 2. Click on the Y Axis tab, click the Auto Offset radio button and enter the proper decibel range as in Figure 23-31. The typical ranges are 25 or 50 however any value can be used. In this example the Y Axis will always have a scale of 50 dB. Figure 23-31: Y Axis Auto Offset 3. Select the X Axis tab, click Standard axis ratio as in Figure 2332. Make sure that the X Axis is set to Free and NOT Autoscale. 4. Click OK to close Figure 23-32: X Axis Standard Axis Ratio SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 301 Graph Header Click the up/down arrows to the right of the Plot Legend to select other curves. You can also Left click and pull down the divider bar at the top of the graph to expand the header to show all the curves in the Plot Legend. Right Click on a graph line in the Plot Legend to adjust its properties. Plot Visible - The selected plot can be hidden. Common Plots - Select the line style for the selected item: Continuous Line, Dots, Connected Dots, Fill Baseline, Vertical Lines and Bar Plot. Color - You have several options using the color spectrum bars: Greyscale, Soft Colors and Bright Colors. You can also click on the artist palette in the lower right and create a custom color. The selected color is shown in the bottom left hand box. Color History You can view and edit the Color History of the Display Editor in the SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini file. (for 32 bit versions only SoundCheck 16.0.ini is used) When using SoundCheck 64 bit, the x64 INI file is created the first time you manually edit a color in a display. You can also create the file by making a blank INI file with the same name as the SoundCheck executable. This shows a list of up to 11 colors used in the most recent run sequence. Colors in the list follow the standard HEX color code with “00” prepended to the value. The color history and INI file text are shown in Figure 23-33. [SoundCheck 16.0 (x64)] colorHistoryItemA=000411D4 colorHistoryItemB=00CA0D00 colorHistoryItemC=00E84D00 colorHistoryItemD=00FFD900 colorHistoryItemE=0012FF00 Figure 23-33: Color History 302 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual User Colors 18 Colors can be defined in the SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini file. (SoundCheck 16.0.ini for 32 bit versions). Colors in the list follow the standard HEX color code and can be named as shown in Figure 23-34. This also shows the text of the INI file used in the example. This is a continuous string with no line breaks. All color items must be within quotes and semi-colons must be used as delimiters. [SoundCheck 16.0 (x64)] colorUserItem="Limits_Red=FF0000;Yellow=F7FF 00;L_Green=00DE25;Red=FF5080;;Blue=2500DF ;Violet=E060FF;Lt._Gray=C3C3C3;Dark_Violet=C 80FE8;Light Violet=FFAFFF;Dark Green=008000;Dark Red=A00000" Figure 23-34: User Colors Line Style - Set the selected line to solid or dashed Line Width - Set the width of the selected item Anti-Aliased - Select this item to make plot lines appear smoother. Note that anti-aliased lines can make sequences run slower if a large number of lines are drawn. Bar Plots - Select between Line Style and a variety of Bar Plots. Useful for display of RTA Spectrums. Fill Base Line - This is used to fill the area above or below the selected item in the Plot Legend. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 303 This is useful for creating masks as in Figure 23-35, making it easier to see the response curve inside the limits mask. Infinity - Fills the area above the selected item -Infinity - Fills the area below the selected item Zero - Fills the area from the selected down to zero Memory List Items - You can fill the area from the item to another curve Figure 23-35: Fill Base Line Mask Interpolation - Determines how the line between known points will be drawn. The most commonly used method in SoundCheck sequences is Point to Point line. Point to point - (Linear interpolation) is the straight line between each point Points only - No interpolation between points Points Only Point to Point Point Style - Select None or a variety of point styles. X Scale - This function is not supported and should not be used. Y Scale - This function is not supported and should not be used. Export - This function is not supported and should not be used. Important: As of SoundCheck 8, Display Windows do not allow the user to export data to Excel. This has been replaced with the Report Function. See Report Generator on page 317 for more information. 304 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Graph Footer To view the tools, click on the Expand Footer icon (down arrow) in the bottom right corner of the graph. Tools Select the tool icons in the Graph Footer: Arrow - When active you can click on the XY axis to change the values. You can also click on the cursor to drag it to a location. Figure 23-36: Expand Footer Magnifying Glass - Click to zoom into a specific part of the display. XY allows you to drag a box to select zoom area X allows you to drag between two points on the X Axis Y allows you to drag between two points on the Y Axis Hand - Click on the graph and move it within the graph window Original - Graph returns to the view from the last saved version of the sequence Annotation - Right Click on the graph and select Annotation to put the Curve name and its coordinates on the graph. When multiple curves are displayed in the same X axis range, only the curve co-ordinates are shown. Axis Controls Left clicking on the X, Y1 or Y2 buttons acts as a “One-time” AutoScale. You can also set the X and Y axis to automatically AutoScale with the Right Click functions noted below. Y2 is only enabled when there is a graph item requiring a Y Axis that is different from Y1, e.g.; Y1 = Frequency Response and Y2 = Impedance Right Click on the X, Y1 or Y2 buttons to open the properties for that axis. AutoScale - Set the preference to automatically scale the graph so the selected axis always fits the screen. Format - The appearance of the numbers on the axis can be changed. This is set to Decimal by default. Decimal - Standard decimal point number SI - International system of units Precision - Set the number of decimal points that should be represented on the axis. Mapping Mode - Sets the scale of the axis to linear or logarithmic SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 305 Creating a Display Step 1. Open the sequence editor 2. Open the Display Category folder in the library 3. Right click on the area under Display and select New 4. Type in a name for the Display Step. This example is named “Final Test”. 5. Click OK. 6. Left click on the new display template and drag it into the Active Sequence. Make sure it is at the end of the sequence. You can left click on the Display step to drag it to a new location in the sequence. Display Step Rules When using multiple Display Steps, each Display Step in the sequence must have a unique name or data will not be displayed correctly. This includes subsequences. 7. Open the Memory List. In this example we have already run the sequence so that we have data ready to view in display windows. 8. Open the Curves tab. Simply double clicking on a memory list item will open it in its default display window. You can use Drag and Drop to add other items to that window. 9. As an alternative, select multiple data items for the XY Graph. Right click on the selected items. Select Display On and select New XY Graph. 10. A new graph display opens on the SoundCheck Main Screen in the Final Test Tab. 11. You can modify the settings of the graph following the instructions seen in Display Editing on pg 296. 12. Right click on the graph of the new display. Select Preferences and name the window. In this case it is named Response. 13. Next we click on just the Response 3rd Oct curve. Right Click and select Display On and select New XY Graph. This creates another XY Graph in the Final Test Tab. 14. Right click on the graph of the new display. Select Preferences and name the window. In this case it is named Phase. 15. The example phase curve is not displayed as a continuous curve, shown in the example to the right. 306 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 16. Right click on the graph again and select Unwrap Phase. This makes the phase a continuous curve as shown in Figure 23-37. See Unwrap Phase on page 298 for more information. 17. In the Memory List, click on the Results tab. 18. Select all of the result items. Right click on the group. Select Display On and select New Results. 19. The final display has three windows for Response, Phase and Results. 20. Other windows can be added in the same manner. 21. See Display Examples on pg 308 for more information on available displays. Figure 23-37: New Display SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 307 Display Examples XY Graph The XY Graph can only be used to display curves. Figure 23-38: XY Graph Multiple curves may be shown on one graph, with one or two Y-axes in use. You can change the colors of a line on the graph by right clicking on the name of the target curve and choosing Color. Other XY Graph properties such as Line Width, Line Style, and Point Style may be configured through the Plot Legend as well. See Graph Header on pg 302. See Display Editing on pg 296. Results The Results window displays the test results, margins, and actual yield percentage if one or more Statistics Steps are in the sequence. The Display Step must occur after the Statistics Steps. Only items in the Results tab of the Memory List can be displayed in this window. Figure 23-39: Results Window Export to Excel Note: 308 To export the information to Excel you must export the entire display from the Report function in the Memory List. See Report Menu on pg 291. Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Results - Display Menu Set the options for the Results window by clicking on Display and then selecting Preferences. The name of the Results display window can be changed in the Preferences dialog box. Use Show Limits and Show Yield to display more information about the limits that produce the pass/fail result. Change the notation and precision (decimal places) to further customize the numerical values. Figure 23-40: Results Preferences The Overall Pass/Fail selection performs a “Boolean AND” function on the selected results and shows the final Pass or Fail verdict. When Overall Pass/Fail is selected, the verdict is shown as a Green “Passed” or Red “Failed” window as shown in Figure 23-41. Figure 23-41: Overall Pass/Fail Polar Plot (optional module required) The Polar Plot allows you to visualize directionality characteristics of the device under test. The list of Responses in the Memory List should be in order (from lowest angle to highest or highest to lowest). SoundCheck will assume that all measurements have been taken consecutively. When all the curves are selected (there must be more than one to show data on the Polar Plot), there will be one color for each. By default: The Polar Plot is Autoscaled It displays the magnitude of the response at a frequency of 1000 Hz The curves will be set at an interval of 10 degrees These default settings may be altered by selecting Preferences from the Display Menu of the Polar Plot window Note: Figure 23-42: Polar Plot Display The “Polar Plot (Linear X turntable)” default sequence has several display examples. Adding Polar Curves to Display Rules Click on the Polar Display to make it the “Active Display” SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 309 If the number of curves for the polar plot changes you must remove the curves from the Polar Display, Re-select the curves in the Memory List and add them back to the Polar Display. This keeps the curves in the proper order so they are displayed correctly. Select the group of curves for the Polar Plot in the Memory List. They must be selected in order, from 0 degrees to the last degree measured and added as a group. Right click on the curves and select “Show On Active Display” Polar - Display Menu The Display Menu in the Polar Plot display window allows you to: Show Legend - of Frequencies next to the Polar Plot as in Figure 23-42 Show XY Graph - in the Polar Plot window as shown in Figure 23-49 A check mark next to these items means they are visible. Open Report - Opens a report based on the current display and the settings in Report Setup. See Report Generator on page 317. Print Preview - Opens the report in Print Preview Print Report - Sends the report to the default system printer Save to Image File - Allows you to save the display window as a JPG or BMP file Preferences Display Title Allows you to enter a unique name for the polar window. Tabs There are two tabs in the Polar Plot Preferences window, Polar Plot and XY Graph. Click on the tab to access the options for the desired graph. Figure 23-43: Polar Plot Settings 310 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Polar Plot Options Visible Section This is used to change the viewable portion of the 360 degrees available. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the options, or left click the current selection to view the possible displays. Figure 23-44: Polar Plot Quadrants Mirror If the curves represent less than 360 degrees of data, you can choose to Mirror the information around the vertical axis of the polar plot. The data will start at 0º at the North position of the circular grid, and proceed counter-clockwise. By clicking the Mirror check box, the right side of the polar display will be a Mirror Image of the left side of the display. Background and Grid Color The color of the plot background or plot grid lines can be selected by left clicking on the color control icon, and then selecting a new color from the color palette. See Figure 23-45. Figure 23-45: Background and Grid Color Angle of Increment The Polar Plot display assumes that the first curve in the series of curves is at the 0º mark of the rotation. Auto Increment requires that you enter the Total Rotation, in degrees, of the polar measurements. The number of points is then automatically divided and displayed in even increments. The And Increment field changes so you can enter the Total Rotation. Auto Increment is off in the default sequence example. Angle Increment is used to set the degrees of rotation used when rotating the turntable. This is to Increment the curves so they are equally spaced from zero degrees. Zero Adjust is used to reflect the true angle of the first measurement. Every other curve is assumed to be taken in increments as set in the Angel Increment field above. Angle Increment should match the degrees of rotation used in rotating the turntable. The default sequence step configuration is set to 10 degrees. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List Figure 23-46: Zero Adjust 311 Scaling The Polar Plot, like the XY Graph, is set to Autoscale the curves by default. You can set this to Manual and set a minimum and maximum range. As curves are added or removed to the display using the Memory List, this value will not change. The Precision field sets the number of decimal places displayed on the Polar Plot. You can show magnitude on a log scale by checking the Log box, or make the minimum value of the Polar Plot the minimum magnitude in the selected range of curves by using the clip to min check box. Figure 23-47: Autoscale Manual Cursors Once all the curves to be displayed are selected, one line will be visible. This line represents the response level for each curve at a frequency of 1000 Hz. If the XY Plot is displayed, the selected curves will be visible with one cursor labeled 1000. This is a discrete cursor. Other discrete cursors can be added at other frequencies. An additional line will be added to the Polar Plot with each discrete cursor. The default frequency increments are one-octave widths (e.g., 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, etc.) Figure 23-48: Cursors To see the response over many frequencies, select the Range option. You can set the start and end values of the range, and one line will be added to the Polar Plot for each measured frequency. These frequencies are shown in the legend to the right of the Polar Plot. Polar Plot Example A color is assigned to each Cursor Point within the designated range Each measured point within the range will create a vertical line in the polar plot You can add an XY graph to the Polar Plot display window as noted inPolar - Display Menu on pg 310. This graph (See Figure 23-49) will show all the curves that have been selected from the Memory List as well as the Cursor Lines selected in the Polar Plot Options tab. See Polar Plot Options on pg 311. Figure 23-49: Polar Plot with XY Graph 312 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual XY Graph Options This is a subset of the functions available in the XY Graph Preferences as described inDisplay Editing on pg 296. There are no settings for: auto-offset standard axis ratio (See Randomize Colors on pg 299 for information on how to easily change the plot colors.) Figure 23-50: XY Graph Options Table A Table displays the numerical values, the name, and units of the Curves, Values, Results or WFM selected from the Memory List. Any combination of these three types of information can be displayed in the same table. Figure 23-51: Table of Curves, in Column Format Table - Display Menu Table properties can be set by choosing Preferences from the Display Menu. You can change the title of the Table display window, and set the notation and precision for the numerical values in the table. By default, the names selected from the Memory List for display on the Table are displayed in columns. This can be changed to Rows by selecting Transpose in the Table Format section. When the Memory List Items are displayed in column format, the width of all the columns can be manually adjusted. Put the mouse cursor over the grid lines in the table until it becomes a double-sided arrow, then drag it left or right. Figure 23-52: Manual Resize SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 313 Table - Preferences This allows for a great deal of flexibility in how table data is presented. From the Active Table window select Display and then Preferences. Column Auto Size sets the column width to widest table cell (default setting) Fixed Width allows you to enter a value for the cell width Manual Resize allows you to click on a column boundary and move it to the desired width Table Format Transpose changes the x and y orientation of the data in the table When Transpose is selected, you can set the width of the row header (which then contains the name and unit information of the curves, values and results). The rest of the table is no longer manually adjustable. Figure 23-53: Table Preferences Row Header Width can be set to a specific value Display Units show the units along with the column header (default setting) Number Format Choose between SI Notation or Floating Point Enter value for Significant Digits Hide Trailing Zeros Font Choose from a drop down list of fonts Set Size, Color and Attributes of selected font (See Figure 23-53) Set color of the Background of the table Text The Text box can be used to annotate tests. The text box allows you to enter freeform notes into the display layout, although it is not a full-fledged text editor. Local Language Characters Text can also be entered in Local Language Characters. See Display Local Language Characters on page 244. 314 Display Editor and Memory List Figure 23-54: Display Menu Options SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Text - Display Menu The Display Menu in the Text display window allows you to change the formatting of the words and numbers of the display. The size, font, style, and color of the displayed text can be changed as well as the title of the Text display window. Figure 23-55: Text Preferences Picture The Picture display window allows jpeg (*.JPG) or bitmap (*.BMP) images to be opened in the display. Mic __ Placement Picture - File Menu The File menu of the Picture Display window allows you to select an image to display. Direction of Rotation Figure 23-57: Select an Image SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List Figure 23-56: Picture Display 315 Picture - Display Menu - Preferences Picture Title - Set the name of the window Image Path - Select the image file to be displayed Resize Window to Picture - The display window automatically adjusts according to the size of the image file Resize Picture to Window - The image file automatically adjusts to the size of the display window. Left Click on the border of the window and drag it to adjust the window size. Figure 23-58: Preferences Waveform Waveforms can be displayed on a graph. They cannot be displayed on the same graph as a curve. The Preferences for Waveform graphs are the same as XY Graphs. See XY Graph on pg 308. Figure 23-59: Waveform Graph 316 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Generator Create and print company reports in Word, Excel, HTML and image files. The Report Menu is found in the Memory List and Open Report is in each of the Display Windows. Load Logo - Company logos can be added to the heading of a report. Click here to select .BMP or .JPG file. Figure 23-60: Report Setup Report Setup - Select the Export Settings for the report: Report Selection - Word, Excel or HTML: Export settings change depending on the type of report selected Report title - None, Standard or Custom Template - Must follow rules as noted in Report Template Rules on page 317 Test Information - Operator, Time, Lot Number and Serial Number Option to Create New File or Append to Existing File Figure 23-61: Report Setup Open Report - Opens a report based on the current display and the settings in Report Setup Print Preview - Opens the report in Print Preview Print Report - Sends the report to the default system printer Note: When printing to PDF Writer or PDF Distiller, the file is not automatically named. Report Template Rules When creating a template, the following fields must be present or an error message will display indicating that the template is corrupt or invalid. These fields are case sensitive and must be included in every report even if they are not used. 'seq_name' - Sequence Name 'operator' - Operator's Name 'time' - Time the sequence was run 'lot' - Lot number 'serial' - Serial number Graph name (case-sensitive, no spaces) Regarding graph names: Bookmarks in Word and Excel use the name of the Display Window: Response, Distortion, Harmonics, Results, etc. The name in the title bar of the display will be used as a bookmark. Excel and Word do not allow spaces in bookmark names, e.g., "Waveform Graph 1" should be "WaveformGraph1" (case-sensitive). Creating Templates Word and Excel Bookmark instructions can be found at: http://office.microsoft.com/ by searching for Work Bookmark or Excel Bookmark. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Display Editor and Memory List 317 REPORTS USING EXCEL An Excel worksheet will appear on the desktop with the data filled in. This file is named and saved to retain the data. The other option, Excel format… is used to set up the way the data is exported to Excel. These preferences are saved when the Display is saved. If the preferences for exporting to Excel are not set, default settings will be used. You can choose which axes to include. This may become useful, for example, if all the data has the same Xaxis. In that case, it is recommended to avoid taking up disk space by omitting the X-axis from all Exports after the first one. Data exported to Excel will be displayed in columns by default, but export to rows can also be used. If the data requires a Header, the Standard Header can be used, which includes unit information. A custom header can also be created. You can choose to export the data in scientific or floating point notation. Test Information such as Operator name, Time of test, Lot number, and Serial number can be exported with the numerical data. All data will be exported to a new Excel spreadsheet, each time, by default. Data can also be appended to an existing Excel file that was created by SoundCheck. Each different name of a curve, value, or result will be saved to an individual worksheet in the Excel workbook. The worksheet will have the same name as the curve, value, or result saved there. Note: If selected, time information is exported with one second resolution, but the default Time/Date format in Excel is one minute resolution. To display the complete time information, format the cell, row, or column in Excel that contains the data. For example to show hour, minute, and second information format the row or column to HH:MM:SS. Figure 23-62: XY Data Curves In Excel 318 Display Editor and Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Print Step A Print Step in a sequence allows you to produce a printed report each time the sequence runs. Printing can be done in the background with no operator action required. A standard SoundCheck® report is shown in Figure 24-1: Printing Editor Standard Report. This can be sent to your printer, or reports can be output to Word, Excel, HTML or Images. A print step must be inserted after a Display Step in the sequence and the Display Step must be configured to “Display when run”. Figure 24-1: Printing Editor Standard Report The Test Info and Test Parameters fields on the left side of the printout are linked to the test information of the sequence. All of the fields can be modified except for the date, which is fixed. Printing is also available in the Offline menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. Reports can be created in the Memory List. See Report Generator on page 317. Print Type Modes There are five modes to choose from in the Select Print Type field; Standard, Word, HTML, Excel and Images. Important! A Display Step MUST come before the Printing Step in the sequence and be open when the Printing Step runs. Standard Mode This mode allows you to setup a report in the Print Editor. You can choose any combination of two graphs, tables, and/or results displays for your printout. sends a report to your printer formatted as Printing Editor. This mode is compatible with the Printing Editor available in previous versions of SoundCheck. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Print Step 319 Report Generator Modes The Report Modes for Word, Excel, HTML and Images each create a report based on the layout of the currently open Display Step that occurs prior to the Printing Step in the sequence. The Filename options are the same as those used for Autosave and Recall. Rules for the generation of reports are the same as those for the Display Step. See Report Generator on page 317 for more information. Word Mode Print to Word options: Report Title - None, Standard or Custom Report Template and Path (See Report Template Rules on page 325) Test Information to include: Operator Time Lot Number Serial Number Printing Options Open Report - Opens the report in Word (Word must be installed) Print - Prints the file to the default printer (opens Word in the background) Save to File - Saves Word file to the location specified in “Report Folder“. Check “Use Default“ to use the “Default Data Path“. See Folder Paths on page 36. Figure 24-2: Printing Editor - Word Mode Save to File Options Filename for the report New/Overwrite - Creates a report using the Template name Append - Add to an existing report Automatic - Creates the file when the step is run Prompt Operator - Requires operator to enter name for report Automatic Filename uses the same options as found in the Autosave and Recall Steps: 320 Construction - Select an item and click Add> to put the item in the Template Separator - Specify what is to be added between items: Spaces, Underscores or None When Memory List is added to the Template, the Memory List Value field is enabled. This allows you to select a value from the Memory List to add to the name template; e.g., Index number of Loop. The Axis and number Format of the value can be set as well. User Defined - User entered text Clear button empties the Template field Print Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual HTML Mode HTML mode requires that you designate a path and filename for your HTML file, and decide whether you would like to simply create the HTML file and save it to disk, or send it directly to a printer. HTML files can be edited with any type of HTML editor. The individual graphic files associated with the HTML file, are uniquely named but not according to the output file name. Some options are common to all print modes. The rules for setting the common options are the same as those for Word. See Word Mode on page 320 for more information. Figure 24-3: Printing Editor - HTML Mode Note: As of SoundCheck 8, it is no longer necessary to set the Page Setup options in Internet Explorer. Note: The default graphic format for HTML mode is BMP. The format can be set to JPG or BMP by editing the “SoundCheck 16.0.ini“ file. This file is located in the root of the SoundCheck folder. Excel Mode Some options are common to all print modes. The rules for setting the common options are the same as those for Word. See Word Mode on page 320 and Report Template Rules on page 325 for more information. The options for setting Axes, Layout, Data Format and Notation are the same as Autosave and Recall Steps. Axes - Choose axes to include in export. The X axis is always included on the first save to Excel. Layout - Set in Columns or Rows. Data Format - Save Data, Images or Both. Notation - Scientific or Floating Point. Figure 24-4: Printing Editor - Excel Mode Note: As of SoundCheck 14.01, Excel Macro-enabled files with the XLSM file extension are allowed. The XLSM file extension is used in the generated file. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Print Step 321 Important! Excel .XLS files are limited to 256 Columns. Rows are unlimited. In Excel 2007 and later the .XLSX file maximum worksheet size is 1048576 rows by 16384 columns. Images Mode Some options are common to all print modes. The rules for setting the common options are the same as those for Word. See Word Mode on page 320 for more information. Image Format - Select JPG or BMP. BMP files have a higher resolution but a larger file size. Figure 24-5: Printing Editor - Image Mode Standard Mode Many functions of the Printing Editor are contained in the menu bar. The following sections describe what options are available. File In the File menu, you can open saved data or results files to be displayed for printing. Additionally, Data or Results in the current sequence can be saved to a *.DAT, .RES, *.TXT, or *.WAV file. Click Logo to load your company logo to customize your reports. Print Preview shows a preview of your report only if you are in Standard mode. Print sends the report in the Print Editor to the selected printer without having to run the sequence. This allows you to make adjustments to the Print Step and then test the results. 322 Print Step Figure 24-6: File Menu SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Page Setup allows you to choose page formatting and printer options. Figure 24-7: File - Page Setup Display The Display menu enables you to configure your printout while in Standard mode. (The Display Drop Down Menu is disabled for all other modes.) Figure 24-8: Display Menu Options The Preferences command opens the dialog box shown in Figure 24-9. Here, you have the option of enabling one or two displays (marked Display A and Display B). If you choose to show one display, options for Display B will become disabled, and Display A will be the only display. For each display you can choose to show a Graph, a Table, or Results. Figure 24-9: Preferences Figure 24-10 shows a graph and a table on the Standard Print report. Notice that unlike the Display Step, the Printing Step has two Memory Lists, one for each type of display. XY Graphs and Tables can display curves and single values, and a Results display can display the result margins and verdicts. Figure 24-10: Show Graph and Table SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Print Step 323 Use Graph Options, Figure 24-11, to adjust scale options on the x or y-axis. You can remove grid lines or change from a linear to a logarithmic scale. You can also cancel the default Autoscaling of the graphs, allowing you to choose your own scale. In the Y Axis options, Auto Offset is available. Here you can set the visible range on the Y-axis. This enables the XY Graph to display a user-defined dB range per decade of frequencies. When this is selected on the Y-Axis box, the Standard axis ratio becomes available on the X-Axis box. Selecting this option will ensure that the aspect ratio set by the Auto Offset will remain constant. Since you cannot alter the graph size in the Printing Editor, the Standard axis ratio is set by default. Figure 24-11: Configure Graphs The table data can be transposed from rows to columns, and the width of the columns can be controlled for each of the two possible tables. Figure 24-12: Table Options Show Limits displays the upper and/or lower bound of your Limits Step in the results display. The results can be displayed individually, or by choosing Overall Pass/Fail, you can perform a Boolean AND on the results selected for display, and receive one Pass or Fail notice. To choose Overall Pass/Fail in this example, you would first need to uncheck the Show Limits box, and then the Overall Pass/Fail box will become available. The choices in Figure 24-13: Results Options are mutually exclusive. Figure 24-13: Results Options Curve In the Curve menu, you can alter the properties of the curves and single values in the Memory List box of the Printing Editor. Delete enables you to delete curves, single values or results selected from the Memory List box on either Display A or Display B (called “Graph A” and “Graph B” in Figure 24-14: Curve menu options. You can rename one selected curve, single value or result at a time in either Display A or Display B. Similarly, you can change the units of the Y axis of one curve or single value (not valid for results) at a time from either of the two displays. Figure 24-14: Curve menu options 324 Print Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates Office 2003, 2007 and 2010 are supported for generating reports. Office 97, 2000, XP and 2002 are not compatible. Report Template Rules When creating a template, Bookmarks must be added to the template so that these items are automatically placed in the correct location in the report. These fields are case sensitive. logo - Uses the file specified under Edit > Preferences > Folder Paths > Logo Path. Maximum size of 260 x 60 pixels seq_name - Sequence Name, Custom Name or None, depending on what is selected in the Report Title field operator - The User Name used in the SoundCheck Login window time - Date and Time the sequence was run lot - Lot number from the SoundCheck Main Screen serial - Serial number entered on the SoundCheck Main Screen or from a Serial Number Step that occurs prior to the Print Step/Report generation Display Window Name - Each Display window must have an individual bookmark or it will be ignored when the report is generated. (case-sensitive, no spaces) Bookmarks in Word and Excel use the Graph Title set in Graph Preferences of the Display Window: Response, Distortion, Harmonics, Results, etc. HOWEVER - Spaces are not allowed in Excel or Word bookmarks. Example: SoundCheck graph title "Waveform Graph 1" should be bookmarked with the spaces removed; "WaveformGraph1" (case-sensitive) Only letters and numbers are allowed. No other characters or punctuation can be used. In addition, the following rules apply: Reports require that a Display Step, along with all its windows, be open in SoundCheck prior to generating the report. The properties of each of the windows must be set in advance since the report will use a Bitmap of each display window. The graphic of a Display Window cannot be automatically scaled in Word or Excel. The graphic size is set in the SoundCheck display. The Excel template can have its page scaling set to reduce the size of report graphics. A Report Template is matched to a sequence since the Bookmark names must match the titles of the Display windows Changing the name of a Display in SoundCheck will break the link to the Bookmark in the template The Report Setup in a display window or the Memory List cannot be saved with the sequence. The Report Title is not remembered after you switch sequences or close SoundCheck. The information will need to be re-selected the next time SoundCheck is run. Reports can be in Landscape or Portrait orientation Bookmarks can be added to the Header or Footer of the template Tables can be used to group graphics with text For more examples of report templates, refer to the Report Templates folder in SoundCheck. The “Self Test“ sequence has template examples in Landscape and Portrait orientation. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates 325 Manually Creating Reports Reports can be created from the Memory List for the whole display, or from individual display windows. 1. In the Memory List click on File > Report Setup. 2. Under Report Selection select a report type from the drop down list. Selections are: Word, HTML and Excel. The Export Settings will change depending on the Report Type selected. 3. For this example, Word is selected. 4. Under Report Title you can choose the title name that will be used on the report. This is the value that is used for the template field - “seq_name“. Selections are: Figure 25-1: Report Setup None - report title will be blank. Standard - report title will be the name of current sequence. Custom - text entered into the field on the right will be used for the report title. For this example, Custom is selected and the name entered is “GS Model 6”. 5. Under Test Information, select which of the four items are to be included on the report. These correspond to the required fields as noted in Report Template Rules on page 325. 6. Click OK to close the Report Setup menu. 7. Click Open Report and a generic report opens in Word as shown in Figure 25-2. The logo is included at the top along with a table that contains the Report Title and the four items selected under Test Information. Bitmaps of all of the display windows follow. Note: The manual report setup cannot be saved with the sequence. Changes to the table or graphic size and position are not remembered. The Report Title is not remembered after you switch sequences or close SoundCheck. The information will need to be re-selected the next time SoundCheck is run. Figure 25-2: Generic Report, Page 1 326 Report Templates SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating a Word Template For the next example, a Word Template is created so that the layout of the report can be customized. 1. Open Word and create a new document named “Speaker Test Template.doc“. 2. In Word, select Page Setup. 3. Set the Orientation of the page to “Landscape”. 4. Set the Margins as desired. 5. Add a page number field to the Footer of the document. (View Header and Footer) Figure 25-3: Page Setup Create Bookmarks Bookmarks are used in Word to set the location of text and graphic fields that SoundCheck will use as targets when generating the report. The window names from the generic report in the previous example are used to create a report template for this sequence. 1. Click on Insert and then Bookmark. 2. Under Bookmark name type in “logo“ and then click Add. Since this is the first Bookmark entered, it will appear in the upper left corner of the document. The Bookmark appears as a simple “I” bracket as long as Show Bookmarks is checked under: Tools - Options - View. (The size of the logo must be set in advance.) 3. Set the location of the next Bookmark in the document. In this case, a Tab is entered so that the next field is moved away from the logo. 4. Click on Insert and then Bookmark. Enter the Report Title field name, seq_name and then click Add. 5. Set the location of the next Bookmark in the document. Hit Enter to move to a new paragraph. Figure 25-4: Set Bookmarks 6. Type “Serial Number: “. Click on Insert and then Bookmark. Enter the field name, serial and then click Add. 7. Repeat the procedure to enter the other required field names as noted in Report Template Rules on page 325. Enter the bookmarks for the display windows as well. The bookmarks must be in place for the display window graphics to be added to the document. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates 327 8. The Word example in Figure 25-5 shows the final template for this sequence. The document is simply a collection of bookmarks as listed in Figure 25-4. Text can be added before or after the bookmark so that a text marker for the graphic is included. 9. Save and close the word template, “Speaker Test Template.doc“ to the Report Template folder in SoundCheck: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Report Templates\Word. Figure 25-5: Template Bookmark Layout Manual Report With Template 10. In SoundCheck, the Report Setup will be modified as in Figure 25-6. Select the template from the previous step. The example title has been changed to “GS 6.5 Woofer”. 11. Click OK to close the setup window. 12. Click Open Report to generate a new report using the template. Figure 25-6: Report Setup 2 13. The report example in Figure 25-7 shows the two pages of the report. The Bookmarks are visible on the screen but are not printed. The size of each display graphic is set in the SoundCheck Display. If the graphics in the report are too large, change the size in SoundCheck and re-open the report. Figure 25-7: Report Example in Word 328 Report Templates SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Print Step Reports By adding a Print Step to a sequence, generating reports can be an automatic process. Reports can be saved to Word without being visible to the user. In the following process, the same sequence from previous examples has been used. The same template can then be used in the Print Step. 1. Insert a Print Step to the sequence. It must occur after a Display Step that is configured to “Display Step when run“ (See Adding Multiple Steps on page 392 for more information). If not, an error will occur when the sequence is run. See Figure 25-8. The settings in the upper section are the same as the Report Setup in the previous example: Manual Report With Template on page 328. Figure 25-8: Error 2. Under Select Print Type, choose Word from the Drop Down Menu. See Figure 25-9. 3. Under Report Title select Custom and enter ”GS 65 Woofer”. 4. Under Report Template select “Speaker Test Template.doc“. 5. Under Test Information select all four items. The settings in the lower section follow the same rules as found in Word Mode on page 320. 6. Under Printing Options select Open Report then click Apply to test the report. A new report will Figure 25-9: Print Step Setup open in word so that you can verify the above settings. The report will be the same as the previous example: Manual Report With Template on page 328. 7. Under Printing Options change the selection to Save File. The filename options are now enabled. 8. Under Filename select New/Overwrite to create a new report for each measurement. 9. Select Automatic to enable the Construction fields. Select User Defined and click Add. Select Serial Number and click Add. The Separator should be set to “Spaces”. In the User Defined field enter “GS 65 W“. For every sequence run, with a new serial number, a new report will be generated. Figure 25-10: Report Folder 10. Click Apply and a new report is generated in the selected Report Folder. Remember: The Display Step of the sequence must be open in order to generate a report. As seen in Figure 25-10, ten reports were generated after testing ten speakers. Each file has the serial number appended to the name. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates 329 File Path The Report Template and Report Folder fields do not follow Relative File Path rules. The path must be reentered if the sequence is run from a different computer. Creating an Excel Template Note: When printing to an Excel template, it is important to keep the File Name short since there is a maximum File Name Length when saving to some versions of Excel. Defined Names are used in cells as field markers for information and graphics when SoundCheck saves to Excel using a template. In this example, we have created a new Excel file named “Speaker Test Template.xlsx“. 1. Right click on a cell where you want to locate a field marker. (A1) 2. Select Define Name and enter the name in the editor. See Figure 25-11. 3. In the Define Name window enter “logo” and click OK. 4. The Defined Name can now be seen in the Name Box above column A. 5. Select cells for the other required field markers and markers for the graphics of the report. Figure 25-11: Excel Template 6. In this example, the markers are in the following fields: (Cells A6 through A10 must be sized to allow enough room for the graphics.) 7. Save and close the template. 330 Report Templates A1 - logo A6 - Results A7 - Fundamental A8 - Impedance A9 - THD A10- RubandBuzz C1 - seq_name E1 - serial E2 - lot E3 - Operator E4 - time SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual In our example sequence we have changed the Print Step to Excel as the Print Type. See Figure 25-12. The settings for an Excel Print Step are covered in Excel Mode on page 303, Word Mode on page 302 and Autosave Editor on page 173. 8. Under Report Template select “Speaker Test Template.xls”. 9. Under Printing Options select Open Report and click Apply. 10. Note that the Data Format is set to Both. This will save both the graphics and the raw data to the report. The data for each of display windows will appear in a separate worksheet in the Excel file. 11. The Excel Report is opened and the size of the cells can be Fined Tuned to fit the display graphics. See Figure 25-13. Figure 25-12: Print Step - Excel 12. Once the cells in the Excel report have been adjusted, delete the graphics and text from the variable fields. Then delete the worksheets for the display data. This leaves the Defined Names and Cell Titles for the template. 13. Save and close the Excel template. 14. In the Print Step in SoundCheck, set Printing Options to Save to File. When the sequence is run, a new Excel spreadsheet is created for each new device tested: “GS 65 W 2001.xls“. Figure 25-13: Excel Template With Data SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates 331 Important! The font size of the cells in the Excel template cannot be adjusted. The setting is over written by SoundCheck. The font size is fixed at 10 point. Important! The size of graphics is not remembered when they are adjusted in the Excel template. Display windows must be scaled in the SoundCheck display. Note: As of SoundCheck 14.01, Excel Macro-enabled files with the XLSM file extension are allowed. The XLSM file extension is used in the generated file. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Report Templates 332 Serial Number Editor You can choose to automatically increment the serial number each time the sequence is run, or to prompt the operator to manually enter the serial number of the DUT. When used in a sequence along with the Autosave Step (See Autosave Editor on pg 183) the updated serial number can be saved with measurement data. The serial number also appears at the top of the main SoundCheck® window and in reports generated by the Printing Step. To view and change the system’s serial number settings, select Serial Number from the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen, or use the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+E. When exiting SoundCheck, the last recorded serial number is saved in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file. The next time SoundCheck is opened, the last serial number is automatically recalled to the S/N field of the SoundCheck Main Screen. This enables the operator to continue measuring a lot that was not finished before their shift was over. Auto Increment With Auto Increment selected, the S/N prefix appears along with the incremented number. Using a step configured as in Figure 26-1: Serial Number Setup, the serial number for the first three items tested would be; ABC1, ABC2 and ABC3. Figure 26-1: Serial Number Setup Prompt Operator When Prompt Operator is selected, any alpha-numeric combination can be entered by the user. This number is then used to identify the data. Once the number is entered, you can Click OK or Enter to continue running the sequence. Note: Note: The Serial Number Step must precede the Autosave Step in a sequence for the serial number to be correctly recorded with the measurement data. Figure 26-2: Serial Number Prompt As of SoundCheck 7, the Serial Number category in the Step Library has been changed from “Serial #” to “Serial No”. To use steps from previous versions of SoundCheck, copy the steps from the Serial # folder of SoundCheck x.x to the Serial No. folder in the SoundCheck 16.0 directory. These can then be used as step templates. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Serial Number Editor 333 page intentionally left blank 334 Serial Number Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor The Statistics Editor allows you to perform a variety of statistical measurements on the data that is produced. These measurements include: minimum, maximum, mean, standard deviation, Cp, Cpk, and Best/Worst fit to Average for curves. The editor can operate in either of two modes depending on the application. The Online mode allows for the use of the statistics step in a sequence. You can use this mode to determine the standard deviation after each run and determine whether the spread of the results is outside of acceptable limits. Statistical calculations are made upon the consecutive runs of a sequence when using Online mode. Online Mode The values calculated by the Statistics Step are created from curves, values, and results generated during the run of the current sequence. Important! If the Hardware, Calibration, Acquisition, Analysis or Statistics Steps are changed, all unsaved statistical data is lost. It is important to understand the circumstances that will enable you to keep building upon the current statistics values. The first time the sequence is run, the statistical values begin to fill. This first run produces curves and values that are based on only one set of data. In other words, the curve Minimum, Maximum, Mean, and Standard Deviation are all identical curves the first time the sequence is run. The second time the sequence runs, all the statistics calculations are performed using the current and previous data together. The third time, the algorithm integrates the current run values with the running statistics calculated from the last two runs, and so on. Redo When Redo is selected from the SoundCheck® Main screen, the last measurement gets overwritten and the statistics recalculated to include the new measurement. This is an unlimited Redo, so it can be selected as many times as is necessary. A change in the lot number, changing the sequence or changing certain steps of the current sequence (See Note above) will reset and empty all your Statistics curves. Any statistics values from this point on will not take old curves/values into account. Figure: 27-1 Unlimited Redo SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 335 Offline Mode You can use the Offline Display Tab to calculate statistics on previously measured data. The Offline mode is used outside of a sequence and can be used on protected data or other previously collected data. Offline mode allows you to compare each of the selected curves to each other, rather than to previous runs. The results are output to the Memory List in the form of protected data. If you want to calculate the average of a group of impedance curves, you can use the Offline mode to compare these curves. Note: Figure: 27-2 Offline Mode Histogram, Best and Worst Fit to Average options are only available in Offline mode, and can be used to determine "Golden Units" and "Outliers". When using stored *.DAT files to create statistics, verify that the *.DAT file contains multiple tests of the same measurement. Please note that any statistical analysis becomes more valid with a large number of samples. Depending on the variability of your measurements, you may need 60 to 100 tests. You can adjust your Sigma value based on the number of samples available. Note: Mean, Maximum, Minimum, and Standard Deviation calculations are done on the numerical values as they are stored in the file. No conversion is made to use a linear scale. Note: Protected Data can only be added to Protected Groups. See Auto Grouping General Rules Memory List on page 290. Important! Any display windows added to the Offline Tab are temporary. They are not stored with a sequence. 336 Statistics Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistical Process Control Statistical Process Control measurements are also available in SoundCheck. These options allow users to track the quality of the production by comparing deviations to user-defined limits. For more information See SPC - Statistical Process Control on page 341. Select Statistics from Offline Menu Select Data, Results or both Work In mode allows for calculation in Linear, dB or Power units Select items from Memory List Select statistical processes to run for Data and Results Click Apply and the statistics results are updated in the Memory List Figure: 27-1 Statistics Offline SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 337 Choosing What Statistics to Create You can decide what curves, values and/or results to analyze statistically. In Figure 27-3: Choosing Data and/or Results the top area of the editor indicates the number of times this particular step has run in this sequence. All statistical values calculated are based on the “No. of Curves Selected”. Figure 27-3: Choosing Data and/or Results You can choose to calculate statistics on Data (curves and values), Results or both. The Data or Results items are selected form the Data and Results lists, respectively. Data items will include the curve and/or value names displayed in the Memory List. Each selected name in the list box will have between one and four calculations performed, which depends on how many statistics boxes are checked. Statistics for Curves and Values The Data section of the Statistics Editor (See Figure: 27-1 Statistics Offline) contains all the options for statistical measurements that this step may perform. Work in mode: Statistics can be calculated using Linear (RMS), dB or Power Units for the Y axis. Linear Example: 90 dB + 90 dB = 96 dB (The math is applied on the linear values.) dB Example: 90 dB + 90 dB = 180 dB (The math is applied on the dB values.) Power Example: 90 dB + 90 dB = 93 dB (The math is applied on the power values.) Max – Compares the current Y (magnitude) and Z (phase) value at point X (frequency or time) with the existing maximum for point X. If the new value is higher, the maximum value is rewritten. The Memory List is updated with a new curve or value whose name ends in Max (e.g., Fundamental [L] Max). This enables you to track the upper extreme of the range of the DUT. Note: To view the Z values in the Display Step, select Phase from the Display menu in the XY Graph, or use a table to display the numerical values of the curve or single value. Min – Compares the current Y and Z value at point X with the existing minimum for point X. If the new value is lower, the minimum value is rewritten. The Memory List is updated with a new curve or value whose name ends in Min (e.g., Fundamental [L] Min). This enables you to track the lower extreme of the range of the DUT. Mean - Calculates the mean Y and Z value at every X point along the curve. If a single value, this command calculates the average single value. The Memory List is updated with a new curve or value whose name ends in Mean (e.g., Fundamental [L] Mean). Variation in the mean after many tests have been run indicates a new factor has been introduced that may be causing problems. Note: This is not to be confused with Statistics: Average in the Post-Processing Editor, a single value which is the average of all the Y values in one curve. Standard Deviation - The standard deviation is a measure of the dispersion of the Y and Z dimension of the selected curve or value. SoundCheck uses the equation, where xi is the current Y or Z value at point X, M is the mean of all the past values at point X, and n is the number of values in the set. σ= (χ i −M) 2 n −1 Choosing this option creates two new curves. These may be viewed as bounds around the curve being measured. For example, if Fundamental [L] is chosen from the Data list box, and the Standard 338 Statistics Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Deviation box is checked, you will see two new curves in the Memory List: Fundamental [L] +1.00sigma and Fundamental [L] -1.00sigma (this is assuming 1 sigma was indicated, as in Figure: 27-1 Statistics Offline). When these two curves are displayed on the XY Graph with the Fundamental [L] Mean curve, the Mean curve should fall directly between the two Standard Deviation curves. Future Fundamental curves have a 68% chance of falling within these bounds. If 2 sigma is chosen, you know that there is a 95% chance new curves will fall between these bounds. At 3 sigma, there is a 99% chance that new curves will fall within the bounds. Responses that fall outside the Standard Deviation of the Mean may indicate erratic problems with the DUT or the test environment. Please note that Standard Deviation values become more accurate when a large number of samples are taken. Absolute Standard Deviation - The absolute standard deviation is the pure σ value. The curve that is the result of this calculation is available in the Memory List. Histogram Available only in Off Line Statistics, on single values (cannot be used on curves) Select which axis of value to apply statistics on: X, Y or Z Select Bin Width - Sets the width of the bar plots of the Histogram Curve and sets the resolution of the counting process. Enter any value greater than 0. The example in Figure 27-5 shows a Bin Width of 1. The bar at 90-91 Pa shows the number of samples that fall in that bin. Enter Custom Name for the resulting curves Users will be able to select a series of single values and output a histogram curve Figure 27-5: Histogram Display Histogram and Distribution (Gaussian bell) curves will appear as new Curves in the memory list These curves can be added to a display Figure 27-4: Offline Histogram Settings Figure 27-5: Histogram Display SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 339 Histogram Display Setup The setup of a Histogram Display window is different than other display types. Follow the example in Figure 27-6 when creating a Histogram Display. 1. Add Histogram curves from the Memory List to a new X Y Graph. 2 2. Right click on the Histogram Curve in the Legend. Select Common Plots and click Bar Plots Select Fill Base Line and click “-Infinity” Set the curve colors as well 3. Right click on an X axis value to open the X Axis Tools. Set Format to Decimal Set Precision as needed Set Mapping Mode to Linear Do the same for the Y axis 3 4 4. Right click on the graph of the display and select Preferences. Enter the Graph Title Set the desired Plot Area color on the Colors tab Set Legend properties as desired Turn off Major and Minor Grid Lines for both the X and Y axis Set both X and Y axis to Free. Click OK to exit You will need to double click on the X and Y axis values on the graph to change the graph window scaling 5. From the Memory List click Display and select Save Display as Template to save the layout for future use. Figure 27-6: Histogram Display Setup 340 Statistics Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SPC - Statistical Process Control Statistical Process Control can be used to monitor the quality of the production run. Statistics can be calculated on a specific scalar parameter (e.g., THD or sensitivity @ 1 kHz) for a group of loudspeakers (e.g., the production of the day). The Statistics module calculates the capability indexes and the results are made available in the Memory List. These can then be saved using an Autosave Step. The history of these indexes can be used to check the trend of production using some external software (e.g., EXCEL). Figure: 27-7 USL/LSL Settings Menu choices: USL: Upper Specification Limit. The maximum tolerance of the production limits. Constants set by the user. e.g., 92.5 dB SPL. (See Figure: 27-7 USL/LSL Settings) LSL: Lower Specification Limit. The minimum tolerance of the production limits. Constants set by the user. e.g., 88.5 dB SPL. Process Capability indexes Cp and Cpk. These indexes are added to the existing list: min, max, mean, sigma. These indexes are calculated in real time and appear in the Memory List. Cp - A measure of process performance Essentially it is a measure of variance/spread of one's data with respect to specification limits. Values greater than 1 indicate that the 6 sigma range is within the limits. If Cp is equal to 1, the range of 6 sigma exactly equals the range of the limits. If it is less than one, the 6 sigma range exceeds the limits. Ideally or to be safe, the process would yield a result of 1.33 (8 sigma) or higher. This means that your measured parameter will not exceed the limits more than 0.0063% of the time. To the right is a table of Cp values and the related Percentage of Failure. The formula for Cp is: C p = ( USL – LSL ) ⁄ ( 6σ ) Cpk - Process performance index This is similar to Cp, except that it takes into consideration any off-centered alignment of the data. The 6 sigma range may be much smaller than the limits range, but the mean could still be close to one of the limits. This would result in a high Cp but a low Cpk. The formula for Cpk is: C pk = Min [ ( USL – mean ), ( m ean – LSL ) ] ⁄ ( 3σ ) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 341 If the spread of data is Well Centered, then Cpk equals Cp. This would be a good situation. In this example, Cp = 1.5 and Cpk =1.5 on day 1. If the spread of data is Off Centered, Cpk is less than Cp. This is a warning sign of a bad trend. In this example, Cp = 1.5 and Cpk =1.05 on day 2. If the spread of data is outside the USL/LSL limits, Cpk will be below 1. This of course, indicates production problems. In this example, Cp = 1.5 and Cpk = 0.66 on day 3. If the mean is outside the USL/LSL limits, Cpk will be less than zero. This indicates a serious problem. In this example, Cp = 1.5 and Cpk = -0.28 on day 4. The graph shows the Cp and Cpk values plotted over the course of the days indicated in the above examples. An ideal situation would be to have Cp and Cpk equal on all days. In this case, Cp (solid blue line) is constant indicating that the spread of the data is consistent. Cpk (dashed green line) is unfortunately not consistent. Tracking the two values in such a way gives you a quick check on your production performance for a particular line. 342 Note: Careful selection of USL and LSL numbers is essential to have meaningful Cp and Cpk numbers. Calibration of the SoundCheck system is also critical. Note: Cpk - Process capability index (and Cp): SoundCheck provides Cpk (and Cp) instead of Ppk (and Pp), but they are mathematically identical. Once a process is put into a state of statistical control, process capability is described using process capability indices, which uses the same formula as Cpk (and Cp). The indices are named differently to call attention to whether the process under study is believed to be in control or not. For more information, please visit: www.isixsigma.com. Statistics Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Best Fit to Average You can select the number of Best or Worst Fit curves that you want to produce. For example, if you have five hundred curves representing the impedances of five hundred speakers, you might want to determine which ten of those were the closest to the average (to find "Golden" reference unit). To do this, you should enter "10" in the "No. Ranked" field in the editor. This will determine which ten curves are the closest to the average, and rank them according to how close they are. In addition to determining which curves are the best fit, the option also produces a deviation curve for each of the "best fit" curves. These curves are the arithmetic difference between the mean curve and the "best fit" curves. The best fit is the curve, which minimizes the quadratic distance to the average curve: , where X is the average curve and Y is one of the result curves. ε = Xi – Yi 2 i Best fit curves with ranking appears in Memory List ranking number Deviation curves Figure: 27-8 Memory List - Best Fit to Average The curves selected in Statistics Offline on pg 337, that meet the Best Fit criteria, appear in the Memory List. The numbers of the curves are indicated along with their ranking. See Figure 27-8 for an example of the items created in the Memory List. In addition to the Best Fit to Average function, a Worst Fit to Average function is also included. This function maximizes the quadratic distance to the average curve using the same formula as shown above. With this option, you can isolate a specified number of outliers. As with the Best Fit function, this option will generate a group of curves whose quantity is specified in the editor along with a group of corresponding deviation curves. This function can be useful in determining which of the tests represent useless data. You can remove these curves from their data group and re-perform the statistical measurements in order to get results that are more meaningful. Statistics for Results The Results section of the Statistics Editor (See Statistics Offline on pg 337) holds the options for Statistical calculations you can perform on a Result, the Margin or the Verdict. Individual Limits Yield [%] - Each Result chosen from the list box has its own Verdict (Pass/Fail). Selecting Individual Limits Yield will create a running tally of the success rate of each result, as the sequence runs multiple times. This value will reflect the percent of times the Individual Limit has passed and can be viewed next to the Limit Result in the Results Display (See Results on pg 308), or SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 343 as a Value in a Table of the Display Step. You could use this value to set a Limits Step, and alert the operator when a Result is failing over 75% of the time. Overall Yield [%] -A Boolean AND function is performed on the Verdicts of the result names selected in the Statistics Step. A PASS or FAIL Verdict is recorded for that test run. The next time the sequence runs, the new value (after the Boolean AND) will be compared with the previous. For example, after two runs, if one run passed and one failed, the Overall Yield will be 50%. Margin Mean - Each time the sequence is run, the Margin mean value is recalculated. There will be a unique Margin Mean for each Result selected, named e.g., Response Margin [L] Margin Mean. Tracking the Margin Mean can give advance notice that a particular process is drifting towards an outof-specification condition (e.g., if the Margin Mean is getting smaller over time). Margin Standard Deviation - The standard deviation is a measure of the dispersion of the result margins. The equation used is the same as the one used for calculating the standard deviation for a curve or value. When choosing this option, two new values are created, named Response Margin +1.00 sigma and Response Margin -1.00 sigma (assuming 1 sigma was specified). These may be viewed as bounds about the margin being estimated. When these two values are displayed on the Table with the Response Margin Mean value, the Margin Mean value should fall between the two Standard Deviation values. If you choose one 1 sigma (one Standard Deviation) then the bounds created will indicate that 68% of future runs will fall with in these bounds. If 2 sigma is chosen, you know that there is a 95% chance new Margin values will fall between these bounds. At 3 sigma, there is a 99% chance that new Margin values will fall within the bounds. Response signals that fall outside the Standard Deviation curves may indicate a new issue in the DUT or the test environment. Note: Please note that Standard Deviation values become more accurate when a large number of samples are taken. Absolute Margin Standard Deviation - Applies only to the Margin of the Results. It is calculated in the same method as Absolute Margin Standard Deviation. Adding Statistics Steps to the Sequence In the case that more than one Statistics Step exists within a sequence, the Statistical values remain completely exclusive to the step. For example, you can insert a jump condition into your sequence, and run a Statistics Step called Passing Stats if a Limits Step passes and Failing Stats if the Limits Step fails. In this way, you can keep your averages, maxima and minima comprised of only Passing, or of only Failing data. Verdict of the Step In the sequence, the Verdict of the Statistics Step is dependant on whether you have selected an Overall Yield calculation in that step. If the Overall Yield box has been checked, the step’s Verdict will be Pass if all the Results selected are Pass. If any of the Result verdicts are Fail, the Overall Yield will fail, causing the step verdict to be Fail. If Overall Yield has not been selected in the step, the step will pass by default. Note: All Mean and Standard Deviation calculations are done on the numerical values of the data or result. No conversion is made to linear units. Rules - Statistics 344 The Statistics Step must occur before the Display Step that shows the Yield Results tied to those statistics. Statistics Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Example Sequence The Statistics sequence located in the “How to Example” sequence folder can be used as a template when creating a new sequence. These steps can be added to an already existing sequence as well. Figure 27-9 and Figure 27-10 show the settings of the Statistics steps in the sequence. The first step is used to calculate statistics on the Fundamental curve and the Response Limits results. Figure: 27-9 Statistics Step 1 The second Statistics Step is used to calculate Process Performance on the Max SPL value. Figure: 27-10 Statistic Step 2 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 345 Figure 27-11 shows the results screen of a sample run of speakers. Figure: 27-11 Statistics Sequence Display SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Statistics Editor 346 Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck Outline Ethernet As of SoundCheck 16, ethernet control for the Outline ET250-3D turntable is included in a custom step. Note: In order to configure the Outline Ethernet custom step, it must first be inserted into a sequence from the Template Library. Address Selection Scan Network Under Address Selection, select Scan Network and then click the Scan Network button. SoundCheck will search for the turntable and automatically populate the address information into the Detected Units table. If the host computer is on both a LAN and wireless network, multiple instances of the turntable may be visible in the Detected Units table. This is the recommended method. Figure: 28-1 Outline Ethernet Control User Entry If you are writing a sequence which will be used at another location, you may want to manually enter the known Network Adapter address. Enter the host computer's Ethernet IP address in the Network Adapter field and the turntable's address in the IP address field. Note that the computer Ethernet IP address must be set in Windows prior to using the custom step in SoundCheck. If the computer is connected to a network using an ethernet connection, a separate ethernet interface will be required for the connection to the turntable. Movement Type Move to Angle Input a specific target angle into the Angle entry box, e.g.: Enter 0° to return the turntable to its Home position. Move in Angled Steps Input the desired angular increment of rotation into the Angle entry box. This would be used to move the turntable in 10° increments for measurement of polar data. Direction Specify clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation of the turntable Wait Until Rotation Stops This will pause the operation of the Sound Check sequence until the turntable stops moving before continuing on to the next step. For complete setup instructions, please refer to the example sequence and sequence note included with SoundCheck. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck 347 Instrument Open Close This demonstrates opening and closing Virtual Instruments from a Custom Step. It serves as a template so you can create a custom step that combines your LabVIEW code with the operation of virtual instruments. 1. Open the necessary Virtual Instruments in SoundCheck. Set them as required for use with your code. See Virtual Instruments on page 407. 2. Save them as a .VIC file. See Virtual Instrument Configuration on page 409. 3. Open your LabVIEW development system. 4. Open “Instrument Open Close.vi” to use as a template. 5. Before doing anything else, select "Save As" from the file menu and give the template a new name, e.g.: “My Code with SigGen.vi”. 6. It must be saved in your current SoundCheck installation, e.g.: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\System\Custom VIs\. 7. The example shows where you should enter your code. 8. Specify the location of the .VIC file. Note: The file path to the .VIC file is absolute.The VIC file will need to be copied to new versions of SoundCheck and the file path used in your Custom Step will need to be updated when you update to a new version of SoundCheck. Figure: 28-2 Instrument Open Close 9. Next, open the LabVIEW VI template "SoundCheck\System\Custom VIs\Instrument Open Close Editor.vi". 10. Select "Save As" and use the same name from the previous step. Make sure it contains ' Editor.vi' after the custom name. For example: and “My Code with SigGen Editor.vi” 11. Edit the new custom step in LabVIEW 2016. A place marker for your code has been left in the template as shown in Figure 28-3. 12. For more information refer to the instructions in Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step on page 353. Figure: 28-3 Put Your Code Here See Instrument Open Close Custom Step on page 444 for instructions for use in TCP IP. 348 Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual System Custom Step Included in SoundCheck Steps library is the Custom Step, System.cus. This allows you to run Command Line operations as part of a sequence. This includes: executable files (.EXE) batch files (.BAT) Command Line Field If the executable is not in a directory listed in the Windows PATH environment variable, the command line must contain the full path to the executable. When executing Batch Files or Executable Files that require a Command Line Interface, cmd/c must be added before the file name in the Command Line Field as shown in Figure 28-4: cmd /c openlatest.bat. Batch files may require that the Working Directory is specified Figure: 28-4 System Step Command Line When the System Step is executed in the sequence, it will perform the functions in the batch file. The example batch file is useful for opening the latest Excel file, according to the “Date Modified”, from the specified folder. @echo off for /f "eol=: delims=" %%F in ('dir /b /od *.xls') do @set "newest=%%F" "%newest%" In order to open the latest Word document you would change *.xls to *.doc. Windows Executable Files When running an executable file that runs from the standard desktop, only the name of the executable needs to be in the Command Line Field as shown in Figure 28-5. The Working Directory is not required for this type of executable file. Figure: 28-5 Open Calc.exe Working Directory Working Directory is the file system directory from which you want to execute the command. Note: Do not use working directory to locate the executable you want to run. Working Directory applies to the executable only after it launches. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck 349 Wait for completion When checked, SoundCheck will wait for the operation called in the Command Line field to complete or be closed, depending on type of operation called. When this is left un-checked, SoundCheck will execute the Command Line and continue to the next step in the sequence. Run as administrator The next step is optional depending on where the batch file is located and what the batch file tries to access. When you launch SoundCheck, it launches under the current user account. By default, this account only has read/write access to its own user folder. So you can run SoundCheck as the administrator by right-clicking on the shortcut and clicking “Run as administrator”. This will open up the privileges. Another way to work around that is to move the batch file and restrict it’s “movement” to the account user’s folder. Mixer Volume Each Mixer Volume Step in a sequence, allows you to control the input and output levels of a 2 channel WDM or Core Audio device. For example, the volume of a headset may be controlled while testing it, or the levels of a device can be fixed at unity gain for consistent calibration. Figure 28-6 shows the Input and Output of a Bluetooth Headset set to 100%. This will require 2 steps in the sequence. Compatible with Windows and Mac OS Compatible with WDM or Core Audio devices Separate steps are required for Playback and Record Separate steps are required for each device being controlled The steps cannot be renamed in a sequence. The name must remain “Mixer Volume” for each instance. Use Step Comments to name the function of each step. Figure: 28-6 Mixer Volume 350 Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual RS232 Read Integer Intended for use as a programming example only. Not for use “as is” in a sequence. Reads the integer value from an external device connected via RS232 Generates a value in the memory list: Read Integer Serial Number Write Read Intended for use as a programming example only. Not for use “as is” in a sequence. This step writes the value "1234" to the serial number field Next, it reads the serial number and writes it to the memory list in a value named "Serial Num" It is useful as a template for creating your own custom vi's which read/write the serial number field of SoundCheck. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck 351 Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs This serves as a tool to be used when updating your Custom VIs to the latest version of SoundCheck and LabVIEW. Easier to use Custom VI templates Updating Custom vis from previous SoundCheck versions is easier Important! This must not be used in a sequence! To convert Custom VI’s from a previous version of SoundCheck: 1. Copy the Custom VI’s into the Custom VI folder of this SoundCheck version. Example: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\System\Custom VIs\ 2. Open the version of LabVIEW which is appropriate for the SoundCheck version and bitness you are upgrading to. In LabVIEW open the vi, “Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs.vi”. (SoundCheck 16.0 requires LabVIEW 2016) 3. From the File menu of “Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs.vi”, open the custom vi(s) you are converting. 4. They should automatically relink to the appropriate vi and ctl files. These are located in the file “custom and SC Run Seq Sub VIs(xXX).llb” found in the root of the SoundCheck folder. 5. Save the vi’s, Start SoundCheck and verify the functions of your vi. Issues you may encounter: Some user Custom VI’s may refer to “Global Data Stack DB Dynamic.vi”. You should relink to “Global Data Stack DB.vi” Some user Custom VI’s may read the “Abort” global from previous versions of SoundCheck. Instead, you must use “Query Sequence Abort Flag.vi” Figure: 28-7 Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs When opening your vi you should see a solid arrow as in Figure 28-7. This indicates that the vi opened correctly. Figure: 28-7 Solid Arrow If you see a broken arrow (Figure 28-8), debugging is required. Figure: 28-8 Broken Arrow 352 Custom Steps Included With SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step Important! The contents of this chapter requires the use of LabVIEW. It is suggested that users have an advanced level of experience with the LabVIEW development environment in order to use these examples. Creating a Custom VI for SoundCheck® SoundCheck provides a way for you to integrate your own LabVIEW code into your SoundCheck sequence as a step. Included with SoundCheck are templates to create your own Custom Steps which can be run in a SoundCheck sequence. Once the files are created according the instructions, you can use those steps in the SoundCheck sequence editor. Note: LabVIEW 2016 English Language version is required to create custom steps and step editors for SoundCheck 16.0. The "Save for Previous Version" option in LabVIEW is not recommended. your step name here.vi 1. Make sure the SoundCheck application is closed. 2. Open your LabVIEW development system. 3. Open the LabVIEW VI template: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\System\Custom VIs\your step name here.vi. Figure: 29-1 Open VI Template SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step 353 4. Before doing anything else, select "Save As" from the file menu and give the template a new name. For example: 'RS232 Read Integer.vi' (This example is installed with SoundCheck by default.) The new name cannot be the same as a pre-existing custom vi. 5. This must be saved in the "Custom VIs" folder. Make sure it has the ".vi" extension (lower case). 6. Make note of the VI name. The step name used must be the same as the VI name (minus the ".vi"). It is also CASE SPECIFIC. 7. Combine your code with the existing code in the SoundCheck template. Figure: 29-2 Add LabVIEW Code To Template 8. Save the VI. 354 Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual your step name here Editor.vi 9. Next, open the LabVIEW VI template "C:\SoundCheck 16.0\System\Custom VIs\your step name here Editor.vi". Figure: 29-3 Open VI Editor Template 10. Select "Save As" and use the same name from the previous step. Make sure it contains ' Editor.vi' after the custom name. For example: 'RS232 Read Integer Editor.vi' (This example is installed with SoundCheck by default.) Note: These two VIs work together within SoundCheck and must be located in the System\Custom VIs folder. In this example, 'RS232 Read Integer Editor.vi' is used to create the custom step, and 'RS232 Read Integer.vi' is called when the custom step is run in the sequence to execute the custom code. 11. Follow the instructions highlighted in yellow on the VI diagram, and "wire in" all the custom code. Important! The curves listed in the 'Curves Generated' array in the custom editor must have exactly the same name as those created by the custom vi. This ensures that the placeholder for the curve in the Memory List is filled with the correct data when the sequence is run. Important! If the VI has any subVIs, put them in the folder: "...\Custom VIs\subVIs\". If the folder does not exist, it must be created and must be located in the "SoundCheck\System\Custom Vis" folder. Note: If you make your custom VI wait for user interaction, such as clicking a Done button, the Custom Step must be configured to "Display step when run" as shown in Figure 29-4. Otherwise, SoundCheck may get stuck inside the custom VI, in an infinite loop. (See Sequence Editor on pg 387) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step 355 Creating a Custom Step 1. Start SoundCheck and open the Sequence Editor. 2. Select "Custom" from the left hand Step Category menu. By default, this list contains the example step 'RS232 Read Integer'. 3. Select "New..." from the Step menu and enter the name for the new step, using the same name as your step VI and step Editor VI. Important! The step name should be exactly the custom VI name, minus the ".vi" (e.g., RS232 Read Integer). In this example, the new step would be called RS232 Read Integer (do not include the .CUS extension in this dialog). This opens your Custom Editor of the same name (RS232 Read Integer Editor.vi). 4. A Custom Step is created and saved when you click OK. The new step can now be used in a sequence. Note: The settings of the Custom Step must be made after inserting it into a sequence. Using your Custom Step in a Sequence 1. Open SoundCheck and open the sequence editor. 2. Insert the step in a sequence and then open it from the right side of the editor Figure 29-4. If you have used the Curves Generated option in your Editor, you will add names to the Memory List with your step. These curve, value, and result names will allow steps, such as Limits and Display Steps, that occur later in the sequence, to act on your custom curves. Open the Memory List to view the curves, values, and results generated by your sequence. 3. Edit and save the parameters for the step as you would any other step in SoundCheck, and save the sequence. Configure step to “Display when run” if it requires user interaction To edit the parameters of a Custom Step in a sequence, select “Custom” from the Setup menu, or use the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+X. If there is a Custom Step in the sequence, either method will open the editor for the Custom Step. Figure: 29-4 Custom Step In Sequence 356 Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap SoundMapTM Time Frequency Analysis Introduction SoundMap™ Time Frequency Analysis is a module which enables detailed analysis of signals simultaneously in both the time and frequency domain. This off-line analysis module can read measurement data from any WAV file or any waveform file created with SoundCheck [.wav, .TIM (MLSSA), .WFM, .TXT and .MAP]. SoundMap offers the following transforms: Short Time Fourier Transform (STFT) Cumulative Spectral Decay (CSD) Wigner-Ville Wavelet These transforms are ideal for loose particle detection, Rub & Buzz detection and impulse response analysis of loudspeakers. They are also used for identification of transient effects such as drop out in digital devices including VoIP, Bluetooth headsets or transient distortion in MP3 players. Example data is included in SoundCheck: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\data\SoundMap\Demo Data When opening SoundMap™, the initial display is a Time-Frequency Analysis window which displays the time signal to be analyzed. From this, you can select which of the four algorithms to use, and define the analysis parameters. The time signal to be analyzed is shown in Figure: 30-1. Displays SoundMap™ offers a variety of display options including: 3D waterfall plot Intensity map with time and frequency slices Global Energy Spectrum Instantaneous spectrum Partial Average Spectrum Group delay Time envelope Partial time envelope Frequency time curve Instantaneous frequency SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure: 30-1 Analysis Window SoundMap 357 Controls Axis Controls These controls allow you to move the graph, zoom in or out to select the area to be analyzed, and move the cursor by dragging the mouse target along the curve. Advanced Graph Controls Autoscale: Left click on the Lock symbol to turn Autoscale on and off. The Green light indicates that Autoscale is on (as well as the Lock/Unlock symbol). Clicking on the X or Y axis symbol, autoscales the axis without turning autoscale on. This is a “one shot“ autoscale. Autoscale OFF for X axis (Unlocked) Autoscale ON for X axis (Locked) X and Y-axis formatting: Choose value type, number of decimal places and Log or Linear scale by left clicking on the “x.xx” or “y.yy” buttons. Left click on x.xx or y.yy Grid Color: Changes the gridline color for X or Y axis. Zoom: Choose to zoom in to different areas of the graph Cursor: Click to activate cursor control tool Hand: Choose to move graph with hand control Graph Background: Click to change color of background Figure 30-2: Axis Scaling, Zoom and Style Controls Zoom To zoom different sections of the graph, place the mouse pointer on top of the magnifying glass and left click. This will open the zoom window, allowing you six (6) different choices. 358 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Zoom in any area of graph Zoom vertically along the Y axis Zoom horizontally along the X axis Undo zoom Left-click on the zoom-in or zoom-out buttons. Move mouse pointer inside graph and single click. Graph will zoom in or out automatically. Figure: 30-3 Zoom Modes Cursor Controls By clicking on a cursor line on the graph, or on the cursor icon in the control box, you can make that cursor active. Once active, the cursor is highlighted and its attributes can be modified. (Snap to is an unused function.) Click on a cursor to make it active. Change cursor attributes Bring to Center moves the cursor to the center of the graph screen Go to Cursor moves the graph screen so that it is centered on the cursor position Figure: 30-4 Cursor Controls Right Click on Graph Right click on any graph in the Analysis or Map windows: Copy Data - The selected graph is copied to the clipboard so it can be pasted into a report Export Simplified Image - You can choose to save as .BMP, .EPSor .EMF. Choose to Export to clipboard or Save to file. Hide Grid simply removes the grid lines of the graph. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 359 Short Time Fourier Transform (STFT) The Short Time Fourier Transform is a general purpose algorithm which enables observation of the spectral changes of a signal over time. This method is ideal for the detection of manufacturing defects such as: Loose particles and Rub & Buzz in loudspeakers Measurement of settling time and ringing in devices including loudspeakers and telephones Analysis of dropouts, discontinuities and instabilities in digital devices Figure: 30-5 shows the STFT Analysis of a loudspeaker with loose particles. Figure: 30-5 STFT Analysis Cumulative Spectral Decay (CSD) Cumulative Spectral Decay is the traditional tool for impulse response analysis of loudspeakers. It calculates the “ringing” of the loudspeaker for each frequency using the impulse response. Data can be output in a variety of formats including the widely-used threedimensional ‘waterfall plots’. An example of a 3D waterfall plot is shown in Figure: 30-6. This is from the analysis of an impulse response of a loudspeaker. Figure: 30-6 3D Waterfall Plot 360 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Wigner-Ville Wigner-Ville is the ultimate algorithm for detailed analysis of very short events. Fine analysis of transients or indepth observation of rapidly evolving signals are two examples. This algorithm offers an output resolution down to one spectrum per sample Wigner-Ville provides the best resolution of all the algorithms It complements the more commonly used analysis methods discussed above Figure: 30-7 show the analysis of the impulse response of a loudspeaker with a time-slice at 3.69 kHz and the group-delay curve Figure: 30-7 Wigner-Ville Analysis Wavelet Wavelet analysis differs from CSD and STFT analysis in that it uses constant percentage bandwidth rather than constant frequency bandwidth. This offers better time resolution at high frequencies and better frequency resolution at the lower end of the spectrum. This is advantageous as it is more psycho-acoustically significant and it is easy to see the entire 20 Hz – 20 kHz spectrum in one picture. Applications for wavelet analysis are generally the same as for STFT analysis described above The algorithm selected depends on whether constant frequency or constant percentage bandwidth is preferred Wavelet analysis presented as a time-frequency map to show Bluetooth dropout is shown in Figure: 30-8 Figure: 30-8 Wavelet Analysis SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 361 Time-Frequency Analysis Window The Analysis Window is displayed when SoundMap is started. This window allows you to select the file to be analyzed, the region of the file to be analyzed and the type of transform to be used. Data Selection Select a Waveform from the Memory List or click on the Browse button and navigate to the file. Allowable files types are: .MAP - SoundMap data file. Opening a .MAP file automatically opens the Time-Frequency Map window using waveform information stored in the MAP file. .WAV - Standard Windows PCM file. See WAV File Types on page 293 for more information on supported WAV file types. .TIM - MLSSA time file. .WFM - SoundCheck waveform (This must be a linear format waveform - y axis not in dB.) .TXT - a text file with specific format (See Text File Format on page 385). A Waveform file may contain more than one waveform. You will be prompted to select which file should be opened for analysis. Important! The waveform must be in linear units such as V or Pa, not dB V or dB Pa. Bargraph Indicators The bargraph above the Intensity Display shows information on the following: Window - A graphic display of the window size that is applied to the waveform being analyzed. Smoothing - The amount of time smoothing applied when using the Wigner-Ville algorithm. Analysis Segment - Shows the location and block size of the waveform portion being analyzed in relation to the full waveform. Axis Controls These controls allow you to move the graph, zoom in or out to select the area to be analyzed, and move the cursor by dragging the mouse target along the curve. The operation of these controls is outlined inControls on pg 358. 362 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Process Frequency Figure: 30-9 shows the breakdown of how the analysis window moves along a waveform in Time Resolution steps. For each step, a Spectra is created. The resulting Multispectrum is used in the Time-Frequency Map and 3D Waterfall Window. Intensity Display Multispectrum Time # of Spectra Gaussian Window 1 2 3 n n+1 Waveform Window Size Time Resolution Overlap % Start Stop Analysis Duration Figure: 30-9 Analysis Process Analysis Parameters Algorithm You can select one of four available algorithms: Short Time Fourier Transform - STFT: General purpose algorithm. Not recommended for low frequency analysis. Cumulative Spectral Decay - CSD: Specifically for impulse response analysis. Wigner-Ville - For tightly focused analysis of waveform details. Sharper resolution than STFT (Super-STFT). Wavelet - Much better for general acoustic measurements (logarithmic frequency spacing). Default Parameters Using the Default Parameters allows SoundMap to calculate a sensible number of spectra and size of spectra for the block of time data displayed. The default values depend on the algorithm chosen and the current block duration selected in the graph window. Time Resolution Decreasing the Time Resolution increases the number of spectra in the analysis. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 363 Frequency Resolution For the first three algorithms this is set in Hz. For Wavelet this is set in octaves, selected from a drop down list; 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24, and user defined. Setting a lower Frequency Resolution increases the analysis window size. The Frequency Resolution is inversely proportional to the window size, i.e.: changing the Frequency Resolution from 100 Hz to 10 Hz will make the window 10 times larger. Information # of Spectra - The number of spectra calculated in the analysis segment. This is directly proportional to the Time Resolution. Lines/Spectra - The number of frequency lines calculated according to the Frequency Resolution specified. # of Points - The # of Spectra multiplied by the Lines/ Spectra. This is the number of points in the Time Frequency Map (similar to the number of pixels in a digital photo). Sampling Rate - The sampling rate of the selected file. Analysis Duration - Time length of the analyzed portion.This is equal to the # of Spectra multiplied by the Time Resolution (1000 spectra x 1 mSec Time Resolution = 1 Second Analysis Duration). Window - Shows the size of the analysis window as determined by the Frequency Resolution setting. For Wavelet, this will be the minimum window size. Overlap - The amount one analysis window overlaps the previous. BT Product - Time Resolution multiplied by the Frequency Resolution. Normally this is 100% but for Wigner-Ville this value varies according to the degree of smoothing applied. See Algorithm Definitions on pg 382. (BT=1 or Bandwidth x Time equals unity) Analysis - This shows the Analysis Completeness. “Gapless” means that the Overlap of the Analysis Window is sufficient to ensure that no information is lost between windows. This helps to prevent missing short term transient details. If “Gaps” are indicated, some data is lost and the curves for Global Spectrum, Partial Spectrum and Group Delay, as well as the values for Total Energy and Partial Energy cannot be calculated. These curves and values will not be available in the Time-Frequency Map. See Frequency Display on pg 366 and Cursor, Parameters and Information on pg 367. + = Important! Using a high number of Points (great number of spectra and/or a very high accuracy in frequency resolution) can use all available computer memory and lead to program instability. Analyze Click Analyze to run the selected algorithm on the portion of the file selected in the graph display. Click Exit to close the SoundMap program. 364 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Time-Frequency Map The Time-Frequency Map is available after clicking “Analyze” or after opening a .Map file. The Map is an arrangement of three displays and a set of Tabs. The Tabs contain information about the Map and how it was analyzed. The top left window is the Time-Frequency Intensity Plot. The top right window is the Frequency Display which shows the different frequency functions. The bottom left window is the Time Display. Different time functions can be displayed as well. The information panel at the bottom right side of the screen shows current cursor positions and values as well as information on how the analysis was processed. Intensity Map Display This provides a 3 dimensional map of the multispectrum created in the analysis process. The three axis of the map are: Vertical Scale - Frequency (axis on right). Linear Scale except for Wavelet, which is Logarithmic. Horizontal Scale - Time in seconds (axis on the bottom). Color Scale - Indicates the level of power at a specific time and a specific frequency (scale on the left). Figure: 30-10 Intensity Plot Axis The three display windows share the X and Y axis. As the cursor is moved in the Intensity display, the horizontal cursor line is linked to the Frequency Display. Changes in the vertical cursor line are also linked in the Time Display. The graduated color scale shows level in dB U. In the example, the color scale transitions from bright red at a high level (-63 dB U), to dark blue at a low level (-93 dB U). Note: U is the unit of the waveform used in analysis. All dB are at a reference of 1. Color Table There are five different color settings for the plot and color scale thermometer. Rainbow Fire Sunset Grey Scale Inverse Grey Scale Auto-Offset - Applies the dynamic range to the Map and side curves, below the maximum value. You can modify the max and min scale numbers by double clicking on a number and editing it. Level values that are below the minimum of the color scale will be displayed with the background color (not visible). SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 365 Dynamic range: The dynamic range of the display is set by typing a value into the Z Dyn (dB) field or by clicking on the up/down arrows. Snap to Max sets the horizontal and vertical lines of Cursor 1 to the absolute peak energy point of the Intensity Plot. The 3D button opens the 3D Waterfall display. See 3D View on pg 368. Frequency Display The Frequency Display axis are transposed compared to the conventional way of looking at level vs frequency. This is done so that the spectrum can be viewed in direct relation to the Intensity Plot. Cursors 1 and 2 of the Frequency Display are linked to the cursors in the Intensity Plot. The following display modes are available: Instantaneous Spectrum (U2/Hz) - Shows the power density spectrum slice at the time location of cursor 1. Global Spectrum (U2.s/Hz) - The sum of all spectra of the multispectrum in the Intensity Plot. Partial Spectrum (U2.s/Hz) - The sum of all spectra of the multispectrum that are between the two vertical cursors. Group Delay (s) - The time of arrival for the energy of each frequency. This shows the mean time of arrival of each horizontal time slice over frequency. See Multispectrum Exploitation: on pg 385 for formula. The X and Y axis controls function the same as those in the Analysis Window. See Controls on pg 358 for more information. Time Display The following display modes are available: Waveform - Shows the waveform of the analyzed segment. Time Slice (U2/Hz) - The horizontal time slice is taken at the frequency location of cursor 1. Time Envelope (U2) - The sum of all the horizontal time slices in the Intensity Map Display. Partial Time Envelope (U2) - The sum of all the horizontal time slices between the two horizontal cursors in the Intensity Map Display. Instantaneous Frequency - This is the plot of frequency vs time which shows the frequency location of the energy at each time point (shows the mean time of arrival for each spectra vs time). Figure: 30-11 Time Display The X and Y axis controls function the same as those in the Analysis Window. See Controls on pg 358 for more information. The name of the analyzed file is shown below the Time Display. 366 Save - Click “Save Map” to store the current analysis as a .Map file. The analyzed portion of the waveform is stored as part of the Map file. This allows you to open the Map file and change the analysis and display parameters. Save Image - This saves the entire Time-Frequency Map screen as a .JPG or .BMP file Close - Closes the Time-Frequency Map and returns you to the Analysis Window SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Cursor, Parameters and Information The Cursor tab shows the values for the current locations of the cursors. t (s) - The time at cursor 1. f (Hz) - The frequency at cursor 1. A (dB U2/Hz) - The power level at cursor 1. Delta t (s) - The time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2. f (Hz) - The frequency difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2. A (dB U2/Hz) - The power level difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2. Energy (dB U2. s) Total Energy - This is the sum of the entire multispectrum analyzed, both in time and frequency. This is equal to the energy of the waveform analyzed. Partial Energy - This is the sum of the multispectrum that occupies the area between both the horizontal and vertical cursor lines. Figure: 30-12 Info Tabs The Parameters tab shows the Analysis Parameters that were used to create the current Map. These are reference values and cannot be edited. The Information tab shows the information from the original Analysis window that was used to create the current Map. These are reference values and cannot be edited. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 367 3D View The 3D View or Waterfall Plot allows you to display the analyzed segment in a threedimensional window showing Level vs Frequency vs Time. Additional controls on the right side of the window allow you to show 2D displays showing aspects of the current analysis. Note: The units of the display are in dB FS. Figure: 30-13 3D View Waterfall Manual Scaling Min Freq, Max Freq - Adjust the Frequency Axis range Min Time, Max Time - Adjust the Time Axis range Min dB, Max dB - Adjust the vertical scale Apply - Click Apply to use the new axis settings. Default View - Click to return to the original display angle. This does not change the time or frequency axis ranges. Cursor On - Activates Cursor 3D Axis and Color Select from four options for 3D display: Logarithmic, Surface - Color Intensity with log frequency scale Linear, Surface - Color Intensity with linear frequency scale Logarithmic, Waterfall - Monochrome with log frequency scale Linear, Waterfall - Monochrome with linear frequency scale Save Image - Save 3D view to .JPG or .BMP Close 3D View window 2D View Controls The 2D control buttons to the right side of the window allow you to select 2d Intensity Plots from the current 3D display. This allows you to put the cursor on a specific point of interest and then switch back to the 3D view. 368 Time vs Frequency (X,Y) dB vs Time (Z,X) dB vs Frequency (Z,Y) 3D View (X,Y,Z) - Returns to the 3D view SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Rotate Change the viewing angle of the display. Put the cursor on the plot. Click and hold on the left mouse button. Rotate the plot by moving the mouse. Release the mouse button and the plot will be redrawn using the new viewing angle. Default View: Click to return to the original display angle. This does not change the time or frequency axis ranges. Figure: 30-14 Rotate Viewing Angle Zoom You can zoom in and out of the plot view. Hold down the “Shift key”. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass. Left click and hold on the mouse button. Move the mouse up and down while left clicking on the mouse to zoom in and out. Figure: 30-15 Zoom In/Out Move The plot can be moved on the screen. Hold down the “Control key”. The cursor changes to cross hairs. Left click and hold on the mouse button. Move the mouse to drag the plot to a new location. Figure: 30-16 Move Plot SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 369 3D Axis and Color You can choose from 4 different types of plot. Logarithmic, Surface - Logarithmic frequency axis 3 dimensional surface map. In addition, the level is color coded using a rainbow scale. Linear, Surface - Linear frequency axis 3 dimensional surface map. Logarithmic, Waterfall - Logarithmic frequency axis, traditional black and white waterfall plot. Linear, Waterfall - Linear frequency axis, traditional black and white waterfall plot. The spectrum shown are a subset of the complete multispectrum. This is done for display clarity. The examples in Figure: 30-17 show the two waterfall versions of the same analysis shown in Figure: 30-13. Figure: 30-17 3D View Waterfall Versions 370 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Examples The following section shows the four analysis types and examples of how they can be used. The example .MAP files are installed with SoundMap and can be found in the Demo Data folder. Please use these .MAP files while reading this section of the manual. The “Linear Chirp” and “4 Pulses” files are provided for educational purposes. They do not represent typical signals to be analyzed. Linear Chirp Open the “Linear Chirp - Wigner.map” file. This file was created using a linear sine sweep from near 0 Hz to approximately 22 kHz. The diagonal response line in the Intensity Display shows how the frequency content changes over time. By moving Cursor 1, you can track the frequency response in the Intensity Display and see the time of arrival of each frequency in the Time Display. (Time Display set to “Time Slice“.) The Frequency Display shows the Instantaneous Power Spectrum at that point in time. See Figure: 30-18. Figure: 30-18 Linear Chirp - Wigner-Ville Analysis Click Close and change the Analysis type to Short Term Fourier (STFT). Click Analyze. With this analysis method there is less resolution in the Intensity Display but the Time and Frequency Displays are clearer. See Figure: 3019. Figure: 30-19 Linear Chirp - STFT Analysis SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 371 If you increase the Frequency Resolution in the Analysis Window, you can see that the width of the Intensity Display gets smaller. Experimentation with Frequency Resolution values will help you optimize the resolution of the analysis of future waveforms. Figure: 30-20 STFT Change the Analysis type back to Wigner-Ville. Use the default Frequency Resolution but decrease the Smoothing to 1 mSec. Click Analyze and you will see the Intensity Display is more narrow, compared to the width in Figure: 3018. Figure: 30-21 Wigner-Ville 4 Pulses Open the file, “4 Pulses - Wigner.map“. This is from a waveform of two overlapping tone bursts followed by a copy of the same pair of tone bursts. The Analysis Type is Wigner-Ville. In the Time Display you can’t determine the difference between the two tones. In the Frequency Display you can see two tones but you don’t see their occurrence in time. Only in the Intensity Display do you see four distinct pulses. Figure: 30-22 4 Pulses - Wigner-Ville Analysis 1. Click Close and uncheck Default Parameters in the Analysis Window. 2. Change the Smoothing and Time Resolution values to 0. Note that the field automatically changes to 22.7 μSec. This is the minimum value for these fields. 22.7 μSec is the sampling interval. 3. Increase the Frequency Resolution from 100 Hz to 25 Hz. 372 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 4. Click Analyze to see the changes in the Intensity Display. The resulting Analysis Window will encompass both sets of pulses. This introduces interferences in the Intensity Display. Note the “Ghosting“ of pulses in the example. Figure: 30-23 Ghost Interference General Rules For Wigner-Ville: The interferences or “Ghost“ will always occur at the midpoint between two components of the signal. The ripple pattern or “Beating“ is perpendicular to the axis drawn between the two components. In the example, you can see the ghosts on the horizontal, vertical and diagonal axes. The center ghost pattern is a product of both diagonal axes. The Global Spectrum shows that the ghost interference adds no residual energy to the Total Spectrum. The frequency of the ripple pattern in inversely proportional to the distance between the two components. As the distance grows, the beating of the ripple becomes more rapid. In the Time Display you can see that the ghost interference adds no residual energy in the time domain. To eliminate the ghost that appears between two successive components, the Analysis Window size should be less than the distance between the two components. To eliminate the ghost that appears between two simultaneous components, the Smoothing should be long enough to encompass 10 periods of the ghost ripple pattern. Although the interferences are the representation of real phenomena, such as: time beating between two simultaneous frequencies or harmonic patterns due to signal periodicity, they may obscure the distribution of a complex signal. In the end, these ghost interferences are caused by having excess resolution and/or insufficient smoothing in the analysis process. Decreasing the Frequency Resolution from 25 Hz to 100 Hz removes the interference along the frequency axis. Increasing the Smoothing from 22.7 μSec to 1 ms removes the interference along the time axis. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 373 Short Term Fourier Transform (STFT) Open the file, “Stweep + Loose Particles Fourier.map”. This map was made from a Stweep on a loudspeaker with loose particles under the dust cap. The log curve of the Stweep is visible as the red curve in the Intensity Display. Along the time axis, the loose particle impacts are very obvious as shown by the randomly spaced, vertical, blue lines. Figure: 30-24 STFT Note that you cannot see the loose particles in the Global Spectrum. Only by zooming into the Time Display can you see the transients added to the waveform. Switching the analysis type to Wigner-Ville will increase the resolution so the transients are more defined. Figure: 30-25 Time Display Zoom 374 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Cumulative Spectral Decay (CSD) Open “Loudspeaker 1 Impulse Response CSD.map“. This is the impulse response of a Loudspeaker analyzed by Cumulative Spectral Decay. This was made from a MLSSA time file (.TIM). Notice the high frequency ringing between 15 kHz and 20 kHz. There is also ringing below 1000 Hz. Move Cursor 1 before the start of the impulse response (before 17.5 ms). The Instantaneous Spectrum Display shows the actual frequency response of the device under test. This is one of the special features of using CSD. Next, click the 3D button to show the Waterfall Display. The default view shows a log waterfall plot with the intensity indicated by color. Clicking on Logarithmic, Waterfall under 3D Axis and Color shows a black and white waterfall display that is equivalent to a MLSSA display. Under Manual Scaling, enter min/max frequencies of 250 and 20 kHz. Enter min/max times of 17 and 23 mSec. Then click Apply. This allows the waterfall plot to fill the grid so that the screen is optimized. Any of the display modes can be rotated on any of the three dimensional axes. The cursor can be switched on and moved to highlight any point in three dimensions to indicate its coordinates. Click “Save Image“ to save a screenshot of the display. Clicking Default View allows you to return to the default three dimensional orientation. This does not change the Min/Max Frequency or Min/Max Time settings. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 375 CSD Analysis Window W in do w W 1 st in ar do t w W 2 st in ar do t w W 3 st in ar do t w n st ar t With CSD analysis the end point of the analysis window is fixed at the endpoint of the analysis segment. The start point of the window is what changes, as shown in Figure 30-26. As the window moves from one analysis point to another, it gets smaller. As this happens frequencies that have less than one cycle within the remaining analysis window are removed because they cannot be reliably measured. Each window becomes progressively smaller Window End Figure: 30-26 CSD Analysis Window Wigner-Ville Loudspeaker 2 Impulse Response Open “Loudspeaker 2 Impulse Response Wigner.map”. This example was made from the impulse response of a two way, near-field monitor. The Global Spectrum shows the overall frequency response. There is a large resonance at 23 kHz. The large spread of energy at this frequency indicates the loudspeaker is ringing at this frequency. There is also a long ring at 31 kHz. Below 3 kHz the signal not only rings but lags behind the high frequency, as evident from the Group Delay Display. This indicates that the woofer and tweeter are not time aligned. Figure: 30-27 Wigner-Ville Set the Frequency Display to Group Delay. The delay peaks are seen here. Ideally, this would be a straight, vertical line. 376 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The ring time or decay time for specific frequencies is also viewed in the Time Slice Display. By comparing the position of Cursor 1 to Cursor 2, you can find the decay rate at specific frequencies. This can be seen in Figure: 30-28. Set Cursor 1 at the peak of the signal at 31.1 kHz. Move Cursor 2 to a Delta of approximately 2 ms and then adjust it to the point where the Frequency Delta is 0 Hz. The Amplitude Delta in this example is 10.38 dB. This indicates that the time constant of the resonance at 31.1 kHz is about 0.83 ms. Figure: 30-28 Decay Rate 2ms -------------------× 4.34dB = 0.83ms 10.38dB Note: 4.34 dB is exp(1) expressed in dB. In the Time Display, Time Slice shows the ringing that occurs between two frequencies. The beating pattern can easily be seen by setting Cursor 1 at approximately 30.1 kHz, between the two frequency peaks as shown in Figure: 30-29. Figure: 30-29 Set Cursor 1 between HF peaks The Time Slice in Figure: 30-30 shows the beating pattern. Figure: 30-30 Beating Pattern SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 377 To reduce the amount of information in the Intensity Display, you can decrease the Frequency Resolution in the Analysis Window. This will tend to smooth the distribution of energy along the vertical frequency axis of the Intensity Display. The example in Figure: 30-31 has been reanalyzed with a Frequency Resolution of 250 Hz. It is now easier to see the main features of the distribution. Notice that the duration of the ringing frequencies is shorter. This shows that too much smoothing can throw away useful information. It is recommended to always start with a high definition and then smooth gradually. This way you can determine when you have gone to far and return to a more appropriate resolution. Figure: 30-31 Lower Frequency Resolution Analysis Click on 3D to show the same information as the Intensity Map, with a more intuitive method of viewing. Note that the Min/Max Frequency and Min/Max Time values have been adjusted to so that the 3D plot is filled with information. MP3 Encoded Dirac Impulse Open “MP3 Encoded Dirac Impulse Wigner.map”. This was made by encoding a Dirac impulse WAV file to MP3 and then decoding it back to WAV. This is a single impulse at 44100 Hz that is 1 sample long with a level of 0 dB Full Scale. Instead of seeing a single vertical bar in the Intensity Display, there is a lot of added noise after the signal and even some added noise before the signal. The pre-ringing in the high and low frequencies is due to the low-pass filtering that occurs in the MP3 encoding process. 378 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The Global Spectrum Display shows the high frequency cut off above 17 kHz. The signal after the impulse shows the noise created by the encoding process. This is most likely quantization noise due to perceptual encoding. You can get the spectrum of the noise part by selection it with the two vertical cursors and using the Partial Spectrum Display as shown in Figure: 30-32. Notice that the noise is not flat. There is less energy at approximately 5.53 kHz. Using Cursors 1 and 2 you can see the duration of the noise in the Waveform Display. This is approximately 20 ms. Wavelet Figure: 30-32 MP3 Noise p50 Male Artificial Speech Open “p50 male artificial speech Wavelet.map”. This file is the Wavelet Analysis of the p50 speech file that is included with SoundCheck. The frequency axis of Wavelet Analysis is logarithmic. Logarithmic is the more typically used type of axis for electoacoustic signals. You can see fundamental of each syllable of the speech waveform as well as each harmonic. Figure: 30-33 p50 Speech SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 379 Bluetooth Dropouts Open “Bluetooth Dropouts - Wavelet.map“. This is a Bluetooth headset measurement using a steady sine wave at 1 kHz. The constant signal at 1 kHz can be seen in the Instantaneous Spectrum Display. Due to intermittent loss of signal, you can see the effect on the constant tone in the Intensity Display. You can easily see the dropouts by looking at the Time Slice Display. Each dropout appears as a vertical spike over time. Move the Cursor 1 horizontal line to the top of the dropout peaks as shown in Figure: 30-34. The cursor value shows that the peaks of the drop out extend above 1.15 kHz. Figure: 30-34 Bluetooth Dropouts With this information you can now make a 12th octave filter, centered at approximately 1.2 kHz, to act as a dropout detector when testing this device in SoundCheck. Note: 380 In SoundCheck this is done by limiting the Analysis Step - Time Envelope values to around 1.2 kHz. SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The resolution of the analysis can be changed to 1/6th octave by closing the Intensity Display, unchecking Default Parameters and then selecting 1/6 octave from the Frequency Resolution drop down menu. Click Analyze. Wavelet Analysis has low time resolution/ high frequency resolution in the low frequencies and high time resolution/low frequency resolution in the high frequencies. This time resolution is logarithmic, as in an RTA. As you increase frequency resolution, the time resolution decreases. The two are inversely related. You can see this by moving Cursor 1 from high frequencies to low frequencies while looking at the Time Slice Display. High frequencies are very defined as shown in the Time Slice Display of Figure: 30-35. Figure: 30-35 High Frequencies As you move lower in frequency, the details diminish which can be seen in the Time Slice Display of Figure: 30-36 Figure: 30-36 Low Frequencies SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 381 Algorithm Definitions Short Time Fourier Transform (STFT) Definition SoundMap uses the following formulae: S x ( t, f)= h( u) × ( t + u)e – i2πuf du 2 With: x(t) = time function to analyze h(u)= weighting function for time window Window The window used is a truncated Gaussian function. Gaussian functions provide the best time-frequency precision. Analysis Completeness If the time increment is below a certain threshold, there is no loss of data and the energy of the signal is conserved. The analysis is then complete. The threshold of completeness is the windows rms duration. BT Product It is the normalized product of the window duration by the window bandwidth. It is always 100% for the STFT. It is called the Heisenberg-Gabor limit in the signal processing world. (BT=1 or Bandwidth x Time equals unity) Cumulative Spectral Decay Transform Definition At each frequency, the CSD time-frequency distribution yields the temporal decay of a “stopping tone burst” of that frequency. This is applied on the analyzed impulse response. This allows you to see which frequencies are “ringing“ in the Device Under Test, including the room. CSD is meaningful only when applied on an impulse response. It should not be used on other types of waveforms. CSD Transform With x(t) being the signal to analyze, the CSD is defined in SoundMap for a frequency, f, as the squared magnitude of the convolution of x by the stopping tone burst 1 [ – T, 0 ] ( t )Exp ( j2πf t ) . C ( t, f ) = t+T t x ( τ ) e– j2πfτ dτ 2 The CSD can be expressed as a STFT with a rectangular, right-sided window. Low frequency limit Because the analyzed data gets shorter as the integration window slides, the frequency limit for each spectrum gets lower. Under this limit the values are meaningless and set to zero. The limit is equal to the inverse of the effective duration of the integration. 382 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Completeness The completeness is determined in the same way as for the STFT. BT Product The BT Product is always 100%. (BT=1 or Bandwidth x Time equals unity) Wigner-Ville Definition SoundMap uses the following formulae, which is a Smoothed Pseudo Wigner-Ville Transform (SPWT): W x ( t, f ) = τ τ τ h --2- g ( u ) x̃ t + u + --2- x̃∗ t + u – --2- e – i2πτf du dτ With: x̃ ( t ) = analytical signal from time signal x(t) h = window function g = smoothing function The window function h is used to limit the time integration range for practical implementation. Each Wigner-Ville spectrum is localized around its time location. The smoothing function, g, is used to smooth the values along the time axis. With a smoothing value equal to the sampling interval, the result is an effective time resolution down to the sample. In this case, there may be a lot of interference on a complex signal. See BT Product on pg 383. Analytical Filtering The analytical filtering removes the negative frequencies of the signal. It is used in the Wigner-Ville analysis to avoid frequency aliasing. Window SoundMap uses two separate Gaussian windows for windowing and smoothing. When the window and smoothing functions have the same duration, the SPWT is equivalent to an STFT. Analysis Completeness With the SPWV, the Analysis Completeness depends only on the smoothing. The threshold of completeness is the rms duration of the smoothing. BT Product With the SPWT, it is the normalized product of the smoothing duration multiplied by the window bandwidth. The two can be adjusted independently. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 383 When BT is smaller than 100%, the time-frequency resolution is better than with the other transforms, but interference appears between components of the signal. This is the price paid when breaking the HeisenbergGabor limit. (BT=1 or Bandwidth x Time equals unity) The smaller the BT, the better the time-frequency resolution, but interference is stronger. Increasing the smoothing allows you to smooth out the time aligned interferences. Increasing the frequency resolution value smoothes out the frequency aligned interferences. When the BT Product is 100%, the result is equivalent to an STFT. Wavelet Transform Definition SoundMap uses the spectral expression of the continuous Wavelet Transform: 2 1 v j2πvt WLT x ( t, f ) = ------ ⋅ X ( v ) ⋅ Ψ∗ --- ⋅ e dv f f With: X(í) = spectrum of the signal to analyze Ø(í) = wavelet spectrum For the wavelet, SoundMap uses a Gaussian analytical wavelet (modified Morlet wavelet) defined in the frequency domain as: v Ψ --- = e f π v–f 2 – --- ----------- 2 γf Frequency Scale The center frequencies of the analyzing wavelets will follow the standardized, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24 octave (RTA) frequencies. The center frequency of each band will use the RTA scale so the analysis can be compared to an acquisition from the SoundCheck RTA analyzer. Analysis Completeness As for STFT, the threshold of completeness is the rms duration of the shortest wavelet (maximum analysis frequency). BT Product The BT Product is 100%. (BT=1 or Bandwidth x Time equals unity) 384 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Multispectrum Exploitation: Global Energy Spectrum †: sum of all spectrum of the multispectrum. It is the energy spectrum of the analyzed signal. Sub-Total Spectrum †: sum of all spectrum of the multispectrum, between the two vertical cursors. It is the energy spectrum of the portion of signal that lies between the two vertical cursors. Energy Calculus †: the total energy of the analyzed signal is obtained by summing of all time-frequency values of the multispectrum. The partial energy is obtained by summing the multispectrum values in the timefrequency region delimited by the two cross-cursors. Energy Time Curve: sum of all time slices of the multispectrum. This yields the time envelope of the signal. Partial Energy Time Curve: sum of all time slices of the multispectrum, between the two horizontal cursors. This yields the time envelope of the filtered signal, limited to the frequency band delimited by the two horizontal cursors. Mean Group Delay †: center of gravity of each time slice over frequency. It is the time of arrival of the energy for each frequency. t ρx ( t, v ) dt T x ( v ) = ---------------------------- ρx ( t, v ) dt Mean Instantaneous Frequency: center of gravity of each frequency slice over time. It is the frequency location of the energy at each time. v ρx ( t, v ) dv F x ( t ) = ------------------------------- ρx ( t, v ) dv Note: †: These functions are only available when Analysis Completeness is attained. Text File Format Physical unit string <CR-LF> (Must be linear units such as V or Pa, not dB V or dB Pa.) Sampling rate in Hz <CR-LF> (Such as 44.1 kHz sampling rate) Real Values (floating point) <CR-LF> .. <CR-LF> (one value per line. For a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz there will be 44100 value lines.) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundMap 385 page intentionally left blank 386 SoundMap SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor What is a sequence? A script to carry out a "sequence" of events A series of individual Steps The sequence (.SQC file) contains all of the steps and settings for those steps. It does not contain the settings for Hardware and Calibration. (See Hardware - System.Har on page 47 and System.Cal on page 65) A sequence contains steps, test variables and Conditional Branching instructions. (See Configure Step on page 398) What is a step? These are the building blocks of a sequence Each step is from a specific category Each step in the library of the sequence editor is a template for use in the active sequence on the right side of the editor The file extension of each step file matches the step type, e.g., Stimulus Step = .STI, Acquisition Step = .ACQ After a step is inserted into the active sequence, it has no connection back to the step in the library. The step information for the active sequence is saved in the .SQC file (See Single-file Sequence Format on page 388) Default Sequences SoundCheck comes with a library of sequences and step templates that can be used with minor or no modifications. These sequences serve as templates for making new sequences Step Templates are independent of sequences and are reusable Please refer to The following list of sequences is included with SoundCheck on page 543 which includes descriptions of all the sequences included in the SoundCheck installation. Note: Application specific sequences are also available on the Listen, Inc. website. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 387 Features The Sequence Editor runs in parallel with the rest of SoundCheck (See Sequence Operation on page 390) Editor can remain open while running a sequence Current running step is highlighted allowing you to see the progress of the sequence run The SoundCheck Main Screen menu can be accessed Editor can be moved to a second monitor The step templates pane now features an expandable tree structure for template categories and can be fully collapsed to maximize sequence space. See Step Template Library on page 393. You can add single or multiple steps to a sequence simply by dragging and dropping. Steps can also be moved in a sequence with drag and drop. All other functions are accessed by right clicking on the step. Drag and drop to insert and re-order single or multiple steps Intuitive right click menu for all functions (See Right Click Functions on page 396) Sequence Debugging Tools (See Debugging Tools on page 396) Steps with Pass/Fail (Conditional Branching) (Mes, Lim, Dis) are highlighted green or red in the editor after they are run Breakpoints can be inserted into a sequence for debugging purposes. Control buttons on the SoundCheck Main Screen can then be used to advance the sequence one step at a time or run the remaining steps in the sequence. See Debugging Tools on page 396. Insert as many break points as desired New buttons for run a single step or continue from breakpoint Steps and sequence may be edited while at a breakpoint ‘Run from here’ option allows you to run only a portion of the sequence Undo functionality has also been added to the Sequence Editor both as a right click and the familiar Ctrl+Z shortcut. This allows you to quickly revert changes made when developing and editing sequences. Single-file Sequence Format As of SoundCheck 12: 388 The sequence file (.SQC) contains all sequence parameters and steps. Individual Step files are no longer required. All attributes and fields of a step in the active sequence are linked to that sequence. Changes to the steps in the active sequence appear only in that sequence. Changes are not linked back to the step template in the Step Template Library of the Sequence Editor. See also Right Click Functions on page 396. Selecting Save As when editing a step in the active sequence, saves the changes in the sequence and makes it a template in the library This feature greatly reduces the error of changing sequence fields that affect other sequences (previously known as Step Specific black fields) Sharing and updating sequences is greatly simplified. Only a single SQC file is required, rather than an entire folder full of step files. See Exporting Sequences on page 403. Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Converting Sequences As of SoundCheck 12, sequences are no longer imported. The Setup Wizard allows you to convert sequences from a previous version to the Single File Sequence format. Master sequences and sub-sequences from versions prior to SoundCheck 12 should be handled as follows: 1. Export the sequence from SoundCheck 11 (or previous) into its own folder. 2. In SoundCheck 16.0, open each sub-sequence (from the exported folder) and click save. This will convert the sub-sequences to the single file format. 3. Open the master sequence and click save so that it is in single file format. 4. See Exporting Sequences on page 403. Sequence Editor Interface The Sequence Editor (optional module 2002) allows you to create and customize sequences to fit your specific testing needs. Sequences can involve a few steps for a straightforward measurement (e.g., loudspeaker frequency response), or include dozens of steps for elaborate tests. To view and change the current sequence, select Sequence from the Setup drop down menu on the main SoundCheck® menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Q. Figure 31-1: Sequence Editor The right side of the Sequence Editor shows the Active Sequence being edited. Here you can expand or collapse step details. The overall sequence configurations are listed first (Overall sequence) and take precedence over any conflicting step configurations. Any individual step configurations are displayed immediately after the step. You can expand the configuration info by clicking the + button next to the step. The left side shows the Step Template Library which gives you a variety of preset steps normally used in SoundCheck. You can also create your own step templates. The editor window allows the right side to be expanded for easier viewing of long step names. Note: Settings for the window and column size of the sequence editor window are stored in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file under [WinColBounds]. This will be recalled the next time SoundCheck is run. Relative File Paths File path controls in a sequence step can be set relative to the folder path of the sequence itself. This is useful when sharing sequences with other SoundCheck users and locations, as it makes it easy to move the sequence and all of its related files (recalled DAT files, WAV file stimuli, etc.) from one place to another. The relative path can even include sub-folders. See Rules - Relative File Path Rules in Recall Editor on page 196. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 389 File Menu The File menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen has the following sequence related functions: New - Create new sequences Save current sequence being edited Save As - Save current sequence with a new name and optional change location folder Revert allows you to discard all changes made since the last time the sequence was saved to disk. Delete - Deletes the selected sequence from the sequence folder. This does not go to the Recycle Bin. Deleting is permanent. Figure 31-2: Sequence Menu Document Sequence - Allows you to export a list of the steps of the active sequence along with information regarding the configuration of the steps and sequence. See Document Sequence on page 404. Sequence Operation The Sequence Editor can remain open while a sequence is running. This allows you to see the progress of the sequence as the steps run. As a step is running it is highlighted in Yellow. See Display Step in Figure 31-3. Steps configured with Pass/Fail Conditional Branching functions are highlighted in Green or Red after they have run. (.MES, .LIM and .DIS) Breakpoints can be set to pause the sequence run for debugging. Steps are marked with a red dot. See Debugging Tools on page 396. Figure 31-3: Step Highlighting The SoundCheck Main Screen menu can be accessed while the editor is open. The Start, Stop, Step and Continue buttons are located in the top left corner. Note: As of SoundCheck 13, the Status window has been removed. Use the Enter key or the Continue button as shown in Figure 31-4. See SoundCheck Main Screen on page 31 for more information on Sequence Control Buttons. Also See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. 390 Start Stop Continue Step Figure 31-4: Sequence Control The editor can be moved to a second monitor to leave more room for display windows. Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Editing Sequences Every sequence is comprised of several steps. The Sequence Editor allows you to configure the sequence as a whole, as well as to configure individual steps. Figure 31-5: Sequence Editor The active sequence name is shown on the SoundCheck Main Screen as shown in Figure 31-6. Figure 31-6: Active Sequence All the steps are listed in the order that they are executed. Steps can also be configured with one or more Conditional Branches (or jumps) to change the order of execution. See Configure Step on page 398. Conditional Branching or “Jumps” show the line number and step name You can change the order of these steps by clicking on a step and dragging it to a new location in the sequence. SoundCheck will prompt you if you are moving steps that are part of a jump. Double click on a step to open its editor. As the sequence runs, each step is highlighted in Yellow as it is processing. Steps marked with a Red Dot are set as Breakpoints. See Debugging Tools on page 396. Line number for each step in sequence Right Click to change view with Expand All or Collapse All Figure 31-7: Sequence Editor You cannot edit sub-sequences from the master sequence. Instead, open the sub-sequence itself in the Sequence Editor to edit it. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 391 Insert/Remove Steps You can also remove or insert steps into the current sequence. Right click on a step (or select several steps), Right Click on them and select Remove To insert a Step Template: 1. The default Step Template location is the Steps folder of your current SoundCheck installation. 2. Choose the desired Category from the drop down menu, left click on a step and drag it into the Active Sequence. 3. You can then “Drag and Drop” the new step in the correct position in the sequence. Note: You can only browse to the Steps directory specified in Main Screen > Edit > Preferences > Folder Paths. See Preferences on page 35. After the step is added to the active sequence it is no longer connected to the Step Template Library. Changes to the step in the sequence appear only in that sequence. Note: In the Step Template Library you can select Sequence to show the steps of a saved sequence. This is an easy short-cut for re-using steps from another sequence. Adding Multiple Steps It is possible to “Add a Block“ of steps to a sequence. This is very useful when adding steps from another saved sequence. Cursor Line Figure 31-8 shows an example. 392 In the Step Template Library select Sequence and pick a sequence from the list Select a group of steps from the sequence in the library. Left Click and drag them to the Active Sequence They will be added above the cursor line that appears when you “mouse over” the Active Sequence. In this example, the steps were inserted above the Acquisition Step. Sequence Editor Figure 31-8: Add Multiple Steps SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Editing Steps You can edit a step in the sequence by simply double-clicking on the step in the Active Sequence list box. You can also click Setup on the SoundCheck Main Screen, select a Category and select a step to edit. Step Template Library The Step Template Library contains preset steps for use in building sequences. The steps are arranged by Category as shown in Figure 31-9. Double clicking a step name in the Step Template Library will open that step so you can review its properties or edit its default settings. To save changes click Save As in the editor. You can give the step a new name or leave the name the same and overwrite the existing step. Figure 31-9: Step Template Library Categories Messages - Specifies text based, digital I/O based messages, or RS232 and/or IEEE messages. Stimulus - Specifies the test signal (sine-based, WAV file) Acquisition - Selects method of data acquisition, e.g., Play and Record, Record only, Real Time Analyzer, etc. Analysis - Selects the analysis algorithm Recall - Recalls a saved data file (SoundCheck-specific *.DAT, *.RES, *.WFM and standard *.WAV files) into the Memory List Post-Processing - Allows for complex data operations Limits - Checks measurement data against preset tolerances Display - Selects how the data and results will be presented Serial No - Selects automatic incrementing of a serial number, or a prompt for the user to enter a Serial Number Abbreviation Mes Sti Acq Ana Rec Pos Lim Dis Ser Sta Aut Pri Cus Seq Associated Editor Messages Stimulus Acquisition Analysis Recall Post-Processing Limits Display Serial Number Statistics Autosave Printing Custom Sub-sequence Figure 31-10: Category Abbreviations Statistics - Calculates running statistics of curves and results that are updated with each test run Autosave - Saves data, results and/or wave forms to disk in one of five formats Printing - Selects how the data and results will be printed Custom - Allows you to integrate your own LabVIEW code into the sequence as a step. See Creating a Custom VI and Custom Step on page 353. Sequence - Allows you to copy a step from a pre-existing sequence into the selected sequence. See Adding Multiple Steps on page 392. This step will retain the settings it had in the saved sequence in the library. You can also insert an entire sequence, making it a sub-sequence. You can choose sequences that are in the same folder as the current Active Sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 393 Step Template Menu Right click on a Step Template category and select: New - Create new steps in the selected category Import Step Templates allows you to bring steps in from previous versions of SoundCheck or other SoundCheck folders. The entire folder of steps must be selected. If you want specific steps it is recommended that you make a copy of the original folder and remove the unwanted files before importing the folder. Figure 31-11: Step Template Menu Rules - Sub-sequences You can insert an entire sequence into another sequence. This makes it a sub-sequence. The subsequence must be in the same folder location as the master sequence. Batch Processing and Memory List Grouping is not allowed in Sub-sequences. If you want to use a sequence which contains batch processing, as a sub-sequence, it will need to be re-configured to use individual steps that do not require Memory List Groups and Batch Processing. Reminder: Rules for Overwrite Data/Keep Repeated Data in Step Configuration applies to data in subsequences. Either use unique names for Data and Waveforms or, select “Add Input Data Name” or “Use Signal Path Name”. Refer to Overwrite vs Keep repeated data on page 399 for more information. Example: When all Acquisition Steps use the name “Recorded Time Waveform” AND the subsequence acquisitions are configured to “Keep Repeated Data”, the resulting names are: Recorded Time Waveform, 2- Recorded Time Waveform, 3-Recorded Time Waveform, etc. The Analysis Steps then point at the first waveform generated, “Recorded Time Waveform”, instead of the waveform that analysis is paired with in the Sub-sequence. The best way to get around this is to use unique names for the acquisition waveforms in each subsequence. 394 When using the Memory List Sorting and Grouping function, “Autogroup By Category”, in the Master Sequence, the Curves, Values, Results and Waveforms from the Sub-sequence are automatically grouped under the heading “Seq” for each Memory List Tab. The sub-sequence when inserted into the master sequence is given a step number in relation to the other steps of the master sequence Steps of sub-sequences are numbered separately, relative to the first step of the sub-sequence. Other steps of the Master Sequence resume their numbering after the sub-sequence. Steps of a Sub-sequence are indented in relation to steps in the Master Sequence. You cannot edit sub-sequences from the master sequence. Instead, open the sub-sequence itself in the Sequence Editor to edit the steps. Figure 31-12: Sequence Step Numbering When exporting the Master Sequence, its sub-sequences are exported as well. This will also export the Associated Files of the Sub-sequences. See Exporting Master Sequence and its Sub-sequences on page 403. See Converting Sequences on page 389 for information on converting Master and Sub-sequences from previous versions of SoundCheck Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Insert Sub-sequence In the active sequence, select the step that you want the Sub-sequence to occur before Right Click on the step and select Insert Step Select Category and Sequence Choose a sequence The sub-sequence must be in the same folder location as the master sequence. Sub-sequences show up in the active sequence as a single step. The step category is identified as “Seq“. In this example, the Display step was selected and the subsequence was inserted before it. See Figure 31-13. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor Figure 31-13: Inserting a Subsequence 395 Right Click Functions Right Clicking on a step or overall sequence opens a selection menu. This makes it easier to change the configuration of any step or the overall sequence. Steps Configure Step - Open step configuration window to set options for how the step works in the sequence. See Configure Step on page 398. Comment Step - Comments appear in the Comment column of the sequence editor as well as the sequence Documentation Insert Step/Replace Step - Allows you to select a step from the Step Library. See Figure 31-8. Remove - Removes the selected step(s) from the sequence. Select multiple steps by holding down the CTRL key while selecting Steps. Rename - Change the name of the selected step Undo [Name of Last Edit] - Revert last change(s) made. This remembers the order that changes are made to the sequence and allows you to step back through multiple layers of Undo. You can also use Ctrl+Z as long as the Sequence Editor window is Active (blue title bar). Figure 31-14: Right Click Sequence Expand All / Collapse All - Used to Show or Hide the configuration of all steps in the sequence Configure Sequence - Opens the sequence configuration window Debugging Tools These functions are typically used to test and fix sequence operation. Set Breakpoint - Select a step for the sequence to stop on. This step is denoted by a Red Dot. You can set as many breakpoints in a sequence as required. Clear Breakpoint - Removes the Breakpoint on the selected step(s). Run from here - Run the sequence from the selected point. This allows you to run to the end of the sequence or to the next Breakpoint. After the sequence stops at a Breakpoint, you can select “Run from here” again to continue sequence run. Figure 31-15: Set Breakpoint Apply - Allows you to Apply the action of selected step without having to open the step. For .MES, .LIM and .DIS steps this will show the Pass/Fail state of the step by highlighting the step number in Green or Red. (Clicking Apply in the step editor will not change the step highlighting.) When a sequence run pauses at a breakpoint, the Step and Continue buttons become available to either advance one step at a time or run the rest of the sequence. Start Stop Continue While the sequence is paused at a breakpoint, you can edit the steps in the sequence. This allows you to trouble shoot a sequence one section at a time, without having to run the entire sequence. Step 396 Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Breakpoints can also be set in Step Configuration. See Configure Step on page 398. Configure Sequence Double click on the first line of the sequence, Overall sequence, at the top of the active sequence or Right Click on the Sequence Editor to open the Configure Sequence window. Options: Figure 31-16: Configure Sequence When Sequence opens Preload Stimulus - Creates and loads the Stimulus Waveform into memory when the sequence opens. Preload Stimulus vs Memory List Selection When "Memory List Selection" is selected in the Stimulus Editor, a message will pop up as a reminder to "shut off" Preload Stimulus. Open First Display Step when sequence opens Open Memory List when sequence opens Open Instruction File - PDF or other document types can be tied to a sequence so that the file opens when the sequence opens. Example sequences included with SoundCheck use this function to open sequence notes and instructions. Browse to Location - Select the file to link to sequence File - Shows the linked File Name and path When Sequence Starts Close Open Display Step - Only the SoundCheck Main Screen is visible after sequence start Clear Measured Data - Used to clear displays of curves and values. Helps prevent confusion during sequence run. Sequence Comments - This field can be used to include notes about the sequence; version, date created, author, etc. When Sequence Runs Update Data in Displays - Data is shows in the display in the order it is acquired, analyzed or processed rather than waiting until the sequence run completes. Display all steps for ___ Time - Useful for debugging. Allows you to see the operation of each step for a preset time. Display FAILED Steps for ___ Time - Same as above except that it only applies to steps that issue a FAILED verdict. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 397 Wait for confirmation - Waits for you to click Continue (Enter) or Stop (Esc) on the SoundCheck Main Screen. Start Stop Continue Halt on Fail - Stops the sequence run when the verdict of any step is FAIL. Figure 31-17: Stop or Continue Buttons Configure Step You can configure individual steps to fine tune their role in the sequence. Configuring individual steps allows implementation of loops and Conditional Branching in the sequence. Right click on a step and select Configure Step. The example in Figure 31-18 shows how the “Test for Signal” step is configured to Jump to a specific step if the result of the step is PASS. It the result is FAIL, the No Signal Message step is issued and the sequence stops since this step is set to Halt on Fail. Figure 31-18: Configure “Test for Signal” Using these options, you can alter the operation and order Step of step execution in the sequence based on the outcome of a particular step. See Conditional Branching Rules - Sequence Editor on page 400 for more information. Options 398 Wait for Confirmation - The sequence will pause after the selected step is completed and wait for user input before continuing. Click the Continue or Stop buttons on the SoundCheck Main Screen as shown in Figure 31-19. Display step when run for / Display Step on FAIL for - Eliminates the need for user confirmation. Enter the amount of time you wish the sequence to pause while the step is displayed. The sequence will resume once the step times out. Start Stop Continue Figure 31-19: Stop or Continue Buttons Halt on FAIL / Halt on Pass - Allows the sequence to be stopped based on the result of the step (PASS or FAIL). Jump on PASS to / Jump on FAIL to - Allows for Conditional Branching. Depending on the PASS/ FAIL result of the step, the sequence will jump to a different point in the sequence. The Drop Down menus contain the names of all the steps in the sequence; you can jump forward or backward in the sequence. You can also elect to loop through part of the sequence for a given number of iterations and jump to a selected step. See Conditional Branching Rules - Sequence Editor on page 400 for more information. Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual After “n” repetitions - Sequence operation jumps to the selected step for a set number of runs. This increments the Index value as noted below. The Index value appears in the Memory List and can be used to control stimulus level, set turntable angle for polar plots and other uses. (Requires that “Jump on PASS or FAIL” is selected.) Index (Loop Index) You can create a Memory List value that increments according to the following settings: Start - Starting value of Memory List item Name - Name of Index value created in Memory List Increment - Amount the item will increase or decrease after each repetition Unit - Log or Linear units can be used. Uses standard editor. See Loop Stimulus Level or Polar Plot (Linear X turntable) example sequences and sequence notes for more information. The Index is a "Y axis” value. When using the Index value to update Start and Stop Frequencies in the Stimulus Editor, select Y axis. See Start and Stop Frequencies from Memory List Values on page 99 for info on how this is used in a Stimulus Step. Figure 31-20: Configure Step - Loop Stimulus Level Set Breakpoint - Allows you to set a Breakpoint to halt sequence operation. Useful for debugging. Looping sequences. The step will have a red dot next to the step name in the Active Sequence to indicate the Breakpoint. See Debugging Tools on page 396. Comment Step - Comments appear in the Comment Column of the sequence editor as well as the sequence Documentation. Overwrite vs Keep repeated data Overwrite data - This is selected so that the Memory List data generated by the step will be overwritten in the each time a sequence loop occurs. This helps reduce the number of curves that appear in the Memory List. This can be set on a per-step basis. In other words, you can overwrite data for some curves in a loop and keep all repeated data for other curves. This is the default setting. Keep repeated data - Allows you to keep the repeated measured curves in memory. They will be added to the Memory List with an iteration prefix, e.g., 2-Fundamental, 3-Fundamental, etc. Curves are only kept when the iteration logic produces a PASS. Default Action for new steps - Any New Step added to the sequence, after this point in time, will use the “Overwrite data/Keep repeated data” setting of this step. This applies to any new step added, independent of its location in the sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 399 Conditional Branching Rules - Sequence Editor Stimulus, Acquisition and Analysis steps should be configured to “Overwrite Data” when these steps are within a Loop The default state of steps when added to a sequence is “Overwrite Data”. When steps in a loop are configured to “Keep Repeated Data”, redundant curves can be generated in the Memory List, e.g., Fundamental [L], 2-Fundamental [L], 3-Fundamental [L], etc. In most cases, steps should be set to Overwrite Data so that only one instance of the curves is created. They will be updated each time the sequence runs. The final step of a sequence should not be used in a Loop Jump on Pass or Fail may create an endless loop In order to execute a jump at the end of a sequence, add a dummy display or message step at the end of the sequence, e.g., Message Step named “End of Sequence“. Then configure the previous step to jump to the desired location. Step Configuration in the Sequence Editor shows the Line number and Step name for the target of a “Jump“ Refer to Figure 31-21 for an example For an example of how Conditional Branching and Loops work, open the Loop Stimulus Level sequence from the SoundCheck Sequences - How To Examples folder. Figure 31-21: Step Configuration Info 400 Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating a New Sequence This is the basic procedure required to complete a sequence. You can alter it to fit your test needs. Note: The order of the Step Categories in the Template Library is also the order that the steps are normally used in a sequence: Stimulus, Acquisition, Analysis, etc. Note: Steps can be added to the sequence from the Step Template Library on the left side of the editor. The step can be opened and edited from the Active Sequence on the right hand side of the editor. Changes to the step are stored in the sequence and are not saved back to the Step Template Library. Note: After opening any of these sequence steps in the active sequence, they can be saved under a different name by clicking on Save As in the Step Editor. You can also right click on a step and select Rename. This change is not saved in the library. 1. On the SoundCheck Main Screen select File > New. This opens the Sequence Editor with a blank Active Sequence. Click File again and select Save to name the sequence. You can also browse to save the sequence in a different folder. 2. The sequence will use the system Hardware and Calibration configurations. 3. Right click in the blank Active Sequence and select Insert Step. Select the Stimulus Category and select the Stimulus Step to be used for the test. You are prompted to select the Output Signal Path. Note: You can also drag and drop steps from the Step Template Library into the Active Sequence. 4. Right click in the blank Active Sequence and select Insert Step again. Select Acquisition and select the method for playing the stimulus signal and recording the DUT (device under test) response and drag it into the Active Sequence. You are prompted to select the Input and Output Signal Path. 5. Repeat the process of right clicking on the Active Sequence to insert steps. You can always change the order of the steps by clicking on them, using the “Drag and Drop” method. 6. Once a step is inserted in the sequence you can right click on it and select Rename to give it a unique name to identify its function in the sequence. 7. Insert an Analysis step. Select the type of signal analysis that will be performed. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 401 8. Insert a Display step. Select a step to display your data Add display windows as described in Creating a Display Step on page 306 and Display Examples on page 308 Right click on the Display Step and select Configure step. See Configure Step on page 398 for more information Select Display step when run. This is required in order for the display to be shown when the sequence is run. Note: When using multiple Display Steps, each Display Step in the sequence must have a unique name or data will not be displayed correctly. 9. At the top of the Sequence Editor double click on “Overall sequence”. This opens the Configure Sequence window. You can also right click on the sequence and select Configure Sequence. See Configure Sequence on page 397 for more information. Select Preload Stimulus to optimize test speed 10. Insert other types of steps as noted above. Note: Remember that you can Drag and Drop steps to change the order that they occur in the sequence. 11. Double click to open each step in the Active Sequence (right hand side of the editor) to fine tune the operation of each step. 12. Right click on a step to Configure the Step. See Configure Step on page 398 for more information. 13. Now you can save and run your sequence. 402 Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Exporting Sequences Sequences developed on one SoundCheck 16.0 installation can be used by other SoundCheck 16.0 (and later) systems using the Export Seq command from the File menu. This will copy the saved sequence to a selected folder. Associated Files In addition to the .SQC file, it also exports the following: Any *.DAT, *.RES or *.WFM files from Recall Steps set to “Specify File Path” Picture files being used in the Display Steps WAV files used in the Acquisition or Stimulus Steps Calibration .DAT files associated with the signal paths used in the sequence Any instruction files from the Sequence Configuration The sequence can be run from the exported folder. This folder can be on a network or on the local PC. Exporting Master Sequence and its Sub-sequences When exporting the Master Sequence, its sub-sequences are exported as well. This will also export the Associated Files of the Sub-sequences. Example - Exporting Sequences To export sequences, do the following: 1. Make sure the sequences you want to export have been saved. 2. Select File→Export Seq…. 3. Navigate to the sequence file(s) location, select the desired .SQC file(s) and click OK 4. Open the folder where the exported sequences will reside. This can be a folder on the local hard drive or anywhere on a network. 5. Once you have opened the destination folder, click on Select Cur Dir 6. SoundCheck will then export the sequence files as noted above SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 403 Document Sequence From the SoundCheck Main Screen click File > Document Sequence. Figure 31-22: Document Sequence Allows you to export a list of the steps of the active sequence along with information regarding the configuration of the steps and sequence. Export the list of steps of a sequence to a text file in 2 text formats or to an Excel file: (See Figure 31-23) 1. Delimited txt file; tab, comma, semicolon and other 2. Space-aligned for fixed width text editors The Documentation setup window allows you to select: 1. Summary: Shows the Simple step information first. For sequences with sub-sequences, only the master sequence setup is shown. Figure 31-23: Documentation Editor 2. Current View: same layout as on screen 3. Expanded Details: Steps names, configuration and settings: a. Line number b. Output Signal Path / Input Signal Path c. Category d. Step title e. Step configuration The Comment window gives you a space to enter general notes about the sequence and it’s use. This info shows up in the Quick-Start menu. An example of the output from the Documentation Editor is shown in Figure 31-24. 404 Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Documentation Spreadsheet Listen SoundCheck 13w w w .listeninc.com Sequence: Limits in Reference to Standard Thu Oct 31 2013 ### Operator: Comment: Sequence Title Date & time of documentation TypeStep Name # Out In (Overall sequence) preload Stimulus display instructions clear data at start close display at start Mes Measure Standard 1 // Measure standard or use stored data display step jump on pass to # 2: Fixture Standard jump on fail to # 8: Reference Standard overw rite curves Mes Fixture Standard 2 display step w ait for confirmation overw rite curves Sti 10k-100Hz (R40) 3 Amp ch 1 Data Out Max FSD Out 10k-100Hz (R40) 10k-100Hz (R40) Acq Play & Record 4 Amp ch Reference Mic Data In 10k-100Hz (R40) Data Out Max FSD In Recorded Time Waveform Comment Lines are denoted by a double slash (//) starting in the first column. Figure 31-24: Documentation in Excel spreadsheet The documentation example shows the result of selecting the “Expanded View” format. If “Summary“ were selected, the step configuration information below each step would be omitted. Sub-sequence Notation The sub-sequence title is given a step number in relation to the other steps of the master sequence Steps of sub-sequences are numbered separately, relative to the first step of the sub-sequence. Other steps of the Master Sequence resume their number after the sub-sequence. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editor 405 page intentionally left blank 406 Sequence Editor SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments Features Distortion Analyzer with THD and Optimized THD+N Real time distortion analyzer that allows you quickly get distortion values and plot them over time with the Strip Chart Recorder. THD Ratio - IEEE THD Ratio - IEC THD Residual THD+N Ratio - IEEE THD+N Ratio - IEC THD+N Residual SINAD Weighting Filter options: Available selections: A, B, C, and “Memory List” Any arbitrary curve from the Memory List can be used New Save to Memory List option See Distortion Analyzer on pg 434. Strip Chart Recorder (optional module) This is available in the Multimeter, Distortion Analyzer and Frequency Counter. The Strip Chart plots the data from the instrument on a graph, where X axis is time and Y axis is the output of the meter. See Strip Chart Recorder on pg 420. Multimeter New - Save to Memory List option. See Common Instrument Controls on pg 409. New - Linear-Repeating Averaging function New - Bandpass Filter option with Auto or Fixed frequency selections Auto: Tracks the most prominent tone Fixed: Allows you to specify the frequency The Q is the same value, for either mode, regardless of frequency For more information on the Multimeter see Multimeter on pg 417. New Frequency Counter The new high resolution frequency counter offers an accurate and clear visual indication of frequency, determining the dominant signal in a selected signal path and returning a precise frequency measurement. See Frequency Counter on pg 435. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 407 Instrument List The Virtual Instruments offered by SoundCheck® allow you to manually operate the different components of the test system as stand-alone instruments: Signal Generator (Ctrl+F4) - generate sine waves, noise and WAV files. The EQ output function can be applied to all types of output signals available in the Signal Generator Multimeter (Ctrl+F5) - display the weighted or unweighted RMS level of an input signal Oscilloscope (Ctrl+F6) - view time waveforms Spectrum Analyzer (Ctrl+F7) - narrow-band frequency analysis Real Time Analyzer (Ctrl+F8) - Nth octave analysis Distortion Analyzer (Ctrl+F9) Frequency Counter (Ctrl+F10) Overload Indicator An overload indicator is included in all Instruments. This appears when the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the range of the hardware. If the signal is within the Max FSD tolerances the value characters of the meter are White When the input signal is within 3 dB of Max FSD, the meter reading will switch from White to Orange characters. See Record Level Monitoring Max FSD on pg 121. When the input signal is actively overloading the hardware, the Overload Indicator becomes visible and flashes Red After the overload condition ceases, the indicator stops flashing, but it remains highlighted in yellow to let you know that an overload condition had been present in the current data acquisition session The Overload Indicator is reset (closed) by clicking on the X (upper left corner), or by stopping and starting the instrument. For the Spectrum Analyzer, Oscilloscope and RTA, click on the Overload Indicator to close it. 408 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Common Instrument Controls The following controls are used on all of the Instrument meters and analyzers: Save to Memory - Saves the acquired data to the Memory List Save Settings - Allows you save the current settings of the Instrument to a .VIC file Set as Default - Saves the current settings as the default settings for this type of Instrument Load Settings - Allows you load settings from a .VIC file Figure 32-1: Common Controls If the selected .VIC file does not contain settings for the current instrument, an error is returned If the .VIC file contains multiple configurations for the current instrument, the first entry is used Close - Closes the Instrument Save In Compact View - Sets the Instrument to open in Compact View when you select Save Settings or Save as Default Virtual Instrument Configuration The set up of the multiple instruments can be saved in a Virtual Instrument Configuration file otherwise known as .VIC. This allows you to save or recall a set of instruments that might be used on a regular basis. Note: The Signal Generator output will be muted when a .VIC file is opened. Figure 32-2: Save Config Virtual Instrument Configurations are managed from the Instruments Menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen. See Figure 32-2. Click Instruments Menu Save Configuration or Save Configuration As to save current Virtual Instrument setup Open Configuration to open a .VIC file Start Up Configuration - Opens the selected virtual instrument set up when SoundCheck is opened. See Figure 32-3. Recently Opened Configurations - List of recently used configurations Figure 32-3: Startup Config SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 409 Opening Multiple Instances of Instruments Several instances of the same virtual instrument or combinations of instruments can be opened at the same time. For multichannel applications, a new instance of the VI can be opened for each channel Both the Spectrum Analyzer and the RTA can run simultaneously while running a sequence so real time live data can be viewed Two Signal Generators can be used to mix signals (e.g., pink noise and a sine sweep) for signal conditioning Waveforms in the memory list may also now be played directly from the Signal Generator VI Instrument Operation Time Rules There is no deterministic link between the input and output of virtual instruments. They are completely independent. In fact, all Input Instruments are independent from each other. The only deterministic synchronization implemented between instruments in SoundCheck is “Sync” for Signal Generators (output side only). The best way to guarantee that the Signal Generator is playing for the entire duration of the Multimeter record operation is by setting up your acquisition as follows: Include a record delay value that is long enough to allow the Signal Generator to open and start playing Configure the Multimeter to record for the duration of interest Make sure the Signal Generator is configured to play for long enough to cover: a. The Record Delay entered in the Acquisition Step field b. The record duration set in the Multimeter Time field c. The time it takes for the Multimeter to open and close The example in Figure 32-4 shows the Signal Generator set to run for 3.8 seconds. This covers the times for: Record Delay (1 Sec) + Multimeter Time (2 Sec) + Multimeter Open & Close (0.8 sec) Figure 32-4: Total Acquisition Time These methods should be used when using any of the virtual instruments as stand-alone instruments or when using them in an Acquisition Step. The values used in this example are for demonstration purposes only. You should determine the optimal record delay, signal generator duration and multimeter duration times for your setup. They will vary based on OS, audio driver, and number of input and output channels acquiring during the step. 410 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Signal Generator Choose the Output Signal Path, Frequency, and Output Level of the sine wave or WAV file to play. The Signal Generator always opens with Mute enabled to prevent playback of inadvertent, excessively high levels. When you are ready to play your signal, click the blinking Muting button to disable muting. Features Frequency steps are in non-integer values. A decimal frequency can be entered as: 37.3 Hz. Bandwidth is limited only by the sampling rate of the audio interface. DC is not supported in the Signal Generator. Drop Down Menu - select stimulus types Sine Wave WAV (See WAV file playback on pg 413) Pink Noise Waveform (See Play Waveform Option on pg 412) Figure 32-5: Signal Generator - Sine Wave EQ - Apply EQ uses the correction curve associated with the selected Signal Path (See Below) Drop Down Menu - select Output Signal Path Max level and units defined in Calibration Editor, Output Signal Path Vary frequency using linear or logarithmic scale Vary level with linear or logarithmic scale Reference 1 kHz tone Sync Temporarily mute output Previous versions of SoundCheck allowed you to Sync multiple Sine Wave generators and multiple WAV file or Noise players, the latter only under specific conditions. As of SoundCheck 15, you can unconditionally sync WAV file and Noise playback with other WAV file/Noise generators and Sine Wave generators. Sync only guarantees matching first sample output on the audio interface. Anything beyond that is up to the user. That is, they are not “synced” in terms of overall Signal Generator configuration: Frequency and level are unique to and controlled individually on each synced generator. Changing the frequency on one synced signal generator will mute all synced generators. This is for phase matching reasons. Syncing signal generators guarantees the signals match at Phase 0/Time 0. Changing the frequency would change the phase relationship between two signals, so all generators need to be reset. Muting all synced generators effectively forces the sync operation to reset. Un-muting any synced generator is a signal for all in the group to start playing again in sync. Changing the level of one synced signal generator has no effect on any other synced signal generator. The same rules generally apply to synced WAV file/Noise Signal Generators. Clicking “Stop,” modifying the WAV file path, or changing the Noise parameters will stop all synced generators. “Start” will start them all. Other than that, each one is configured individually. EQ The EQ output function can be applied to all types of output signals available in the Signal Generator (Sine Wave as well as WAV and noise). When the EQ box is checked the EQ Out Correction curve that is created in the output calibration process is applied to the output signal. This allows you to equalize the response of an artificial mouth or anechoic chamber. EQ out correction curves are populated with data when the Speaker SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 411 Equalization or Simulated Free Field calibration sequences are selected in the output calibration process. See Equalization and Correction Curve on pg 77. The level and units are determined by the calibration setup. For example, if you have calibrated the output sensitivity to include the gain of an amplifier in the path of the output signal, the level indicated will be the level into the DUT. The output level is in physical units. Refer to Calibration Configuration on pg 65 for more information on Physical Units. Note: The EQ out selection box is available for Sine Wave stimulus. Pink or White Noise When playing Pink or White Noise you can select the Duration of the noise and the number of times it can be looped. Select in Continuous Loop to playback until you hit Stop Select Duration and enter the playback time in the Duration field or Select N Times and enter the number of times for file playback in the N field Figure 32-6: Play N Times Play Waveform Option Any waveform available in the memory list can be played from the Signal Generator. Select Waveform from the first Drop Down Menu. The waveform is selected from the Drop Down list under waveform name. Figure 32-7: Play Waveform 412 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual WAV file playback WAV file streaming in the signal generator with real time equalization removes memory limitations on the length of test signals. Longer test signals such as those required for analysis of speech and music can easily be accommodated. This applies to the standalone Signal Generator as well as the Signal Generator when used in an Acquisition Step. (WAV file streaming is not available in the Stimulus Step.) Important! See Instrument Operation Time Rules on pg 410 regarding syncing and operation time with multiple instruments. Level The Output Level field allows you to set the playback level of the WAV file. The level is set in physical units. The output units will vary depending on the output units of the System Calibration Configuration. For example, if using an artificial mouth or anechoic test box the output level will be Pa rms. For an amplifier or direct output the level will be V rms. This requires an accurate calibration of the output signal chain. (See Calibration Configuration on pg 65 for instructions on output calibration.) The Drop Down Menu next to the Level field has the following selections: RMS level (Pa rms, V rms) dB level WAV Info File Path - Browse and select a WAV file. The sample rate of the WAV file must match the sample rate of the System Hardware Configuration. WAV Channel - Select which channel of stereo WAV file to use for playback. The following section shows the properties of the selected WAV file. These values are for reference only, and cannot be changed. Peak: the maximum absolute value of the file (in dB FS, or %FS). RMS: the RMS value of the entire wave file (in dB FS, or %FS). WAV format: stereo/mono, sampling rate, bit depth. Time: total duration of the wave file in mm:ss.ms. Note: Figure 32-8: Signal Generator - WAV File As of SoundCheck 10.0, WAV file playback “N times“ is available when using NI DAQmx hardware devices such as the PCI/PXI 4461. More information on the use of WAV files in SoundCheck can be found in WAV File Excitation on pg 111 and WAV File Types on pg 293. Why use an equalized WAV file? Many modern electroacoustic products, in particular mobile phones, incorporate nonlinear digital signal processing for noise suppression and speech encoding. Usually these products must be tested using complex excitation signals such as real or simulated speech. Prior to their use, these special signals need to be equalized to compensate for the non-flat response of the mouth simulator or loudspeaker used as the output device. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 413 Equalize a WAV file In order to obtain an accurate output level the WAV file should be equalized as shown in Figure 32-9. The selected WAV file is equalized by applying the EQ curve defined in the System Calibration Configuration. The System Calibration Configuration must have an equalization curve associated with the selected Output Signal Path. EQ Out Correction curves are populated with data when the Speaker Equalization or Simulated Free Field calibration sequences are selected in the output calibration process. See Equalization and Correction Curve on pg 77. Make sure that the desired Output Signal Path has an appropriate EQ curve available in the Memory List. The EQ curve is unique to the Output Signal Path. The EQ curve is available in the Memory List and can be manipulated via Post-processing or calibration. (For more information on generating or manipulating EQ curves refer to Calibration Configuration on pg 65.) How to example 1. Open the Signal Generator by choosing it from SoundCheck’s Instruments menu. (Open the RTA as well if you wish to see the measured signal change as the equalization is applied.) 2. Select WAV file from the radio button in the upper left hand corner of the Signal Generator. Browse to the WAV file you would like to equalize, and set your Output Level and number of times for the file to play. Press Start to play the file, and watch the unequalized response on the RTA. The WAV file will stop playing when the number of times to play has passed, or, if you have chosen Continuous Loop, click Stop when you are satisfied. 3. Select the EQ option at the top of the Signal Generator, make sure your Output Level is appropriate, and the WAV file is set to play a fixed number of times (for Duration will play the WAV file once). 4. The Analyzing Status light indicates that the EQ'd signal is being calculated. When the light goes out the process is complete. Figure 32-9: WAV File EQ 5. Press the Start button and watch the equalized response of your WAV file on the RTA. Important! As of SoundCheck 8, an equalized version of the WAV file is no longer created. The equalization is done in real time. 6. Return to editing your sequence. Add a Virtual Instrument Acquisition Step to play the WAV file (e.g., P50 speech.wav) through the Signal Generator. The EQ box must be checked in order for SoundCheck to apply the EQ. 7. Record the response through the RTA, as in Figure 32-10. Figure 32-10: Equalize WAV in Sequence 414 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Signal Generator Synchronization Multiple signal generators can be synced in real time and in a sequence so they will start and stop simultaneously. This is important when checking the phasing of multiple channels such as loudspeaker and microphone arrays. Figure 32-11 shows three Signal Generators, all set to Sync Output on multiple channels or on the same channel Clicking Start or Unmute on a signal generator in the group will start all signal generators in the group Clicking Stop or Mute operates all generators in the group The output level of signal generators can be changed independently while the group is running Figure 32-11: Signal Generator Synchronization Changing the Signal Path or Frequency on one generator in the group will Stop/Mute the whole group Different signal types can be mixed as shown in Figure 32-12 Sync allows you to Start, Stop and Mute multiple signal generators by clicking on only 1 button It synchronizes the phase of sine signals and the start of WAV files Important! See Instrument Operation Time Rules on pg 410 regarding syncing and operation time with multiple instruments. Signal Generator Mixing In Figure 32-12, two Signal Generators are open, both sending to Direct Out 1 but with different frequencies set in their respective control panels. Signal Generator 1 is set to 1000 Hz Signal Generator 2 is set to 2000 Hz SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 415 The Scope FFT shows the mix of the two signal generators Figure 32-12: Multiple Signal Generator Mixing Of course, other types of signals can be mixed. Signal Generator 1 can play a 1 kHz sine wave while a WAV file is played from Signal Generator 2. Note: When playing WAV files, the sample rate of the WAV file must match the sample rate of the System Hardware Configuration. Note: See WAV File Types on pg 293 for more information on supported WAV file types. Important! See Instrument Operation Time Rules on pg 410 regarding syncing and operation time with multiple instruments. 416 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Multimeter The Multimeter allows for measurement of input signal in real time. The level and units are determined by the Signal Path Calibration setup. For example, if you have calibrated the input sensitivity to include the sensitivity of a microphone used to measure the input signal, the level indicated will be the absolute SPL level at the microphone position. Meter Display Compact View Button - (double Up or Down arrows) Minimizes the Multimeter to just the Thermometer and Numeric display. This helps to save space on a computer monitor. Strip Chart Recorder Button - Opens and Closes the Strip Chart Recorder. See “Strip Chart Recorder” on page 420. Thermometer - When Limits are active, a Yellow bar indicates passing. A Red bar indicates the level is failing the set limits. Compact View Overload - The numeric display area will turn yellow when the signal into the audio interface exceeds the Max In Vp level Strip Chart Recorder Figure 32-13: Buttons Resolution The Display Resolution can be set by right clicking on the numeric display of the meter and setting the values for Linear Numeric and dB Numeric as in Figure 32-16. Linear Numeric Field Choose between SI notation and Floating point Select Digits of precision or Significant digits Check to Hide Trailing Zeros dB Numeric Field Set Digits of precision. Setting a greater precision may be required when using Multimeter Limits in a sequence as noted above. Figure 32-14: Numeric Display Preferences Check to Hide Trailing Zeros SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 417 Measurement Tab Signal Path - Select any signal path available in the Calibration Editor as the Input to the Multimeter Apply Correction - Allows you to apply input correction curves associated with the selected, calibrated signal path Measurement Type Select AC RMS, AC Peak or DC RMS (DC requires a DC coupled audio interface) Peak - Within 50 mSec time blocks Strip Chart Button - This opens the Strip Chart Recorder for the Multimeter. Circled in Figure 32-15. Autoscale - Default is 100 dB scale. You can manually change the upper and lower scale values to “Zoom In’. This is not remembered when a configuration is saved. Save in Compact View - Changes the meter to Compact view when you click Save Settings or Set as Default. Figure 32-15: Multimeter Averaging Tab (Avg.) Averaging - The meter shows the Average value, updated according to the Time or Time Weighting selected Max Hold and Min Hold - The meter collects data for the duration the meter is running and shows the Maximum or Minimum value Linear Click “Start” to run the meter The Multimeter will run for the duration set in the Time field The “Averaging” indicator is green when the Multimeter is running The Elapsed Time window shows the amount of acquisition time Linear - Repeating 418 Measures the input signal for the duration set in the Time field. Example: If Time is set to 1 second, the meter will measure for 1 second and then repeat. This is particularly useful when used with the Strip Chart Recorder to output a curve with measurements taken in blocks of time. The Value saved to the Memory List is the last value taken. Figure 32-16: Averaging The Strip Chart Recorder Duration field will set the length of the acquired curve. See Strip Chart Recorder (optional module) on pg 407. This will run in a loop until you click Stop. Only the data from the most recent acquisition is saved to the Memory List from a Virtual Instrument Acquisition Step or when you click “Save to Memory”. Continuous - Moving Avg. Click “Continuous” to run the meter The Multimeter will run continuously until you click OK or Cancel in the Multimeter window Averaging Time: Fast (250 mSec), Slow (2 Sec) or User Defined The Strip Chart Recorder Duration field will set the length of the acquired curve Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Filters Tab Weighting - Select A, B, C or any curve available in the Memory List Check to enable the High Pass Filter and/or Low Pass Filter and enter values in Hz The selected frequency will be the -0.1 dB point of a dynamically calculated filter Bandpass Filter option with Auto or Fixed frequency selections Auto: Tracks the most prominent tone Fixed: Allows you to specify the frequency The Q is the same value, for either mode, regardless of frequency Figure 32-17: Filters Limits Tab Limits can be used when the Multimeter is opened from the Instruments menu. The limit settings are remembered when the Multimeter is saved in a Configuration. The Pass/Fail indicator is only for visual reference. Check Limits On to enable Upper and Lower Limit values are entered manually When the condition of the limits is “Passing”, the Multimeter Thermometer is yellow. When failing, the thermometer turns red. Pass/Fail conditions can be set in Step Configuration to use for Conditional Branching (Jump on Pass/Fail to ...). See Configure Step on pg 398. Figure 32-18: Limits SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 419 Strip Chart Recorder The Strip Chart Recorder is an optional module available for the following Instruments: Multimeter Distortion Analyzer Frequency Counter Click the Strip Chart button to open the feature. Docking button Strip Chart button Strip Chart Active button Figure 32-19: Strip Chart The chart window can be “Undocked” from the meter, resized and moved on the desktop as an independent window. Click the Docking button as shown in Figure 32-19. The Strip Chart can be “Docked” to it’s Instrument by clicking the Docking button. Click the Expand Menu button on Strip Chart for the following controls: Cursor Arrow - Click on an X or Y axis endpoint value to change the extents of the graph Magnifying Glass - Zoom on X, Y or and X and Y axis Hand - Move the graph within the window. (Autoscale X and Y should be shut off when using this.) XY Autoscale buttons Time Relative - Shows the time according to the start of signal acquisition Actual - Shows the clock time of the SoundCheck Computer. Note: Data saved to the Memory List uses Relative Time values. Duration - Sets the maximum window size. The window scales to show as much data as possible until the Duration value is reached. The Strip Chart will then stop unless Scroll is selected. Scroll 420 Off - The Strip Chart recorder stops after the Duration value has been reached On - The Strip Chart data will scroll to the left once the Duration value has been reached. The Strip Chart window maximum width is set by the Duration value. This is also the available data that is saved to the Memory List when you click Save to Memory. Delta X and Delta Y - Shows the X and Y axis difference between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Right click on the Strip Chart window to place cursors, access the Zoom Tool and to export the window as a JPG or BMP file. The remaining controls are not available. Cur1/Cur2 - Two cursors are available in the Strip Chart window Tool - An alternate means of accessing the Cursor Arrow, Zoom, Hand and Autoscale controls Averaging Tab The Strip Chart Recorder follows the selected Averaging Mode. See Averaging Tab (Avg.) on pg 418. Linear - Makes one measurement that is integrated over the Time set in Averaging. The Strip Chart shows all the measurements that comprise that measurement. Linear Repeating - Makes one measurement every X seconds, depending on the Time set. Continuous - Makes a continuous measurement but the Strip Chart Output Curve is set by the Duration Field. Save to Memory In the meter that is linked to the Strip Chart, click on Save to Memory to send the data to the Memory List. Figure 32-20: Linear Repeating Only the data in the window is saved If Scroll is selected, data that scrolls past the left edge of the window is not saved You can click Save to Memory more than once while scrolling to save “Snapshots” of data When used in a sequence, the data is saved to the Memory List when acquisition is complete The Value and Waveform data will be named with the Meter Input name, e.g.: Multimeter - Direct In 1 and saved to the Memory List Values and WFM tabs. If multiple data Snapshots are taken while scrolling the data will be Autoprotected and the order number prepended to the data name. Figure 32-21: Memory List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 421 When used in a sequence, Limits can be applied to the Strip Chart waveform (or value) as shown in Figure 32-22. This allows you to apply limits to measurements of Level vs Time, Distortion vs Time or Frequency vs Time. Figure 32-22: Limits On Strip Chart Waveform 422 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Spectrum Analyzer The spectrum analyzer allows detailed analysis of spectral components. The weighted spectrum is now available. The weighting functions include: none, A, B, C or any other curve in the SoundCheck Memory List. Estimated Frequency and Level Choose Window type and Weighting Units based on Signal Channel Calibration Cursor 1 - Snap to Max - Harmonics and THD level Cursor position and level Figure 32-23: FFT Screen Overview FFT Controls Display (Mode Select and Cursor Readout Controls) Spectrum/Time: Selects mode of operation - frequency or time analysis. The Oscilloscope will run in the time domain, while the Spectrum Analyzer will run in the frequency domain. Est. Freq: Displays interpolated frequency estimate, in Hz, at Cursor 1. The interpolated frequency value is significantly greater in resolution than the measurement bandwidth. Est. Level: Displays the calculated level estimate at Cursor 1, in units RMS. In order to get valid results for Est. Frequency and Est Level, Cursor 1 must be positioned before or during measurement. The interpolated level value is significantly great in resolution than the direct reading in the Cursor 1 legend. Spectrum (Display properties): Allows you to change the color and attributes of the Spectrum Line. For more information on these controls refer to Display Editor and Memory List on pg 279. Cursor 1 & 2: Shows position on X and Y-axis of the two cursors. Cursor position can be fine tuned by using the Diamond control to the right of the cursor panel. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 423 The Snap to Max button on the Scope-FFT control panel moves Cursor 1 to the peak of the acquired spectrum. The Estimated Frequency and Estimated Level are shown in the fields at the top of the Spectrum Display. This function is available when the mode is set to Time or Spectrum but the cursor location is only shown when the mode is set to Spectrum. The Estimated Frequency and Level are shown in either mode. Clicking on the Harmonic Cursor will then plot and show the Harmonics on the FFT display as well as calculate the THD. Delta: Difference (in relevant units) between the position of Cursor 1 and Cursor 2. Axis Scaling, Zoom and Style Controls Curve Attributes: Controls curve attributes. See Introduction on pg 21 for more information on these graph controls. Autoscale: Left click on the Lock symbol to turn Autoscale on and off. The Green light indicates that Autoscale is on (as well as the Lock/Unlock symbol). Clicking on the X or Y axis symbol, autoscales the axis without turning autoscale on. This is a “one shot“ autoscale Autoscale OFF Autoscale ON Precision: Allows you to set the level of precision for the display of values. Scale 424 Y axis: Provides choice of dB (relative) or linear (absolute) units. Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Right Click Functions Right Click on the graph: Copy Data - Creates a screen shot of the graph side of the instrument window, including Cursor section and annotations Description and Tip - Not used Visible Items - Select/De-select items to show in the graph section of the instrument Clear Graph - Not used Create Annotation - Allows you to post markers on the graph that are included when exporting a screen shot of the graph Delete All Annotations - Removes all annotations from the graph Smooth Updates - Selected by default to minimize flicker as the display changes Autosize Plot Legend - Always on Optional Plane - Not used Export Data to Clipboard - Copies the graph data to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into another application Data to Excel - Opens Excel and copies the graph data to a new worksheet Simplified Image - Sends a black and white capture of only the graph window to the clipboard. Annotations are included. Figure 32-24: Export Simplified Image Right Click on a Cursor name: Visible Items - Turn the Vertical Scroll Bar on and off (Other controls are not used) Snap To - Not used Attributes - The Standard Line Attribute settings are available. Refer to Cursor Controls on pg 44. Bring to Center - Moves the selected cursor to the center of the spectrum display Go to Cursor - Centers the spectrum on the selected cursor Create Cursor - Not used Delete Cursor - Not used Trigger Controls Triggering can be used to automatically capture a spectrum when the signal level exceeds the value set in the “Trigger Level” field. Trigger Channel: Sets the Input Signal Path used for Trigger Trigger Level: Sets level of measurement trigger, in either Physical Units or dB. If dB is chosen, the trigger threshold is on the positive value of the waveform. The trigger level is a Peak value. The trigger value has the same dB reference as the trigger signal path. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 425 Trig. Offset (sec): Sets the amount of time that the Acquired Signal is shifted, relative to the point at which it is triggered. A negative offset indicates that the signal will be shifted to the right by the time that is in the field e.g., -100 mSec. Slope: Selects whether Positive going signal triggers before negative going signal Indicator light next to Triggered button indicates when the signal is triggering measurement Resolution When the Display type is set to Time, only the Time [sec] field is available. When the Display type is set to Spectrum both the Time and Spectral lines fields are available. Time [sec] indicates the total amount of time allowed before the next trigger will be allowed. Measurement record length in seconds (sec). dT [sec]: Sampling Interval of the time signal. This is the inverse of the sampling rate determined in the System Hardware configuration. Spectral lines: Number of FFT lines from 0 Hz to 0.5x (half) of the audio interface sampling frequency. dF [Hz]: Resolution/spacing of Spectral Lines. Averaging Controls Linear/Exponential: Different averaging modes Linear will average for only the number of averages entered (e.g., 12) and then stops measuring. When Linear averaging is selected, the Averages indicator will appear, specifying the number of averages currently completed. Exponential allows for continuous measurement. Averages, in this case, sets the number of spectrum that are averaged together for each measurement display. If this number is set to 1, there will be no averaging. This will then be the raw spectrum. Start Button (Available in Linear mode): Starts the acquisition of data. Acquisition ends when the number of averages is complete. Continuous (Available in Exponential mode): Starts the continuous measurement of spectrum and ends when the Stop button is clicked. The Continue button allows you to resume a previously started measurement. Spectrum 426 Input Channel: Any predefined Input Signal Path will be available for input. Average: Displays the average spectrum, either Linear or Exponential, as determined in the Averaging Field. Power: The result is the average Power of each FFT bin, excluding phase information. Complex: The result is the average of the complex value of each FFT bin (amplitude and phase); this must be used in conjunction with the trigger controls. The signal must be very stable when using triggering, otherwise slight random variations in phase from one trigger cycle to the next will cause synchronous components to be underestimated in amplitude. A greater signal to noise ratio can be obtained by using this. Maximum: Displays the maximum of each spectral line. Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Minimum: Displays the minimum of each spectral line. Weighting Controls Window: User selectable time window. Available windows are shown above. Weighting: Allows you to select A, B or C weighting. Additionally, a curve from the Memory List can be used as a weighting function. This is applied to the measured spectrum, e.g., frequency domain. Apply Correction: Applies the correction curve associated with the Input Signal Path. Refer to Calibration Configuration on pg 65 for information on the creation of Calibration Curves. Window Types Weighting Types Operation Control Buttons Save to Memory: Saves the current measurement data to the Memory List. The curve will appear in the Memory List as “FFT Spectrum [L]”. Change the file name by Selecting “Rename“ from the Memory Drop Down Menu in the Memory List. The FFT Spectrum displays the amplitude corrected for the noise energy bandwidth of the time window used in the FFT calculation (e.g., Hanning, 4-Term Blackman-Harris, etc.). The FFT spectrum should be used when measuring pure tones and/or sinusoidal distortion components, such as harmonics. The FFT Spectrum is used when using the Power Sum post-processing function. Typical applications include determining the total power in a frequency band when using Pink or White noise or program material. Figure 32-25: Memory List - Snap to Max Values If “Snap to Max” is selected before clicking “Save to Memory”, the FFT Cursor values will also be added to the Memory List: Est. Freq, Est. Level and THD. This value can then be shown in a Display Table as shown in Figure 32-25. Note: All FFT spectrum are summable spectrum as of SoundCheck 7. Cancel: Closes the Spectrum Analyzer, any changes to user defined fields will not be stored OK: Closes the Spectrum Analyzer, storing all settings. Measurement Status Buffer Use: This shows memory buffer use. If this indicator is not solid red, there is no data loss (all data processed). Real time analysis is performed. Real Time: This shows the update rate of the data display. A solid green bar indicates that the data is being displayed as quickly as it being acquired. There will be circumstances where the display processor cannot SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 427 keep up with the actual data processing. Since the display may not be able to be updated after each completion of a new average, this field would be a partial green bar. The actual time data is still processed even though the display is not updated with each new average. After the number of required averages has been calculated, the final screen is the cumulative average of all averages. Measurements Listen’s Scope/FFT instrument allows straightforward measurements of acoustic, vibration and electrical signals. The procedure to make a measurement is relatively simple: 1. Set up the Y-axis, X-axis, time window, and units in the Scale and Weighting sections. In the Trigger and Averaging sections: 2. Select the proper Input Signal Path. 3. Input the Trigger Level and the Slope. 4. Determine the Time record length. For lower frequencies and higher resolution, a longer record length is needed. The delta Hz will automatically be updated to reflect changes in record length and number of FFT Lines. 5. Enter the number of FFT Lines desired and select type of averaging (Linear or Exponential). 6. Select and type in the number of Averages needed. Running a Measurement After set up of the above sections, pushing Start in linear averaging mode will start the measurement and averaging and will stop the analyzer when finished (when the requested number of averages is reached). In Exponential averaging mode, this button becomes the Continuous button which, when pressed, starts exponential averaging. To stop exponential averaging, press the Continuous button again. Pressing Start in linear averaging mode while running will stop the measurement and averaging. Use the cursors and/or saving facilities to analyze and view data. Note: The Estimated Frequency and Level fields only update during measurements. When the measurement is finished (as in the case of linear averaging), the fields will reflect the last cursor position before the completion of the last average. Using the Graph Cursors When the cross (+) cursor appears (selected using the Return to Cursor button), click on the graph cursor and drag it to the frequency line of interest to read the frequency and level data. Use the other cursor facilities to zoom, scale and change the graph attributes. Refer to Introduction on pg 21 for tips on using graph controls. 428 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual FFT Weighting Types An FFT analysis must be made on a time record or measurement of finite length. The measurement is then limited to a specified window. Spectral leakage occurs when the acquired data does not exactly correspond to one of the spectrum frequency lines. This leakage leads to amplitude accuracy errors as well as obscuring adjacent frequency peaks. For these reasons it is important to apply a Weighting function to obtain more useful information from a measurement. Various windowing types affect the results of the measurement in different ways. None (Uniform) Also referred to as Rectangular. No weighting is applied to the measurement. This works well with transients that are shorter in length than the measurement time. Due to the flat characteristic in the time domain, all parts of the signal are equally weighted. Hanning This is a smooth window function, which is one period of a cosine2 function and tapers to zero at the beginning and end of the measurement. Hanning is recommended for the analysis of noisy signals. Its main advantage is that it has excellent frequency selectivity. Blackman-Harris This window has a low ripple (<0.87 dB) in the pass-band and a low skirt (<-80 dB) in the stop-band. BlackmanHarris is recommended for harmonic and order analysis. Its main advantage is that it has an excellent dynamic range combined with good frequency selectivity. Flat-top This window has very little ripple (<0.01 dB) in the pass-band (in the frequency domain). The window’s main use is for level measurement of sinusoid (calibration), due to its negligible amplitude errors. Its main advantage is that it has excellent amplitude accuracy. Note: Audio Analyzer Type 2012, Brüel & Kjær Technical Documentation, BE 1074-12, 1994. Figure 32-26: Windowing Types SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 429 Signal Content Window Type Sine wave or combination of sine waves Hanning, Blackman-Harris Sine wave (amplitude accuracy is important) Flat Top Narrow-band random signal (vibration detail) Hanning Broad-band random (white noise) Hanning Closely spaced sine waves Blackman-Harris Signals with harmonics Blackman-Harris Unknown content Blackman-Harris Figure 32-27: Table of Applications vs. Window Types 430 Virtual Instruments SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope allows you to display and analyze the waveform of the signal from your transducer. This instrument draws a graph of the instantaneous input signal as a function of time. You can configure the settings of the SoundCheck Oscilloscope to take a linear average of the input signals as well. The units of the Y axis of the Oscilloscope are determined by the System Calibration Configuration. Controls for the Oscilloscope are similar to those in the Spectrum Analyzer and are defined in more detail in the Spectrum Analyzer section. Set to Time for Oscilloscope Select Start/Continuous to begin measuring, click this button again to freeze or stop the measurement Figure 32-28: Oscilloscope Triggering: All of the controls available in Spectrum are available except for the following: Average – Maximum - Minimum, Power - Complex, Window, Weighting, Apply Correction, Spectral Lines, dF, THD and X & Y Axis scale. Triggering can be used to automatically capture a spectrum when the signal level exceeds the value set in the “Trigger Level” field. Refer to Spectrum Analyzer on pg 423 for more information. Calculate Spectrum Off - FFTs are not being done in the background which makes it faster. On - Collect data while the Scope is running and then switch to FFT scope to view or save the spectrum. The spectrum acquired by Calculate Spectrum will be available in the Memory List. Controls Save to Memory: Saves the current measurement waveform to the Memory List. The data will appear in the Memory List as “Oscilloscope Waveform [L]”. Change the file name by selecting “Rename“ from the Memory Drop Down Menu in the Memory List. Right Click Functions Refer to Right Click Functions on pg 425 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 431 Real Time Analyzer The Real Time Analyzer (RTA) allows you to analyze a signal using Constant-Percentage Bandwidth (1-Nth octave) filters. This method of frequency analysis is inherently different than using the FFT. The FFT approach operates on a whole block of time data; e.g., a time block of 100 ms in length. The recursive digital filtering utilized in the RTA is a continuous process. For every input (each time sample from the audio interface), an output data value is obtained. This way, the RTA functions like a bank of analog 1-Nth octave filters that are wired in parallel. An RTA should be used when Analyzing non-linear audio devices (such as cell phones) Using complex signals (such as simulated or actual speech) Testing devices using pink noise or tone bursts This algorithm conforms to the ANSI S1.11 - 2004 class 0 standard. Note: As of SoundCheck 10.0, the RTA instrument is compatible with NI DAQmx devices. Note: When using a National Instruments DAQmx interface hardware you cannot open Multimeter and RTA instruments simultaneously. To use the RTA, select Real Time Analyzer (Ctrl+F8) from the Instruments drop down menu. The RTA will start as soon as it opens. The RTA wakes up in the same mode it was last used (e.g., Exp averaging with a Slow time constant using 1/3 octave filters). dB reference based on Signal Path Calibration settings Select Input Signal Path Select Weighting Figure 32-29: 1/Nth-Octave Real Time Analyzer SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 432 Spectrum Octave Band (was Filter Width) The RTA has 1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, and 1/24 octave digital recursive filters. The upper frequency range is based on the audio interface’s sampling frequency. The highest frequency that can be measured will be no more than one-half the audio interface sampling rate (Fsample). To measure beyond 22 kHz, choose a sampling rate higher than 44.1 kHz. Because of the different filter widths, the highest filter that is displayed will typically be lower than Fsample/2. For example, the highest 1/3 octave filter that can be used for a 44.1 kHz sampling rate is 16 kHz. To measure closer to the actual upper limit of 22 kHz, you must use filters that are narrower (e.g., 1/12 or 1/24 octave). The following controls operate the same as in the Spectrum Analyzer. Refer to Spectrum Analyzer on pg 423 for more information. Input Signal Path – Any predefined channel will be available for input Average Maximum Minimum Buffer Use Real Time Indicator Weighting Apply Correction Averaging Linear: Linear will average for only the number of averages entered (e.g., 13) and then stops measuring. When Linear averaging is selected, the Averages indicator will appear, specifying the number of averages currently completed. Exponential: Exponential averaging is a continuous process. It is equivalent to a running average. As the averaging time gets longer, the response of the filters slows down. Choice of Averaging Time: Fast (250 ms), Slow (1 s), User Defined (s). Controls Save to Memory: Saves the current measurement data to the Memory List. The curve will appear in the Memory List as “1/X Octave RTA [L]”. (1/X changes depending on the resolution of the measurement.) Change the file name by Selecting “Rename“ from the Memory Drop Down Menu in the Memory List. The standard Scale Legend, Graph Palette and Cursor Legend appear below the graph. See Axis Scaling, Zoom and Style Controls on pg 424 for more information. Right Click Functions Refer to Right Click Functions on pg 425 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 433 Distortion Analyzer The Distortion Analyzer measures the distortion or distortion and noise characteristics of the signal on the selected signal path. Measurement tab controls (Meas.) Signal Path control - Select any input signal path available in the Calibration Configuration Apply Correction control - Select to apply input correction is applied Measurement Type Select the type of distortion to be measured and then select the appropriate harmonics from the Distortion (Dist.) Tab. See Figure 32-30. THD Ratio IEEE - Same as in HarmonicTrak THD Ratio IEC - Same as in HarmonicTrak See Total Harmonic Distortion on pg 156 THD Residual - The power sum of the harmonics selected in the Dist. Tab. THD+N Ratio IEEE - Same as in HarmonicTrak THD+N Ratio IEC - Same as in HarmonicTrak See THD + Noise on pg 157 THD+N Residual - The level of all the noise and distortion products in the measurement bandwidth SINAD - Is the reciprocal of THD+N, if and only if THD+N is calculated without High and Low Pass filters in the Analysis Editor Figure 32-30: Meas. Tab Figure 32-30: Dist. Tab See Virtual Instrument THD+N Options on pg 158 Averaging Tab (Avg.) Averaging Type When setting the averaging time, be aware that averaging times greater than 250 mSec my be required to produce repeatable THD+N measurements. When selecting Continuous - Moving Avg, the default averaging time is Fast (250 mSec). When selecting Linear or Linear - Repeating, the default averaging time is 1 second as shown in Figure 32-31. The remaining tab controls are the same as the Multimeter. See Averaging Tab (Avg.) on pg 418, Filters Tab on pg 419 and Limits Tab on pg 419. For more details on THD+N Optimized, refer to THD + Noise on pg 157. Figure 32-31: Avg. Tab SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 434 Frequency Counter The Frequency Counter returns a precision frequency measurement of the dominant signal in the selected signal path. Combined with the Strip Chart recorder this can be used to determine if the device under test is playing back audio at a constant rate. The remaining tab controls are the same as the Multimeter. See Averaging Tab (Avg.) on pg 418, Filters Tab on pg 419 and Limits Tab on pg 419. Figure 32-32: Frequency Counter SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 435 Page intentionally left blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Virtual Instruments 436 SoundCheck ONE™ Introduction SoundCheck ONE is an entry-level SoundCheck system which is essentially a lower cost, simplified, version of SoundCheck coupled with the AmpConnect ISC or AudioConnect. SoundCheck ONE offers the capability to test loudspeakers, microphones and headphones within predetermined sequence templates. Figure 33-1: Final Display Although the user interface is the same as in the full version of SoundCheck, rather than using the Sequence Editor, SoundCheck ONE users are supplied with sequence templates. These templates serve as the starting point for all SoundCheck ONE tests and can be used to generate as many product specific sequences as desired by selecting parameters such as the stimulus signal, characteristics to be measured, frequency range, level and limits. SoundCheck ONE is aimed at customers who do not own a full version of SoundCheck and need a low cost and easy to set up system for basic production line tests of loudspeakers, microphones or headphones. While it offers the same accuracy, advanced algorithms and speed as the regular version of SoundCheck, its flexibility and test customization capabilities are restricted. It is a good entry point for a company testing their products for the first time or moving up from a more rudimentary test system. It can be upgraded to the full version of SoundCheck at any time for an additional fee. Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard runs when you start SoundCheck ONE. You can check “Do not show this dialog again” to stop the wizard from running at each startup. See Setup Wizard on page 11 for details. As of SoundCheck 16, hardware setup is simplified by Automatic Startup Configuration in the Hardware Editor. AmpConnect ISC or AudioConnect are detected when SoundCheck starts and Vp values are loaded automatically from the connected Listen Hardware device. (SoundCheck ONE requires either AmpConnect ISC or AudioConnect.) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck ONE™ 437 AudioConnect Hardware Setup Before calibrating the reference mic and/or before the first run of the sequence, open the Hardware Editor and select the Listen Hardware Tab. (This requires that the user has signed in with Engineer or Technician Access Level.) Right click on AudioConnect Device ID and select Assign Startup Default. Set the channels as instructed in the Sequence Template - Sequence Note you are using. Typical settings for each template: Loudspeaker Inputs: Channel 1 Mic In, Channel 2 Line In Mic Bias: On for SCM microphone Figure 33-2: Assign S Microphone Inputs: Channel 1 Mic In, Channel 2 Line In Mic Bias: On for SCM microphone Headphone Inputs: Channel 1 and 2 Line In Mic Bias: Off Template Sequences SoundCheck ONE template sequences are used to create customized sequences that are specific to a given product. The provided templates serve as a starting point, containing all the necessary steps to perform the essential measurements for their test application. The basic process of using SoundCheck ONE: Choose the appropriate template for the application Modify any necessary settings Save the template as a new sequence There is no limit as to how many custom sequences can be saved from these templates The typical setup for a SoundCheck ONE system is to have a separate test sequence for each product model that will be tested. Each sequence can have its own unique settings such as: stimulus range/level, tolerance limits, graphical displays, and data saving. Unlike the full version of SoundCheck, sequences in SoundCheck ONE cannot have their steps and layout modified, however the settings within the steps can be changed. AmpConnect/AudioConnect Self Test for SC ONE Included in the SC ONE sequence folder are Self Test sequences for AmpConnect ISC and AudioConnect. These are used to verify the operation of the hardware. They should not to be used as template sequences. 438 SoundCheck ONE™ SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setup & Calibration The required calibration will depend on which application is being tested. Choose from the three sub-headings below: Loudspeaker: AmpConnect: The calibration for the AmpConnect power amplifier is fixed, so no additional steps are required. AudioConnect: Calibrate the power amplifier according to the instructions in Amplifier Calibration Procedure on page 84. The Reference Microphone should be calibrated in either case. See Microphone Calibration Procedure on page 80. Prior to calibrating the microphone, the gain of the AmpConnect/AudioConnect Reference Mic channel must match the gain used in the AmpConnect/AudioConnect Message Step of the test sequence. See Auto Read on page 70. Microphone: The SC ONE Microphone sequence uses a substitution method to account for the response of the reference speaker. 1. Calibrate the Reference Microphone. See Microphone Calibration Procedure on page 80. 2. Open the sequence, C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\SC ONE\SC ONE Microphone (Measure Reference).sqc 3. Position the reference microphone at the test point in front of the reference speaker 4. Run the sequence to measure and record the response of the speaker 5. Remove the reference microphone and replace it with the DUT 6. Open and run the SC ONE Microphone sequence Note: These steps should be run at a regular interval to ensure accurate calibration of the reference speaker as environmental conditions change. Headphones: AmpConnect ISC: The headphone amplifier provides a unity gain output, so no calibration is required for the output. The ear simulators or couplers (signal paths “Ear Sim L” and “Ear Sim R”) should be calibrated according to the instructions in Microphone Calibration Procedure on page 80. AudioConnect: The headphone amp (or external power amp) should be calibrated to account for gain and frequency response. In this case, the two channels should be calibrated independently for more accurate results. Use the Headphone Amplifier Calibration sequence and follow the instructions for Headphone Amplifier Calibration in the AudioConnect Manual. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck ONE™ 439 Generating SoundCheck ONE Sequences 1. Refer to the sequence note PDF files for the SoundCheck ONE sequences, included in the Sequences > SC ONE folder, for complete instructions on setup and use. 2. Open one of the three template sequences which will serve as the starting point (Loudspeaker, Microphone or Headphones). There are versions for AudioConnect and AmpConnect ISC, named accordingly. “Microphone (Measure Reference)” is used to store the Reference Microphone Fundamental and Sensitivity, before using the “Microphone” measurement sequence. Figure 33-3: Template Sequences Important!: All sequences must be generated from one of these templates. Sequences cannot be created from scratch. 3. Use File > Save As to save a copy of the sequence with a new name. The new sequence file can be stored anywhere on the system. It does not need to be stored in the same folder as the template. Note: The templates are Read-only files and cannot be overwritten. 4. To modify sequence parameters click Setup from the SoundCheck Main Screen then choose the step category that you would like to modify (See the examples below). Note: The Sequence Editor can be opened to watch the progress of a sequence, but steps can only be edited through the Setup drop down list. 5. Click the green start button on the toolbar to run the sequence and see the result. 6. When finished making changes save the sequence (File > Save) to store your changes to disk. Note: 440 Figure 33-4: Setup Drop Down Menu For more information on the Template Sequences, please refer to the sequence note: “SoundCheck ONE Templates” found in the SoundCheck ONE sequence folder: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\SC One. SoundCheck ONE™ SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Editing The Sequence Editor is not used. All steps are grayed out. You can use it to view the progress of a sequence. All steps are accessed by using the Setup drop down menu on the SoundCheck Main Screen as noted above in Step 3 Steps cannot be added or removed from a sequence Step parameters can be modified Breakpoints cannot be added to a sequence Stimulus To edit the stimulus level and frequency range in a SoundCheck ONE sequence click Setup > Stimulus. This will open the stimulus editor. Make the desired changes then click 'OK'. The changes will be saved to disk when the sequence is saved. For details on Stimulus Step editing see Stimulus Editor on page 97. Note: SoundCheck ONE uses only Frequency stepped-sine sweep (Stweep™). No other stimulus types are available. See Frequency Stepped Sweep (Stweep™) Excitation Signal Parameters on page 97. Figure 33-5: Stimulus Step Limits To edit the limits in a SoundCheck ONE sequence click Setup > Limits. You will see a list of all the different limit steps in the sequence. Choose the one you would like to edit, and click 'OK'. The editor will open where you can make any desired changes then click 'OK'. The changes will be saved to disk when the sequence is saved. For details on Limit Step editing see Limits Editor on page 257. Figure 33-6: Response Limits Step SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck ONE™ 441 Display To edit the display in a SoundCheck ONE sequence, first click the tab for 'Final Display'. The windows for the sequence display will then open. For details on Display editing see Display Editor and Memory List on page 279. Add or remove windows, modify what data is shown via the Memory List, and change display preferences of the individual windows. The entire display is configurable. Once all necessary changes have been made click File > Save to save the sequence. Note: If you use both SoundCheck ONE and SoundCheck full version, you can switch between the two versions by selecting the appropriate Status.dat file under preferences. See Folder Paths on page 36. SoundCheck ONE operation mode is shown on the Main Screen title bar. The desktop wallpaper is the same as the full version of SoundCheck. Important!: If you save a sequence in SoundCheck Full Version, it cannot be opened in SoundCheck ONE. Figure 33-7: Final Display SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck ONE™ 442 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP Overview As of SoundCheck 15, you can control SoundCheck through TCP/IP. External control of SoundCheck is simpler, yet more powerful with the new TCP/IP control. This offers many advantages over the previous ActiveX controls (still available), such as the ability to connect to SoundCheck via any programming language, on any operating system, either locally or through a network. It also features a more powerful and expandable command format for interacting with SoundCheck. This is extremely valuable for anyone who needs to control SoundCheck from an external program, for example as part of an overall test plan or factory automation. For example, one computer can control multiple SoundCheck systems, simplifying production line measurements. This helps when integrating with LabVIEW Test Stand. TCP/IP control uses a JSON data format so that commands return information in a format that is easily parsed by any programming language. You can receive test data and results SoundCheck sequences can be opened and run through this API, but not modified Only one connection to SoundCheck can be used at any time Setup Click Edit on the Main Screen and select Preferences. Select the Advanced tab Check Enable TCP/IP Server. This automatically updates the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file with the Enable status and Port #. Window Security The first time you enable Telnet in SoundCheck Preferences, you may get a Windows Security Alert prompting you to allow SoundCheck to communicate on the selected network. Click Allow Access and continue. Figure 34-1: Advanced Tab Manual Setup The “Enable TCP/IP” and “Port #” settings are stored in the SoundCheck 16.0.ini file found in the root of the SoundCheck folder. [External Control] TCP IP SERVER ENABLED = TRUE or FALSE TCP IP SERVER PORT # = 4444 These settings can be modified manually if necessary. Server IP address If running on the local computer this is “127.0.0.1” or “localhost”. If accessing a computer on the network, it is the IP address of the target PC, e.g.: 192.168.0.107. You will need to know the IP address of the computers running SoundCheck in order to control them over a network. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 443 Instrument Open Close Custom Step When calling the new custom step from TCP IP the command should be formatted as: Instruments.OpenVICFile(path, mute?) Instruments.CloseAll() Controlling SoundCheck with TELNET Windows Telnet Setup Windows users will need to enable Telnet. Telnet is enabled by default on Mac computers. 1. Click Start > Control Panel 2. Click Programs and Features 3. Click Turn Windows features on or off 4. In the Windows Features dialog box, check the Telnet Client check box 5. Click OK. The system installs the appropriate files. This will take a few seconds to a minute. Using Telnet 1. Edit SoundCheck Preferences. See Setup on page 443. 2. Open SoundCheck 16.0 3. Mac OS Use the Terminal editor enter: “telnet localhost 4444” and hit Return Figure 34-2: Mac Telnet Editor Windows OS Open a Command Line window enter: “telnet localhost 4444” and hit Return Figure 34-3: Windows Telnet 4. “Connected to SoundCheck” confirms that the connection to SoundCheck is complete. Then it is a matter of entering commands with the proper syntax and then executing them. See Command Set Definition on page 450 & Command List and Return Format on page 451. 444 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP Figure 34-4: Connected SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Run a Sequence and Retrieve Data Now that you have connected to SoundCheck through Telnet, you can start to execute commands. The following example covers manually opening a sequence, running a sequence from Telnet and retrieving results. 1. From the SoundCheck File menu, open the Calibration/Self Test.sqc file. (Later you'll learn how to do this from Telnet as well.) 2. Open Telnet as shown in Using Telnet on page 444. Telnet should show: Connected to SoundCheck 3. To Run the sequence, type the following then hit Enter/Return: Sequence.Run You will need to click on the SoundCheck window and answer any prompts from the sequence. 4. Telnet returns a JSON response: {"cmdCompleted":true,"returnData":... Figure 34-5: Sequence.Run Example The response format is defined in Command List and Return Format on page 451. 5. After the sequence has run you can retrieve a curve using: Command: MemoryList.Get('Curve', 'Parameter'). See Memory List Commands on page 454. 6. Type the following and hit Enter/Return: MemoryList.Get('Curve', 'Fundamental [Direct In 1]') The JSON response is: {"cmdCompleted":true,"returnType":"MemoryListCurve","returnData":{"Found":true,"Curve":{"Name":"F undamental [Direct In1]","XData":[20000,16000,...,31.5,25,20],"Data":[0.3442260151137711,...,3.0393 952906618722],"ZData":"","XUnit":"Hz","YUnit":"V/ V","ZUnit":"deg.","XDataScale":"Lin","YDataScale":"dB","ZDataScale":"Lin","XdBRef":1,"YdBRef":1,"Z dBRef":1,"XAxisScale":"Log","YAxisScale":"Lin","ZAxisScale":"Lin","Protected":false}},"errorType":"","e rrorDescription":"","originalCommand":"MemoryList.Get('Curve', 'Fundamental [Direct In 1]')","resolvedCommand":"MemoryList- Get('Curve', 'Fundamental [Direct In 1]')"} Every command sent via TCP/IP gets back a JSON formatted text string. The definitions for these are found in Command Returns on page 450. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 445 C# Example App This shows what can be created using C# and how it can be used to control SoundCheck. The example executable is in the main SoundCheck folder: C:\SoundCheck 16.0-x64\External Control Examples\C Sharp\Application\C Sharp Example.exe. Figure 34-6: C# API Example 1. Run SoundCheck - Click “Select Executable” and navigate to: C:\SoundCheck 16.0x64\SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).exe. Click “Run SoundCheck”. You can also have SoundCheck running and then open the C Sharp Example.exe. Window State - Allows you to select how SoundCheck opens: Standard, Hidden or Minimized. 2. Connect to SoundCheck - Enter the IP Address and Port number of the PC to control, e.g.: 127.0.0.1 and 4444. Click “Connect to SoundCheck”. These fields are disabled as soon as the app has connected to SoundCheck, and enabled again if it is determined that the connection has been lost. 3. Open Sequence - Click “Select Sequence” and navigate to your sequence folder and select a sequence, e.g.: Complete test.sqc Click “Open Sequence” to load it into SoundCheck. 4. Set Lot Number - Click “Set Lot Number” to send data to the Lot Number field on the SoundCheck Main Toolbar. 5. Set Serial Number - Click “Set Serial Number” to send data to SoundCheck 6. Click “Run Sequence” 446 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 7. Curves - Allows you to query curves from the Memory List. This is only a preview window. It does not allow you to view multiple curves with limits. Steps - Shows the order of steps in the sequence along with channel settings and Limits results. 8. Click “Exit SoundCheck” when finished Log Window - This shows all of the activity occurring with the C Sharp App. LabVIEW Example App The example app shows what can be created in LabVIEW to control SoundCheck. It also works as a control panel to test the operation of the available commands. The example executable is in the main SoundCheck folder: C:\SoundCheck 16.0-x64\External Control Examples\LabVIEW\Application\LabVIEW Example.exe The LabVIEW example uses the same Command Set Definition as the C# Sharp example. See Command Set Definition on page 450 and Command List and Return Format on page 451. Figure 34-7: LabVIEW API Example Server IP address: If running on the local computer this is “127.0.0.1” or “localhost”. If accessing a computer on the network, it is the IP address of the target PC, e.g.: 192.168.0.107. You will need to know the IP address of the computers running SoundCheck in order to control them over a network. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 447 Port: Port number of the selected SoundCheck system Connected: Shows that the selected system is responding Commands: List of available commands and the proper syntax to use when entering the command Command: Enter a command from the list and click Execute Command Return Data: Defines the format for each of the listed data types It shows information based on the most recently run MemoryList Command, e.g.: “MemoryList.GetAllData” shows the data fields in Figure 34-7. The Up/Down arrows to the left of each data type allow you to cycle through the data from the sequence run. Response Details: Shows if a command completed and the type of data returned as well as showing details on errors. Response JSON: Shows the data contents of the Response JSON. See Command Returns on page 450. Each data return type has a uniform standard which is defined in Command List and Return Format on page 451. LabVIEW Return Library Located in C:\SoundCheck 16.0-x64\API\LabVIEW Return Library This collection of VIs is included to help you get data out of the JSON Response. Note: 448 LabVIEW 2016 or later is required to use these VIs. Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Python Example Python is an object-oriented scripting language that offers some advantages over C++. The example included with SoundCheck shows off the simplicity of SoundCheck control via Python. Compatible with Python 2 and 3. The example script included with SoundCheck will: Open SoundCheck Automatically run the “Complete Test” sequence After the sequence is complete, results are passed back to the python script for further processing Requirements Before running the Python script you will need to: Uncheck “Run Setup Wizard” in Preferences > Startup Uncheck “Show Quick Start” in Preferences > Startup Uncheck “Show Login Window on Startup” in Preferences > Login Check “Enable TCP/IP Server” in Preferences > Advanced See Preferences on page 35 for more information From a Command Line, run the Python script by calling: "python <SoundCheck root>\External Control Examples\Python\Scripts\ SimpleSoundCheckExample.py" SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 449 Command Set Definition The commands sent to SoundCheck via TCP/IP must conform to these rules. This is used in C Sharp, Telnet or any other communication method, via TCP/IP. SoundCheck commands are built of period (.) separated command segments, where each segment may take parameters All parameters must be enclosed by single-quotation marks, a.k.a. apostrophe ('). This includes both string and numeric values. All commands must be completed with the \r\n (Carriage Return + Line Feed) sequence. You don’t need to add these when using Telnet or any other terminal app that automatically adds Carriage Return & Line Feed. Please note that you will need to do this only when programming your own TCP interface for sending commands to SoundCheck. The parentheses after a command are only needed if the command needs parameters. If there are no parameters associated with a command or command segment, and parentheses are added anyway, SoundCheck will ignore them. Commands ARE case sensitive Command Returns Every command sent gets back a JSON formatted text string with the following fields: cmdCompleted: true or false True indicates that the command was recognized as a valid SoundCheck command and was executed to completion. If the command is not recognized, it times out, or there is an error while trying to execute the command, cmdCompleted will be false. It does not indicate what the result was, e.g.: Sequence.Save - cmdCompleted = true can be returned even if the sequence is marked “Read Only” and cannot be saved. returnData - This field contains the data that is returned by SoundCheck after executing a command. This may be the result of a query, e.g.: Sequence.GetName, or it may indicate if a requested operation successfully completed, e.g.: SoundCheck.SetSerialNumber. returnData will be different for each command. See Command List and Return Format on page 451. returnType - This field indicates the data type of the returnData, e.g.: Boolean, String, StringArray, etc. errorType - If an error occurs, this field shows the error type, e.g.: Timeout, Unknown Command, etc. errorDescription - If an error occurs, this field shows the error description originalCommand - This is the original command that was sent to SoundCheck resolvedCommand - This is the actual resolved command that SoundCheck executed originalCommand and resolvedCommand fields are provided for troubleshooting. 450 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Command List and Return Format The following legend may be used to determine the data type of a field by examining the value in the example JSON data, returned by SoundCheck API. For example, if you see “false” in the result, you can interpret that as a Boolean, which may be either false or true. Data Type Value Boolean String String (with three possible values: "a", "b", or "c") Number (Integer) Number (Double) false "string" "a/b/c" 0 0.1 The following list of commands are currently available for use with SoundCheck. Every command issued gets back a Return. Some Returns show as “Void” which simply means that no data was returned. An acknowledgment is still returned indicating that the command completed. SoundCheck Commands Command/Parameter Command: SoundCheck.SetLoginLevel('Parameter') Return Data Void Parameter: Login level (0, 1, or 2) 0 = Engineer, 1 = Technician, 2 = Operator Description: Used to set the user login level Command: SoundCheck.SetUserName('Parameter') Void Parameter: User Name Description: Used to set the user name of the currently logged in user Command: SoundCheck.SetSerialNumber('Parameter') Void Parameter: Serial Number Description: Used to set the serial number of the device under test Command: SoundCheck.SetLotNumber('Parameter') Void Parameter: Lot Number Description: Used to set the lot number for a batch of devices to be tested Command: SoundCheck.GetLoginLevel {"Value":0} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the login level of the currently logged in user. It returns an integer: 0 = Engineer, 1 = Technician, 2 = Operator. Command: SoundCheck.GetLotNumber {"Value":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the lot number of the batch of devices currently being tested Command: SoundCheck.GetSerialNumber {"Value":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the serial number for the device under test SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 451 Command/Parameter Command: SoundCheck.GetUserName Return Data {"Value":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the user name of the currently logged in user Command: SoundCheck.GetLicenseStatus {"Valid":false,"KeyID":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the license status of SoundCheck. It indicates whether a valid hardware key was found, and if so, what the key ID is. Command: SoundCheck.GetStatus {"Busy":false} Parameter: None Description: Used to query SoundCheck for its status and determine if SoundCheck is busy, or available to execute a command such as, run a sequence. Command: SoundCheck.Exit Void Parameter: None Description: Used to request SoundCheck to exit. Command: SoundCheck.SetFloatStrings('Parameter1','Parameter2','Parameter3') Void Parameter: 1. String representing "Not a Number" 2. String representing "Positive Infinity" 3. String representing "Negative Infinity" Description: For floating point numbers, SoundCheck uses "NaN" for "Not a Number", "Infinity" for "Positive Infinity", and "-Infinity" for "Negative Infinity". If your programming environment use different strings to represent these values, send this command with all three parameters. For example, for clients written in Python and Matlab will need to send SetFloatStrings('NaN', 'Inf', '-Inf'). JavaScript does not support any of these values, so the command should be SetFloatStrings('null','null','null'). A client written in any language that uses "NaN", "Infinity", and "-Infinity", which are the same strings that SoundCheck uses, does not need to send the SetFloatStrings command, if it is the only TCP client connecting to SoundCheck. Command: Instruments.OpenVICFile(path, mute?) Void Parameter: 1. ‘x:\file path\VicFile.vic’ 2. ‘TRUE’ or ‘FALSE’ Command: Instruments.CloseAll() Parameter: None Description: Allows you to open and close virtual instrument configuration files (.VIC) 452 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Sequence Commands Command/Parameter Command: Sequence.Open('Parameter') Return Data {"Value":false} Parameter: Sequence Path Description: Used to request SoundCheck to open a sequence. If a sequence is already open, SoundCheck may display a dialog to save or discard the existing sequence. That dialog needs to be closed for this command to complete, otherwise it will time out. Command: Sequence.Run or { Sequence.Run('Parameter') "Success?": false, Optional Parameter: Timeout in milliseconds "Pass?": false, "Margin": 0.1, Description: Used to request SoundCheck to run the currently open sequence. SoundCheck has a default timeout of 5 minutes to run a sequence. If a longer sequence needs to be run, the optional timeout may be included. For example, for a timeout of 10 minutes, the command will be: "StepResults": [{ "Evaluated": false, "Verdict": false, "Margin": 0.1, Sequence.Run('600000') "Limit": "String", "Max/Min": "String" }] } {"Value":false} Command: Sequence.Save Parameter: None Description: Used to request SoundCheck to save the currently open sequence. Command: Sequence.GetDuration {"Value":0.1} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the duration of the last run sequence. Command: Sequence.GetName {"Value":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the name of the currently open sequence. Command: Sequence.GetPath {"Value":"String"} Parameter: None Description: Used to get the path of the currently open sequence. Command: Sequence.GetStepsList [{ Parameter: None "Name": "String", Description: Used to get a list of all the steps in the currently open sequence. "Type": "String", "InputChannelNames": ["String"], "OutputChannelNames": ["String"] }] SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 453 Memory List Commands Command/Parameter Command: MemoryList.GetAllNames Return Data { Parameter: None "Curves": ["String"], Description: Used to get names of all curves, values, results, and waveforms in the Memory List "Values": ["String"], "Results": ["String"], "Waveforms": ["String"] } { Command: MemoryList.Get('Curve', 'Parameter') "Found": false, Parameter: Curve Name "Curve": { "Name": "String", Description: Used to get data for a specific curve from the Memory List. The response indicates whether or not the curve was found, and its data, if found. "XData": [0.1], "YData": [0.1], "ZData": [0.1], "XUnit": "String", "YUnit": "String", "ZUnit": "String", "XDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "YDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "ZDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "XdBRef": 0.1, "YdBRef": 0.1, "ZdBRef": 0.1, "XAxisScale": "Log/Lin", "YAxisScale": "Log/Lin", "ZAxisScale": "Log/Lin", "Protected": false } } 454 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Command/Parameter Command: Return Data { MemoryList.Get('Value', 'Parameter') "Found": false, Parameter: Value Name "Value": { "Name": "String", Description: Used to get data for a specific value from the Memory List. The response indicates whether or not the value was found, and its data, if found. "XData": 0.1, "YData": 0.1, "ZData": 0.1, "XUnit": "String", "YUnit": "String", "ZUnit": "String", "XDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "YDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "ZDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "XdBRef": 0.1, "YdBRef": 0.1, "ZdBRef": 0.1, "Protected": false } } { Command: MemoryList.Get('Result', 'Parameter') "Found": false, Parameter: Result Name "Result": { "Name": "String", Description: Used to get data for a specific result from the Memory List. The response indicates whether or not the result was found, and its data, if found. "Passed": false, "Limit": "String", "Unit": "String", "Scale": "String", "Max/Min": "String", "Margin": 0.1, "Protected": false } } SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP 455 Command/Parameter Return Data { Command: MemoryList.Get('Waveform', 'Parameter') "Found": false, Parameter: Waveform Name "Waveform": { "Name": "String", Description: Used to get data for a specific waveform from the Memory List. The response indicates whether or not the waveform was found, and its data, if found. "Waveform": { "X0": 0.1, "dX": 0.1, "YData": [0.1] }, "XUnit": "String", "YUnit": "String", "YDataScale": "dB/Lin/Pwr", "YdBRef": 0.1, "YAxisScale": "Log/Lin", "Overload?": false, "Protected": false } Command: MemoryList.GetAllData Parameter: None Description: Used to get data for all curves, values, results, and waveforms in the Memory List } { "Curves":[<See data format for "Curve" in Return Data for MemoryList.Get('Curve', 'Parameter')>], "Values":[<See data format for "Value" in Return Data for MemoryList.Get('Value', 'Parameter')>], "Results":[<See data format for "Result" in Return Data for MemoryList.Get('Result', 'Parameter')>], "Waveforms":[<See data format for "Waveform" in Return Data for MemoryList.Get('Waveform', 'Parameter')>] } Hardware Commands Command/Parameter Command: Hardware.Object('Parameter1').SetAddress(' Parameter2') Return Data Void Parameter: 1. Bluetooth Device Name - BTC device ID (e.g. 'BTC1') 2. Bluetooth Address - (e.g. 'AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF') Description: Used to set the bluetooth address for a Portland Tool & Die BTC (or BQC) device 456 Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck® From ActiveX - DEPRECATED Important! ActiveX control is being replaced by TCP/IP control. Please refer to Controlling SoundCheck with TCP/IP on page 443 for more information. The following information is provided for legacy purposes and to assist with converting existing ActiveX controls to TCP/IP. ActiveX Control - Legacy Examples (Windows Only) You can run SoundCheck test sequences from any programming language that supports ActiveX You can receive test data and results SoundCheck is opened in this process, but the SoundCheck window can be hidden SoundCheck sequences can be opened and run in this mode, but not modified A valid Hardware Key is required to register ActiveX components during SoundCheck installation. The Hardware Key is not required to use ActiveX in Demo Mode. Important! Please make sure only one version of SoundCheck is installed on the computer before using ActiveX control. Otherwise, the wrong version might get called. In terms of Microsoft’s® Component Object Model (COM), SoundCheck is an ActiveX Server, while the software to control SoundCheck is an ActiveX Client. It is important that the developer be familiar with these programming concepts before attempting to use SoundCheck’s API. Listen, Inc. does not provide a static library to link to. Examples are in included in the SoundCheck installation folder: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\External Control Examples\_Legacy ActiveX Examples Visual Basic (2010): See Visual Basic Example on page 458 C#: See C # Example on page 459 LabVIEW’s ActiveX Library SoundCheck is written in LabVIEW. There are many ways to programmatically obtain SoundCheck's ActiveX object, but the most efficient way is to import its Type Library into your project. The SoundCheck program folder contains a file: "SoundCheck 16.0.tlb". This is the SoundCheck Type Library which contains a superset of LabVIEW 2016, plus SoundCheck’s interfaces. You add the TLB as a reference into your project. The main ActiveX interface used to control SoundCheck is the Call Method of the VI object. The Call Method defines inputs to a VI, runs the VI, and then receives the outputs from the VI. The Call is synchronous, so your program execution will stay on that line of code until the Call is completed. Starting Up SoundCheck SoundCheck can be started via a shell object as a command line invocation, or when the COM object is created. In our examples, ActiveX is not used to start SoundCheck. Instead, a Windows® "command line" command is used. Example: In Visual Basic the line of code is: Shell "C:\SoundCheck 16.0\SoundCheck 16.0.exe" If your SoundCheck folder is not in the root directory, replace the beginning of the path, with the path to the SoundCheck folder on your system. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED 457 Command Line Options SoundCheck interprets three command line options: -m – Minimize SoundCheck immediately after it starts up (SoundCheck main screen is accessible) -h – Hide the SoundCheck Main Screen so that it cannot be brought into view even by clicking the SoundCheck task bar button (Prevents access to the SoundCheck main screen options) Note: The only restriction on these options is that -m and -h cannot be used together. Visual Basic Example The example executable file can be run to show its general use. The source code files are included in the example folder. C:\SoundCheck 16.0\External Control Examples\_Legacy ActiveX Examples\VB2010 Example.exe This line of code is used to start SoundCheck. The Main window is hidden. Shell """C:\SoundCheck 16.0\SoundCheck 16.0.exe"" -h -s" Figure 35-1: Visual Basic Panel Select Command Options: None - SoundCheck opens in a normal window Hidden - SoundCheck is hidden from view Minimized - SoundCheck is opened but the window is minimized 1. Select SoundCheck version to run - SoundCheck 16.0, then click Run SoundCheck 2. Select sequence to open - ActiveX & Test Stand example, then click Open Sequence 3. Enter Serial Number and click Set Serial Number 4. Enter Lot Number and click Set Lot Number 5. Click Run Sequence - Get Curve Names 6. Click Exit SoundCheck to close 458 Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual C # Example The example executable file can be run to show its general use. The source code files are included in the example folder. C:\SoundCheck 16.0\External Control Examples\_Legacy ActiveX Examples\C Sharp\Application\C Sharp Example.exe 1. Launch SoundCheck. Check SoundCheck Main Screen and dismiss open dialog windows. 2. Press any key to load sequence. Check SoundCheck Main Screen and dismiss open dialog windows. Figure 35-2: C # Example 3. Run Sequence Creating the VI ActiveX Object and Calling SoundCheck Here are some Visual Basic lines of code that illustrate how to create the VI object you need and then how to use it to communicate with SoundCheck. Only paramValues (0) is an input to ControlSC.vi. You must set the remaining seven paramValues to dummy values prior to making the Call. After the Call returns, paramValues (1) through (7) will contain values returned by the VI. Set lvApp = CreateObject("SoundCheck111.Application") lvPath = "ControlSC.vi" Set lvVI = lvApp.GetVIReference(lvPath) paramNames(0) = "Command" paramNames(1) = "Success?" paramNames(2) = "Pass?" paramNames(3) = "Margin" paramNames(4) = "Table" paramNames(5) = "Xdatapoints" paramNames(6) = "Ydatapoints" paramNames(7) = "Zdatapoints" paramValues(0) = "serial " & txtSerialNum paramValues(1) = False paramValues(2) = False paramValues(3) = 0# paramValues(4) = "" paramValues(5) = "" paramValues(6) = "" paramValues(7) = "" lvVI.Call paramNames, paramValues SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED 459 API Specification (Windows) SoundCheck’s ControlSC.vi The VI that you Call is ControlSC.vi, which is embedded in the application's executable file. ControlSC.vi has the following inputs and outputs (not all outputs are returned by every command): Parameter / Function Input or Output? Type Description [0] - Command Input string One of seven commands directing SoundCheck perform an action. The command word may be followed by parameters that are separated by spaces, all in the same string. [1] - Success? Output boolean Tells whether or not the command and action were successful. [2] - Pass? Output boolean Tells whether or not the test sequence passed or failed overall, typically as configured in the final Display Step. [3] - Margin Output double float The margin of Pass or Fail in the last Limits Step of a test sequence. [4] - Table Output string Multi-purpose table of information, in standard tab-delimited spreadsheet format, in which columns are separated by tabs and rows are separated by CR-LF. [5] - Xdatapoints Output array of double floats Array of X values of requested data curve. Example: Frequency in Hz. [6] - Ydatapoints Output array of double floats Array of Y values of requested data curve. Example: Magnitude in dB. [7] - Zdatapoints Output array of double floats Array of Z values of requested data curve. Example: Phase in deg. Common Properties of the Success? Returned Parameter For all seven commands, the "Success?" parameter returns a FALSE if SoundCheck was busy or if the command was not understood. For example, SoundCheck is busy and cannot process any commands if it is not finished processing the last command that was sent or a test sequence is running. If "Success?" returns a FALSE, SoundCheck is probably busy, and therefore it is suggested practice to reissue the command until Success? = True. Note: 460 Do not reissue the command more than about 10 times, which should take a total of less than one second. Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The Seven Commands of the “Command” Input 1. Open - Action: Loads a desired test sequence into SoundCheck and prepares it for execution. Unloads the previously loaded sequence. If this command is not issued, SoundCheck will load its default sequence at start-up. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “open <sqc>” string <sqc> must contain full path of sequence file [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if the requested sequence was opened successfully. FALSE if: Opening a sequence not currently permitted [2] - Pass? FALSE [3] - Margin 0.0# [4] - Table NULL boolean Sequence file not found or path invalid Sequence file corrupt One or more steps in the sequence not found or is corrupt Not used, but input should still be initialized to FALSE Not used, input value should be zero. string Table – One row for each step in the sequence. Four columns, as follows: Output channel Input channel Step category (3-letter abbreviation) Step name [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used Example: open C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\Loudspeakers\Fundamental.sqc SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED 461 2. Lot - Action: Sets the Lot Number in SoundCheck. This Lot Number will remain in force until it is changed. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “lot <number>” string <number> - any alphanumeric characters [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if the Lot Number was set successfully [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean Not used; but input should still be initialized to FALSE [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Not used; input value should be zero [4] - Table NULL string Table – One row for each step in the sequence. Four columns, as follows: Output channel Input channel Step category (3-letter abbreviation) Step name [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used Example: lot SC200108 3. Serial - Action: Sets the Serial Number in SoundCheck. This Serial Number will remain in force until it is changed (the sequence may be configured to change it as well). Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “serial <sn>” string <sn> - serial number (any alphanumeric characters) [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if the Serial Number was set successfully. [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean Not used; but input should still be initialized to FALSE [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Not used; input value should be zero. [4] - Table NULL Not used [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used Example: serial LSX00844 462 Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 4. Run - Action: Runs the test sequence currently loaded in SoundCheck. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “run” string [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if the sequence ran to completion, regardless of whether or not it passed. FALSE if running a sequence not currently permitted, or Sequence aborted at some point. [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean TRUE if sequence passes [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Overall margin [4] - Table NULL string One row for each step in the sequence. Three columns, as follows: - Pass or FAIL - Margin - Limit-Max/Min info [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used 5. Names - Action: Returns a list of curve names generated by the last test sequence run. If no sequence was run or if the sequence did not generate any curves, the list is empty. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “names” string [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if a list of curve names was returned, even if it was empty. [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean TRUE if sequence passes [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Not used [4] - Table NULL string One column: the curve names [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used Command string: names SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED 463 6. Curve - Action: Returns a binary representation of the data from the requested curve, and other curve info. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “curve <cn>” string <cn> - curve name obtained from “names” command [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if the requested data was returned. FALSE if the requested curve was not found among the curves generated by the last sequence run. [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean Not used [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Not used [4] - Table NULL string 17 rows, 2 columns. A table of information about the data values including units and log scaling. The first column contains the item names, the second column the item values: N points - number of data points in the curve X data - "dB" or "lin" Y data - "dB" or "lin" Z data - "dB" or "lin" X axis - "log" or "lin" Y axis - "log" or "lin" Z axis - "log" or "lin" X unit - such as "Hz" Y unit - such as "Pa", "V" (floating point numbers are used so prefixes such as mV are not used) Z unit - such as "deg" X dB ref - dB reference, in floating point or scientific notation Y dB ref - dB reference, in floating point or scientific notation Z dB ref - dB reference, in floating point or scientific notation Single val? - "True" or "False", True meaning that only the Y value of only the first data point is of interest. [5] - Xdatapoints NULL double float array Xdatapoints [6] - Ydatapoints NULL double float array Ydatapoints [7] - Zdatapoints NULL double float array Zdatapoints Example: “curve Fundamental [L]” 464 Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 7. Exit - Action: Exit SoundCheck. SoundCheck and LabVIEW Run-Time will quit and close. Parameter / Function Input Output Remarks [0] - Command “exit” string [1] - Success? FALSE boolean TRUE if SoundCheck started exiting. [2] - Pass? FALSE boolean Not used [3] - Margin 0.0# double float Not used [4] - Table NULL Not used [5] - Xdatapoints NULL Not used [6] - Ydatapoints NULL Not used [7] - Zdatapoints NULL Not used SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED 465 Page Intentionally Left Blank 466 Controlling SoundCheck From ActiveX - DEPRECATED SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck Note: This requires optional module 2010 - Save to Database. Important! As of SoundCheck 8, the procedure for setting up a database has changed. The following instructions should be reviewed even if you already have a database working with SoundCheck. Important! As of SoundCheck 13, SoundCheck x86 requires 32 bit Access/SQL drivers for 32 bit databases. SoundCheck x64 requires 64 bit Access/SQL drivers for 64 bit databases. You cannot run 32 and 64 bit databases at the same time on a computer. Creating an ODBC Connection for MS Access ODBC Connection Rules Windows 64 bit OS: In Windows 64 bit you have the choice of using 64 bit SoundCheck and Access or 32 bit SoundCheck and Access. The “bitness” of both must match. SoundCheck 64 bit - You must use a 64 bit version of MS Access along with the 64 bit ODBC tool. The 64-bit version of the Odbcad32.exe file is located in the %systemdrive%\Windows\System32 folder (both files are named Odbcad32.exe but they are not the same) NOTE: The default installation of MS Office is 32 bit. You will need to install MS Office 64 bit instead. SoundCheck 32 bit - You must use a 32 bit version of MS Access along with the 32 bit ODBC tool. The 32-bit version of the Odbcad32.exe file is located in: %systemdrive%\Windows\SysWoW64 folder Windows 32 bit OS: In Windows 32 bit you must use the 32 bit versions of all programs noted above. As of SoundCheck 13, SoundCheck x86 requires 32 bit Access/SQL drivers for 32 bit databases. SoundCheck x64 requires 64 bit Access/SQL drivers for 64 bit databases. You cannot run 32 and 64 bit databases at the same time on a computer. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck 467 Example Database Rather than set up your own database, please use the one included with SoundCheck. Copy "C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Database\Blank SoundCheck Database.mdb" and paste it in the desired location. Rename it so it is relevant to your application. Next, point your ODBC driver to it. The file must not be set to Ready Only. If you start from our blank database, you will not need to open Access to start writing to the database. 32 bit Example: Using SoundCheck 32 bit with MS Office 2010 (or later) 32 bit installed Copy "Blank SoundCheck Database.mdb" to "SoundCheck Test.mdb". The default location is: C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Database. Open the 32 bit ODBC from C:\Windows\SysWoW64\odbcad32.exe. (The 32-bit version of the Odbcad32.exe file is located in: %systemdrive%\Windows\SysWoW64 See Figure 36-1 Click the System DSN tab Click Add to create a new DSN Select the Microsoft Access Driver from the list and click Finish Figure 36-1: Create DSN In the Data Source Name field enter "SoundCheck DSN" In the Database section click Select Navigate to the location of your .MDB file: "C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Database\SoundCheck Test.mdb" Click OK to exit out of the open editor windows Figure 36-2: Select MDB 468 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Open the default sequence, "C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Sequences\How To examples\Autosave.sqc" Edit the Autosave to DB step and enter "SoundCheck DSN" as the DSN name. Do not browse to the .MDB file. Run the sequence and store data to the Access database. Use Access to look at the Datarun_Table to confirm that data was written. Figure 36-3: Autosave to DB Relationship of Access Tables for SoundCheck Figure 36-4 shows the relationship of tables in an Access database used with SoundCheck. Figure 36-4: Table Relationships - SoundCheck Database SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck 469 Supported Databases SoundCheck’s Autosave feature currently supports the following databases: Microsoft Access 2003, 2007, 2010, 2013 (*.MDB files) Microsoft SQL Server 2005, 2008, 2014 and 2016 See 64 bit vs 32 bit ODBC Connection Rules on page 467 Database Setup Steps You need to perform the following steps in order to make a successful database connection: 1. Determine the required “bitness” of the programs used. See ODBC Connection Rules on page 467. 2. Determine the data store 3. Ensure that the data store contains the correct schema 4. Create the appropriate connection descriptor 5. Configure SoundCheck to use this descriptor Determining the Data Store The following data storage scenarios are supported: Local data storage Remote data storage Local storage means that data is stored on a hard disk of the computer running SoundCheck. SoundCheck can write to an Access database file (mdb) or to a local database such as SQL Server Express. As a rule of thumb, if you want to set up a quick way of saving data for your own use and are familiar with MS Access, then use a .MDB file. If you need System Administrators’ assistance in setting up the database, or you plan on integrating this data into your enterprise, then SQL Server would be more appropriate. Choosing MS Access for Local Storage Installation of MS Access drivers (also known as Jet 4.0 Database Engine) is required for interfacing to .MDB files. These drivers can be downloaded separately as 2007 Office System Driver: Data Connectivity Components: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=23734 The MS Access application is not required to be installed for writing to a .MDB file, but you do need it to create a new .MDB file. Rather than set up your own database, please use the one included with SoundCheck. See Creating an ODBC Connection for MS Access on page 467. Make sure that the file is on a local disk, not a shared network disk, as this will significantly affect performance. 470 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SQL Server for Local Storage If you choose SQL Server Express, the database engine must be installed. SQL Server Express is freely distributed by Microsoft at no cost. Select SQL Server Express 32 bit or 64 bit depending on the “bitness” of the database application you will be using. See ODBC Connection Rules on page 467. Creating a Schema for Local Storage 1. Open a command prompt window, e.g Start Menu > Run… and type cmd.exe 2. Execute command: cd C:\SoundCheck 16.0\database (change path to your SoundCheck install folder) 3. Execute command: sqlcmd -S localhost\SQLExpress -i createSchema.sql “SQLExpress” is the default name created in the installation of SQL Server Express. If you use a different name in the installation, you must use that same name here. SQL Server for Remote Storage Remote storage means that the data will be stored outside the computer, which must be connected to a network. If this scenario matches your environment, you would need to know the following information: The name of the database server The name of the database table The authentication parameters (account name and password) No database software is required for remote storage, but drivers are required. Since SQL Server is an enterprise class database, its installation should be performed by a qualified Database Administrator (DBA), and is beyond the scope of this document. It is recommended that the SQL script included in the SoundCheck Database folder, createSchema.sql, be forwarded to the DBA for installation. The DBA may need to modify the script to accommodate your company’s database administration policy. Creating the Connection Descriptor Regardless of data store, SoundCheck relies upon Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Universal Data Links (UDL) to describe how database connections are to be established. The descriptor specifies where the storage is, and which driver SoundCheck will use to communicate with the database. About DSN A Data Source Name (DSN) descriptor is required for database connections using ODBC drivers. A DSN can be of System, User or File types. Choose System DSN if you are not sure which one to use. About UDL A UDL descriptor is required for database connections using OLE DB drivers, as well as ODBC drivers. Like a File DSN, UDL connection parameters are stored as a connection string in a text file. DSN or UDL? SoundCheck can use either set of drivers to connect to a database. Which set you will use would most likely come from other software requirements, if any. For example, there may be a 3rd party application that requires SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck 471 one or the other, and SoundCheck can use the same drivers to ease deployment. Sometimes a DSN would already be created for you by your IT department. The most straightforward method is to create a UDL file. Creating a UDL Definition for SQL Server Follow these directions to create an UDL file that connects to SQL Server (any edition). 1. Make sure that a database that contains SoundCheck’s schema has been created and available on the network. If you are using local storage, make sure that SQL Server Express is installed and schema created. 2. Create a new Microsoft Data Link file from Windows Explorer. If this choice is not available, you can create an empty text file and rename it with a .udl extension. The file will then be displayed as Microsoft Data Link document. 3. Double-click the .udl file. The Data Link Properties dialog is displayed. 4. Click on the Provider tab as in Figure 36-5. Figure 36-5: Provider Tab 5. Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server. 6. Select Next > to go to the Connection tab. Item 1: Select a server from the drop down list Item 2: Select the Use Windows NT Integrated security radio button, unless specified otherwise Item 3: Select the database that contains the SoundCheck schema (here the database is named SoundCheck Test) from the drop down list Figure 36-6: Connection Tab 7. Select the Test Connection button. A success dialog is displayed. 472 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Creating an ODBC Connection for SQL Server If you have installed a 32 bit database program on a 64 bit OS, you have to use the 32 bit ODBC admin tool (Odbcad32.exe) when configuring a database DSN for SoundCheck. Do not use the default 64 bit version in the Windows control panel. See ODBC Connection Rules on page 467. You have to choose the ODBC tool depending upon the bitness of the database you have installed. Follow these directions to create a DSN that connects to SQL Server (any edition). 1. Make sure that a database that contains SoundCheck’s schema has been created and available on the network. If you are using local storage, make sure that SQL Server Express is installed and schema created. 2. Open OBDC Data Source Administrator from the Control Panel. Administrative Tools > Setup Data sources (ODBC) 3. Select System DSN tab. Select Add… button. The Create New Data Source dialog is displayed: 4. Select SQL Server from the list. 5. Select Finish. The Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog is displayed as in Figure 36-7. Figure 36-7: New Data Source 6. Enter a name and description of your choice for the data source as shown in Figure 36-8. 7. In the Server drop down list, select (local) for local storage, or select the database server on the network. 8. Do not click Finish. Select Next > to open Login verification. Figure 36-8: Wizard Screen 1 9. The wizard prompts to determine how SQL Server should verify the network login as shown in Figure 36-9. Select Next > to accept the defaults, or consult your IT administrator. Figure 36-9: Wizard Screen 2 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck 473 10. The next dialog in the wizard appears Figure 36-10. 11. Check “Change the default database to:” and select the database that contains the SoundCheck schema (here the database is named SoundCheck Simple) from the drop down list Figure 36-10: Wizard Screen 3 12. Select Next. The next dialog in the wizard appears Figure 36-11. 13. Unless specified by your IT administrator, use the defaults. Figure 36-11: Wizard Screen 4 14. Select Finish. A summary dialog is displayed Figure 36-12. Figure 36-12: Summary Dialog 474 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 15. Select Test Data Source to make sure the configuration works. A confirmation dialog is displayed as in Figure 36-13. 16. Select OK to dismiss close the windows. The new data source will be listed in the System DSN tab: Figure 36-13: Test Dialog 17. Select OK to close the OBDC Data Source Administrator. Figure 36-14: New System DSN 18. In the Autosave Step you can select the .udl file from the beginning of this example. Figure 36-15: Select UDL in Autosave SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Database Setup for use with SoundCheck 475 Creating a UDL Definition for MS Access 1. Create a new Microsoft Data Link file from Windows Explorer. If this choice is not available, you can create an empty text file and rename it with a .udl extension. The file will then be displayed as Microsoft Data Link document. 2. If you are using a 64 bit Windows operating system, the provider tab will not show the Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider or Microsoft Office 12.0 Access Database Engine OLE DB Provider. This is because they are 32 bit database providers. To make 32 bit providers display in the Provider tab, follow these steps: a Navigate to Start>All Programs>Accessories>Command Prompt b Type the following command: C:\Windows\syswow64\rundll32.exe "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\System\Ole DB\oledb32.dll", OpenDSLFile C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Database\SoundCheck Test.udl. Figure 36-16: Provider Tab c C:\SoundCheck 16.0\Database\SoundCheck Test.udl is the file path to the UDL file you have created. This will open the UDL file. d Click the Provider tab, the 32 bit database providers should now show. 3. Double-click the file. The Data Link Properties dialog is displayed. 4. Click on the Provider tab as in Figure 36-16. 5. Select Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider. Select Next > to go to the Connection tab. 6. For Item 1, specify the Access .MDB file as in Figure 36-1. Figure 36-1: Connection Tab 7. Select Test Connection button. A success dialog is displayed: Figure 36-2: Success 476 Database Setup for use with SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Data File Format SoundCheck® versions *.DAT and *.WFM file binary formats for most commonly used 1 DAT Binary Data File Format – SoundCheck 4.13 (DAT v2) Key: B=bytes, b=bits, uint=unsigned integer, float=floating point number in IEEE standard format Note: Strings do not have a termination character ONCE AT BEGINNING OF FILE 4B 32b uint number of curves (curve structures) in file BEGINNING OF FIRST CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors 64-BYTE HEADER USED TO GET INFO Prior TO LabVIEW CLUSTER UNFLATTEN 16B string SoundCheck flattened cluster type, "Data", right padded with spaces 2B 16b uint SoundCheck version number for this cluster type 1B 8b uint number of dimensions in data array (obsolete in SoundCheck, now set to 0) 42B string curve name, right padded with spaces 3B reserved for SoundCheck, binary 0 for now FLATTENED LabVIEW CLUSTER 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in curve name NB string curve name 4B 32b uint number of X-Y-Z data points (N) in curve N*3*8B 64b float data points in X-Y-Z X-Y-Z X-Y-Z order 2B 16b uint Xdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Ydata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Xaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Yaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xprefix NB string Xprefix SI prefix for unit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yprefix NB string Yprefix SI prefix for unit SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Data File Format 477 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Zprefix NB string Zprefix SI prefix for unit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xunit NB string Xunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yunit NB string Yunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Zunit NB string Zunit 8B 64b float X dB ref 8B 64b float Y dB ref 8B 64b float Z dB ref 1B boolean single-value flag (0=normal curve, 1=single value) BEGINNING OF SECOND CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors 2 DAT Binary Data File Format – SoundCheck 5.54 (DAT v3) Key: B=bytes, b=bits, uint=unsigned integer, float=floating point number in IEEE standard format Note: Strings do not have a termination character ONCE AT BEGINNING OF FILE 4B 32b uint number of curves (curve structures) in file BEGINNING OF FIRST CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors 64-BYTE HEADER USED TO GET INFO Prior TO LabVIEW CLUSTER UNFLATTEN 16B string SoundCheck flattened cluster type, "Data", right padded with spaces 2B 16b uint SoundCheck version number for this cluster type 1B 8b uint number of dimensions in data array (obsolete in SoundCheck, now set to 0) 42B string curve name, right padded with spaces 3B reserved for SoundCheck, binary 0 for now FLATTENED LabVIEW CLUSTER 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in curve name NB string curve name 4B 32b uint number of X-Y-Z data points (N) in curve N*3*8B 64b float data points in X-Y-Z X-Y-Z X-Y-Z order 2B 16b uint Xdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 478 Data File Format SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 2B 16b uint Ydata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Xaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Yaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xprefix NB string Xprefix SI prefix for unit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yprefix NB string Yprefix SI prefix for unit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Zprefix NB string Zprefix SI prefix for unit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xunit NB string Xunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yunit NB string Yunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Zunit NB string Zunit 8B 64b float X dB ref 8B 64b float Y dB ref 8B 64b float Z dB ref 1B boolean single-value flag (0=normal curve, 1=single value) 1B boolean protected flag (0=unprotected, 1=protected) 1B boolean display X flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean display Y flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean display Z flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 4B 32b uint Plot Color (RGBa) BEGINNING OF SECOND CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Data File Format 479 3 DAT Binary Data File Format SoundCheck 6.01-7.01 (DAT v6 Key: B=bytes, b=bits, uint=unsigned integer, float=floating point number in IEEE standard format Note: Strings do not have a termination character ONCE AT BEGINNING OF FILE 4B 32b uint number of curves (curve structures) in file BEGINNING OF FIRST CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors 64-BYTE HEADER USED TO GET INFO Prior TO LabVIEW CLUSTER UNFLATTEN 16B string SoundCheck flattened cluster type, "Data", right padded with spaces 2B 16b uint SoundCheck version number for this cluster type 1B 8b uint number of dimensions in data array (obsolete in SoundCheck, now set to 0) 42B string curve name, right padded with spaces 3B reserved for SoundCheck, binary 0 for now FLATTENED LabVIEW CLUSTER 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in curve name NB string curve name 4B 32b uint number of X-Y-Z data points (N) in curve N*3*8B 64b float data points in X-Y-Z X-Y-Z X-Y-Z order 2B 16b uint Xdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Ydata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Xaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Yaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Zaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xunit NB string Xunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yunit NB string Yunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Zunit NB string Zunit 8B 64b float X dB ref 8B 64b float Y dB ref 8B 64b float Z dB ref 480 Data File Format SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 1B boolean single-value flag (0=normal curve, 1=single value) 1B boolean protected flag (0=unprotected, 1=protected) 1B boolean display X flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean display Y flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean display Z flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 4B 32b uint Plot Color (RGBa) 1B 8b uint Plot Interpolation (0-5) 1B 8b uint Plot Point Style (0-16) 1B 8b uint Plot Line Style (0-4) 4B 32b uint Plot Point Color (RGBa) 1B 8b uint Plot Line Width (0-5) 1B 8b uint Plot Bar Plot Style (0-10) 2B 16b int Fill Baseline (-1 – 32767) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Test Info NB string Test Info BEGINNING OF SECOND CURVE STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in curve structure: header, data, and descriptors 4 WFM Binary File Format – SoundCheck 6.01-7.01 (WFM v3) Key: B=bytes, b=bits, uint=unsigned integer, int = signed integer, float=floating point number in IEEE standard format Note: Strings do not have a termination character ONCE AT BEGINNING OF FILE 4B 32b uint number of waveforms (waveform structures) in file BEGINNING OF FIRST WAVEFORM STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in waveform structure: header, data, and descriptors 64-BYTE HEADER USED TO GET INFO Prior TO LabVIEW CLUSTER UNFLATTEN 16B string SoundCheck flattened cluster type, "Waveform", right padded with spaces 2B 16b uint SoundCheck version number for this cluster type 1B 8b uint number of dimensions in waveform array (obsolete in SoundCheck, now set to 0) 42B string waveform name, right padded with spaces 3B reserved for SoundCheck, binary 0 for now FLATTENED LabVIEW CLUSTER 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in waveform name SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Data File Format 481 NB string waveform name 8B 64b float X0 Waveform start value 8B 64b float dX Waveform increment 4B 32b uint number of points (N) in waveform N*4B 32b float waveform points 2B 16b uint Xdata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Ydata (0=dB, 1=linear) 2B 16b uint Yaxis (0=log, 1=linear) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Xunit NB string Xunit 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Yunit NB string Yunit 8B 64b float Y dB ref 1B boolean display Y flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean display X flag (0=do not display, 1=display) 1B boolean overload flag (0=no overload, 1=overload) 1B boolean protected flag (0=unprotected, 1=protected) 4B 32b uint number of flattened steps (N) in sequence history (for SoundCheck use) N*(4B 32b uint number of chars (M) in flattened step string, MB string) (for SoundCheck use) 4B 32b int Waveform Channel Number (-1 – N Channels) 4B 32b uint Plot Color (RGBa) 1B 8b uint Plot Interpolation (0-5) 1B 8b uint Plot Point Style (0-16) 1B 8b uint Plot Line Style (0-4) 4B 32b uint Plot Point Color (RGBa) 1B 8b uint Plot Line Width (0-5) 1B 8b uint Plot Bar Plot Style (0-10) 2B 16b int Fill Baseline (-1 – 32767) 4B 32b uint number of chars (N) in Test Info NB string Test Info BEGINNING OF SECOND WAVEFORM STRUCTURE 4B 32b uint number of bytes in waveform structure: header, data, and descriptors 482 Data File Format SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List The devices in the following list are approved for use with SoundCheck. Other devices may be compatible but have not been verified for use with SoundCheck and are not supported. Windows OS - Hardware is no longer validated in Windows 8. Although most drivers will work, default hardware files in SoundCheck may need to be adjusted (e.g. latency values, buffer setting) These audio interfaces allow for repeatable delay, therefore they can be used for measurement of absolute phase. Audio Interface Windows 7-32 & 64 bit, Windows 10-64 Driver Type AudioConnect 4x4 Lynx E44/E22 LynxTWO (discontinued) Lynx Aurora (n) 8/32 LT-USB & LT-TB Lynx Aurora 8/16 LT-USB & LT-TB (discontinued) Fireface UC Fireface UCX USB & Firewire MultiFace II FireFace 802 USB & Firewire FireFace 800 (discontinued) NI 4461 CardDeluxe (discontinued) ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO ASIO DAQmx MME (32 Bit OS Only) The following audio interfaces require the use of Autodelay in SoundCheck Analysis Steps to compensate for large and changing latencies. This is normal when using devices with WDM drivers. These devices should not be used when measuring absolute phase. Audio Interface Windows 7-32 & 64 bit, Windows 10-64 Driver Type AudioConnect & AmpConnect ISC WDM 1 DCC-1448 WDM 2 PQC-3048 WDM 2 PIO-9216 WDM 2 BTC-4148 + BQC - 4148 WDM Lynx E44/E22 & Aurora series WDM 3,4 LynxTWO (discontinued) WDM 3,4 FireFace 802 USB WDM 3 WDM CardDeluxe (discontinued) WDM 3 MultiFace II 1. Can only be used at 44.1 kHz sampling rate for all operating systems. 2. Can only be used at 48 kHz sampling rate for all operating systems. 3. Sampling rate must be changed in the audio interface mixer/control panel program AND in the SoundCheck Hardware configuration. 4. MME drivers are not supported. For additional information on drivers see Approved Drivers - Windows on page 485. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List 483 Mac OS These audio interfaces allow for repeatable delay which can be used for measurement of absolute phase. Audio Interface Lynx Aurora (n) 8-16 LT-USB Lynx Aurora (n) 8-32 LT-TB Lynx Aurora 8-16 LT-USB (discontinued) Lynx Aurora 8-16 LT-TB (discontinued) Fireface UC Fireface UCX FireFace 802 USB FireFace 800 (discontinued) Mac OS X - El Capitan or later Driver Type Core Audio Lynx Core Audio Thunderbolt Core Audio Lynx Core Audio Thunderbolt RME Intel Driver RME Intel Driver RME Intel Driver RME Intel Driver The following audio interfaces require the use of Autodelay in SoundCheck Analysis Steps to compensate for large and changing latencies. These devices should not be used when measuring absolute phase. Audio Interface AudioConnect 4x4 Mac OS X - El Capitan or later Driver Type Core Audio AudioConnect Core Audio 1 AmpConnect ISC Core Audio 1 DCC-1448 Core Audio 2 PQC-3048 Core Audio 2 PIO-9216 Core Audio 2 Core Audio BTC-4148 + BQC-4148 1. Can only be used at 44.1 kHz sampling rate for all operating systems. 2. Can only be used at 48 kHz sampling rate for all operating systems. For additional information on drivers see Approved Drivers - Mac on page 486. 484 Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Approved Drivers - Windows MFG Listen Listen Listen Device AmpConnect ISC (3) AudioConnect Lynx Studio AudioConnect 4x4 Aurora (n) 8-32 LT-TB Aurora (n) 8-16 LT-USB E44, E22 NI NI 4461 Lynx Studio Lynx Studio Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List USB Driver Type WDM Native Win USB WDM Native Win 3.2.4.9 (3) AUAB: 1.14 1.60 USB ASIO 2.20.0 28, LTusb 10 Thunderbolt ASIO 2.23G 1.5 USB ASIO 3.34 28, LTusb 10 PCI ASIO 2.23H Connection Driver Ver Firmware Default ASIO / Default USB Buffers Latency NA 250 Default Chan Trim Sample Rate – In/Out Auto Update NA 44.1 kHz only NA 250 NA 44.1 kHz only 2048 / Safe Set In ASIO (1) 256 5145 NA Yes 612 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes 2565 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes 20170817 1024 / Auto Set In ASIO (1) 256 538 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes PCI/PXI DAQmx DAQmx 16.0 NA NA 109 NA Yes Portland Tool DCC 1448 & Die (PTD) PTD PIO-9216 USB WDM Native Win 1.28 NA 250 NA 48 kHz only USB WDM Native Win 1.07 NA NA NA 48 kHz only PTD PQC-3048 USB WDM Native Win 1.27 NA NA NA 48 kHz only PTD USB WDM Native Win NA NA Firewire ASIO 3.123 1.32, 1.8 34/27/7 NA RME Audio BTC-4148, BQC-4148 Fireface 802 256 610 +4 dBu/+4 dBu 44.1kHz & 48kHz Yes RME Audio Fireface 802 USB ASIO 1.099 13/9/7/9 1024 2116 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes RME Audio Fireface UC USB ASIO 1.099 117 1024 2114 -10/+4 (5) Yes RME Audio Fireface UCX Firewire ASIO 3.123 46, 27 256 612 +4 dBu/+4 dBu (5) Yes RME Audio Fireface UCX USB ASIO 1.099 46 1024 2118 +4 dBu/+4 dBu (5) Yes See Footnotes on page 486. 485 486 Approved Drivers - Mac MFG Device Connection Driver Type Driver Default Latency Firmware 0 Default Chan Trim – In/Out NA Sample Rate Auto Update 44.1 kHz only Listen AudioConnect (4) USB Core Audio Native Mac 1.60 Listen AudioConnect 4x4 (4) USB Core Audio Native Mac 28, LTusb 10 1276 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Listen AmpConnect ISC (3, 4) USB Core Audio NA 44.1 kHz only NA 48 kHz only Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List Portland Tool DCC 1448 (4) & Die (PTD) PTD PIO-9216 (4) USB Core Audio Native Mac 3.2.4.9 (3) 0 AUAB: 1.14 Native Mac 1.28 0 USB Core Audio Native Mac 1.07 0 NA 48 kHz only PTD PQC-3048 (4) USB Core Audio Native Mac 1.27 0 NA 48 kHz only PTD BTC-4148, BQC-4148 (4) Fireface UC USB (5) USB Core Audio 0 NA USB Core Audio Native Mac 1.32, 1.8 2.17 12 1234 +4 dBu/+4 dBu 44.1kHz & 48kHz Yes RME Audio Fireface UCX USB USB Core Audio 2.17 1269 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes RME Audio Fireface 802 (5) USB Core Audio 2.17 1273 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Lynx Studio Aurora (n) 8-32 LT-TB Thunderbolt Lynx Studio Aurora (n) 8-16 LT-USB USB RME Audio 12 Footnotes See Hardware Configurations on page 489 for individual audio interface settings. (1) Requires change to ASIO defaults for proper operation. Follow setup guide provided with approved driver from www.listeninc.com. (2) Windows 8.x is no longer supported (3) For SoundCheck 10.11 and above, AmpConnect requires firmware version 3.2.4.6 or later. See AmpConnect ISC PN: 4042 on page 489. (4) Autodelay MUST be used in SoundCheck Analysis Steps. (5) Requires changes to default mixer settings. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Discontinued Hardware The following hardware has been discontinued by the manufacturer. Approved Drivers - Windows Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List DAL CardDeluxe x32 OS PCI Driver Type MME DAL CardDeluxe x64 OS PCI WDM 5.10.3523 Lynx Studio Aurora 8-16 LT-USB USB ASIO 3.34 Default ASIO / USB Default Default Chan Trim Sample Rate Buffers Latency – In/Out Auto Update NA NA 41 Set Jumpers: No +4dBu In /-10dBV No NA NA 250 Out 28, LTusb 10 1024 / Auto (1) 2564 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Lynx Studio Aurora 8-16 LT-TB Thunderbolt ASIO 2.0.23H 28, 6.2 256 610 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Lynx Studio LynxTwo, A, C PCI ASIO 2.0.23B Build 24 256 (1) 618 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes RME Audio Fireface 800 (discon- Firewire tinued) Multiface PCI, PCIe & PCMCIA ASIO 3.114 2.77 256 653 (5) ASIO 4.06 55 256 623 Front panel switch Yes MFG RME Audio Device Connection Driver Ver 4.0.6.1037 Firmware Approved Drivers - Mac MFG RME Audio Device Fireface 800 Connection Driver Type Firewire Core Audio Driver Firmware 3.27 33 Default Latency 1265 Default Chan Trim – In/Out Sample Rate Auto Update Yes Lynx Aurora 8-16 LT-TB Thunderbolt Core Audio Build 58B 2016.05.18 1287 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Lynx Aurora 8-16 LT-USB USB Core Audio Native Mac 2015.07.23 1216 +4 dBu/+4 dBu Yes Footnotes See Hardware Configurations on page 489 for individual audio interface settings. (1) Requires change to ASIO defaults for proper operation. Follow setup guide provided with approved driver from www.listeninc.com. (2) Windows 8.x is no longer supported (3) For SoundCheck 10.11 and above, AmpConnect requires firmware version 3.2.4.6 or later. See AmpConnect ISC PN: 4042 on page 489. (4) Autodelay MUST be used in SoundCheck Analysis Steps. (5) Requires changes to default mixer settings. 487 Minimum Computer Requirements - Windows Before buying a series of new computers for use with SoundCheck, we recommend that you purchase a single computer so it can be tested with all the related hardware, including the audio interface. Test the audio interface using the SoundCheck Self Test sequence to insure that it is compatible with the computer. We recommend that you purchase a high quality computer according to the guidelines below. Note that some computers may not be compatible with all audio interfaces Windows® 7 64 bit and 32 bit OS are supported along with Windows® 10 64 bit Windows® 8.1 - Hardware is no longer validated in Windows 8. Although most drivers will work, default hardware files in SoundCheck may need to be adjusted (e.g. latency values, buffer setting) Windows® 98, Millennium Edition, Windows® 2000, NT® and Windows® XP are not supported Intel Core Duo processor minimum or better (Celeron processors are not recommended) To take advantage of using multiple virtual instruments, a multi-threaded processor is recommended, e.g.; Intel-I3/I5/I7 processor / AMD Phenom II processor or better. 4 GB of RAM minimum (8 GB or more recommended for large WAV files or high resolution measurements below 50 Hz). Windows 7 systems will require a minimum of 4 GB of RAM 500MB of free hard-disk space required for complete software installation Thunderbolt audio interfaces perform better when used with Windows® 10 (See Thunderbolt Audio Interfaces on page 489) Thunderbolt audio interfaces cannot be used on a Mac using Bootcamp running Windows We offer an evaluation service to customers who would like to have their computer and hardware compatibility evaluated by Listen. Please contact [email protected] for pricing on this service. Windows Computer Setup Recommendations BIOS Settings: Hyper-threading, SpeedStep (Cool n Quiet) and C-States: Problems may occur with audio and system performance on computers with Intel processors and motherboards using chipsets that employ Hyper-threading, SpeedStep (EIST) and/or C-State functions. While these functions work to improve power management and energy saving, they can have detrimental effects on the performance of a computer used for SoundCheck. If your system experiences performance issues, please follow the instructions below. Speedstep – Allows the system to dynamically increase/decrease its clock speed between its minimum clock and its normal operating frequency, as well as voltage, in order to optimize for power consumption. While this helps save energy, it can unfortunately result in audio dropouts. C-states – In order to save power, this reduces clock speed by adjusting the multiplier and to some extent, the processor voltage. With multicore processors this can result in a single core partially shutting down to multiple cores completely shutting down. This can cause large jumps in CPU usage as the processor adjusts to these changes while processing audio. In BIOS, turn off SpeedStep and all C-States (C1E; C3; C6). This may require a BIOS update. Dell computers do not always allow control of these functions in Bios. Please contact Dell support for information on disabling Hyper-threading, SpeedStep and C-States. Hyper-threading – This can cause problems with system performance when SoundCheck is running. It can interfere with real-time audio processes on some motherboards. If the system is experiencing problems with performance we recommend that you shut off hyper-threading. AMD Processors - Cool and Quiet is the equivalent to Speed Step and should be shut off along with C1E 488 Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Windows Settings Set Windows power management scheme to high-performance. When Windows tells the processor to go into low power mode, it can cause glitches in the audio stream. Please refer to: Appendix - Computer Setup, in the SoundCheck Instruction Manual for more recommendations. Thunderbolt Audio Interfaces Windows® 10 has far superior support for Thunderbolt devices than Windows® 7. Windows® 10 supports hotplugging and no 3rd party software is required. Hardware Configurations Most audio interfaces cannot record and play simultaneously. There is almost always a delay between the two and the delay should not vary from measurement to measurement. The audio interfaces that Listen provides are certified to have high performance in making audio-related measurements. If you are using an audio interface that Listen, Inc has not certified, the measurement performance of SoundCheck may be severely compromised! AudioConnect PN: 4050 Driver: Uses native USB audio driver in Windows. Large and changing latencies are to be expected. You must use Autodelay in Analysis Steps. Firmware: 1.58 and later required. Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to computer USB port. AudioConnect 4 x 4 PN: 4051 Driver: Version 2.20.0 Firmware: Board 29, LT-USB 11 Default ASIO buffer is 2048 & USB Streaming Mode is Safe (Hardware Step > ASIO control panel) Prior to SoundCheck 14, large and changing latencies are to be expected. You must use Autodelay in Analysis Steps. Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to computer USB port. AmpConnect ISC PN: 4042 1. SoundCheck (or SoundCheck ONE) 10.11 as a minimum is required in order to control AmpConnect ISC™ via USB. AmpConnect ISC requires firmware version 3.2.4.6 or later to work with SoundCheck 10.11 and higher. AmpConnect units with S/N 367 and above have this firmware pre-installed. Units with S/N 366 and prior may require a firmware update. Please contact [email protected] for instructions on determining the firmware version. 2. Units with S/N AC432 and after (AUAB audio board firmware: 1.14), operate at 44.1 kHz and 24 bit depth in Windows 7 and above. (Prior to that S/N, 44.1 and 48 kHz are supported) [Windows XP: AmpConnect can only be used at 44.1 kHz sampling rate AND 16-bit] 3. As of SoundCheck 13, a new Driver: for AmpConnect ISC has been included in the SoundCheck installation process. The new Driver: will not work in versions prior to SoundCheck 13. To use AmpConnect ISC with SoundCheck 12 (and previously supported versions), you will need to manually rollback the device Driver: in Windows Device Manager. 4. As of SN1536, the “3 dB Down Point” default jumper position is 2 Hz (Jumper removed). 5. As of serial number AC2402, the default jumper position sets the XLR inputs to Single Ended by putting a jumper across pins 2 & 3 of J20 and J28. This also makes the XLR input single ended since the jumper connects pin 3 of the XLR to pin 1 (common). SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List 489 6. SoundCheck 14 requirements: Default Windows WDM audio driver, minimum of SoundCheck 14 control driver, minimum of firmware 3.2.4.6. 7. After installing SC 14, SC 13 users will not have control over the Headphone Amp. Other controls will work correctly. Additionally, the serial number of the AmpConnect audio interface will not be read properly, which changes the name of the device in the Hardware Editor. Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to computer USB port. Portland Tool and Die DCC-1448 PN: 5810 - MEMS Digital Microphone Measurement Interface Configuration PQC-3048 PN: 5811 - Production Line MEMS Digital Microphone Measurement Interface PIO-9216 PN: 5813 - Programmable Digital Serial Audio Data Interface Driver: Uses native USB audio driver in Windows and Core Audio in Mac OS Operates at 48 kHz and 24 bit depth (Select 16 bit depth if using Windows XP) BTC-4148 PN: 5814 - Bluetooth Audio Measurement Interface BQC-4148 PN: 5815 - Bluetooth Audio QC Interface Driver: Uses native USB audio driver in Windows and Core Audio in Mac OS Operates at 44.1 kHz & 48 kHz, and 24 bit depth (Select 16 bit depth if using Windows XP) SoundCheck requires that input and output sample rates match. You can either: Use 48 kHz for your output Hardware Configuration in SoundCheck Or If the output configuration cannot be set to 48 kHz, for example because you are using an AmpConnect ISC, you can use Re-sampling and Frequency Shift Post-Processing steps in your sequence to align the stimulus and response waveforms. DCC-1448 can be used as a clock source by connecting its SPDIF Out to the SPDIF In of the SoundCheck audio interface. Then set the audio interface to synchronize its clock to the SPDIF Input. Doing so insures that input and output are synchronous and will insure that re-sample and frequency shift steps are not required. Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to computer USB port. NI 4461 Tested with DAQmx 16.0 which can be found on the SoundCheck DVD Sennheiser Blue Tooth USB Adapter - BTD 500 USB Uses default Windows driver and appears as a WDM device in SoundCheck LynxTWO/E44/E22 490 Windows 7 or 10 – 32 and 64 bit, Windows XP (ASIO only) Driver and Firmware refer to Approved Drivers - Windows on page 485. Important! - Open the ASIO Control Panel from the SoundCheck Hardware Configuration Editor and then Turn Off “Double Buffer Output” If you see periodic drop outs in SoundCheck Acquisition, increase the buffer size to the next highest value. The latency value must be updated in the SoundCheck Hardware Editor. Maximum Channels - The default is “Unlimited”. We recommend changing this to 4 or 8 channels in order to save system resources. This limits the virtual channels of the device and limits the number of Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual channels that can be selected in the SoundCheck Hardware Editor. When using a 192 kHz sample rate in SoundCheck, this may be essential. Otherwise, severe dropouts may occur. 203 kHz Maximum Sample Rate - The sample rate of 200 kHz is available in the Sample Rate field of the Hardware Table but is not valid for the Lynx TWO. Instead, use the Input and Output Tabs of the editor. There you can select “User” in the sample rate field of each channel and change the sample rate to 203 kHz. Lynx Aurora (n) 8-16 LT-USB or 8-32 LT-TB Interface Windows 7 or 10 – 32 and 64 bit Driver and Firmware refer to Approved Drivers - Windows on page 485. LT-USB - Currently you must set the ASIO control panel to a buffer of 1024 and Safe in order to match the latency values provided in the default hardware (HAR) file. LT-TB does not use USB buffers. Lynx Aurora 8-16 with LT-USB or LT-TB Interface - discontinued Windows 7 or 10 – 32 and 64 bit Driver and Firmware refer to Approved Drivers - Windows on page 485. LT-USB - Currently you must set the ASIO control panel to a buffer of 2048 and Safe in order to match the latency values provided in the default hardware (HAR) file. LT-TB does not use USB buffers. Lynx issues with Intel motherboards using SpeedStep and C-States: Problems can occur with PCI audio interfaces on Intel motherboards using the Sandy Bridge chipset and others that employ SpeedStep and C-State functions. In BIOS, turn off SpeedStep and all C-States (C1E; C3; C6) – may require BIOS update. Dell computers do not always allow control of these functions in Bios. Please contact Dell support for information on disabling SpeedStep and C-States. Set Windows power management scheme to high-performance. When Windows tells the processor to go into low power mode, it can cause glitches in the audio stream. RME (Multiface II, Fireface UC/UCX, Fireface 800) Driver versions tested (firmware update may be required). Driver and Firmware refer to Approved Drivers - Windows on page 485. Configuration Details The Multiface II does not use Firewire. It requires an RME PCI, PCI Express, ExpressCard or CardBus interface card. Do not connect it to a FireWire port! It will damage the MultiFace II box beyond repair. Fireface UCX and Fireface 800/802 are not compatible with all firewire chipsets: Texas Instruments and VIA chipsets are generally known to work. Fireface UC and UCX are both compatible with USB 3 (USB 2 transfer rate) Fireface 802 USB will produce small changes in latency. Autodelay should be used in SoundCheck Analysis Steps. Do not connect audio interfaces through USB hubs. Connect directly to computer USB port. Windows XP: ASIO driver supported, WDM driver supported for Fireface 800 only. Windows 7 & 10: ASIO driver supported, WDM driver not recommended Windows 8: RME USB audio interfaces not approved. With the FireFace UCX, use the FireWire connection. PCI Express Interface Card for Laptop BIOS settings, "PCI Express Power Management" should be disabled SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List 491 ASIO Configuration The sample rate of the RME interfaces automatically updates to the rate set in the SoundCheck Hardware Editor. In Windows 7, if using Fireface UCX or 800/802, you must Rollback the system’s 1394 OHCI Compliant (firewire) device driver to the legacy version in Device Manager as shown below. CardDeluxe - discontinued Please install SoundCheck BEFORE installing the CardDeluxe drivers. The SoundCheck installation process sets the customized configuration of the CardDeluxe for use with SoundCheck. If the CardDeluxe driver is already installed, you will need to configure the driver manually. Refer to the CardDeluxe instructions in the driver folder on the SoundCheck install DVD or on the Listen, Inc. website. Windows XP: Driver: use MME Driver - Version 4.06.1037 Windows 7-32 & 8-32 bit: Driver: use MME Driver - Version 4.06.1037 Driver: use the WDM/ASIO Driver – Version 5.10.3523 Set ASIO Buffer Size to 3 mSec via the configuration utility Must set sample rate in CardDeluxe control panel (Click CardDeluxe icon in Windows tray) Sample rate selection in hardware editor is over-ridden by CardDeluxe setting Windows 7-64 & 8-64 bit: Driver: Must use WDM Driver - Version 5.10.3523. Note issues from chart on page 1 of this document Must also set the sample rate and the bit depth to 24-bit mode via the CardDeluxe control panel AudioFire 12 - discontinued Driver: Version 5.8 (Firmware update may be required. Requires internet connection.) In Windows 7, you must Rollback the system’s 1394 OHCI Compliant (firewire) device driver to the legacy version in Device Manager as shown under IEEE 1394 Legacy Driver (below). The sample rate must be set in the AudioFire mixer, settings tab. The sample rate selection in the SoundCheck Hardware Editor must agree with this setting. 492 Appendix A: Hardware Compatibility List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix B: Windows Setup Recommendations Audio Device System Settings The following settings are recommended to prevent Windows systems sounds from inadvertently playing through a device under test or artificial mouth. Some system sounds are capable of damaging some transducers. Windows Audio Devices 1. Click Windows Start, Type ”Manage Audio Devices” and hit Enter. This opens the Sound Control Panel. 4. Select the Playback tab and set the default device to the motherboard audio interface (or any other device that is not used for test and measurement) 2. Click the Sounds tab and set the default scheme to No Sounds 3. Uncheck “Play Windows Startup sound” 5. Select the Recording tab and set the default device to the motherboard audio interface (or any other device that is not used for test and measurement) 6. Click OK and close the remaining Control Panel windows SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Windows Setup Recommendations 493 WDM Device Sample Rate Note: When using WDM audio interfaces with SoundCheck, you will need to set the sample rate in the SoundCheck Hardware Editor and in the Windows Play and Record panels for the audio interface. 1. Double click on a device in Playback or Recording 2. Select the Advanced Tab 3. Set the Sample Rate and Bit Depth to match the SoundCheck Hardware Editor Audio Device Enhancements Some audio devices feature Enhancement settings. When testing such a device, these enhancements should be shut off. European Decimal Notation The “Decimal Display Format” can be changed to European Style in Windows. (comma in place of period) SoundCheck must be closed before changing the decimal format. Changes will be seen the next time it is started. Windows Instructions 1. Click Start 2. Select Control Panel 3. Select Clocks, Language and Region Options 4. Click Change the date, time or number format 5. Click Additional Settings 6. Change the Decimal Symbol to "," (comma) and Digit Grouping Symbol to "." (period) 7. Click Apply and click OK to close editing windows 494 Windows Setup Recommendations SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Change SoundCheck Default If you want to overrule your regional settings, use the following method. You can change the default behavior by changing the SoundCheck INI file found in the root of your SoundCheck folder. This changes the decimal mark based on the language of the OS. This forces SoundCheck to always use a dot for decimal notation. 1. Exit SoundCheck 2. Add the following line to SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini file. (for 32 bit versions only SoundCheck 16.0.ini is used) useLocaleDecimalPt=False 3. Save the changes to the .ini file and start SoundCheck (When using SoundCheck 64 bit, the x64 INI file is created the first time you manually edit a color in a display. You can also create the file by making a blank INI file with the same name as the SoundCheck executable, e.g.: SoundCheck 16.0 (x64).ini.) Windows Display - Text Size The settings of the Windows display resolution effects the display windows and information tabs in SoundCheck. The following settings should always be used for a SoundCheck system. 1. SoundCheck must be closed 2. In Windows 7, Right click on the Windows desktop and select Personalize In Windows 10, Right click on the desktop and select Display Settings 3. Open the Display menu 4. Select Smaller or 100% This is the typical default setting for Windows but it is sometimes changed when individual users are trying to make icons larger on the Windows desktop or making program menu fields larger. Setting this higher than 100% causes fields in SoundCheck to overlap and in some cases become “not visible”. Medium (125%) and Large (150%) should not be used. Menus will not be readable. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Windows Setup Recommendations 495 page intentionally left blank 496 Windows Setup Recommendations SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix C: PXI/PCI 4461 Installation Note: When SoundCheck is off or not running, the default state of the NI 4461 is “Open Outputs”. This means that noise will be present on the outputs of the card. As a safety precaution we recommend that you shut off any amplifier connected to the output of the NI 4461 before starting SoundCheck. The amplifier should be shut off before exiting SoundCheck as well. Always use the latest NI DAQmx driver that has been approved for use with SoundCheck. See “Hardware Compatibility List” on page 483. PXI 1031 Chassis Identification The following is for installation of the PXI 4461 card in a PXI 1031 Chassis Figure C-1 shows the Chassis Identification process when using the PXI 1031 chassis and a PXI 4461 card. Click on the “Chassis Unidentified” device Select Identify As Select PXI-1031 from the list This is not required when installing the PCI 4461 in a computer. Figure C-1: Chassis Identification for PXI 1031 Note: Some NI interface cards may require the PXI platform services driver. Please refer to the NI documentation. Figure C-2: PXI 4461 recognized in NI Explorer SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual PXI/PCI 4461 Installation 497 NI 4461 Install and Setup Follow the instructions provided by NI for installing the NI 4461 card. The following screen shots are a step by walk-through of the NI 4461 install process. Instructions are included on each screen of the install process. Open NI Max, Measurement and Automation Explorer to verify that the 4461 has been installed correctly. Figure C-3: PCI 4461 DAQ-MX Properties Self Calibration Select the 4461 from the NIDAQmx device list as shown in Figure C-4. Click on the SelfCalibrate button at the right hand side of the window. When the process is finished you should get a response indicating the device was calibrated successfully. Figure C-4: Self-Calibrate Self Test Self Test can be run by clicking on Self Test in the NI Max screen or by right clicking on the NI 4461 in the Device list and selecting Self Test from the Drop Down Menu. When the process is finished you should get a response indicating that Self Test was successful. Figure C-5: Self Test 498 PXI/PCI 4461 Installation SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck® Hardware Configuration The System Hardware configuration should be setup according to the following examples. Setting the Vp values for the NI 4461 in the Hardware Editor actually sets the hardware input range and sends the Gain or Attenuation levels to the NI 4461 card. See Input and Output Vp settings on page 500 for more information. In the SoundCheck Hardware Editor, click the Import Button and select “NI PCI-4461.Har” from the appropriate operating system folder. Use the same file for the PXI-4461. This automatically sets up the Hardware Editor with the basic settings for the 4461 interface. Depending on the number of DAQmx devices available, you may need to click on the Device Fields and select the appropriate Device Number from the list. This should be the same Device ID as shown in the NI Explorer in Figure C-3. Select the proper Input and Output channels from the Select Ch Fields. Vp Values The In (Vp) and Out (Vp) values in the System Hardware configuration sets the resolution of the NI 4461. Figure C-6: NI 4461 Hardware Editor If the signal level of the Device Under Test is low select a low value from the list, such as 1. If the levels are high, select a larger value, such as 10. This is the default value in the NI PCI-4461.Har file. Input Vp values can be different from Output Vp values. Refer to the table in Figure C-7 for a list of allowable Vp settings. Using values other than what are listed in the table will produce unreliable results. Max FSD Note: As you increase the input gain, the maximum input signal limit decreases proportionally. Check the Max FSD value in the Memory List to make sure the input of the NI 4461 is not clipping or under-loaded (signal too low which increases the noise floor). In general, if you are measuring distortion, Max FSD should be greater than -30 dB FSD. If Max FSD reaches 0 dB FSD the signal is being clipped. Hardware Defaults Sampling Rate: 44100Hz Bit Depth: 24 Bit Latency: 109 (This will change if the Sampling Rate is changed. See “Sample Rate / Latency” on page 500.) Term Config: Default Coupling: AC IEPE: Disable - Enable only if connecting an IEPE powered transducer to the input of the 4461. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual PXI/PCI 4461 Installation 499 Input and Output Vp settings In the Hardware Configuration Editor you must enter the Vp value from the chart in Figure C-7 that corresponds to the Gain or Attenuation required on the NI 4461. These settings are sent to the NI 4461 after saving the Hardware Configuration. Input Range NI 4461 Gain (dB) SoundCheck Hardware Setting Vp Value 1 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 0.316 1.00 3.16 10.0 31.6 42.4 Output Range NI 4461 Attenuation (dB) SoundCheck Hardware Setting 0 -20 -40 10.00 1.0 0.1 Vp Value 2 Figure C-7: Input and Output Vp 1, 2 The input gain and output attenuation is set independently for each channel in System Hardware. Latency and Sample Rate The Latency of the 4461 will change as the sample rate of the System Hardware configuration changes. The following chart shows recommended Latency values for the sample rates supported in SoundCheck. Sample Rate (Hz) 200k 192,000 176,400 96,000 88,200 48,000 44,100 32,000 16,000 8,000 Latency (Samples) 100 100 100 114 114 109 109 109 90 80 Figure C-8: Sample Rate / Latency Note: 500 Output and Input sample rates must match in the Hardware Editor. The NI 4461 clock defaults to the output sample rate. PXI/PCI 4461 Installation SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix D: Connection Procedures Amp Calibration - Single Ended Connections 1. Make sure amplifier is OFF. Amplifier Input Output + - 2. to 3. Connect Output 1 of the audio interface to the input of the amplifier. (amp channel 1) Step 6 - Amp On Step 3 4. to 5. Connect the output of the amplifier (amp channel 1) to Input 1 of the audio interface. Step 4 Amp Output (Connector may be Binding Post or Screw Terminal) Balanced or Singleended amp input (Connector may be RCA phono as well) Adapters: Banana to BNC + BNC to RCA + RCA to ¼" Phone Plug Important: The ground of the banana adapter must be connected to the amplifier minus (-) connection or a "loop" condition will occur that could result in damage to the amp and audio interface. Step 1 - Amp Off Step 2 Step 5 Audio Interface 6. Turn the amplifier ON. Input 1 (Left) Input 2 (Right) Output 1 (Left) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Output 2 (Right) Follow the procedure outlined in Amplifier Calibration Procedure on page 84. Figure D-1: Amplifier Calibration Connections Connection Procedures 501 Amp Calibration - XLR Balanced Connections 1. , 6. Single-ended amp input (Connector may be RCA phono as well) 3. Amp Output (Connector may be different than Banana) Amp + + - - Banana to BNC + BNC to RCA + RCA to ¼" Phone Plug 4. XLR male to RCA phono male cable Input 1 Audio Interface with XLR In/Out 5. XLR female to ¼" male cable 2. Output 1 Figure D-2: Amplifier Calibration Connections - Balanced 1. Make sure amplifier is OFF. 2. to 3. Connect Output 1 of the audio interface to the input of the amplifier. (amp channel 1) (Connection may be balanced or single ended.) 4. to 5. Connect the output of the amplifier (amp channel 1) to the Input 1 of the audio interface. Note: 6. Turn the amplifier ON. Follow the amplifier calibration procedure outlined in the Calibration chapter: Amplifier Calibration Procedure on page 84. 502 The ground of the banana adapter (4) must be connected to the amplifier minus (-) connection or a "loop" condition will occur that could result in damage to the amp and audio interface. In SoundCheck®, open the Calibration Configuration Editor. Do not open the Amplifier Calibration sequence. The Calibration Operation is run from the Calibration Editor. Select the Amplifier Output channel to calibrate. Make sure the Input Signal Path is set the proper Direct In as used in Step 4/5. It must be an Input Signal Path that is set for Unity Gain. Click the Calibrate button in the Calibration Editor to calibrate the amplifier. After receiving a PASS notification from the calibration sequence, click Save As to save the new amplifier gain settings to disk with a new name or close the Calibration Editor and click File > Save to save the entire sequence using the existing step name. Connection Procedures SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual (Single-ended amp input) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual - + Amplifier Amplifier set to Bridged Mode. - + Connection Procedures Ring Audio Interface Output Single ended - Tip and Sleeve Amp output must be wired according to manufacturer’s instructions Amp Output Tip Ring Sleeve Sound Card Input Balanced using ONLY Tip and Ring, sleeve is not connected Tip (TRS Connector) Output 2 (Right) Output 1 (Left) Input 2 (Right) Input 1 (Left) Amp Calibration - Bridged Connections Figure D-3: Bridged Amp Calibration Connections 503 Mic Calibration - SoundConnect™ Connections Single-ended mic power supply output (Connector may be different than RCA phono if a different supply is used) * Based on using Listen SoundConnectTM Microphone Power Supply Audio Interface 2. Input 1 (Left) 3. Input 2 (Right) Output 1 (Left) Output 2 (Right) Digital Input 4. 1. Microphone Calibrator Digital Output Figure D-4: Microphone Calibration Connections 1. Plug microphone into front of SoundConnect. Make sure appropriate polarization voltage is selected. 2. Plug RCA phono (or other connector type appropriate for your power supply) to output connector on back of SoundConnect. 3. Plug 1/4-inch jack into Input 1 of audio interface. This should be an input with a Unity Gain Signal Path in the Calibration Configuration of SoundCheck. 4. Insert microphone into calibrator and turn the calibrator on. 5. Click Calibrate in the Input section of the SoundCheck® Calibration Editor to calibrate the microphone. Make sure units are V/Pa and dB re 20 µ. 6. After calibration is successful, click OK to close the Microphone Calibration window, then click Save to close the editor and save the new microphone gain settings to disk. 504 Connection Procedures SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Loudspeaker Test Connections 6. Audio Interface Single-ended mic power supply output (Connector may be different than RCA phono if another supply is used) 7. Input 1 (Left) Input 2 (Right) 2. Output 1 (Left) Output 2 (Right) 5. Digital Input 1. , 8. (-) (+) 4. + + - - 3. Digital Output Figure D-5: Loudspeaker Test Connections 1. Make sure amplifier is OFF before connecting any cables. 2. to 3. Connect Output 1 of the audio interface to the amp input. 4. Connect the amp output to the DUT (loudspeaker). This example uses a banana connector. 5. Plug the measurement microphone into the front of SoundConnect. Make sure the appropriate polarization voltage is selected and mic has been calibrated. (See Calibration Configuration on page 65.) 6. to 7. Connect the output of the mic power supply to Input 1 of the audio interface. Make sure the mic power supply is ON. 8. Turn the amplifier ON. You are now ready to run your loudspeaker test sequence. Turn the amplifier OFF before shutting down the PC. Note: If an external footswitch has been supplied, plug it into the computer's COM port (DB9 connector on back of PC). Make sure the footswitch is enabled in the system Hardware Configuration. See Hardware Configuration on page 47. Make sure that Hardware Type > External Interface is chosen and the selected interface is Footswitch. NI VISA is required and is installed during the SoundCheck installation. This is required for the footswitch to operate properly. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Connection Procedures 505 Loudspeaker Test Connections with Impedance Box Single-ended mic power supply output (Connector may be different than RCA phono if another supply is used) Audio Interface 6. 7. Input 1 (Left) 9. Input 2 (Right) 2. Output 1 (Left) Output 2 (Right) 5. Digital Input 8. (-) Digital Output 1. ,10. (+) 4. Speaker Side (long lead) Amp Side (short lead) + + - Impedance Box 3. Amp Figure D-6: Loudspeaker Test Connections with Impedance Box Important: The Impedance Measurement Interface shown in Figure D-6: is available from Listen. Part number: 4009 with 1/4" connector cable and 4010 with XLR connector cable. 1. Make sure the amplifier is OFF before connecting any cables. Note: 506 The amplifier should be calibrated before making any measurements. Refer to the Calibration Configuration chapter for details. 2. to 3. Connect Output 1 of the audio interface to the amplifier input. 4. Connect the short Impedance Box leads to the amplifier output channel and then connect the long Impedance Box leads to the loudspeaker. 5. Plug the microphone into the mic input of SoundConnect. Make sure the appropriate polarization voltage is selected and that the mic has been calibrated. 6. to 7. Connect the RCA output on the back of SoundConnect to Input 1 of the audio interface. (The BNC output on the front of SoundConnect can be used as an alternative.) Make sure the mic power supply is ON. 8. to 9. Use a TRS cable (Tip-Ring-Sleeve) to connect the Impedance Box output to Input 2 of the audio interface. (XLR audio interfaces will use a 1/4” TRS to XLR Male cable.) Connection Procedures SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 10. Turn the amplifier ON. You are now ready to run your loudspeaker test sequence. Turn the amplifier OFF before shutting down the PC to avoid unwanted transients from potentially damaging the loudspeaker. Detailed Drawing of Impedance Box Amplifier (Single-ended amp input) Test Speaker Amp Output + + - - + Load Resistor - (The shield of the TRS cable is not connected at the resistor) Connect the amp chassis to the chassis of the computer Input 1 (Left) Tip (XLR pin 2) (TRS Connector) Ring (XLR pin 3) Sleeve (Single-ended output) Input 2 (Right) Output 1 (Left) Tip Output 2 (Right) (TRS Connector) Tip Sleeve Ring View of Male XLR connector when looking at the pins Pin 2 = High (+) Pin 3 = Low (-) Pin 1 = not connected at the resistor 1 Digital Input 2 3 Digital Output Computer Chassis Ground Audio Interface Figure D-7: Impedance Box Layout Important: In order to maintain a good signal to noise ratio, the Load Resistor value should not be more than 100 times different than the load being measured. Please refer to Impedance Setup on page 170 for more information. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Connection Procedures 507 Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connections When calibrating an audio interface with Balanced inputs and outputs it is important to follow the wiring procedure noted in Figure D-8: Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connection. Audio Bandwidth DMM set to Volts AC + - Audio Interface Balanced Input (from Meter) Audio Interface Balanced Output (to Meter) + + - NC NC Figure D-8: Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connection For the purpose of calibration, do not connect the ground of the XLR connectors. Leave them “Floating”. (NC = Not Connected) Do not short the Low (-) of a balanced output to ground. With some Active Output devices this will result in distortion on the High (+) signal. (The low (-) of the balanced input can be tied to ground. Shorting the low input insures that it is not a source of noise and usually causes no problem.) Note that many commonly available XLR to BNC adapters short pins 1 and 3 together internally. This can cause problems in the calibration process. Important: When an audio interface is calibrated for Balanced mode but used in Single Ended mode, there will be a 6 dB drop in the output level. Only one line of the balanced output is being used. See Figure D-11: Balanced Output to Single Ended Input. When calibrating and/or using a Balanced Audio Interface in Single Ended mode it is important to follow the guidelines outlined in the following section. 508 Connection Procedures SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Balanced vs Single Ended Connections Single Ended or Unbalanced outputs can typically be connected to Balanced inputs in either of the two methods shown in Figure D-9 and Figure D-10. Single-Ended output to Balanced input With the output level of the Single Ended Output device set to 0 dB, + RCA or ¼" Phone cable XLR + - 0 dB is measured at the Balanced Input Figure D-9: Single Ended Output to Balanced Input 1 Single-Ended output to Balanced input With the output level of the Single Ended Output device set to 0 dB, + RCA or ¼" Phone cable XLR + - NC 0 dB is measured at the Balanced Input Figure D-10: Single Ended Output to Balanced Input 2 Balanced output to Single Ended input wiring is a different matter. It is important to not short the Low (-) of a balanced output to ground. With some devices with Active Balanced Outputs this will result in distortion on the High (+) signal. (Transformer balanced outputs can have the low connected to ground.) Figure D-11 shows the suggested wiring for connecting a Balanced output to a Single Ended input. The measured level at the Single Ended input is down by 6 dB since only one line of the Balanced output it used. Balanced output to Single-Ended input + - With the output level of the Balanced Output device set to 0 dB, XLR cable RCA or ¼" Phone + NC -6 dB is measured at the Single Ended input Figure D-11: Balanced Output to Single Ended Input Important: (NC = Not Connected) SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Connection Procedures 509 page intentionally left blank 510 Connection Procedures SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix E: Serial Port Control Footswitch and Buzzer Control Via Serial Port Important: Use of the footswitch and buzzer with SoundCheck® requires that NIVisa is installed on the system. This can be found on the SoundCheck installation CD under Additional Software. (Footswitch and Buzzer control cannot be used with Windows NT.) Serial Port Pin Out Definition Figure E-1: Serial Port Pin Out Buzzer On/Off Message The output of the serial ports of the computer can be used to control remote devices such as a Piezo Buzzer. The voltages are generally 11.2 VDC when the Line is high and -11.2 VDC when the line is low. The standard wiring for a Piezoelectric Buzzer is to connect the Positive lead to the DTR Line and the Negative lead to Ground. Similarly, a second device can be connected across the RTS Line and Ground to receive completely separate On/Off messages. Footswitches or other types of external devices cannot be used with a second buzzer on the same COM port, e.g., Buzzer A and Buzzer B can be on COM Port 1 and Footswitch 1 and Footswitch 2 can be on COM Port 2. Figure E-2: Buzzer A and B Wiring Important: USB serial port adapters can be used but not all adapters are compatible with NIVisa. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Serial Port Control 511 Insert a Message Step into a sequence and rename it “Buzzer ON”. Right Click on the step and select Configure Step. Check Display step when run and set the time to 0.0 seconds. Select "Wait for confirmation" only if the buzzer is to remain on until the operator selects "Continue" on the Main Screen Check-off "Display step when run" and set the time to 0.0 seconds Figure E-3: Configure Message Step Open the SoundCheck Hardware Editor from the SoundCheck Main Screen. Select the External page. Enter the COM Port number for the Serial Port that is used. This can be found in the Windows Device Manager. In this case the Serial port is 9. Under Type select Buzzer. Under Type select Buzzer and set the COM Port Click Save to close the editor. The Interface settings are simply added to the System Hardware Configuration. Figure E-4: Hardware Config - Interfaces 512 Serial Port Control SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Setting the Message steps in the Sequence Double click on the Buzzer On step on the right of the Sequence Editor. Function should be set to Set Control Lines. Interface, Number 2 and DTR high are selected. Under Setup the following should be selected: Pass/ Fail and Wait. The wait time can then be set for the length of time the buzzer should sound. This will also be the amount of time before the next step of the sequence is executed. Select Interface Select Interface number (must be setup in Hardware Editor External page) Select Pass/Fail - this is the state that the message will report when the step runs Select Wait time - this is the amount of time in mSec that the step will wait before moving to the next step in the sequence. This is the length of time the buzzer will sound. Function - Select “Set Control Lines” Select DTR high Figure E-5: Message Step Interface Settings Insert the Buzzer Off message below (after) the Buzzer On Step in the Sequences section. Double click on it to edit the step. The message section needs to be set to match the settings in the Buzzer On step. DTR low should be selected to shut the buzzer off. Under Setup, Pass or Fail must be selected. Select Wait only if the Buzzer Off message is to be displayed for a selected amount of time. Select Interface Select Interface number (must be setup in Hardware Editor External page) Select Pass/Fail - this is the state that the message will report when the step runs Select Wait time - Off messages do not necessarily need any Wait time Function - Select “Set Control Lines” Select DTR low Figure E-6: Message Step Interface Settings Important: Footswitches and a Buzzer can be connected to the same Serial Port connector but there is usually limited room for wiring in standard connector housings. Important: Two Buzzers can be connected to the same Serial Port at the same time with no footswitches. Only one Buzzer can be connected to a Serial Port when two Footswitches are in use on the same port. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Serial Port Control 513 Remote Control Switch The serial port connections can also be used as a Remote Control Switch. A foot switch (or similar) can be wired across pins 7 and 8 to act as a Start and Continue switch. A second switch can be added across pins 6 and 7 for the Stop and REDO function. These switch functions are pre-set in the SoundCheck system and cannot be changed. These functions do not require the use of a Message Step in a sequence. Important: When two switches are used on a single serial port, a buzzer cannot be used on the same serial port. Use a second serial port if needed. Figure E-7: Serial Port Switch Wiring 1. To enable the Remote Control Switch function Click Setup on the SoundCheck Main Screen Open the Hardware Editor and select External Hardware Open Hardware Editor Figure E-8: Open Hardware Configuration 2. Right click on an empty line in the Interface section and click Add Interface. Under Type select Footswitch Under COM Port enter the COM Port number for the Serial Port (Found in Windows Device Manager) 3. Click on Save to close the Hardware Configuration 514 Select Footswitch Enter COM port Figure E-9: Hardware Setting For Footswitch Serial Port Control SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix F: System Verification Using SoundCheck This section will enable users of SoundCheck to verify that their PC-based electroacoustic test system is working properly. Open the Self Test sequence from the Calibration folder in SoundCheck. Figure F-1 This sequence requires that at least two channels of input and output are setup in your System Hardware configuration. (See Hardware Configuration on page 516.) The Self Test sequence checks to see if your SoundCheck installation is working properly and verifies the performance of your audio interface. By looping back the audio interface output directly into the audio interface input, the audio interface’s Frequency Response, Sensitivity, THD, Play/Record Delay, and Self Noise are measured. The sequence is setup to test two channels of the selected audio interface as shown in Figure F2. Note that audio interfaces using WDM drivers will not have a consistent play/record delay, so the Delay results will show up as a failure. This is normal for WDM devices. Autodelay must be used in Analysis Steps when using WDM. Figure: F-1 Open Self Test Figure: F-2 Completed Sequence Showing Passing Results SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual System Verification Using SoundCheck 515 Hardware Configuration Make sure that the correct System Hardware settings are entered for your audio interface. The default settings shown are for the AudioConnect. To run Self Test on AudioConnect both input channels must be set to Line In by opening an AudioConnect Message Step or by changing the Input Selection in the Startup Configuration of AudioConnect in the Listen Hardware Tab. Figure: F-3 Default Hardware Settings See AudioConnect on page 57. Figure: F-3 Default Hardware Settings Audio Interface Connect Output 1 to Input 1 and Output 2 to Input 2 of the audio interface. Figure F-4 WARNING! Do not connect the amplifier. The test level could damage the amplifier/loudspeaker if connected while . Sequence Parameters 2. 4. 1. 3. The sequence will test the audio interface using a Frequency Stepped Sweep with the following settings: Input 1 (Left) Input 2 (Right) Output 1 (Left) Output 2 (Right) Digital Input Digital Output Frequency Stepped Sweep Amplitude 1 V. (This level will provide a good signal-to-noise ratio for most audio interfaces. For the LynxTwo, try increasing the level to 5 V.) 20 kHz-20 Hz (To measure to higher frequencies, remember to increase the sampling rate for the audio interface in the Hardware Configuration) 1/3 Oct Steps - This gives you 31 frequency points 24 Cycles/Step (if you change the number of cycles, you should stay above an effective 15 cycles/step to insure proper THD+N measurement) Figure: F-4 Loop Back Wiring The results as shown in Figure F-2 cover the following parameters: 516 Frequency Response: 20 to 20 kHz, +/- 0.5 dB Sensitivity @ 1 kHz: +/- 1 dB THD (%) & THD+N (%): 20 to 20 kHz, 0.03% Audio interface delay: +/- 0.05 ms Overall Noise Level Limits: [0 Hz, -70 dB], [30 Hz, -90 dB], [22 kHz, -90 dB] System Verification Using SoundCheck SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix G: Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance Checking the performance of the SoundConnect™ using the Amplifier THD+N sequence (Electronics folder). The Generator and FFT instruments will be used as well. Connect the audio interface to SoundConnect™ as shown in Figure G-1. AUDIO INTERFACE 3. 4. Chan 1 Input (Left) Chan 2 Input (Right) 5. 1. Chan 1 Output (Left) Chan 2 Output (Right) Digital Input 2. Digital Output Figure G-1: SoundConnect Performance Test Connections 1 to 2 Connect the Chan 1 Out of the audio interface to the BNC input on the SoundConnect front panel. In this example a 1/4 inch-to-RCA cable and a BNC male to RCA female adapter is used. 3 to 4 Connect the RCA output connector on the back of SoundConnect to the Chan 1 In of the audio interface. A 1/4 inch-to-RCA cable is used in the example. The BNC out on the front of SoundConnect can also be used. The two jacks are connected in parallel and should not be used simultaneously. 5 Set A1, A2, and A3 switches to 0 dB. Run the Amplifier THD+N sequence to check the frequency response and sensitivity of the SoundConnect. The SoundConnect™ frequency should be very flat (less than 1.0 dB variation). Even though the audio interface frequency and phase response may be within spec, ground loops may occur. A more detailed analysis can be done using the built-in signal generator and FFT functions within SoundCheck®. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance 517 Noise Floor and Ground Loop Detection 1. Open the Signal Generator and FFT instruments by clicking Instruments and click on Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer. You can also use the keyboard shortcuts (Crtl + F4 and Ctrl + F7). 2. Set the Generator Output Level to 1.000 V, Frequency to 1000, and Channel to Direct Out 1. Figure G-2: Noise Floor 3. Set FFT controls as shown in Figure G-2. The Input Signal Path should be set to Direct In 1. 4. Click on Mute in Signal Generator so it no longer is blinking red. A 1.0 Volt, 1 kHz sine wave will be sent to the SoundConnect. Click Start on the FFT screen and the frequency spectrum will appear. If the SoundConnect and interconnecting cables are in good working condition, the FFT spectrum should look like the one above. The FFT spectrum should only have a 1 kHz signal. If any harmonics are present, they should be at least 60 dB below the 1 kHz level. Use the Snap to Max button to set Cursor 1 to the peak of the signal and then click on the Harmonic Cursor to show the THD. 518 Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual To check for any ground loops or electrical line frequency interference (50 Hz or 60 Hz), reduce the frequency range of the FFT display from 20 kHz to 1 kHz. To do this, place the mouse cursor over the 20000 number and highlight it by double-clicking using the left mouse button. Enter 1k and the press then press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The display will look like Figure G-3. If there is any electrical interference, there will be significant spikes at 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) and associated harmonics. Figure G-3: Check for Ground Loop SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance 519 Page Intentionally Left Blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Verifying SoundConnect™ Performance 520 Appendix H: Keyboard Shortcuts & Stweep Chart Windows Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard Shortcuts Main Screen Buttons Shortcut Instruments (Alt+A) Shortcut SEQUENCE Sequence Editor Ctrl+Q New… Ctrl+N Save Ctrl+S Delete Ctrl+D Start Sequence F2 Signal Generator Ctrl+F4 Continuous F3 Multimeter Ctrl+F5 Redo F4 Oscilloscope Ctrl+F6 Cursor to Lot # Field F7 Spectrum Analyzer Ctrl+F7 Cursor to Serial # Field F8 RTA Ctrl+F8 Continue Enter Distortion Analyzer Ctrl+F9 OFFLINE (Alt+N) Stop Esc Frequency Counter Ctrl+F10 None Signal Generator (Ctrl+F4) Shortcut Shortcut None Memory List (Ctrl+Shift+Y) Memory List must be highlighted FILE (Alt+F) Shortcut Mute F5 Toggle between Frequency and Output Level F8 Increase Decrease FILE Shortcut New Ctrl+N Open Ctrl+O Close Ctrl+W Save Ctrl+S Save As None Revert Ctrl+R Hardware Ctrl+Shift+H Rename None Calibration Ctrl+Shift+C Delete Ctrl+D Messages Ctrl+Shift+M Export Seq Ctrl+E Stimulus Ctrl+Shift+S Setup Wizard None Acquisition Ctrl+Shift+A Show Context Help Ctrl+H Exit None Analysis Ctrl+Shift+N User Manual None Recall Ctrl+Shift+R Additional Documentation None Post-Processing Ctrl+Shift+O Quick Start Menu… Ctrl+G Limits Ctrl+Shift+L Listen Inc Website None Display Ctrl+Shift+D Request Support None Serial Number Ctrl+Shift+E Ctrl+Shift+T Request a New Feature None Statistics Autosave Ctrl+Shift+U Report a Bug None Printing Ctrl+Shift+P Optional Modules… None Custom Ctrl+Shift+X About SoundCheck… None Memory List Ctrl+Shift+Y Sequence Ctrl+Q EDIT (Alt+E) Login Preferences SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SETUP (Alt+S) Load Display Ctrl+L Page Up Search Ctrl+F Page Dn Select All Ctrl+A Protect Ctrl+M Full Size Ctrl+/ Print Current Display Ctrl+P Shortcut Shortcut None None Windows Keyboard Shortcuts HELP (Alt+H) Shortcut 521 StweepTM Table - ISO Stepped-sine Frequencies R10 20 R20 20 R40 20 21.2 22.4 22.4 23.6 25 25 25 26.5 28 28 30 31.5 31.5 31.5 33.5 35.5 35.5 37.5 40 40 40 42.5 4.5 45 47.5 50 50 50 53 56 56 60 63 63 63 67 71 71 75 80 80 80 85 90 90 95 100 100 100 106 112 112 118 522 R80 20 20.6 21.2 21.8 22.4 23 23.6 24.3 25 25.8 26.5 27.2 28 29 30 30.7 31.5 32.5 33.5 34.5 35.5 36.5 37.5 38.7 40 41.2 42.5 43.7 45 46.2 47.5 48.7 50 51.5 53 54.5 56 58 60 61.5 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77.5 80 82.5 85 87.5 90 92.5 95 97.5 100 103 106 109 112 115 118 122 R10 125 R20 125 R40 125 132 140 140 150 160 160 160 170 180 180 190 200 200 200 212 224 224 236 250 250 250 265 280 280 300 315 315 315 335 355 355 375 400 400 400 425 45 450 475 500 500 500 530 560 560 600 630 630 630 670 710 710 750 R80 125 128 132 136 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 206 212 218 224 230 236 243 250 258 265 272 280 290 300 307 315 325 335 345 355 365 375 387 400 412 425 437 450 462 475 487 500 515 530 545 560 580 600 615 630 650 670 690 710 730 750 775 R10 800 R20 800 R40 800 850 900 900 950 1000 1000 1000 1060 1120 1120 1180 1250 1250 1250 1320 1400 1400 1500 1600 1600 1600 1700 1800 1800 1900 2000 2000 2000 2120 2240 2240 2360 2500 2500 2500 2650 2800 2800 3000 3150 3150 3150 3350 3550 3550 3750 4000 4000 4000 4250 450 4500 4750 Windows Keyboard Shortcuts R80 800 825 850 875 900 925 950 975 1000 1030 1060 1090 1120 1150 1180 1220 1250 1280 1320 1360 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600 1650 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2060 2120 2180 2240 2300 2360 2430 2500 2580 2650 2720 2800 2900 3000 3070 3150 3250 3350 3450 3550 3650 3750 3870 4000 4120 4250 4370 4500 4620 4750 4870 R10 5000 R20 5000 R40 5000 5300 5600 5600 6000 6300 6300 6300 6700 7100 7100 7500 8000 8000 8000 8500 9000 9000 9500 10000 10000 10000 10600 11200 11200 11800 12500 12500 12500 13200 14000 14000 15000 16000 16000 16000 17000 18000 18000 19000 20000 20000 20000 R80 5000 5150 5300 5450 5600 5800 6000 6150 6300 6500 6700 6900 7100 7300 7500 7750 8000 8250 8500 8750 9000 9250 9500 9750 10000 10300 10600 10900 11200 11500 11800 12200 12500 12800 13200 13600 14000 14500 15000 15500 16000 16500 17000 17500 18000 18500 19000 19500 20000 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix I: Equation Editor Functions + and - addition and subtraction * and / multiplication and division ^ Exponentiation User Equation Syntax Function Corresponding LabVIEW Function Description abs(x) Absolute Value Returns the absolute value of x. acos(x) Inverse Cosine Computes the inverse cosine of x in radians. acosh(x) Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine Computes the inverse hyperbolic cosine of x. asin(x) Inverse Sine Computes the inverse sine of x in radians. asinh(x) Inverse Hyperbolic Sine Computes the inverse hyperbolic sine of x. atan(x) Inverse Tangent Computes the inverse tangent of x in radians. atanh(x) Inverse Hyperbolic Tangent Computes the inverse hyperbolic tangent of x. ci(x) Cosine Integral Computes the cosine integral of x where x is any real number. cos(x) Cosine Computes the cosine of x, where x is in radians. cosh(x) Hyperbolic Cosine Computes the hyperbolic cosine of x. cot(x) Cotangent Computes the cotangent of x (1/ tan(x)), where x is in radians. csc(x) Cosecant Computes the cosecant of x (1/ sin(x)), where x is in radians. exp(x) Exponential Computes the value of e raised to the x power. expm1(x) Exponential (Arg) - 1 Computes one less than the value of e raised to the x power ((e^x) - 1). floor(x) Round To -Infinity Truncates x to the next lower integer (largest integer £x). SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Equation Editor Functions 523 gamma(x) Gamma Function G (n + 1) = n! for all natural numbers n. int(x) Round To Nearest Rounds x to the nearest integer. intrz(x) - Rounds x to the nearest integer between x and zero. ln(x) Natural Logarithm Computes the natural logarithm of x (to the base of e). lnp1(x) Natural Logarithm (Arg +1) Computes the natural logarithm of (x + 1). log(x) Logarithm Base 10 Computes the logarithm of x (to the base of 10). log2(x) Logarithm Base 2 Computes the logarithm of x (to the base of 2). pi(x) Represents the value = 3.14159... pi(x) = x * ppi(1) = ppi(2.4) = 2.4 * p rand( ) Random Number (0 - 1) Produces a floating point number between 0 and 1 exclusively. sec(x) Secant Computes the secant of x, where x is in radians (1/cos(x)). si(x) Sine Integral Computes the sine integral of x where x is any real number. sign(x) Sign Returns 1 if x is greater than 0, returns 0 if x is equal to 0, and returns -1 if x is less than 0. sin(x) Sine Computes the sine of x, where x is in radians. sinc(x) Sinc Computes the sine of x divided by x (sin(x)/x), where x is in radians. sinh(x) Hyperbolic Sine Computes the hyperbolic sine of x. spike(x) Spike Function spike(x) returns: 1 if 0£ x £10 for any other value of x. sqrt(x) Square Root Computes the square root of x. square(x) Square Function square (x) returns: 1 if 2n£ x£ (2n + 1)0 if 2n + 1£ x £(2n + 2)where x is any real number and n is any integer. step(x) Step Function step(x) returns: 0 if x < 01 if any other condition obtains. tan(x) Tangent Computes the tangent of x, where x is in radians. tanh(x) Hyperbolic Tangent Computes the hyperbolic tangent of x. 524 Equation Editor Functions SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix J: Weighting and Window Types TSR Window Type As of SoundCheck 8, the TSR window waveform is output in the Memory List and can be displayed on top of the impulse response or the deconvolved response to check the time alignment. The Start and Stop times of the window are set in the Analysis Step. See Time Selective Response (TSR) on page 145 for more information. The window is used to select the portion of the Deconvolved Response that contains the fundamental impulse response (linear impulse response). This impulse response contains the frequency response of the device under test. The following examples use the same impulse response as a means of comparison. None Also referred to as Rectangular. No weighting is applied to the measurement. This works well with transients that are shorter in length than the measurement time. Due to the flat characteristic in the time domain, all parts of the signal are equally weighted. Figure J-1: None Cosine Tapered The Cosine Taper window used by the Time Selective Response algorithm, has a 10% taper at each end. The Fundamental Impulse Response must be inside these tapers. In the example, the taper of the window disregards the first and last 1 mSec of the impulse. In versions of SoundCheck prior to version 8, this was the fixed window type for TSR. Figure J-2: Cosine Tapered Half-Cosine Tapered This window has only a trailing Cosine taper. It is well suited for impulses which have no content before zero time. The taper removes any slight discontinuity at the very end. Figure J-3: Half-Cosine Tapered SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Weighting and Window Types 525 Exponential This window is useful for impulses with a long decay rate which exceeds the duration of the time window. The exponential curve applies an additional damping that forces a smoothing of the impulse in the time window. The start value of the exponential weighting is 100% and the final value is 10%.” Figure J-4: Exponential Adrienne This is an optimized window for time selective response measurements. The leading and trailing tapers are both half Blackman-Harris functions. For optimal results the beginning of the flat portion should be 0.2 mSec before the impulse. This window is specified in the British Standard, "Road traffic noise reducing devices - test method for determining the acoustic performance - part 5: intrinsic characteristics - in situ values of sound reflection and airborne sound insulation" BS CEN/TS 1793-5:2003. Figure J-5: Adrienne Half-Hanning This applies a Half-cosine taper to the end of the window. It is well suited for long impulses that exceed the duration of the time window. The damping applied is stronger than what is found in the Exponential window, yielding smoother results in the frequency domain. Figure J-6: Half-Hanning Half-BH4 This is a Half Blackman-Harris function (4 terms). The application is the same as for exponential and Half-Hanning. It has the strongest damping and therefore yields the greatest smoothing in the frequency domain. Figure J-7: Half Blackman-Harris 4 Term 526 Weighting and Window Types SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix K: Time Selective Measurements With Log Sweep A time selective measurement of a frequency response is (directly or indirectly) based on a measurement of the impulse response, where a well-defined time window is applied to the impulse response. The frequency response is simply the Fourier transform of the impulse response. Time selective measurements are often used in electroacoustics to make simulated free-field measurements of transducers. This is to isolate the directly transmitted, free field sound from reflections due to the surroundings. By using a time window applied to the impulse response, it is possible to obtain results similar to those obtained in a non-echoic environment. The accuracy of such measurements depends on several factors. Some basic properties apply generally to all implementations, while some others relate to the actual algorithm and specific implementation. The most basic requirement for simulated free-field measurements is that the reflections must not arrive so early that they overlap the impulse response of the direct sound. If the reflections arrive so early that they overlap the direct sound, the time window will cut away some of the impulse response of the direct sound, and the measurement will loose accuracy. This applies to all time selective methods. If the system is perfectly linear then the impulse response can be obtained by a direct measurement, simply by applying a short pulse and recording the resulting "impulse response". In practice, however, such measurements will usually suffer from either a poor S/N ratio due to the low energy in the short pulse or suffer from overloading if the pulse is increased to improve the S/N ratio. The crest factor of the excitation is simply too high for practical use. Various types of noise signals have a much lower crest factor and combined with cross-spectrum or crosscorrelation analysis, the response of the linear behavior can be measured. Most systems, however, are not perfectly linear. The non-linearity not only sets limits for which test signals can be used, but also introduces the need for characterizing this non-linearity, e.g., measuring the distortion. The Time Delay Spectrometry (TDS) introduced by Heyser uses a linear swept sine for time-selective measurements. Like most other swept sine algorithms, it is based on the assumption that the response at a certain point in time represents the response to just one particular frequency. That is approximately correct if the sweep rate is low enough. A delay in the system under test, however, will result in a frequency shift (proportional to the delay) of the measured response. If the signal follows different paths with different delays (e.g., direct and reflected sound from a loudspeaker), the signal measured will contain slightly different frequencies. Tracking the response with a narrow bandpass filter therefore makes it possible to isolate one path (e.g., just the direct sound from a loudspeaker) from the others. It is proven that such a tracking bandpass filter is simply equivalent to applying a time window to the impulse response. In addition, a tracking bandpass filter can also be used to track the harmonics of the swept signal, thereby measure harmonic distortion as well (and still in a time selective way). However, the sweep rate must be limited in order to measure the fundamental correctly, measuring harmonics at low frequencies put further constraints on the maximum sweep rate. The Time Selective Response (TSR) introduced by Brüel & Kjær also uses a linear swept sine, but removes the limitation on the sweep rate (by mathematical refinement of the algorithm) so the fundamental response is measured correctly even with very fast sweeps. For measuring distortion at low frequencies, the same constraints still applies to the maximum sweep rate for TSR, as for TDS. Both TDS and TSR, with the tracking bandpass filter approach, are linked to using a linear sweep. The linear sweep, however, is not very ideal, if the measurements shall cover a broad frequency range: Often the S/N ratio at low frequencies is critical, but the linear sweep has relatively little energy at low frequencies: Half of the time (and thereby half of the energy) is used in the highest octave, only one fourth of the time (and of the energy) is used in the second highest octave, etc. In order to achieve a sufficient S/N ratio at low frequencies a very slow sweep has to be used, wasting time (and energy) at high frequencies. The linear sweep also becomes very slow, if the sweep rate has to be kept very low in order to measure distortion at low frequencies - eventually even slower than required for a sufficient S/N ratio. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Time Selective Measurements With Log Sweep 527 The log TSR implemented in SoundCheck® uses a logarithmically swept sine for fast time selective measurements of both the fundamental response and of distortion. The logarithmically swept sine is much more suitable for electroacoustic measurements: The logarithmic sweep uses the same time (and energy) for every octave, which is much more suitable achieving a good S/N ration for all frequencies in typical electroacoustic measurements. The logarithmic sweep also provides a sweep rate, which is low at low frequencies but increases with the frequency. That makes it possible to measure distortion also at low frequencies without making the whole sweep very slow. As a logarithmically swept sine is used the "tracking bandpass filter" method is not applicable for the analysis. Instead, cross correlation analysis is used. By doing the cross correlation of the response signal with a special energy weighted version of the excitation signal, the impulse response is found directly, and from that the frequency response is easily calculated as well. It is thereby possible to obtain a unique combination of features: Time selectivity. The very suitable energy distribution of the logarithmic sweep (increased energy at low frequencies). The capability of measuring distortion due to the sine based nature of the signal. An effective way measure distortion even at low frequencies due to the sweep rate of the logarithmic sweep being low only at low frequencies just where it is needed. Important: The time windows used by the Time Selective Response algorithm are defined in Weighting and Window Types on page 525. Please refer to the following AES paper for more information on this measurement technique: “Simulated Free Field Measurements”, found on the Listen website. 528 Time Selective Measurements With Log Sweep SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix L: Excel Template Tutorial Excel templates are a great way to keep your data organized when you are running the same sequence repeatedly and want to save several pieces of data each time. They allow you to customize the layout of data and even create additional worksheets with graphs, statistics, or summaries. Step 1 – Write Sequence Before you can begin developing a template your sequence should be able to collect all the data that should be saved to Excel SoundCheck relies on the data names that are visible in the memory list to create the worksheets in Excel When saving to an Excel file, a new worksheet is created for each data item The names for all Curves, Values and Results should be finalized before they are saved to Excel If the data names are changed after you’ve created the Excel template, the Excel template will have to be re-created Step 2 – Create Autosave Step(s) Insert an Autosave Step in the sequence, and configure it to Save Data to Excel. Important: If you are saving Data and Results, you will need at least 2 Autosave Steps set to Append. In this case, the steps are set to Append Data so that all the information is added to one Excel file. Choose settings for all of the parameters, but select ‘None’ for the Header Figure L-1: Autosave Steps If saving curves you may wish to only select the ‘Y’ axis. This will result in the X axis being printed once at the beginning of the Excel file, and only the Y axis data will append after that. Depending on the sequence, there may be multiple Autosave Steps appending to the same file. The benefit of this is that you can save different data types with unique formats but keep the data confined to a single file. Data and Results are autosaved via different steps. Figure L-1 shows 3 separate Autosave Steps in the Sequence Editor. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Excel Template Tutorial 529 The Autosave Step in Figure L-2 is saving the bulk of the data to Excel. The Y axis is always saved on the first save to Excel In this example, only the Y axis is saved since the Z axis values are not needed. Other settings used for all three Autosave Steps: Autosave Folder Path: C:\SoundCheck\Data (or other folder on your local drive) Format: Excel Header: None Layout: Rows Notation: Floating point, 2 Decimal places Test Information: Serial No. Filename: Append and Automatic Filename Template: <Seq> (Sequence Name) Figure L-2: Save Y Axis The step in Figure L-3 is nearly identical to the previous step except for the axis choice. Only the Z axis is saved since the data is phase information. These two steps are set to append to the same file. This is done by selecting Excel as the data format, and choosing the same data folder and filename settings. In this particular example the first autosave step will open Excel, save the data, and then close Excel. The second step will repeat this procedure, appending to the file that was just created. Figure L-3: Save Z Axis 530 Excel Template Tutorial SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The third Autosave Step in Figure L-4 is set to save the Results of the selected limit steps. Otherwise the settings are identical to the first two steps, and the data will again be saved to the single Excel file. Note: Saving Data and Results requires two separate Autosave steps. Figure L-4: Save Results Step 3 – Create Initial Excel File Now that the autosave step(s) have been created, it is time to run the sequence so that an Excel file is created. This initial file is used to create the template. Using an Excel file with real data saves a lot of time in Step 4 since this initial file has the correct structure for data including worksheet names and data headers. Figure L-5: Initial Excel File Example Figure L-5 shows the “Fundamental Tab“ of the initial saved file from the example sequence. Step 4 – Create Template Open the Initial Excel File and save it as a new file, adding the word “Template” to the end of name. This identifies it for use in the next step and to prevent it from accidentally being overwritten. For example: Sequence Name Template.xls This must be an .XLS or .XLSX file, not an .XLT Excel template. XLSM files are supported as of SC14.01. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Excel Template Tutorial 531 Create New Summary Worksheet Excel allows you to link data from several worksheets to cells on a Master Page. This allows you to condense and format data to suit your needs. In the example template file, a ‘Summary’ worksheet has been added. It has been moved so it is the first worksheet in the Excel file. All the required data from each worksheet can be presented on a single page instead of having to scan through each of the tabs. This is especially useful for individual product reports or creating an overall pass/fail report for a production run. Summary for Production Run Copy the entire Column of data from a worksheet for each item you want on the Summary Page. This ensures that the data from all sequence runs will be shown on the Summary Page. Go to the Summary Page and click on the Column Letter where you would like that data to appear Select Edit > Paste Special > Paste Link Do this for each Data Column that should appear on the Summary See example in Figure L-8 Summary for Single DUT Copy individual cells of data from a worksheet for each item needed and paste in the desired cell on the Summary Page using “Edit > Paste Special > Paste Link” as noted above You can also use the graph function in Excel, e.g.: Response or Distortion graphs Prepare Template for New Data Go through each Tab or Worksheet of the Excel Template that generated by SoundCheck. Do not include the Summary Page. Perform the following operation Select all the Initial Data Cells by clicking on box in the upper left corner of the first data worksheet Select multiple worksheet by holding the Shift Key and clicking on all of the Worksheets along the bottom. DO NOT INCLUDE THE SUMMARY PAGE! 532 Right Click on the selected region(s) and select Clear Contents. (Do not use the Delete key. It is not the same function.) You can also go to the Excel Edit menu, select Clear and then select Contents. This Clears the data from the cells but retains the formating and data pointers required by Excel Excel Template Tutorial SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure L-6 shows the all the worksheets are present in the template but the data lines are empty. This must be done for every worksheet in the template. Figure L-6: Clear Contents to Create Template Step 5 – Use the Template in the Sequence In SoundCheck open the Sequence Editor and set each of the Autosave Steps to use the new Excel Template. When the sequence is run, SoundCheck will enter the data into this template but save it as a new Excel file according to your Filename settings. If the Autosave Step is set to Append, SoundCheck will continue appending to an existing file. Figure L-7 shows the new Excel file after saving date on four units in a production run. Figure L-7: New Production Run Excel File Figure L-8 shows the Summary Tab which links to data from the other worksheets. Figure L-8: Summary Tab SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Excel Template Tutorial 533 Page Intentionally Left Blank SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Excel Template Tutorial 534 Appendix M: Barcode Reader Integration At its most basic functionality, a barcode reader can be used to input characters scanned from a barcode directly into any available field in SoundCheck. This is useful for quickly entering long and/or complex serial numbers or lot numbers in SoundCheck. It is also possible to scan a barcode that performs an action in SoundCheck. Scan a barcode that starts a SoundCheck sequence Scan a barcode that opens the Signal Generator This is possible because a barcode reader converts data read from the barcode into ASCII data that is sent to your PC. Essentially, it’s emulating keyboard activity. This is great for production line systems where a keyboard is not available to the operator and you want to simplify and minimize operator contact with the PC. We can take advantage of this by creating barcodes which represent the keyboard shortcuts available in SoundCheck. Referencing the first example, starting a sequence through the keyboard is done by pressing F2 on the keyboard. Therefore, by generating a barcode which contains the same ASCII data as F2, we are able to mimic that function key being pressed by scanning that barcode. See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. Programming Most barcode readers need to be programmed to be able to read a barcode and emulate a key stroke. This is done by scanning a series of barcodes in the bar code reader user manual. Sometimes an extended manual or programming guide for the reader needs to be downloaded from the manufacturer’s website. Important! The barcode reader must be able to “Emulate Keyboard Functions” so that SoundCheck receives keystrokes when a barcode is scanned. Before you buy a barcode reader for SoundCheck control, contact the technical support department of the bar code reader manufacturer and ask if it supports: Keyboard Emulation, Keyboard Wedge or Does it act as an HID (Human Interface Device) Code 39 Full ASCII and Code 39 Extended Function Key Mapping (See below) Does the reader come pre-programmed to read Function Key barcodes from their programming guide (cut and paste F key barcodes from their PDF file) Symbology and Function Key Mapping The first thing that needs to be activated is the symbology called “Code 39 Full ASCII” and Code 39 Extended. Either of these may be required. Bar Code Rules Some bar code readers allow you to create special rules allowing you to emulate key strokes. The process usually involves scanning a list of bar codes in the bar code reader instruction manual. Instructions will vary depending on the make and model of bar code reader. This is only a general example. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Barcode Reader Integration 535 Example Scan the bar codes in the order listed. 1. Begin New Rule 2. Specific String at Start 3. Capital letter F code 4. Number 2 code 5. End of Message 6. Send F2 Key 7. Save Rule With barcode creation software, make a barcode for “F2” (the letter F and the number 2 in one bar code), label it “Start Sequence” and print it out. Scanning this bar code will emulate hitting the F2 key on the keyboard. Repeat the process for other function keys. See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. Check with the manufacturer regarding utilities that will assist with Function Key Mapping or programming the reader. Advanced Function Key Mapping creates a “preset” in the barcode reader for selected keys on the keyboard, such as the function keys. The mapping uses ASCII values that are rarely used. This is what allows a barcode reader to send key strokes to the computer, such as F2, which is used to start a sequence is SoundCheck. Some barcode readers also have “Advanced Data Editing” functionality. This allows you to program the barcode reader to manipulate the data read by the barcode reader. You can program prefix and suffix commands, so that when a bar code is scanned, other commands can be “chained“ together to control SoundCheck. For example: The barcode reader is programmed with the prefix F8 (which puts the cursor in the serial number field) and the suffix F2 (which starts a SoundCheck sequence) Scanning a serial number barcode on your DUT automatically adds the number to the serial number field and then starts the currently open sequence Barcode Software You will also need a software application to create barcodes. The software must be able to create Code 39 barcodes The example in Figure M-1 shows a Code39 barcode for “capital F + 2”. The barcode reader is programmed to read this code and send the “F2 key” to the computer. Figure M-1: Code39 of Capital F + 2 You will need to create a separate barcode for each keyboard function required (F2, F3, F4, etc.) See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 521. These barcodes and instructions for use can be used to make to a ”Barcode Command Sheet” that is printed out and posted with each SoundCheck system There are a number of Barcode Software applications available that provide the basic functions required, such as Code 39. There are also free barcode applications available. 536 Barcode Reader Integration SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix N: Running Sequences from a Network Drive As of SoundCheck 12, the sequence file (.SQC) contains all sequence parameters and steps. Individual Step files are no longer required. See Single-file Sequence Format on page 388. Sequences can be shared with workstations on the network All systems must use the same version of SoundCheck as sequences are not backward compatible Each workstation will use its own System Hardware and System Calibration Configurations, which will have unique values Once edited, sequences can be marked as ”Read-Only” to prevent unwanted changes on the workstations (Right click on the sequence or folder of sequences, select Properties and check ReadOnly) Important! The only downside to this practice is that the Master and Workstation PCs can only open sequences if the network is operational. The reliability of the network should be considered before implementing this system. Server - A sub-server used solely for SoundCheck (preferred) or the main network server Master PC - Used to create and edit SoundCheck sequences, storing them on the network Workstation PC - A SoundCheck system that opens sequences stored on the server Master PC Configuration The Master PC is the computer that sequences are developed and/or edited on. This requires the Sequence Editor (optional module 2002). Server S:\ Sequences can be stored on the Master PC and then copied to the Server or simply stored and edited on the Server. 1. Any exported sequences from previous versions should be saved with SoundCheck 16.0 on the Master PC. Doing this saves all of the steps within the sequence file as specified in Single-file Sequence Format on page 388. Master PC SoundCheck Sequence Development SoundCheck Workstation 1 SoundCheck Workstation 2 Figure N-1: SoundCheck Network Scheme 2. On the SoundCheck Main Screen, click on Edit and then select Folder Paths. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Running Sequences from a Network Drive 537 3. Step Templates can remain on the local PC. They are not linked to sequences. 4. Browse to the location for the Import/Export folder. In this case it is on the network. Click on Select Cur Dir. 5. Browse to the location of the Logo for use in print-outs. Click on Select Cur Dir. 6. Status.dat files can also be located on the network. 7. The Master PC can now open sequences from the network. On the SoundCheck main window click on File and then Open. Browse to the network sequence location and open a sequence. Note: Changes to the Master PC System Hardware and System Calibration Configurations will not be replicated on the Workstation PCs. Workstation PC Configuration 8. For existing workstations: Make sure the sequences unique to that workstation have been exported and backed up. See “Exporting Sequences” on page 403. Server S:\ Each workstation opens sequences from the server. Sequences can be made Read-Only. 9. The Hardware Configuration of the Workstation PC should be set up for the specific audio interface used on each machine. Note that the physical hardware can be different on each machine. See “Hardware Configuration” on page 47. Of course, multichannel sequences will require multichannel hardware. 10. Each workstation must have the same Signal Path naming convention as the Master PC. See “Naming - Best Practices” on page 73. Master PC SoundCheck Sequence Development SoundCheck Workstation 1 SoundCheck Workstation 2 Figure N-2: Workstation Configuration As long as the “Signal Path naming convention” of the workstations matches the Master PC, the sequence will access the hardware and work as expected. Each workstation will have the same channel names and channel structure, but will have unique calibration values for each input and Output Signal Path. 11. See Calibrating SoundCheck on page 76 for instructions on input and output calibration. Set the folder paths in the same way the Master PC is setup. Generally, sequences are not edited on the workstation computers. If this is the case, the Sequence Editor module is not needed for the workstations. 538 Running Sequences from a Network Drive SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix O: Data Import Wizard Tutorial Importing text from a saved file 1. From the Memory List click Data 2. Select Open Data 3. Select a .TXT file to start wizard The first Import Wizard screen (Figure O-1) will display the contents of the selected text file. The default settings are: Delimited Column delimiter - tab Data is in - columns Data offset: 0 columns and 0 rows The text file shown in Figure O-1 is tab delimited in a row format and includes a header row of frequency values. Figure O-1: Data Import Wizard Screen 1 To configure the import wizard, do the following: 1. Choose whether data is delimited or fixed width. If the data is delimited, choose the type of delimiter (tab, comma, space, other). 2. Choose the data format (columns or rows). 3. Choose whether the data file includes a header. The row/col: box refers to how many rows (or columns) the header is offset from the first row (or column). In Figure O-1, the header information is in the first row, therefore the offset value is 0. Check the Standard Header box if the data file was stored using the SoundCheck Standard header format (See Autosave Editor on page 183 for more details regarding the standard header format). 4. Increment the Data offset if the data begins at a row (or column) other than Row 1 (or Column 1). If the first row or column contains the data (as in Figure O-1), then the offset should be 0. 5. Click Next when finished. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Figure O-2: Configuring Import Wizard Screen 1 Data Import Wizard Tutorial 539 The Import Wizard table in Figure O-3 shows if the X-axis/Y-axis appears in Columns or Rows. X-axis This is typically set to common Y-axis Typically set set to increments. If the X-axis is set to increments, SoundCheck will interpret the first row (or column) to be the X-axis and the second row (or column) to be the corresponding data values. Figure O-3: Data Import Wizard Screen 2 For files containing multiple data sets: The X and Y-axes are grouped in pairs (e.g., rows 1 and 2 are the X and Y data respectively for Data Set #1 Rows 3 & 4 are the X and Y data respectively for Data Set #2, etc.) The set individually option allows you to choose which rows or columns are X-axis values. Click Next once the appropriate settings have been made. Figure O-4: Data Import Wizard Screen 3 540 Note: The import wizard keeps imported data in memory. Depending on the computer hardware, you may not be able to import large data arrays such as an FFT spectrum or time waveform. Note: The example in Figure O-4 shows only X and Y data. For files with both Magnitude and Phase please see Phase Data on page 541. Data Import Wizard Tutorial SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual The following is a breakdown of the settings in Figure O-4. X axis settings Location of X-axis values X-axis data type and units. Typically the X-axis values are linear (Hz) and displayed on a logarithmic axis. Y axis settings Location of Y-axis values. The Row/col: value is based on which curve is highlighted in the Curves list. In this case, curve 1 (the highlighted curve) is located in Row 2. Phase Data When importing a curve with Magnitude and Phase data, select “Phase row/col included”. Note: When importing a reference curve with Magnitude and Phase you may need to remove extra Curves created by the wizard. Then select “Phase row/col included”. This will enable the Phase fields for editing and setup the proper Z-axis column for phase data. Y-axis data type and units. Typically, the Y-axis values are in dB and displayed on a linear axis. The decibel reference value can be entered. Note: When importing correction or equalization curves, choose Units with no prefix or unit name and set the dB reference to 1.00. Curves Data curves are available in the imported text file. Curves can be added or removed by clicking Add and Remove. Click Apply Setting to All to apply the settings for a highlighted curve; e.g., Units of dB re 20 µPa to all the curves in the list. Name Allows you to create a custom name for a curve. The highlighted curve(s) can be individually named by typing in the Name field. Save Settings The import configuration should be saved using Save Settings… This allows you to recall these settings in the future by using the Load Settings... button shown in Figure O-1. Once settings are loaded, click Finish and data is immediately imported. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Data Import Wizard Tutorial 541 Apply Settings to All Apply data/axis type, magnitude, units to all curves for import Add Add new curve to import Remove Remove curve from import list Importing Correction Curves From Other Manufacturers If an imported curve does not have a 0 dB value at 1 kHz you must change the calibration Reference Frequency in the Calibration Editor to a point on the correction curve that is at 0 dB. This may also have to be done when importing Diffuse Field or other such correction curves without data at 1 kHz. See Importing Correction Curves From Other Manufacturers on page 70. 542 Data Import Wizard Tutorial SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Appendix P: Default Sequence List The following list of sequences is included with SoundCheck Sequence Description Calibration AmpConnect Self Test Stepped Sine Used to test the functionality and connections of AmpConnect. For use when Time Selective Response option is not available. AmpConnect Self Test Used to test the functionality and connections of AmpConnect. Requires Time Selective Response module. Microphone Calibration Self Test This is not to be used as a sequence. It is only a placeholder for Calibration Editor functions. A diagnostic tool used to check the settings and performance of the audio interface (sound card) Electronics Amplifier THD+N Tests the gain response and THD+N for an amplifier or other electronics MP3 Player (Multitone) Uses a multitone stimulus to test various parameters of a portable music player Headphones and Headsets Bluetooth Headset - Receive Subsequence used in Bluetooth Headset sequence for testing the receive side Bluetooth Headset - Send Subsequence used in the Bluetooth Headset sequence for testing the send side Bluetooth Headset Uses a multitone stimulus to test a Bluetooth headset in both the send and receive directions Headphones An example headphone sequence that measures frequency response and distortion Hearing Aids Frequency Response Basic frequency response measurement (gain versus frequency) for a hearing aid Input vs Output Uses amplitude sweeps at several frequencies to generate the input-output curves for a hearing aid OSPL 90 Performs the OSPL 90 test from the ANSI and IEC hearing aid standards Release Time Tests hearing aid release time according to ANSI S3-2003 How To Examples ActiveX & Test Stand example This sequence is called up by the Active X example code located at C:\SoundCheck 9.1\ActiveX Examples\ActiveX VB example.exe Autosave Demonstrates several methods for using the autosave step Average Sensitivity A very basic sequence that calculates the average sensitivity from a response curve Complex Averaging in Loop Calculates a complex average (magnitude and phase) over multiple measurements Confidence & Noise Demonstrates the confidence feature in the analysis editor by using 3 stimuli of varying lengths Diff Distortion Dual-Channel Analysis An example for testing difference frequency distortion Measures frequency response with three different methods: stepped sine, log sweep + TSR, pink noise and transfer function IM Distortion An example for testing intermodulation distortion SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Default Sequence List 543 Limits in Reference to Standard Measures a reference standard and uses its response to automatically generate limits for subsequent measurements Loop Stimulus Level A complex example of sequence logic that searches for the stimulus level that will generate 3% THD in the DUT Multitone Analysis A basic example of the multitone stimulus and analysis Power Averaging Uses the real time analyzer (RTA) to measure sound power Statistics THD at Actual Measured Frequency Demonstrates the various uses of the statistics step Plots the harmonics at their measured frequency and generates a normalized distortion curve Virtual Instrument Acquisition Walks through each of the virtual instruments and demonstrates their uses in a simple electrical loop back Loudspeakers Complete test An example of a loudspeaker production test that measures frequency response, distortion, impedance, and sensitivity all in one sweep Impedance Measures impedance of a loudspeaker Loose Particles Perceptual Rub & Buzz Demonstrates the loose particle algorithm Demonstrates the Perceptual Rub & Buzz function which measures distortion based on human hearing models and masking curves (Analysis Editor) Polar Plot (Linear X turntable) Measures the polar response and directivity of a loudspeaker in the horizontal and vertical axes by automatically controlling a Linear X turntable Rub & Buzz T-S Parameters – Added Mass T-S Parameters – Known Mass T-S Parameters – Known Volume An example of measuring rub & buzz Time Selective Response An example of measuring frequency response using a log sweep and the TSR algorithm Thiele-Small Parameters: Generates Thiele-Small parameters via the added mass or fixed volume methods Microphones Mic substitution Microphone Self Noise Microphone Measures the self noise of a microphone Measures frequency response and sensitivity of a microphone with an equalized stepped sine sweep SC ONE SC ONE – Headphones SC ONE – Loudspeaker SC ONE – Microphone (Measure Reference) SC ONE – Microphone SoundCheck ONE template sequences serve as a starting point for making new sequences. They contain all the necessary steps to perform the essential measurements for their test application. SC One AmpConnect Self Test Used to test the functionality and connections of AmpConnect. Telephones Receive Measures response, distortion, and loudness for the receive side of a telephone Send Measures response, distortion, and loudness for the send side of a telephone 544 Default Sequence List SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality SoundCheck® 16.0 Available Functionality Industry Standard Sequences Blackman-Harris, and 7 Term BlackmanHarris windows (Please contact Listen for a complete list) • IEEE • ITU • ANSI • IEC • TIA •TBR • ISO • AES • ALMA Triggering Complex or power averaging Average, Maximum, Minimum level with overload and real time indicators SoundCheck Virtual Audio Test Bench Run multiple instances of each virtual instrument simultaneously Selectable averaging time (Linear & Exponential) Save to Memory List available in all meters A, B, C and user-defined weightings Pure tone frequency and amplitude extraction with “snap to max” Delta and Harmonic cursor with THD readout Selectable graphical zoom View last waveform of current spectrum Save to memory of current spectrum Manual Signal Generator Sine Pink and White Noise with user-defined frequency range Streaming .wav file from disk with RMS, Peak level and active speech level calibration Equalization using calibration measurements or any user-defined curve AC RMS, AC Peak and DC levels (Average, Max Hold, Min Hold) with overload indication 1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24 octave filters with true digital recursive filters Linear and Continuous-Moving averaging time (fast, slow, and user-defined) Average, Maximum, Minimum level with overload and real time indicators A, B, C and user defined weighting filters Complies with ANSI S1.11 and IEC 1260 Linear and Exponential averaging time (Fast, Slow, and user-defined) Multimeter Real-Time Analyzer Linear and Exponential averaging time (Fast, Slow, and user-defined) A, B, C and user-defined weightings Selectable Max/Min limits with Pass/Fail indication Save and Recall specific multimeter settings Fixed or auto-tracking bandpass filter option ‘Linear Repeating’ averaging mode Oscilloscope Triggering Delta cursor Selectable graphical zoom View spectrum of current waveform Spectrum Analyzer FFT with arbitrary number of spectral lines (only limited by computer speed and memory) Hanning, Hamming, Blackman-Harris, Exact Blackman, Blackman, Flat top, 4 Term SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Real Time Distortion Analyzer continuous real time measurement of output distortion Select THD / THD+N, THD / THD+N Residual and SINAD A, B, and C weighting filters along with userdefined arbitrary weighting functions Distortion over time using optional strip chart recorder Frequency Counter High resolution frequency measurement Frequency value can be saved to the memory list for use in a sequence SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality 545 equalize any test signal including arbitrary signals. Strip Chart Recorder Provides measurement over time capability for the multimeter, distortion analyzer and frequency counter Plot continuously or for a predefined amount of time and plot instantaneous results or repeating averages Curves and Values can be saved to the memory list for use in a sequence SoundCheck Step Editors Hardware Windows Multimedia devices including sound cards with ASIO drivers (PCI, PCMCIA, USB, Fire wire), Bluetooth, and VoIP. Apple’s Core Audio devices (SoundCheck Mac version) NI DAQmx data acquisition cards including NI 4461 Calibration and settings including sampling rate, bit depth, analog or digital audio, maximum voltage, and alias free frequency limit. I/O cards for TTL relay control Computer interfaces control with RS-232, GPIB (IEEE-488), footswitch and buzzer. Configuration for AmpConnect™, AudioConnect™, AudioConnect 4×4™, SoundConnect 2™ , DC Connect™, BTC 4148 and BQC-4148 Multichannel configuration with table view of channels Messages Message steps initiated based on Pass/Fail conditions Display text message in local language, input numeric values, Yes/No dialog Digital I/O IEEE-488 and RS-232 AmpConnect™, AudioConnect™, AudioConnect 4×4™ , SoundConnect 2™ , DC Connect™ BTC-4148 and BQC-4148 setup Stimulus Log sweep (“Farina” sweep) Sine (stepped – any linear or logarithmic resolution, and amplitude sweep) Two-tone (two sweeping tones for Difference Frequency Distortion or one fixed and one sweeping tone for IM) Multitone with linear or logarithmic spacing Noise (pink, white, MLS with user-defined bandpass range) Arbitrary (any WAV file) Equalization DC (requires Listen DC Connect or National Instruments hardware) Sweep Equalization for Minimized Transients Selecting equalization enables a smooth transition between steps in stepped sine amplitude and frequency sweeps Calibration 546 Measure Input and Output sensitivities for transducers, amplifiers, and signal conditioning devices using built-in routines and store calibration history Import of EQ/Correction curves for transducers Acquisition Play & Record, or any combination of Signal Generator, Multimeter, RTA, and FFT Calibration with external, absolute source including acoustic, vibration, or voltage. Capture response time waveform as a WAV file User-defined physical units (e.g. Pa, V, G, etc.) Complex Equalization (amplitude and phase) of input and output devices (e.g. microphones and amplifiers). If the output device is an acoustic source, (e.g. loudspeaker, mouth simulator), SoundCheck can automatically Simultaneous acquisition using up to 64 channels Triggered record Record level monitoring SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Distortion THD and Rub & Buzz Analysis Time Impulse Response Normalized THD and Rub & Buzz distortion (harmonics compared to amplitude of fundamental at measured frequency) Auto-Correlation Cross-Correlation Perceptual Rub & Buzz in phons Time Envelope THD + Noise Loose particle detection Intermodulation or Difference Frequency Automatic delay compensation Difference Frequency Non-Coherent Distortion Frequency FFT & DFT (any size), and Nth octave resolution Hann, Blackman-Harris and Flat Top windows Auto-spectrum & Cross-spectrum Spectral Scaling: RMS or Power Density Frequency and phase response including harmonics Complex or power averaging Relative or absolute response Coherent Output Power Recall Automatically recall data or results Post-processing Complex math: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, offset by constant (X, Y, or Z dimensions), change sign, reciprocal, absolute value, square, square root, exponential, and logarithm Scalar (Ave, Power, Max, Min, Resonant Frequency, Q, Notch, Loudness) Coherence & Non-Coherence Windowing (time and frequency) Signal-to-Noise Ratio Measurement Confidence User-defined Equations (e.g. Thiele-Small parameters) Impedance Change resolution to Nth octave or user defined linear or logarithmic Nth Octave synthesis Power Summation of any user-defined frequency range Group delay Unwrapped phase Search range to find intersection of two curves (e.g. -3dB points of crossover network) Curve smoothing with 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, and 1/ 24 octave or user-defined linear or log resolution Loudness rating according to IEEE and ITUT; example sequences for TIA and other industry standards included Attack & Release time calculates the time for the response signal to rise or decay, respectively, by a user-defined amplitude in dB or linear units Directivity Index Resampling and sampling rate correction Algorithms Broadband RMS to measure unfiltered level of an AC or DC signal Average FFT Spectrum Time Selective Response (‘Farina” method) to measure free-field and impulse response of fundamental AND harmonics. This includes deconvolved time response and choice of time windows. Heterodyne to measure frequency and phase response with optimal accuracy HarmonicTrak™ Algorithm tracks level and phase of any user-selected harmonics including sub-harmonics or intermodulation products; no limit to number of harmonics Loose particle detection Multitone RTA Spectrum & frequency response Transfer function between any two channels SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality 547 Printing FFT / Inverse FFT Zwicker loudness (level and spectrum) Standard & arbitrary waveform filtering Active speech level (ITU-T P.56) Statistics Average Max, Min, Mean Standard Deviation with user-defined sigma Process Control (Cp & Cpk) Best and Worst Fit to Average with ranking Yield Histogram and bell curve fit Limits Pass/Fail Absolute Floating (x & y directions) Aligned to a pre-defined value (e.g. 0 dB at 1 kHz) Dynamic, using live measurements Waveforms, single values, and curves Control of significant digits Margin, Critical and Failed points 548 Report generation to Excel, Word, HTML or image files Use of templates (Excel, Word) Print preview Direct print to file or printer Automatic file naming Custom Steps Outline ET250-3D Turntable Control Ethernet control for the Outline ET250-3D turntable Instrument Open Close Template for creating a custom step combining your LabVIEW code with SoundCheck virtual instruments System Custom Step Run Command Line operations as part of a sequence Display Multiple displays on separate tabs allow viewing of curves, single values, and test results with PASS/FAIL indicators; display layout can be transferred to Word or as HTML document; curves with different units (e.g. dBSPL and Ohms) can be displayed in one graph with no limit to number of curves displayed in a single graph; data from any one graph can be exported directly to a new Excel file or pre-defined template Displays include XY graph, table, results, text, polar plots and embedded images Default template and duplicate Save to image file Lock display to protect display layout Data search function Mixer Volume Control input / output levels of a 2 channel WDM / Core Audio device RS232 Read Integer Programming example that reads the integer value from an external RS232 device Serial Number Write Read Programming example for creating a custom vi to read or write to the SoundCheck serial number field Open Before Converting Old Custom VIs Tool for updating your Custom VIs to latest version of SoundCheck / LabVIEW SoundCheck 16.0 Available Functionality SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Glossary Term Definition Absolute Standard Deviation The standard deviation calculated at each point of the curve. See Statistics chapter for formula. algorithm A procedure for solving a mathematical problem in a finite number of steps that frequently involves repetition of an operation. Algorithm here refers specifically to a procedure that encodes audio information (so that it can be sent at high speed across data lines) and decodes the transmitted information into audio at the receiving end. Amplitude The instantaneous magnitude of an oscillating quantity such as sound pressure. The peak amplitude is the maximum value. Anechoic Without echo Area of Audibility The area within which a specific sound or sounds are audible. Best/Worst Fit to Average Determines which of the selected curves is the closest/furthest from the average of the curves. See Statistics chapter for formula. Center Frequency See IEEE 269 and/or B&K Frequency Analysis Text Book definition Conditional Branching Used in a sequence to Jump over steps in a sequence according to the Pass/Fail criteria of a step. CPB Constant Percentage Bandwidth. Crest Factor crest factor = absolute peak value / rms value = max[|x|]/rms(x) dB See decibel dB (A) or dBA A sound-level meter reading with an A-weighting network simulating the human-ear response at a loudness level of 40 phons. dB (B) A sound-level meter reading with a B-weighting network simulating the human-ear response at a loudness level of 70 phons. C34 dBm0 dBm0 is a digital level. 0 dBu = 775 mV = 1 mW@600 Ω. A reference voltage of 775 mV yields 1 mW with a load of 600 Ohm. dBSPL A sound-level meter reading with no weighting network in the circuit, i.e., flat. The reference level is 20 μPa. Decade Ten times any quantity or frequency range. The range of the human ear is about 3 decades. Decibel A logarithmic form of any measured physical quantity and commonly used in the measurement of sound. The decibel provides the possibility of representing a large span of signal levels in a simple manner as opposed to using the basic unit Pascal. The difference between the sound pressure for silence versus a loud sound is a factor of 1,000,000:1 or more, and it is not practical to use these large numbers. Doubling of Sound Pressure = 6 dB Doubling of Sound Power = 3 dB Doubling of Perceived Sound Level = 10 dB (approximately) Decibel dB---the term used to identify ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of two like quantities proportional to power or energy. (See level, sound transmission loss.) One decibel corresponds to a power ratio of 100.1. Directivity index (DI) The difference between sound pressure level in any given direction in the acoustic far field and the average sound pressure level in that field. DUT Device Under Test Equal loudness contour A contour representing a constant loudness for all audible frequencies. The contour having a sound pressure level of 40 dB at 1,000 Hz is arbitrarily defined as the 40-phon contour. Equalization The process of adjusting the frequency response of a device or system to achieve a flat or other desired response. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Glossary 549 Far field That part of the sound field in which sound pressure decreases inversely with distance from the source. This corresponds to a reduction of approximately 6 dB in level for each doubling distance. Feedback, acoustic Unwanted interaction between the output and input of an acoustical system, e.g., between the loudspeaker and the microphone of a system. FFT Efficient algorithm to calculate the Fourier Transform. Filter, band pass A filter that passes all frequencies between a low-frequency cutoff point or a high-frequency cutoff point.C55 Filter, high pass A filter that passes all frequencies above a cutoff frequency. Filter, low pass A filter that passes all frequencies below a certain cutoff frequency. Fletcher-Munson Curve Our sensitivity to sound depends on its frequency and volume. Human ears are most sensitive to sounds in the midrange. At lower volume levels humans are less sensitive to sounds away from the midrange, bass and treble sounds "See m" reduced in intensity at lower listening levels. Fourier analysis Application of the Fourier transform to a signal to determine its spectrum. Free field An environment in which a sound wave may propagate in all directions without obstructions or reflections. Anechoic rooms can produce such an environment under controlled conditions. Frequency The number of times per second that the sine wave of sound repeats itself. It can be expressed in cycles per second, or Hertz (Hz). Frequency equals Speed of Sound / Wavelength. Frequency Masking Principle where louder sounds render soft sounds inaudible in nearby frequency bands. This is the principle behind perceptual encoding. Frequency response The changes in the sensitivity of a circuit, device, or room with frequency. FSD Full Scale Deflection full duplex Telco communication that is bi-directional. ISDN is full duplex, so each end of the connection can simultaneously transmit to the other. Fundamental The lowest frequency of a note in a complex wave form or chord. G.711 Refers to the transmission of audio via a POTS (Plain Old Telephone) circuit. Frequency response is limited to about 3.5 kHz. Gain To increase in level. The function of a volume control. GUI Graphical User Interface Handshaking Protocols usually implemented in hardware that let one data device tell another that conditions are right (or wrong) for communications. A simple example: a printer telling a computer that it is OK to print. Harmonics Also called overtones, these are vibrations at frequencies that are multiples of the fundamentals. Harmonics extend without limit beyond the audible range. They are characterized as even-order and odd-order harmonics. A second-order harmonic is two times the frequency of the fundamental; a third order is three times the fundamental; a fourth order is four times the fundamental; and so forth. Each even-order harmonic second, fourth, sixth, etc.is one octave or multiples of one octave higher than the fundamental; these even-order overtones are therefore musically related to the fundamental. Odd-order harmonics, on the other hand third, fifth, seventh, and up-create a series of notes that are not related to any octave overtones and therefore may have an unpleasant sound. Audio systems that emphasize odd-order harmonics tend to have a harsh, hard quality. Hearing Range (human) A healthy young person generally can hear frequencies from approximately 20 Hz to 20000 Hz, and sound pressure levels from 0 dB to 130 dB or more (threshold of pain). The smallest perceptible change is 1 dB. 550 Glossary SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Hearing sensitivity The human ear is less sensitive at low frequencies than in the midrange. Turn your volume knob down and notice how the bass seems to "disappear". To hear low bass requires an adequate SPL level. To hear 25 Hz requires a much higher SPL level than to hear 250 Hz. Hertz The unit of frequency, abbreviated Hz. The same as cycles per second. High-pass filter See filter, high pass. Impedance The opposition to the flow of electric or acoustic energy measured in Ohms (Ω). Impulse A very short, transient, electric or acoustic signal. Impulse response Sound pressure versus time measurement showing how a device or room responds to an impulse. In phase Two periodic waves reaching peaks and going through zero at the same instant are said to be "in phase." Infrasound Frequencies below 20 Hz. Humans perceive frequencies below about 20 Hz as pressure rather than sound. Inverse-square law Under far field/free field conditions, sound intensity varies inversely with the square of the distance from the source. In pure spherical divergence of sound from a point source in free space, the sound pressure level decreases 6 dB for each doubling of the distance. Loudness The subjective judgment of intensity of a sound by humans. Loudness depends upon the sound pressure and frequency of the stimulus. Loudness was defined by Fletcher and Munson (1933) as a physiological description of the magnitude of an auditory sensation. The definition of loudness was later refined as a definition of the attribute of auditory sensation corresponding most closely to the physical measurement of sound intensity, but is not always accurate. Loudness is a subjective quantity and all measurement techniques are based on assumptions and interpretation. Masking The process by which the threshold of audibility for a sound is raised by the presence of another (masking) sound. A masking noise is one that is intense enough to render inaudible or unintelligible another sound that is also present. Max (statistics) The maximum value at each point of the curves being compared. Mean (statistics) The average value at each point of the curves being compared Microphone An acoustical-to-electrical transducer by which sound waves in air are converted to electrical signals. Min (statistics) The minimum value at each point of the curves being compared. NaN Not a Number Near field Locations close to the sound source between the source and the far field. The near field is typically characterized by large sound pressure level variations with small changes in measurement position from the source. This is a physical region in space where the inverse square law does not apply. Noise Traditionally, noise has been defined as unwanted, undesired, or unpleasant sound. This makes noise a subjective term. Sounds that may be unwanted and undesired by some may be wanted and desirable by others. Noise is sound, as defined in this document: a pressure variation, etc. In order to keep terms used in soundscape management as non-subjective as possible, sounds should be classified as either appropriate or inappropriate, rather than as "noise." or "sound." The appropriateness of any sound in a given area of a park will depend on a variety of factors, including the management objectives of that area. Noise Free Interval (natural sounds only) The length of the continuous period of time during which only natural sounds are audible. Though little research has been conducted to relate how this measure correlates with visitor judgments or with common experiences in park settings, it should provide a reasonable measure of the existence and availability of periods with only natural sounds. It is also a metric that requires no acoustics knowledge to be meaningful. Over the coming years of soundscape data collection, the NPS will acquire such data and develop an understanding of how this metric can best be used to aid in assessing and managing park soundscapes. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Glossary 551 Octave An octave is a doubling or halving of frequency. 20 Hz-40 Hz is often considered the bottom octave. For each octave lower in frequency that a speaker tries to reproduce, the speaker needs to move four times as much air! Octave Band The segment of the frequency spectrum separated by an octave. Octave bands Frequency ranges in which the upper limit of each band is twice the lower limit. Octave bands are identified by their geometric mean frequency, or center frequency. One-third octave bands Frequency ranges where each octave is divided into one-third octaves with the upper frequency limit being 2* (1.26) times the lower frequency. Identified by the geometric mean frequency of each band. Peak sound pressure level LPK[nd] ----ten times the common logarithm of the square of the ratio of the largest absolute value of the instantaneous sound pressure in a stated frequency band during a specified time interval to the reference sound pressure of 20 micro pascals. Percent Time Above Natural Ambient The amount of time that sound levels from human-caused sound(s) are greater than sound levels of natural ambient sounds in a given area. This measure is not specific to the hearing ability of a given animal, but a measure of when and how long human-caused sound levels exceed natural ambient sound levels. Percent Time Audible The amount of time that various sound sources are audible to animals, including humans, with normal hearing (hearing ability varies among animals). A sound may be above natural ambient sound pressure levels, but still not audible to some animals. This information is essential for measuring and monitoring human-caused noise in national parks. These data can be collected by either a trained observer (attended logging) or by making high-quality digital recordings (for later playback). Percent Time Audible is useful because it is a measure that is understandable without any acoustics knowledge. It is a measure that can be specific to a given animal, and it is a metric that correlates well with park visitor judgments of annoyance and with visitor reports of interference from certain noise sources with natural quiet and the sounds of nature. Phase Phase is the measure of progression of a periodic wave. Phase identifies the position at any instant which a periodic wave occupies in its cycle. It can also be described as the time relationship between two signals. Phase shift The time or angular difference between two signals. Phon The loudness level in phons of any sound is defined as being numerically equal to the dBSPL of a 1000 Hz tone that is judged by the average observer to be equally loud. Pink noise Noise with a continuous frequency spectrum and with equal power per constant percentage bandwidth. For example, equal power is any one-third octave band. Pitch A subjective term for the perceived frequency of a tone. Polarity The positive or negative direction of an electrical, acoustical, or magnetic force. Two identical signals in opposite polarity are 180 degrees apart at all frequencies. Polarity is not frequency dependent. POTS Plain Old Telephone Service. Standard analog phone lines used for voice and computer modem operation. Power Sum Calculates the square root of the sum of the squares of each Y value in a spectrum. See Power Sum on pg 210. Cp (statistics) A measure of process performance. The relationship of the +/- 6? value to the user specified limits. See Statistics chapter for formula. Cpk (statistics) The same as Cp except that it takes into consideration how centered the data is with respect to the limits. See Statistics chapter for formula. Pressure zone As sound waves strike a solid surface, the particle velocity is zero at the surface and the pressure is high, which creates a high-pressure layer near the surface. Pure tone A tone with no harmonics. All energy is concentrated at a single frequency. 552 Glossary SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Random noise A noise signal, commonly used in measurements, which has constantly shifting amplitude, phase, and a uniform spectral distribution of energy. Reflection For large surfaces compared to the wavelength of impinging sound, sound is reflected much as light is reflected, with the angle of incidence equaling the angle of reflection. Refraction The bending of sound waves traveling through layered media with different sound velocities. Resistance The quality of electrical or acoustical circuits that results in dissipation of energy through heat. Resonance A natural periodicity, or the reinforcement associated with this periodicity. Resonant frequency Any system has a resonance at some particular frequency. At that frequency, even a slight amount of energy can cause the system to vibrate. A stretched piano string, when plucked, will vibrate for a while at a certain fundamental frequency. Plucked again, it will again vibrate at that same frequency. This is its natural or resonant frequency. While this is the basis of musical instruments, it is undesirable in music-reproducing instruments like audio equipment. Response See frequency response. Reverberant sound field The sound in an enclosed or partially enclosed space that has been reflected repeatedly or continuously from the boundaries. Reverberation The persistence of sound in an enclosed or partially enclosed space after the source of sound has stopped; by extension, in some contexts, the sound that so persists. Reverberation room A room so designed that the reverberant sound field closely approximates a diffuse sound field, both in the steady state when the sound source is on, and during the decay after the source of sound has stopped.C125 Reverberation time The tailing off of a sound in an enclosure because of multiple reflections from the boundaries. Root Mean Square (RMS) Square root of the average of the squares of the signal. Measures the power of a signal. RS232 electronic specification for serial data connections between digital terminal equipment (DTE) and data communications equipment. (DCE) Signal is unbalanced. May be either synchronous or asynchronous. Can reside on multiple connector sizes, but most commonly appear on DB9/ DB25 connectors. 50' transmission limit. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital InterFace. Standard 2-channel digital audio interface found on many consumer-oriented products. sample rate The rate at which an analog signal is sampled, or digitized. For instance, when digitizing audio for a CD, the audio is captured at a sample rate of 44.1 kHz, or 44,100 times per second, creating a very close, but not perfect, digital representation of the analog waveform. SC SoundCheck® Self-noise, n Extraneous non-acoustical signals, generated or induced in a measurement system. Signal-to-noise (SN) ratio The range or distance between the noise floor (the noise level of the equipment itself) and the test signal or program material. Sine wave A periodic wave related to simple harmonic motion. Sone The unit of measurement for subjective loudness. Sound A wave motion in air, water, or other media. It is the rapid oscillatory compressional changes in a medium that propagate to distant points. It is characterized by changes in density, pressure, motion, and temperature as well as other physical properties. Not all rapid changes in the medium are sound (e.g., wind distortion on a microphone diaphragm). Sound attenuation The reduction of the intensity of sound as it travels from the source to a receiving location. Sound absorption is often involved as, for instance, in a lined duct. Spherical spreading and scattering are other attenuation mechanisms. Sound energy, E [ML2T-2]; J-energy added to an elastic medium by the presence of sound, consisting of potential energy in the form of deviations from static pressure and of kinetic energy in the form of particle velocity. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Glossary 553 Sound insulation The capacity of a structure to prevent sound from reaching a receiving location. Sound energy is not necessarily absorbed; impedance mismatch, or reflection back toward the source, is often the principal mechanism. Sound intensity, I [MT-3]; W/m2 the quotient obtained when the average rate of energy flow in a specified direction and sense is divided by the area, perpendicular to that direction, through or toward which it flows. The intensity at a point is the limit of that quotient as the area that includes the point approaches zero. Sound isolation The degree of acoustical separation between two locations, especially adjacent rooms. Sound level Of airborne sound, a sound pressure level obtained using a signal to which a standard frequency-weighting has been applied. Sound Level The weighted sound pressure level obtained by frequency weighting, generally A- or Cweighted. The weighting used must be clearly stated: For L Aeq, "A" denotes that A-weighting was used, and "eq" indicates that an equivalent level has been calculated. Hence, L Aeq is the A-weighted, energy-equivalent sound level. Sound Level Floor The lowest amplitude measurable by sound monitoring equipment. Most commercially available sound level meters and microphones can detect sound levels down to about 15 to 20 dBA; however, there are microphones capable of measuring sound levels below 0 dBA. Sound power level, Lp Of airborne sound, ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the sound power under consideration of the standard reference power of 1 pW. The quantity so obtained is expressed in decibels. Sound power, W [ML2T-3]; W---in a specified frequency band, the rate at which acoustic energy is radiated from a source. In general, the rate of flow of sound energy, whether from a source, through an area, or into an absorber. Sound Pressure Fluctuations in air pressure caused by the presence of sound waves. Sound pressure is the instantaneous difference between the actual pressure produced by a sound wave and the average barometric pressure at a given point in space. Not all pressure fluctuations detected by a microphone are sound (e.g., wind over the microphone). Sound pressure is measured in Pascals (Pa), Newtons per square meter, which is the metric equivalent of pounds per square inch. Sound Pressure Level (LP or SPL) The logarithmic form of sound pressure. In air, 20 times the logarithm (to the base 10) of the ratio of the actual sound pressure to a reference sound pressure (which is 20 micropascals, and by convention has been selected to be equal to the assumed threshold of human hearing). It is also expressed by attachment of the word decibel to the number. A 10 dB increase in SPL represents a perceived doubling in loudness sensation and a 3 dB increase is typically a "just noticeable difference" to an average listener. Sound Speed The speed of sound in air is about 344 m/sec (1,130 ft/sec or 770 mph) at 70° F at sea level. Sound waves Sound waves can be thought of like the waves in water. Frequency determines the length of the waves; amplitude or volume determines the height of the waves. At 20 Hz, the wavelength is 56 feet long! These long waves give bass its penetrating ability, (why you can hear car boomers blocks away). Spectrum the distribution of the energy of a signal versus frequency. Spectrum (Frequency Spectrum) The amplitude of sound at various frequencies. It is given by a set of numbers that describe the amplitude at each frequency or band of frequencies. Spectrum analyzer An instrument for measuring, and usually recording, the spectrum of a signal. Speech intelligibility A measure of sound clarity that indicates the ease of understanding speech. It is a complex function of psycho acoustics, signal-to-noise ratio of the sound source, and direct-toreverberant energy within the listening environment. Standard Deviation (statistics) The plus/minus sigma values evaluated on each point of the curves. See Statistics chapter for formula. STFT Short Term Fourier Transform 554 Glossary SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Stweep Stepped Sine Sweep stimulus signal Timbre The quality of a sound that distinguishes it from other sounds of the same pitch and volume. The distinctive tone of an instrument or a singing voice. Time Weighting The response speed of the detector in a sound level meter. For Slow response, the response speed is 1 second. Slow time weighting is frequently used in environmental sound measurements. Fast response time is 1/8 second (0.125). This is less frequently used, but will detect changes in sound levels more rapidly. Fast and Slow time weightings were developed, in part, to slow needle movement (called a "decay" factor) in analog meters so investigators could read and record sound levels. New digital sound level meters, while changing numbers rapidly on the screen, store sound level data in memory for later analysis. This means the ability to read numbers on the screen is less important. Hence, the most accurate "weighting" is none. Generally, 1-second Leq data are appropriate; however, when measuring sudden onset sound events such as sonic booms, more frequent data (many readings per second) may be appropriate. Tone burst A short signal used in acoustical measurements to make possible differentiating desired signals from spurious reflections. Total harmonic distortion (THD) Refers to a device adding harmonics that were not in the original signal. For example: a device that is fed a 20 Hz sine wave that is also putting out 40 Hz, 80 Hz, etc. Not usually a factor in most modern electronics, but still a significant design problem in loudspeakers. Transient response The ability of a component to respond quickly and accurately to transients. Transient response affects reproduction of the attack and decay characteristics of a sound. Transients Instantaneous changes in dynamics, producing steep wave fronts. Ultrasound Sounds or a frequency higher than 20,000 Hz. Watt The unit of electrical or acoustical power. 1 watt = 1 joule per second Wattage Is the unit of power used to rate the output of audio amplifiers. For a wattage number to have meaning the distortion level and impedance must also be specified. Wave A particular type of disturbance that travels through a medium by virtue of the elastic properties of that medium. Wavelength Wavelength is the distance a wave travels in the time it takes to complete one cycle. A wavelength can be measured between successive peaks or between any two corresponding points on the cycle. Wavelength (ft) = Speed of Sound (ft) / Frequency (Hz). (speed of sound at sea level is 331.4 meters/second or 1087.42 feet/second). Weighting Adjustment of the unweighted frequency response to account for a given human psycho acoustic White noise (ANS) Noise with a continuous frequency spectrum and with equal power per unit bandwidth. For example, equal power in any band of 100 Hz width. These definitions were derived from several sources, including: Listen, Inc. Acoustic Alliance. 2001. Glossary of Terms, Acoustic Alliance Products and Services Catalog. Provo, UT. American National Standards Institute. 1976. Standard Acoustical Terminology, S1.1. American National Standards Institute, NY, NY. Bruel & Kjaer. 2002. Environmental Noise. Bruel & Kjaer Sound and Vibration Measurement. Naerum, Denmark. Everest, F. A. 2001. Master Handbook of Acoustics. McGraw-Hill, New York, NY. Hirschorn, M. 2002. Noise Control Reference Handbook. Sound & Vibration, Bay Village, OH. Kelso, D. and A. Perez. 1983. Noise Control Terms Made Somewhat Easier. Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1976. About Sound. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D. C. SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Glossary 555 page intentionally left blank 556 Glossary SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual INDEX A absolute ................................................................. 112, 413 Absolute Analysis ...................................................94, 176 Absolute Comparison Precision ..........................259, 273 Absolute envelope ........................................................ 174 Absolute Limits ......................................................259, 269 Absolute Response ...................................................... 140 Absolute SPL level ....................................................... 417 Absolute Standard Deviation ....................................... 339 Absolute Units ................................................................. 93 Absolute Value ......................................................208, 523 Access Level ................................................................... 45 Acquisition ............................123, 176, 180, 335, 393, 426 Acquisition Editor ......................................49, 58, 111, 125 Acquisition modes ........................................................ 124 Acquisition Step .. 124, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 180 Active Speech Level ....................................................... 98 Active Speech Level (ASL) ............................................ 98 Active Speech Level P56 ............................................. 219 ActiveX Call method ..................................................... 457 ActiveX Control .....................................................457, 539 ActiveX Interface ........................................................... 457 Add ................................................................154, 199, 541 Add Input Data Name ................................................... 267 Add New Mic ................................................................... 81 Add… and Clear buttons .............................................. 199 Additional Software ....................................................... 511 Administrative Rights ........................................................ 2 A-law ................................................................................ 91 Algorithm Details ........................................................... 142 Algorithms ...............................................................94, 176 Alias free freq limit .......................................................... 55 Aligned Limits ........................................................259, 272 All Curves ...................................................................... 199 Amp Calibration - Bridged Connection ........................ 503 Amp Calibration Diagram - Balanced .......................... 502 AmpConnect ................................................................... 57 AmpConnect Driver .......................................................... 7 Amplifier Calibration .........................................83, 84, 502 Amplifier Calibration Procedure ...............................83, 84 Amplitude Sweep Excitation ........................................ 110 Analog/Digital Radio Buttons ......................................... 56 Analysis . 94, 124, 335, 393, 423, 427, 429, 517, 527, 528 Analysis algorithm .......................................................... 94 Analysis Editor ..................................... 76, 78, 94, 95, 111 Analysis Setting ....................................................135, 153 Analysis Step ................................. 94, 122, 124, 138, 180 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Analysis Step Distortion tab ......................................... 156 Analysis-Response Measurement ................................. 94 Anti-Aliased ................................................................... 303 Appendix ............................................................... 511, 517 Appendix 15 - PXI/PCI 4461 Installation .............497, 543 Apply Correction In ....................................................... 140 Apply Correction Out .................................................... 141 ASCII .....................................................................248, 249 ASIO ................................................................................ 54 ASIO Control Panel ........................................................ 54 ASL (Active Speech Level) .......................................... 118 Attack and Release ...................................................... 213 Attack Time ................................................................... 214 audio interface 11, 14, 15, 28, 54, 55, 76, 79, 84, 129, 131, 170, 177, 432, 504, 517 Audio Interface Calibration Sequence ....................53, 56 audio interface delay .................................................... 177 audio interface driver ...................................................... 11 audio interface sampling frequency ............................ 426 audio interface sampling rate ..............................131, 433 Auto Correlation of Response ..................................... 149 Auto Correlation of Stimulus ........................................ 149 Auto Delay ..................................................................... 177 Auto Increment .....................................................226, 333 Auto Read .................................................................80, 82 Autoprotect ............................................................286, 292 Autoprotect Rules ......................................................... 286 Autosave .............................................. 183, 189, 190, 393 Autosave Demo ............................................................ 190 Autosave Editor ........................... 183, 185, 189, 190, 285 Autosave sequence ...................................................... 192 Autosave Step ...................... 125, 183, 189, 192, 287, 333 Axis ................................................................................ 188 Axis response curves ................................................... 226 Axis Scaling, Zoom and Style Controls ....................... 424 B Background ................................................................... 311 Background noise ................ 101, 123, 131, 142, 145, 175 Backup .............................................................................. 2 Balanced Audio Interface Calibration Connections .... 508 Balanced vs Single-ended Connections ..................... 509 Band limits ............................................................. 100, 119 Bar Plots ........................................................................ 303 Barcode Function Key Mapping .................................. 535 Barcode Reader ............................................................ 535 Barcode Symbology ..................................................... 535 Batch Processing ..........................................141, 204, 267 Best Fit .......................................................................... 269 binary format ................................................................. 477 INDEX 557 Bluetooth .................................................................90, 151 Broadband or Spectrum Algorithms ............................ 111 Broadband RMS ...........................................................142 BT Product - SoundMap ...............................................364 Buttons ............................................................................44 Buzzer On/Off Message ............................................... 511 C Calculate Spectrum ......................................................431 Calibrate ................................................................502, 504 Calibrate Device .......................................................79, 86 Calibrating SoundCheck ................................................76 Calibration 25, 45, 55, 73, 75, 76, 79, 80, 81, 83, 88, 102, 170, 176, 414, 429, 503 Calibration Basics ...........................................................67 Calibration Configuration ....................... 15, 65, 76, 77, 94 Calibration Editor ................................. 65, 76, 77, 83, 502 Calibration folder .............................................................76 Calibration procedure ...............................................86, 87 Calibration Sequence .................................. 73, 75, 76, 80 Calibration setup ...........................................................412 Calibration Setup menu ..................................................76 Call method of the VI object .........................................457 Change Sign .................................................................208 Change the output level .................................................43 Changing curve names ........................................138, 182 Channel .................................................................170, 180 Channel assignment .....................................111, 113, 134 Choose the interface type ............................................247 CLEAR Distortion Measurement .................................161 Code 39 .........................................................................535 Color - Graph Line ........................................................302 Column delimiter ...........................................................539 Command Input ............................................................461 Command line options ..................................................458 Comment - Memory List .......................................288, 292 Comment Step ..............................................................399 Common Plots ..............................................................302 Communication Interface ...............................................60 Complex Averaging ......................................................151 Complex data curve ......................................................207 Complex Stweeps .........................................................108 Computer Interface type .........................................60, 246 Computer Setup ................................................................2 Conditional Branching ................................. 391, 398, 400 Confidence and Noise ..................................................168 Confidence limits ...........................................................168 Configure Steps ............................................................392 Constant ................................................. 86, 205, 206, 221 Constant-Percentage Bandwidth .........................131, 432 Context Sensitive Help .................................. 35, 222, 292 Controls ..........................33, 423, 424, 426, 428, 431, 433 Controls for the Oscilloscope .......................................431 ControlSC.vi ..................................................................460 558 Convert linear units ........................................................ 75 Correction curve .....................................................77, 427 Cp .................................................................................. 341 Cpk ........................................................................341, 342 Creating a Custom Setup ............................................. 356 Creating a Custom VI ................................................... 353 Creating a New Sequence ........................................... 401 Creating a sequence .................................................... 280 Creating an Equalized WAV File ................................. 414 Creating or editing very large equations ..................... 222 Cross Correlation of Stimulus and Response ............. 149 Cumulative Spectral Decay (CSD) - SoundMap 360, 363, 375 Current Source level ..................................................... 134 Cursor .......................35, 43, 110, 312, 313, 423, 428, 519 Cursor 1 ......................................................................... 423 Curve 77, 94, 95, 123, 124, 137, 138, 168, 180, 182, 186, 189, 199, 200, 204, 205, 206, 207, 211, 220, 221, 223, 224, 226, 257, 259, 260, 261, 269, 270, 272, 296, 311, 312, 318, 324, 338, 344, 356, 423, 427, 541 Curve Attributes ............................................................ 424 Curve Average .............................................................. 264 Curve menu .................................................................. 324 Curve Name ......................................... 123, 132, 138, 182 Curve Names to be Recalled ....................................... 199 Curve Resolution ..................................................147, 153 Curves ........................................................................... 280 Curves and Values .......................................221, 335, 338 Curves Generated ........................................................ 356 Curves tab .....................................................133, 134, 182 Curves, Values, Results and WFM ..... 280, 285, 296, 313 Custom calibration sequence ........................................ 76 Custom Curve Name ....................................138, 182, 267 Custom Group .............................................................. 289 Custom header fields ................................................... 188 Custom Step .........................................................253, 353 Custom Stimulus ........................................................... 104 Custom VI .......................................................47, 353, 356 D DAQmx ............................................. 47, 62, 413, 432, 498 DAT file .........................185, 192, 195, 322, 477, 478, 480 Data acquisition card ..............................................24, 180 Data curve ..................................................................... 460 Data folder ..................................................................... 200 Data Import Wizard ...................................................... 284 Data Import Wizard Tutorial ......................................... 539 Data Menu .....................................................285, 287, 290 Data Menu - Memory List .....................................287, 290 Data or Results ............................................................. 190 Data Source Name (DSN) ........................................... 185 Database .......................................................185, 186, 192 dB level ......................................................................81, 82 dB or linear units ........................................................... 102 dBm0 ............................................................................... 90 DC Connect ............................. 58, 99, 100, 113, 134, 180 INDEX SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual DC Connect Acquisition Step ....................................... 134 DC Connect Driver ........................................................... 7 DC Connect measurement .......................................... 180 DC Connect Mode - Acquisition .................................. 134 DC Current Waveform .................................................. 180 DC voltage ......................................................58, 100, 180 DC Voltage Waveform .................................................. 180 Decimal ASCII code ..................................................... 249 Deconvolved Response ............................................... 145 Default Action for new steps ........................................ 399 Default calibration sequences ........................................ 76 Default sweep direction .................................................. 97 Define Linear Units ......................................................... 75 Define Logarithmic Units ................................................ 75 Defining the Input and Output Signals .......................... 74 Defining the Units - Calibration ...................................... 74 Delay ......................................55, 101, 123, 132, 177, 527 Delimiter ................................................................188, 539 Delta ......................................................................424, 428 Delta µs .................................................................129, 130 Dialog Message ............................................................ 243 Difference Frequency Distortion .......................... 115, 164 Difference frequency stimulus ..................................... 115 Digital I/O ........................................ 61, 237, 246, 255, 393 Digital recursive filter .................................................... 131 Direct Calibration ............................................................ 85 Directivity Index ............................................................ 226 Display 44, 94, 95, 131, 181, 188, 280, 318, 323, 393, 423, 512 Display A/B - Print Step ................................................ 323 Display Curve ................................................................ 308 Display decibel values .................................................... 78 Display Editing .............................................................. 296 Display Editor ..........................................................95, 205 Display layout ................................................................ 314 Display menu .......................296, 310, 313, 315, 323, 338 Display menu - Polar Plot ............................................ 309 Display on the XY Graph .............................................. 182 Display Step 138, 182, 192, 220, 279, 308, 319, 320, 323, 338, 344, 356 Display Step on FAIL .................................................... 398 Display step when run ..........................................398, 512 Display Tabs .................................................................. 295 Display type ................................................................... 426 Display will cease to display fundamental .................. 182 Display XY Plot - Polar Plot ......................................... 312 Displays ......................................................................... 295 Distortion 100, 115, 116, 117, 122, 124, 144, 153, 154, 155, 156, 164, 260, 527, 528 DSN .......................................................................185, 186 Dual-Channel ................................................................ 148 DUT time signal ............................................................ 125 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual Dynamic Limits ............................................................. 263 E Editing Sequence ......................................................... 396 Empty curve .................................................................. 199 Energy Time Curve ....................................................... 181 Energy Time Curve - SoundMap ................................. 385 Engineer level ................................................................. 45 EQ curve ....................................................................... 414 Equalization and Correction Curve ............................... 77 Equalization curve ..................................................78, 414 Equalize a WAV file ..............................................413, 414 Est. Level ...................................................................... 423 Excel file ............................................... 186, 187, 188, 318 Excel format .................................................................. 318 Excel spreadsheet ........................................................ 318 Excel Template .....................................................187, 188 Excel Template Tutorial ................................................ 529 Excel workbook .....................................................186, 318 Exp ................................................................................. 208 Exponent ....................................................................... 208 Export sequence .............................................33, 199, 403 Export to Excel .............................................................. 308 Exporting to Excel ......................................................... 318 External buzzer ......................................................... 9, 511 External footswitch .....................................9, 60, 505, 511 External Interface .........................................237, 246, 505 F Fail verdict ..................................................................... 273 FFT ................................................................................ 209 FFT analysis ................................................................. 429 FFT Controls .........................................................423, 518 FFT display ................................................................... 519 FFT Spectrum .......................................................142, 227 File Menu ..................................... 125, 296, 315, 322, 403 File Path ................................................................184, 196 File path ......................................................................... 199 File path to Recall ......................................................... 198 File Types ...................................................................... 198 Filename ............................................... 183, 189, 190, 321 Filename template ........................................................ 190 Fill Base Line ................................................................ 303 Filter ........................................ 24, 133, 142, 185, 432, 433 Fitted curve ................................................................... 211 Floating Data .........................................................259, 271 Floating Limits .......................................................259, 269 Floating Point Notation .........................................188, 318 Floating Point Number ................................................. 524 INDEX 559 Folder Path ......................................................................36 Footswitch and Buzzer Control .................................... 511 Fourier transform ..........................................................527 Free field .......................................................................527 Frequency Analysis ......................................................432 Frequency and Output Level ........................................127 Frequency curve .......................................... 176, 205, 210 Frequency or time analysis ..........................................423 Frequency or time headers ..........................................185 Frequency response curve ..................................260, 270 Frequency Shift .............................................................229 Frequency stepped-sine sweep (Stweep™) .. 97, 98, 101 Frequency sweep .........................................................180 Frequency Window .......................................................223 FS ..........................................................................112, 413 Full-duplex mode ............................................................55 Fundamental curve .......................................................186 Histogram ...................................................................... 339 HTML formatting of Text Boxes ................................... 293 HTML mode .................................................................. 321 Hysteresis level ............................................................. 175 I IEC .........................................................................159, 160 IEEE ......................................................................159, 160 IEEE interface card ........................................................ 60 IM and Difference distortion ......................................... 100 IM Distortion .................................................................. 116 Impedance .......................79, 83, 169, 170, 237, 506, 507 Impedance Measurement Details ................................ 171 Impedance Measurement Interface Box .............170, 506 Impedance of device under test .................................. 170 Impedance response .................................................... 170 Impedance .................................................................... 169 Impedance, Headphone ............................................... 173 Import Data Wizard Tutorial ......................................... 284 Impulse Response ........................................................ 181 Incrementation .............................................................. 226 Index ............................................... 99, 190, 251, 320, 399 Individual ....................................................................... 343 Input (Vp) and Output (Vp) ............................................ 55 Input and output channels ............................................. 55 Input Calibration ............................................................. 79 Input Channel .......................................................426, 428 Input Monitor .........................................................238, 239 Input range of the audio interface .................................. 79 Input Signal Path 67, 69, 72, 83, 86, 121, 125, 180, 404, 425, G Generator & Multimeter ................................................132 Generator & Oscilloscope ............................................133 Generator & Real Time Analyzer .................................134 Generator Output Level ................................................518 Global Energy Spectrum - SoundMap .........................385 Global Spectrum - SoundMap ......................................366 Graph properties ...........................................................308 Graphs and Cursors .......................................................44 Ground Loop .................................................................518 Group Delay ..................................................................209 Group Delay - SoundMap ............................................366 Grouping ........................................................................289 H Halt on FAIL ..................................................................398 Halt on Pass ..................................................................398 Hardware ............................................ 14, 24, 25, 335, 408 Hardware Configuration ......14, 47, 55, 60, 111, 177, 512 Hardware delay .............................................................177 Hardware Editor ............................................... 62, 77, 514 Hardware Key (Dongle) ....................................................4 Hardware Key Installation ................................................5 Hardware Step ................................................................14 Hardware Type External Interface ...............................505 Harmonic Distortion ..................... 115, 154, 156, 164, 527 Harmonic N shifted curves ...........................................159 HarmonicTrak 135, 144, 145, 153, 160, 161, 164, 224, 225, 227 Header .......................................... 188, 248, 285, 318, 539 Header row of frequency values ..................................539 Header Separator .........................................................248 Headphone Amp Calibration ..........................................85 Headphone Output Pad ................................................255 Help Menu ...................................................... 35, 222, 292 Heterodyne ....................................................................145 560 426, 427, 433, 518 Insert .............................................................................. 392 Instantaneous Frequency - SoundMap ....................... 366 Instantaneous Spectrum - SoundMap ......................... 366 Instruments ................................................................... 407 instruments .................................................................... 517 Intensity Display - SoundMap ...................................... 365 Interface ................................... 21, 60, 237, 247, 248, 513 Interface Message ........................................................ 248 Interface settings .......................................................... 512 Intermodulation distortion ..................................... 115, 164 Intermodulation stimulus .............................................. 115 Interpolation 204, 205, 211, 259, 268, 275, 276, 304, 481, 482 Intersection ................................................................... 220 Inv FFT .......................................................................... 209 Inverse Fourier Transform ........................................... 181 Invert Curve .................................................................... 71 ITU Wideband Weighting Curves ................................ 213 J Jump on FAIL ................................................................ 398 Jump on PASS .............................................................. 398 INDEX SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual K M Keep repeated data ...................................................... 399 keyboard shortcuts .................................................32, 518 Knobs .............................................................................. 44 Main Screen .................................................................... 31 MAP file - SoundMap ................................................... 366 Margin Standard Deviation ........................................... 344 Mass Add Steps ............................................................ 392 Mass Export .................................................................... 40 Master PC Configuration .............................................. 537 Mathematical operator ................................................. 204 Max - Stats .................................................................... 338 Max FSD ....................................................................... 121 Maximum and Minimum frequency limits .................... 270 Maximum curve Y value ............................................... 210 Mean - Stats .................................................................. 338 Mean Instantaneous Frequency - SoundMap ............ 385 Measurement curve ................................................44, 260 Memory ......................................................................... 521 Memory List 94, 95, 98, 124, 125, 133, 134, 135, 137, 140, 177, L LabVIEW ..................................47, 60, 348, 353, 457, 523 LabVIEW Test Stand .................................................... 443 LabVIEW version required ........................................... 353 Last Curve Only ....................................................199, 200 Latency ............................................................................ 55 Layout ........................................... 185, 186, 188, 282, 320 Legend ........................................................................... 298 Level 43, 44, 79, 80, 101, 102, 106, 110, 111, 113, 140, 144, 155, 159, 168, 175, 259, 264, 268, 312, 412, 417, 423, 424, 425, 428, 429 Level knob ............................................................. 113, 114 Level of distortion .......................................................... 155 Level of noise ................................................................ 168 Level of the measurement ........................................... 168 Level recorder ................................................................. 24 Limit curve .............................................................260, 262 Limit Result ................................................................... 343 Limit Step .............................................. 192, 324, 344, 460 Limits 87, 168, 175, 257, 259, 268, 269, 277, 309, 343, 356, 393, 527 Limits Editor ..........................................................259, 260 Limits Editor Summary Table ....................................... 259 Limits Table ................................................................... 261 Line Style ....................................................................... 303 Line Width ..................................................................... 303 Line Width, Line Style ................................................... 308 Linear averaging mode ................................................ 428 Linear Interpolation ....................................................... 275 Linear or dB units .......................................................... 110 Linear units ...................................................................... 75 Ln - Natural Logarithm .................................................. 208 Load Settings - Data Import Wizard ............................ 541 Local Language Characters .........................242, 244, 314 Log Amplitude Sweep .................................................... 99 Log frequency scale ..................................................... 131 Log Interpolation ........................................................... 275 Logarithmic units ............................................................. 75 Login ..........................................................................45, 46 Loop Index ....................................................190, 251, 399 Loop Stimulus Level ..................................................... 399 Loose Particle Analysis ................................................ 176 Loudspeaker Test .........................................505, 506, 507 Loudspeaker Test Connections with Impedance Box 506 Lower Limit curves ........................................................ 261 SoundCheck® 16.0 Instruction Manual 182, 183, 186, 190, 204, 206, 221, 257, 261, 279, 280, 284, 285, 286, 287, 288, 290, 292, 295, 296, 308, 309, 312, 313, 323, 324, 338, 339 Memory List Selection .................................................. 177 Message Step .............................. 237, 249, 255, 393, 513 Message Step Editor ............................. 96, 246, 247, 249 Messages ...................................................................... 393 Microphone Calibration ..........................................80, 504 Microphone manufacturer’s specifications ................... 80 Min - Stats ..................................................................... 338 Min Cycles ..................................................................... 101 Min Cycles per Step ..................................................... 153 Min Duration .................................................................. 101 Min/Max Duration levels ............................................... 175 Minimum curve Y value ................................................ 211 Minimum duration ......................................................... 101 MLS ............................................................................... 119 MLSSA time file - SoundMap ...................................... 362 Mode field - Acquisition ................................................ 124 Mode Select and Cursor Readout Controls ................ 423 Modules ...........................................................33, 185, 210 Mouth Calibration and Correction .................................. 86 Mouth Simulator Calibration .......................................... 86 MP3 player .................................................................... 151 mu-law ............................................................................. 90 Multimeter 79, 93, 124, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 134, 259, 267, 408, 417, 418 Multiple DAT files .......................................................... 284 Multiple Instances Virtual Instruments ........................ 410 Multitone ...................................
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project